Home Page
Table of Contents
iDCS 500 Release 2 / OfficeServ
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS MARCH 2004
T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S
USER INSTRUCTIONS SECTION
PART DESCRIPTION
PAGE
OVERVIEW........................................................................................... 1.1
CALL FORWARDING .......................................................................... 1.6
1.4
2
3
5
7
8
ITP-5012L USER GUIDE
ITP-5021D USER GUIDE
DCS KEYSET USER GUIDE
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION AND SPECIAL FEATURES GUIDE
AUTO ATTENDANT AND UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION
ADMINISTRATION GUIDE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Home Page
Table of Contents
iDCS 500 Release 2 / OfficeServ
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 1 MARCH 2004
This diagram illustrates the keys on a iDCS 8
BUTTON keyset that have special functions
during programming. When required, these keys
will be referred to by the names described in the
diagram.
• DCS KEYSETS
This diagram illustrates the keys on a
display keyset that have special functions
during programming. When required,
these keys will be referred to by the names
described in the diagram.
1.2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Home Page
Table of Contents
iDCS 500 Release 2 / OfficeServ
TECHNICAL MANUAL
PROGRAMMING
PART 1 MARCH 2004
• ITP-5021D KEYSETS
This diagram illustrates the keys on an ITP 5021-D keyset that have special functions
during programming. When required, these keys will be referred to by the names
described in the diagram.
A BC D E F
1.3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Home Page
Table of Contents
iDCS 500 Release 2 / OfficeServ
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MARCH 2004
1.2 LOCKING YOUR KEYSET
You can lock your keyset to prevent other people from making or receiving calls while
you are away. You can unlock it when you return.
ACTION
DISPLAY
[201] STN LOCK
PASSCODE:_
1. Press the transfer key followed by 100
Display shows
[201] STN LOCK
UNLOCKED
2. Enter your passocde
Default is 1234
[201] STN LOCK
LOCKED OUTGOING
3. Enter 1 for locking outgoing calls (Internal
calls will still be allowed).
OR
[201] STN LOCK
LOCKED ALL CALLS
4. Enter 2 for locking all calls (Internal and
external calls will not be allowed).
[201] STN LOCK
UNLOCKED
5. Enter 0 to unlock your phone.
6. Press the transfer key to save and exit
1.4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Home Page
Table of Contents
iDCS 500 Release 2 / OfficeServ
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MARCH 2004
1.3 CHANGING YOUR PASSCODE
Each keyset user can set or change his/her individual passcode. This passcode is used
to lock or unlock keysets, for toll restriction override and to access the DISA feature.
NOTE: Default passcodes cannot be used for toll restriction override or for DISA
access.
ACTION
DISPLAY
[201] PASSCODE
OLD CODE:_
1. Press the transfer key followed by 101
Display shows
[201] PASSCODE
OLD CODE:****
2. Enter the existing passcode (default = 1234)
3. Enter the new passcode
[201] PASSCODE
NEW CODE:_
[201] PASSCODE
VERIFY :SUCCESS
4. Reenter the new passcode to verify the number
If reentered correctly, display shows
5. Press the transfer key to save and exit
1.5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Home Page
Table of Contents
iDCS 500 Release 2 / OfficeServ
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MARCH 2004
1.4 CALL FORWARDING
The iDCS 500 allows the system administrator to program the call forward destinations
for other station users. This MMC also allows call forward to be set after the destination
has been entered.
The iDCS 500 system allows four types of call forwarding: FORWARD ALL, FORWARD
NO ANSWER, FORWARD BUSY, and FORWARD DND. There is an additional option,
FORWARD BUSY/NO ANSWER, that allows both of these options to be activated at the
same time, provided that destinations have been entered for both. The destinations for
all these forwards can be either an internal number or an external number.
0 = FORWARD CANCEL
1 = ALL CALL
2 = BUSY
3 = NO ANSWER
4 = BUSY/NO ANSWER
5 = FORWARD DND
0 = FORWARD CANCEL
1 = ALL CALL
This option will cancel any call forwarding set in MMC
102. It will not remove the programmed destination and
will not override any preset forward settings in MMC 316.
This option, when set, will forward all calls to the
programmed destination. If the programmed destination
is a station then that station can call the forwarded
station to put calls through.
2 = BUSY
This option, when set, will forward calls to the
programmed destination when the forwarded keyset is
busy.
3 = NO ANSWER
This option, when set, will forward calls to the
programmed destination if the forwarded station
does not answer a call before the forward no answer
timer in MMC 502 expires.
4 = BUSY/NO ANSWER
5 = FWD DND
This option will activate both the BUSY option and the
NO ANSWER option at the same time.
This option will forward all calls to the programmed
destination whenever the forwarded station goes into
DND.
ACTION
DISPLAY
[201] FORWARD
0:FORWARD CANCEL
1.
Press the transfer key followed by 102
Display shows
1.6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Home Page
Table of Contents
iDCS 500 Release 2 / OfficeServ
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MARCH 2004
[201] FORWARD
1:ALL CALL:NONE
2.
3.
4.
Dial 0 – 4 to select forward type
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select forward type
and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor
[201] FORWARD
1:ALL CALL:205
Dial destination number (e.g., 201)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select destination
and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor
[201] FORWARD
CURENTLY SET :YES
Dial 1 for YES, 0 for NO
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select YES or NO
and press RIGHT soft key to return to step
2
5.
Press the transfer key to store and exit
1.7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Home Page
Table of Contents
iDCS 500 Release 2 / OfficeServ
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MARCH 2004
1.5 SETTING YOUR ANSWER MODE
Each keyset can have its answer mode for intercom calls set to one of the following
options:
RING—The station will ring in one of eight custom ring patterns. Calls are answered by
pressing the ANS/RLS key or lifting the handset.
AUTO—After giving a short attention tone, the station will automatically answer calls on
the speakerphone. When a C.O. line is transferred to a station in Auto Answer, the
screened portion of the call will be Auto Answer, but the keyset will ring when the
transfer is complete if the user has not pressed the ANS/RLS key or lifted the handset.
VOICE—The station will not ring. After a short attention tone, callers can make an
announcement. The called party must press the ANS/RLS key or lift the handset to
reply.
ACTION
DISPLAY
[201] ANS MODE
RING MODE
1. Press the transfer key followed by 103
Display shows
[201] ANS MODE
VOICE ANNOUNCE
2. Dial 0, 1 or 2 to change the ring mode, e.g., 2
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select the ring mode
3. Press the transfer key to store and exit
1.8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Home Page
Table of Contents
iDCS 500 Release 2 / OfficeServ
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MARCH 2004
1.6 PROGRAMMING YOUR STATION’S NAME
Names are written using the keypad. Each key press selects a character. Pressing the
dial pad key moves the cursor to the next position. For example, if the directory name
is “SAM SMITH,” press the number “7” three times to get the letter “S.” Press the
number “2” once to get the letter “A.” Continue selecting characters from the table
below to complete your message. Pressing the bottom left programmable key will
change the letter from upper case to lower case. There are up to 11 characters that can
be used.
NOTE: When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous
character, press the VOLUME UP or DOWN keys to move the cursor to the right or to
the left.
• DCS KEYSETS
COUNT
1
2
3
4
5
DIAL 0
DIAL 1
DIAL 2
DIAL 3
DIAL 4
DIAL 5
DIAL 6
DIAL 7
DIAL 8
DIAL 9
DIAL 4
Q
space
Z
?
.
,
C
F
I
L
O
S
V
Y
[
)
!
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
D
G
J
M
P
T
B
E
H
K
N
R
U
X
@
#
$
%
^
&
4
W
:
(
]
9
4
=
The # key can be used for the following special characters: #, space, &, !, :, ?, ., %,
$, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ;, \, " and ~.
1.9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Home Page
Table of Contents
iDCS 500 Release 2 / OfficeServ
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MARCH 2004
• iDCS KEYSETS and ITP KEYSETS
COUNT
1
2
3
4
5
DIAL 0
DIAL 1
DIAL 2
DIAL 3
DIAL 4
DIAL 5
DIAL 6
DIAL 7
DIAL 8
DIAL 9
DIAL 4
<
space
>
?
.
,
C
F
I
L
O
R
V
Y
[
)
!
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
D
G
J
M
P
T
B
E
H
K
N
Q
U
X
@
#
$
%
^
S
4
W
:
Z
]
9
4
=
1. When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous
character, press UP to move the cursor one space to the right.
2. Other symbols are available for DIAL #.
ACTION
DISPLAY
[201] STN NAME
1. Press the transfer key followed by 104
Display shows
[201] STN NAME
SAMSUNG
2. Enter the station name using the procedure
described above
3. Press the transfer key to store and exit
1.10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Home Page
Table of Contents
iDCS 500 Release 2 / OfficeServ
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MARCH 2004
1.7 PROGRAMMING PERSONAL SPEED DIAL
LOCATIONS
You can program frequently dialed telephone numbers in a personal speed dial list.
Each station user begins with ten numbers 00–09 and may be assigned up to fifty
numbers. See your system administrator to determine the amount assigned to your
station.
NOTE: Press button B for flash and button C for pause.
Display keyset users may want to hide some speed dial numbers so they will not show
in the display. Before entering a telephone number, press button E. All digits after this
will be hidden. Press button E again to begin displaying digits.
If your system uses rotary (or pulse) dialing C.O. lines, pressing button D before
entering a speed dial will cause all subsequent digits to be sent as DTMF tones until
the D button is pressed again.
ACTION
DISPLAY
[201] SPEED DIAL
00:
1. Press the transfer key followed by 105
Display shows
[201] SPEED DIAL
SPDBLK NOT EXIST
If you have no speed dial bins,
the display will be as shown
[201] SPEED DIAL
05:_
2. Dial the location number (e.g., 05)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select the location
Press the right soft key to move cursor
[201] SPEED DIAL
05:9-4264100_
3. Enter the trunk access code (e.g., 9) followed
by the number to be dialed (e.g., 4264100)
OR
Press the left soft key to return to step 2
4. Press the F button to access the next program
OR
Press the transfer key to save and exit
1.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Home Page
Table of Contents
iDCS 500 Release 2 / OfficeServ
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MARCH 2004
1.8 NAMING YOUR PERSONAL SPEED DIAL
LOCATIONS
This program allows a character name to be entered for each personal speed dial
location. This name enables the speed dial number to be located when using the
directory dial feature. The directory dial feature allows the display keyset user to select
a speed dial location by scanning its name. There are up to 11 characters that can be
used.
ACTION
DISPLAY
[201] SPEED NAME
00:
1. Press the transfer key followed by 106
Display shows
[201] SPEED NAME
01:_
2. Dial the speed dial location (e.g., 01)
OR
Use UP or DOWN to scroll through the location
numbers and use the right soft key to move the
cursor
[201] SPEED NAME
01:SAMSUNG_
3. Enter the location name using the procedure
described in Programming Your Station’s Name
4. Press UP or DOWN to move to the next
location
OR
Press the F key to program speed dial numbers
5. Press the transfer key to store and exit
1.12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Home Page
Table of Contents
iDCS 500 Release 2 / OfficeServ
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MARCH 2004
1.9 ADDING EXTENDERS TO KEYS
This program allows you to assign key extenders to make a general access feature key
more specific. The feature keys that can have extenders are listed below:
FEATURE KEY
DESCRIPTION
EXTENDER
BOSS
DP
DS
Boss and Secretary
Direct Pickup
Direct Station Select
Call Forward
Group Conference
Group Pickup
In/Out of Group
Meet Me Page
Page
Park (orbits)
Ring Plan
Speed Dial
Programmed Message
Directory
1–4
Extension or station group number
Any extension number
0–6
1–5
FWRD
GCONF
GPIK
IG
MMPG
PAGE
PARK
RP
SPD
PMSG
DIR
VT
SG
01–20
Any group number you are part of
0–9, 4
0–9, 4
0–9
1–6 or HOLD for None
00–49, 500–999
01–30
PERS (1), SYS (2) or STN (3)
Voice Mail Group (501–549)
Any group number (500–549)
Voice Mail Transfer
Station Group
ACTION
DISPLAY
[201] EXT (KTS)
01:CALL1 ¤
1. Press the transfer key followed by 107
Display shows the first station
[201] EXT (KTS)
2. Enter the key number, e.g., 18
OR
18:DS
¤
Use UP and DOWN to scroll through the keys
Use the right soft key to move the cursor
OR
Press the key to be programmed
[201] EXT (KTS)
18:DS ¤DS207
3. Dial the extender according to above table
Press the right soft key to return to step 2
OR
Press the transfer key to store and exit
OR
Press the speaker key to store and advance to
the next program
1.13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Home Page
Table of Contents
iDCS 500 Release 2 / OfficeServ
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MARCH 2004
1.10 CHECKING STATION STATUS
This program displays the following attributes of a station port. This is a read only
feature.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
PORT #
PICKUP GROUP
SGR
BOSS-SECR
PAGE
COS NO
Cabinet (1–2)/Slot (1–10)/(1–48)
None, 01–30
Station Group Number
None, 1–4
Page Zone (1–4)
COS (1–30) per Ring Plan (01–06)
1–2
TENANT GROUP
ACTION
DISPLAY
[201] STN STATUS
PORT:C1-S03-P01
1. Press the transfer key followed by 108
Display shows
[201] STN STATUS
TYPE:24B US SET
2. Press UP or DOWN to view the status items
3. Press the transfer key to exit
1.14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Home Page
Table of Contents
iDCS 500 Release 2 / OfficeServ
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MARCH 2004
1.11 CHANGING YOUR TIME AND DATE DISPLAY
Display keysets will always have the date and time displayed when not in use. You can
select from the following display options:
0
1
2
COUNTRY Sets overall display format and has two options
0 = ORIENTAL
1 = WESTERN
MM/DD DAY HH:MM
DAY DD MM HH:MM
CLOCK
Sets format of clock display and has two options
0 = 12 HOUR (Displays 1 P.M. as 01:00)
1 = 24 HOUR (Displays 1 P.M. as 13:00)
DISPLAY
Sets format of DAY and MONTH display and has two options
0 = UPPER CASE (Displays Friday as FRI and March as MAR)
1 = LOWER CASE (Displays Friday as Fri and March as Mar)
ACTION
DISPLAY
[201] DAY FORMAT
COUNTRY:WESTERN
1. Press the transfer key followed by 109
Display shows
[201] DAY FORMAT
COUNTRY:ORIENTAL
2. Press UP or DOWN to select the display mode
Press the right soft key to move the cursor
3. Press the right soft key to return to step 2
OR
Press the left soft key to return to step 3
4. Press the transfer key to store and exit
1.15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Home Page
Table of Contents
iDCS 500 Release 2 / OfficeServ
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MARCH 2004
1.12 SETTING STATION ON/OFF OPTIONS
The iDCS 500 allows the system administrator to set any of the keyset features listed
below.
FEATURES
DESCRIPTION
Automatically places an existing C.O. call
on hold if a CALL button, trunk key or trunk
route key is pressed during that call.
AUTO HOLD
00
01
Automatically starts the stopwatch timer
during a C.O. call.
AUTO TIMER
When ON, this feature disables the
hookswitch allowing a headset user to
answer all calls by pressing the ANS/RLS
button.
02
HEADSET USE
When ON, this feature allows the user to
dial directory numbers without having to
first lift the handset or press the SPK button.
03
04
05
HOT KEYPAD
KEY TONE
Allows the user to hear a slight tone when
pressing buttons on keyset.
Allows the user to hear the latter part of
page announcements if keyset becomes
free during a page.
PAGE REJOIN
When OFF, requires the user to press the
fast flashing button to answer a ringing call
after lifting the handset.
06
07
RING PREF.
This field is reserved and can not be used
for U.S. software.
NOT FOR USA
Keyset users can allow intercom calls to
camp-on to other keysets without having to
press a CAMP-ON key.
08
09
10
AUTO CAMP-ON
NOT FOR USA
AME PSWD
If this option is set to YES, station users
who have AME set must enter their station
password to listen to messages being left.
If this option is set to ON the user will have
the name associated with the speed dial
number shown in the display after the
number has been dialed.
If this setting is set to OFF the CID review
list will only store CID information for calls
that were not answered at the station and
reject the information for calls that were
answered.
11
12
DISP SPD NAME
CID REVIEW ALL
1.16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Home Page
Table of Contents
iDCS 500 Release 2 / OfficeServ
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MARCH 2004
FEATURES
DESCRIPTION
When set to OFF an OHVA will be heard
through the keyset speaker rather than the
handset.
13
14
SECURE OHVA
NOT FOR USA
This option determines whether CO calls
arriving at a station will be auto answered if
auto answer is selected in MMC 103.
15
AUTO ANS CO
ACTION
DISPLAY
[201] STN ON/OFF
AUTO HOLD :OFF
1. Press the transfer key followed by 110
Display shows
[201] STN ON/OFF
HOT KEYPAD :OFF
2. Dial the option number from above list
(e.g., 4)
Press UP or DOWN to select the option and
Press the right soft key to move the
cursor
[201] STN ON/OFF
HOT KEYPAD :ON
3. Press UP or DOWN to select ON or OFF
Press the left or right soft key to return to
step 2
OR
Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF
[201] STN ON/OFF
AUTO HOLD :OFF
If option 00 from above list is dialed at
Step 2
[201] STN ON/OFF
AUTO TIMER :OFF
If option 01 from above list is dialed at
Step 2
[201] STN ON/OFF
HEADSET USE :ON
If option 02 from above list is dialed at
Step 2
[201] STN ON/OFF
HOT KEYPAD :ON
If option 03 from above list is dialed at
Step 2
[201] STN ON/OFF
If option 04 from above list is dialed at
Step 2
KEY TONE
:ON
[201] STN ON/OFF
RING PREF :ON
If option 06 from above list is dialed at
Step 2
1.17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Home Page
Table of Contents
iDCS 500 Release 2 / OfficeServ
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MARCH 2004
[201] STN ON/OFF
DISPLAY :TIME
If option 07 from above list is dialed at
Step 2
[201] STN ON/OFF
AUTO CAMPON :ON
If option 08 from above list is dialed at
Step 2
[201] STN ON/OFF
AME PASSCODE :ON
If option 10 from above list is dialed at
Step 2
[201] STN ON/OFF
HOT KEYPAD :ON
4. Press UP or DOWN to select ON or OFF
Press the left or right soft key to return to
Step 2
5. Press transfer to store and exit
1.18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Home Page
Table of Contents
iDCS 500 Release 2 / OfficeServ
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MARCH 2004
1.13 SELECTING A RING TONE
Each keyset user can select one of eight ring frequencies.
ACTION
DISPLAY
[201] RING TONE
1. Press the transfer key followed by 111
SELECTION 6
Display shows
[201] RING TONE
SELECTION 5
2. Dial 1–8 to select the ring tone
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select the ring tone
Press the right soft key to move the cursor
3. Press the transfer key to store and exit
1.19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Home Page
Table of Contents
iDCS 500 Release 2 / OfficeServ
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MARCH 2004
1.14 ALARM REMINDER
Station users can have three alarms programmed at their phones. Each alarm may be
one of the following three types:
0. NOTSET
The alarm is not set.
1. TODAY ONLY The alarm will ring at the programmed time and be canceled
automatically.
2. DAILY
The alarm will ring each day at this time.
ACTION
DISPLAY
[201] ALM CLK(1)
HHMM: ¤NOTSET
1. Press the transfer key followed by 112
Display shows
[201] ALM CLK(2)
HHMM: ¤NOTSET
2. Dial 1–3 to select the alarm (e.g., 2)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select alarm
Press the right soft key to move the cursor
OR
Press the left soft key to return to step 2
[201] ALM CLK (2)
HHMM:1300¤NOTSET
3. Enter alarm time in 24 hour format (e.g., 1300)
Display automatically advances to step 5
[201] ALM CLK
HHMM:1300¤DAILY
4. Enter alarm type (e.g., 2)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select alarm type
Press the right soft key to move the cursor
and return to step 2
5. Press the transfer key to store and exit
1.20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Home Page
Table of Contents
iDCS 500 Release 2 / OfficeServ
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MARCH 2004
1.15 STATION VOLUME
This procedure allows users to view and set the level of the volume for your keyset.
0. RING VOLUME
1. OFF-RING VOL
2. HANDSET VOL
3. SPEAKER VOL
4. BGM VOLUME
Set a level for your keyset ring volume. There are eight levels of
volume; level 1 is the lowest and level 8 is the highest.
Set a level for your keyset off-hook ring volume. There are eight
levels of volume; level 1 is the lowest and level 8 is the highest.
Set a level for your keyset handset volume. There are eight
levels of volume; level 1 is the lowest and level 8 is the highest.
Set a level for your keyset speaker volume. There are sixteen
levels of volume; level 1 is the lowest and level 16 is the highest.
Set a level for your keyset background music volume. There are
sixteen levels of volume; level 1 is the lowest and level 16 is the
highest.
5. PAGE VOLUME
This is the volume you will hear internal page over the keyset
speaker when your keyset is idle and BGM is turned on. There
are 16 volume levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 16 the
highest.
ACTION
DISPLAY
[201] STN VOLUME
RING VOLUME :OFF
1. Press the transfer key followed by 114
Display shows
[201] STN VOLUME
OFF-RING VOL:OFF
2. Dial 1-8 to select the volume to change
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select the volume to
change
Press the right soft key to move the cursor
[201] STN VOLUME
OFF-RING VOL:ON
3. Press UP or DOWN to select ON or OFF
Press the left or right soft key to return to step 2
OR
Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF
[201] STN VOLUME
RING VOLUME :4
If option 0 from above list is dialed at step 2
1.21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Home Page
Table of Contents
iDCS 500 Release 2 / OfficeServ
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MARCH 2004
[201] STN VOLUME
OFF-RING VOL:4
If option 1 from above list is dialed at step 2
[201] STN VOLUME
HANDSET VOL:4
If option 2 from above list is dialed at step 2
If option 3 from above list is dialed at step 2
If option 4 from above list is dialed at step 2
4. Press the transfer key to store and exit
[201] STN VOLUME
SPEAKER VOL:13
[201] STN VOLUME
BGM VOLUME :13
1.22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Home Page
Table of Contents
iDCS 500 Release 2 / OfficeServ
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MARCH 2004
1.16 SETTING A PROGRAMMED MESSAGE
When you will be away from your phone for any length of time, you can leave a
programmed message. Display stations calling you will see this message and be
informed of your status or follow your instructions.
ACTION
DISPLAY
[201] PGMMSG(00)
CANCEL VAC MSG
1. Press the transfer key followed by 115
Display shows
[201] PGMMSG(05)
PAGE ME
2. Dial 00–20 to select message number, e.g., 05
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select message
3. Press the left or right soft key to return to step 2
OR
Press the transfer key to store and exit
1.23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Home Page
Table of Contents
iDCS 500 Release 2 / OfficeServ
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MARCH 2004
1.17 ALARM REMINDER WITH MESSAGE
Station users can have three alarms programmed at their phones. Each alarm may be
one of the following three types:
0. NOTSET
The alarm is not set.
1. TODAY ONLY The alarm will ring at the programmed time and be canceled
automatically.
2. DAILY
The alarm will ring each day at this time.
In addition, each alarm may be accompanied by a 16 character message that will be
displayed while the alarm is ringing.
allows a message to be added. A display keyset is necessary to view messages.
ACTION
DISPLAY
[201] ALM REM(1)
HHMM: ¤NOTSET
1. Press the transfer key followed by 116
Display shows
[201] ALM REM(1)
HHMM: ¤NOTSET
2. Dial 1–3 to select the alarm (e.g., 2)
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select the alarm
Press the right soft key to move the cursor
[201] ALM REM (2)
HHMM:1300¤NOTSET
3. Enter the alarm time in 24 hour clock format
(e.g., 1300)
Display automatically advances to step 4
[201] ALM REM
HHMM:1300¤DAILY
4. Dial the valid entry from the above list for the
alarm type
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select the alarm type
Press the right soft key to move the cursor
[201] ALM REM
TAKE MEDICATION
5. Enter messages using the method in
Press the right soft key to return to step 2
6. Press the transfer key to store and exit
1.24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Home Page
Table of Contents
iDCS 500 Release 2 / OfficeServ
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MARCH 2004
1.18 CALLER ID DISPLAY
The station user can change the order in which the CLI, Caller ID and/or ANI
information is displayed on an LCD set.
CLI display options are the following:
0. NO DISPLAY
No CLI data will be displayed.
1. NUMBER FIRST
The CLI number received from the Central Office will be
displayed first.
2. NAME FIRST
The CLI name received from the Central Office will be
displayed first.
Caller ID display options are the following:
0. NO DISPLAY
No CID data will be displayed.
1. NUMBER FIRST
The CID number received from the Central Office will be
displayed first.
2. NAME FIRST
The CID name received from the Central Office will be
displayed first.
ANI display options are the following:
0. NO DISPLAY
No ANI data will be displayed.
1. NUMBER FIRST
The ANI number received from the Central Office will be
displayed first.
2. NAME FIRST
Since there is no name sent by the Central Office, The only
time you will receive a name is when your service company
has programmed a name to be associated with the number
otherwise your display will read “no ANI name”.
ACTION
DISPLAY
[201] CID DISP
NUMBER FIRST
1. Press the transfer key followed by 119
Display shows
1.25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Home Page
Table of Contents
iDCS 500 Release 2 / OfficeServ
TECHNICAL MANUAL
USER INSTRUCTIONS
PART 1 MARCH 2004
[201] ANI DISP
NUMBER FIRST
2. Dial 0 or 1 to select CID or ANI
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select CID or ANI and
press the right soft key
[201] CID DISP
NAME FIRST
3. Dial display option 0, 1 or 2, e.g., 2
OR
Press UP or DOWN to select option
4. Press the transfer key to store and exit
1.26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Home Page
Table of Contents
ITP-5012L
™
ITP-5012L User Guide
03/2004
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Home Page
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ABOUT THIS BOOK ....................................................................................1
THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW ................................................2–8
ASSEMBLING YOUR KEYSET ........................................................9
ITP-5012L SETUP ........................................................................................10
Initializing the ITP-5012L............................................................................................................10
IP Setup Menu ................................................................................................................................10
Menu Structure..............................................................................................................................11
Navigating the Menus ................................................................................................................12
Setting the Network Parameters ............................................................................................12
OUTSIDE CALLS
Making an Outside Call ..............................................................................................................16
Dialing from the Outgoing / Incoming Menu....................................................................17
Dialing the Most Recent Outgoing / Incoming Number ..............................................17
Making Calls from the Call Log ................................................................................................17
Answering a Call ..........................................................................................................................17
Universal Answer ..........................................................................................................................18
Recall Dial Tone ............................................................................................................................18
Sending a Flash..............................................................................................................................18
Busy Line Queuing with Callback ..........................................................................................18
Canceling Callback........................................................................................................................19
INTERCOM CALLS
Calling Other Stations ................................................................................................................20
Dialing the Most Recent Outgoing / Incoming Number................................................20
Answering Intercom Calls ..........................................................................................................20
Voice Announce Mode................................................................................................................20
Auto Answer Mode ......................................................................................................................21
Busy Station Callback ..................................................................................................................21
Busy Station Camp-On................................................................................................................21
Calling your System Operator ..................................................................................................22
Copyright 2004 Samsung Telecommunications America.
All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form or by any means—graphic,
electronic or mechanical, including recording, taping, photocopying or information retrieval systems—
without express written permission of the publisher of this material.
Samsung Telecommunications America reserves the right without prior notice to revise information in
this guide for any reason. Samsung Telecommunications America also reserves the right without prior
notice to make changes in design or components of equipment as engineering and manufacturing
may warrant. Samsung Telecommunications America disclaims all liabilities for damages arising from
the erroneous interpretation or use of information presented in this guide.
CALL PROCESSING
System Hold ....................................................................................................................................23
Exclusive Hold ................................................................................................................................23
Remote Hold ..................................................................................................................................23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Hold Recall ......................................................................................................................................24
Consultation Hold ........................................................................................................................24
Retrieving Calls Held at Another Station..............................................................................24
Transferring Calls ..........................................................................................................................25
Transfer with Camp-On ..............................................................................................................25
Transfer to Voice Mail ..................................................................................................................26
Call Waiting......................................................................................................................................26
Conference Calls............................................................................................................................26
Conference Splitting ....................................................................................................................27
Forwarding Calls ....................................................................................................................27–28
Station Call Pickup........................................................................................................................29
Group Call Pickup..........................................................................................................................29
My Group Pickup ..........................................................................................................................29
Privacy Release ..............................................................................................................................29
Appointment Reminder/Alarm Clock....................................................................................41
Door Phone Calls ....................................................................................................................43-44
Executive/Secretary Hotline......................................................................................................44
Group Listening ............................................................................................................................46
Account Codes ..............................................................................................................................46
Locking Your Keyset ....................................................................................................................46
Manual Signalling ........................................................................................................................47
Off-Hook Voice Announce ........................................................................................................47
OHVA Block......................................................................................................................................48
OHVA Reject ....................................................................................................................................48
In Group/Out of Group ..............................................................................................................48
CUSTOMIZING YOUR KEYSET
AME Password................................................................................................................................49
Auto Camp-On ..............................................................................................................................49
Select Ring Tone ............................................................................................................................50
Change Your Passcode ................................................................................................................50
Set Answer Mode (Intercom)....................................................................................................51
Set Answer Mode (CO) ................................................................................................................51
Automatic Hold..............................................................................................................................51
Headset Operation ......................................................................................................................52
Hot Keypad......................................................................................................................................52
Key Confirmation Tone................................................................................................................53
Rejoining a Page............................................................................................................................53
Ring Preference..............................................................................................................................53
Auto Answer CO Calls..................................................................................................................54
Display Speed Dial Name ..........................................................................................................54
Caller ID Review All ......................................................................................................................55
Secure OHVA ..................................................................................................................................55
DIALING FEATURES
Speed Dialing ................................................................................................................................31
Programming Personal Speed Dial Numbers ....................................................................32
One Touch Speed Dialing ..........................................................................................................33
Directory Dialing ..........................................................................................................................33
Last Number Redial ......................................................................................................................34
Manual Retry with Redial ..........................................................................................................34
Save Number with Redial ..........................................................................................................34
Automatic Redial/Retry ..............................................................................................................34
Pulse to Tone Changeover ........................................................................................................35
Memo Redialing ............................................................................................................................35
PAGING AND MESSAGING
Making an Internal Page ............................................................................................................36
Making an External Page............................................................................................................36
All Page ............................................................................................................................................36
Meet Me Page ................................................................................................................................36
Call Park and Page ........................................................................................................................37
Messages—Set and Cancel ......................................................................................................38
Returning Messages ....................................................................................................................38
Programmed Messages ..............................................................................................................39
DISPLAY FEATURES
Directory Information ................................................................................................................ 56
Call Log ............................................................................................................................................56
Dial by Name ..................................................................................................................................57
Call Progress Displays..................................................................................................................57
Display Number Dialed ..............................................................................................................58
Call Duration Timer ......................................................................................................................58
Auto Timer ......................................................................................................................................58
Timer Function ..............................................................................................................................58
Viewing Message Indications ..................................................................................................59
Personal Speed Dial Names ......................................................................................................59
Station Names................................................................................................................................59
Managing Key Assignments ....................................................................................................59
LCR with Clear ................................................................................................................................60
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
Do Not Disturb ..............................................................................................................................40
One Time DND ..............................................................................................................................40
Mute ..................................................................................................................................................40
Background Music ........................................................................................................................40
Established Call Pick-Up ............................................................................................................41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Backspace with LCR......................................................................................................................60
Text Messaging ......................................................................................................................60–61
CALLER ID ............................................................................................................62
Selecting your Caller ID Display ..............................................................................................62
Viewing the Next Caller ID Call................................................................................................62
Saving the Caller ID Number....................................................................................................62
Redialing a Saved Caller ID Number......................................................................................63
Storing a Caller ID Number ......................................................................................................63
Inquire Caller ID Park/Hold Info ..............................................................................................63
Reviewing Past Caller ID Calls ..................................................................................................64
ABOUT THIS BOOK
APPLICATION PROGRAM MENUS ........................................65
PhoneBook......................................................................................................................................65
E-Diary ..............................................................................................................................................65
Message............................................................................................................................................66
Volume..............................................................................................................................................67
Call Forward....................................................................................................................................68
Configuration ................................................................................................................................68
My Phone ........................................................................................................................................70
Status Screen of the LCD Panel................................................................................................71
Samsung’s new OfficeServ technology keyset model ITP-5012L is part of the iDCS
500 Release 2.
The ITP-5012L IP keyset represents a new concept of Internet phone, in that it uses
an IP address to Send/Receive voice and data. For voice communications, the ITP-
5012L uses the data network line already in place in most offices and increasing
number of homes.
The ITP-5012L IP keysets also incorporate a large LCD screen, which provides
important information for the user, to make using the keyset easier and more con-
venient.
SVMi-8/ SVMi-16E......................................................................................72
SVMi-8/SVMi-16E Subscriber Services Menu Diagram .........................................73–74
Accessing your Mailbox ..............................................................................................................75
Getting Started .............................................................................................................................76
Listen to your Messages.............................................................................................................76
Subscriber Services Menu .........................................................................................................76
Listening to Old or New Messages ........................................................................................77
Group New or Old Messages....................................................................................................78
Record and Send a Message ....................................................................................................78
Access Manager ............................................................................................................................79
Personal Greetings ......................................................................................................................81
Mailbox Administration..............................................................................................................83
Message Broadcast ....................................................................................................................85
Personal Services ........................................................................................................................86
Personal Administration Settings ..........................................................................................87
Keyset User Features ..................................................................................................................88
Shortcuts ........................................................................................................................................90
Interactive Displays ......................................................................................................................90
Please take the time to study this guide and to become familiar with the operation
of your keyset. Keep this guide handy, as you may need to look up instructions for
infrequently used features.
This book is written based on factory default settings, for the feature access codes.
Sometimes, due to programming requirements, these codes may be changed. If
you find that a feature code does not work as described in this book, please con-
tact your installation and service company to determine the correct code.
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS ............................91–92
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Home Page
TERMINAL STATUS INDICATOR
THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW
The terminal status indicator light is positioned on the top right corner of the key-
set above the display. The terminal status indicator is a tri-colored (red, green, and
amber) light that provides greater visibility of your keysets status than the indi-
vidual button LEDs. The terminal status indicator provides the following indica-
tions:
USER ORIENTATION
The ITP model telephones are called “IP keysets”. The IP keyset incorporates but-
tons or “keys” that are used to access or activate the many features of your office
phone system. The lower five buttons (ten total) that reside on either side of the
Large Display screen are programmable buttons. This means they can be pro-
grammed for a specific function on your keyset and that same button can be
something different on another keyset. See the system manager to get your most
frequently used features assigned to your programmable buttons.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Busy/Off Hook
Intercom Ring
Outside Call Ring
Recall Ring
Message Waiting
Do Not Disturb
Steady Red
Flashing Red
Flashing Blue
Flashing Amber
Flashing Red
Fast Flash Red at 1 Second Intervals
The top button on either side of the Large Display Screen scrolls through the var-
ious levels of the programmable button display screens.
SELECT BUTTONS
Lines from the telephone company are “C.O. lines”. Calls on these lines are referred
to as “outside calls”. Your system can have individual C.O. line buttons or lines may
be assigned to groups. When they are in a group, you access a line by dialing an
access code or pressing a route button. For example, dial 9 or press a“LOCAL”but-
ton to get a local outside line. If Least Cost Routing is used, pressing the“LCR”but-
ton will automatically select a preprogrammed C.O. line according to what digits
are dialed. Each line in the system is numbered, beginning with 701, then 702, 703,
etc.
The 5012L keysets incorporate twelve select buttons. These buttons are posi-
tioned six on either side of the LCD screen.
The top left and right buttons are used to access the various levels of the user
screens.The 5012L has ten levels of programmable feature screens.By pressing the
top left (DOWN arrow) you progressively increase the screen level number [1-10].
By pressing the top right (UP arrow) you progressively decrease the screen level
number [10-1].
The remaining five buttons on either side of the display are programmable. There
are ten programmable buttons per programmable feature screen, with the excep-
tion of the last screen, which has nine programmable buttons. The total program-
mable buttons per 5012L station is ninety-nine.Any system feature or function can
be assigned to these buttons.
Direct Station Selection (DSS) buttons are programmed to ring specific stations.
You can press a DSS button instead of dialing the extension number.
The 5012L keyset provides distinctive ring patterns:
•
•
•
Outside calls have a single ring tone repeated.
Internal calls have a double ring tone repeated.
Door phone calls and alarm/appointment reminders have a triple ring tone
repeated.
VOLUME CONTROLS
The 5012L keysets use the UP and DOWN buttons to adjust the ringer volume
while the keyset is ringing, the speaker volume while the speakerphone is in use
and the handset volume while you are listening. These three levels will be stored
in memory until changed. If background music is turned on at your keyset, the vol-
ume buttons will also control the level of music. The volume of pages heard
through the speaker of a keyset can be adjusted during a page announcement by
using the volume buttons.There are 16 levels for each volume setting.The volume
of off-hook ring is controlled by a user-programmable setting.
SPEAKERPHONE
All ITP keysets are speakerphones. Pressing the SEND button will answer an
incoming call on the speakerphone. Pressing the END button will release the call
on the speakerphone.
Switching from the handset to the speakerphone is easy. Press the SPEAKER but-
ton and hang up the handset.
2
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Home Page
SCROLL BUTTON ASSEMBLY
SCREEN BUTTON
The scroll button is actually a type of thumbwheel assembly. You may use it to
scroll through the station screens. Rolling the SCROLL BUTTON DOWN (towards
the navigation button) will advance you through the multiple STATION FIXED
FEATURE and STATION PROGRAMMABLE button screens. Rolling the SCROLL
BUTTON UP (towards the station display) will bring the cursor back towards the
Main Screen. By scrolling up or down, you cause the cursor to move back and forth
through the screens in the same manner as the UP/DOWN arrows on the top
SELECT BUTTONS work.
The 5012L incorporates a SCREEN button. This button allows you to choose your
keyset’s idle screen display. The default is CALENDAR. The options are STATION
FIXED FEATURE buttons (two levels), or STATION PROGRAMMABLE buttons
(ten levels).
NOTE:
From the default CALENDAR screen:
•
•
Press the SCREEN button once to access the STATION PROGRAMMABLE
BUTTON SCREEN #1. Press the DOWN arrow associated with the top left soft
key and you will advance to STATION PROGRAMMABLE SCREEN #2. Each
additional press of the DOWN arrow will advance you through the screens,
until you reach SCREEN #10. Press the UP arrow associated with the top left
soft key to return to the previous screen. Each additional press of the UP but-
ton will move you back towards the main screen.
Press the SCREEN button twice to access the STATION FIXED FEATURE
SCREEN #1. Press the DOWN arrow associated with the top left soft key and
you will advance to SCREEN #2.
NAVIGATION BUTTON
The 5012L keysets incorporate a Navigation Button. This button is designed to
assist the user in activating and using various station features, more easily. These
features include Outgoing Call Log, Incoming Call Log, Speed Number Search, Call
Forward Assign and Alarm Assign.
With the NAVIGATION BUTTON, the station user is no longer required to enter
station level programming to activate these frequently used features. A few but-
ton presses and these features are activated.
The NAVIGATION BUTTON is divided into separate feature buttons. These but-
tons are described below.
CONFERENCE BUTTON
The CONFERENCE button allows the user to set up a call with up to five parties
•
•
MENU BUTTON: This button displays the station feature main menu, which is
configured in icons, so that the users can easily utilize various settings and
helpful functions.
(station or trunk).
TRANSFER BUTTON
SEND BUTTON: If the station is programmed for Enblock Dial Mode, when
dialing an outside telephone number or internal station number, you must
press the SEND button to initiate the call. This button is also used when
reviewing recently received or called numbers and answering incoming calls.
TRANSFER is used to send any call to another extension in one of two ways. You
can do a screened transfer by informing the other extension who is calling or you
can do a blind transfer without notification.
When reviewing recently received calls,continue to press the SEND button for
more than 2 seconds and the last outside number called will be redialed.
HOLD BUTTON
The HOLD button maintains the call at your keyset, while enabling you to call
The SEND button operates as the ANS portion of the ANS/RLS button. An
ANS/RLS button may be assigned to the station as a programmable button.
other stations or consult coworkers in confidence.
•
•
ENTER BUTTON: This button is used to select a menu option, or to save
changes made to a menu or submenu option.
SPEAKER BUTTON
The SPEAKER button allows you to have a conversation from the keyset without
DIRECTION BUTTON: The DIRECTION BUTTON is the donut shaped ring,
which surrounds the ENTER button.This button is used to navigate within the
menus. There are directional arrows stenciled into this button, which indicate
which direction the cursor will be moved.
lifting the handset.
4
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Home Page
Note that the DIRECTION BUTTON has four icons, at the top, bottom, left and
right of the ENTER button. These icons are used to navigate directly to
particular programming options from the CALENDAR screen.
SYSTEM TONES
The system provides several tones to assist you. Some of these tones are already
familiar to you.
Pressing the top (HOME) icon will take you directly to the Main Menu. The
bottom (TONE) icon will take you to the Ring Tone/Volume Menu.The left side
(MESSAGE) icon will take you to the Text Message Menu. The right side
(PHONE) icon will take you to the PhoneBook Menu.
•
•
END BUTTON: This button is used to disconnect a call after a conversation or
to move to the initial screen.
The END button operates as the RLS portion of the ANS/RLS button. An
ANS/RLS button may be assigned to the station as a programmable button.
CANCEL BUTTON: This button is used to erase any characters or numbers
entered by the dial button or to move to the previous screen.
After pressing the MENU button, use the direction button to highlight the desired
menu icon. For multiple screen options, the UP/DOWN arrows at the either side of
the top of the LCD may be used to scroll on a per page basis. Press ENTER to
access that menu. To navigate within the menu, you may scroll to the desired
option/function, dial the associated option function number or press the associ-
ated select button on either side of the display.
Press the END button to exit programming.
FEATURE ACCESS CODES
This user guide is written based on the default access code for using system fea-
tures. If the system numbering plan has been changed some of the access codes
may not be correct.Your installing company can inform you the correct codes.
6
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Home Page
ITP-5012L KEYSET
ASSEMBLING YOUR KEYSET
LCD Panel
Displays a large quantity
of information so that
the users can easily
search.
•
•
Place the keyset face down on a flat surface.
Select Buttons (6)
To select a specific item
the user can simply
press the Select button
next to the item.
Insert notched ends of the support bracket into the channels located in the
upper section of the bottom panel. Push towards the top of the keyset to lock
in.
Volume Button
Used to adjust
the volume of
the handset,
speakerphone,
ringer, back-
Select Button (6)
Status Indicator
Used to provide
your keyset status.
•
•
Plug the handset cord into the jack marked with the
symbol.
Route the handset cord out the RIGHT side of the keyset as you look at it face
down.
ground music
and page.
Screen
Button
•
•
•
•
Plug the eight-conductor LAN cable, from the wall, into the jack marked LAN
on the back of the keyset.
Scroll
Button
Navigation Button
Microphone Button
Plug the eight-conductor PC cable, from the PC, into the jack marked PC on
the back of the keyset.
Dial Button
Speaker Button
Conference Button
Used to make a calls of
up to 5 parties.
Plug the power connector, from the power adapter provided, into the power
jack on the back of the keyset.
For handsfree operation and ringing.
Hold Button
Used to save a call
without hanging-
up on the current
call.
Transfer Button
OPTIONAL: To connect a recording device, plug the device connector into the
jack marked REC on the bottom of the keyset.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
•
Be careful not to connect the Network LAN cable into the PC connector of the
phone.
•
To prevent damaging the keyset, only use the Power Adapter that came with
the 5012L keyset.
8
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Home Page
•
•
•
•
•
The [0]-[9] dial buttons are used to directly choose a menu, or sub menu
options.
The [ENTER] button in the navigation button assembly is used when saving a
modification.
The [MENU] button in the navigation button assembly is used to to display
the IP Setup Main Menu.
The [END] button in the navigation button assembly is used when canceling
or editing the modification, or existing programming.
The [CANCEL] button in the navigation button assembly is used to go back to
the previous screen or to delete the last digit of a displayed option value.
ITP-5012L SETUP
INITIALIZING THE ITP-5012L
Initially the ITP-5012L IP keyset will need to be setup to operate within the users
network.The Setup Menu is also used to make changes to the keyset, in the event
that the system information should change. The option chosen via scroll button
will be highlighted.
The station numbers will be automatically set by the iDCS 500 system once the
necessary information has been entered into the IP keyset. Enter ID and password
of the server, as described below to register the phone.
MENU STRUCTURE
The IP SETUP MENU is configured as follows:
See your system administrator for specific Network and Server addresses. The
addresses necessary to set up the ITP-5012L are:
1. INFORMATION
1. Version
2. Network
3. Load Option
•
•
•
•
•
IP Address of Station
Network Gateway Address
iDCS 500 MCP2 Server Address
User ID
4. MAC Address
(Note that Option 3 will be indicated only when setting the Manual IP)
Password
2. NETWORK
As soon as the ITP-5012L IP phone is connected to the power supply, press the
MENU button and the LCD displays the SETUP OPTIONS SCREEN.
1. Mode
2. IP
3. Netmask
4. Gateway
IP SETUP MENU
(Note that Option 2 will be indicated only when setting the Manual IP)
To enter the IP SETUP MENU, press the MENU
Setup (1/6)
button as soon as the ITP-5012L IP phone is con-
nected to the power supply. Unplug the power
1.Information
3. LOAD & UPGRADE
2.Network
1. Load Option
2. Upgrade Program
3. Upgrade Bootrom
4. Format
from the ITP. Press and hold the MENU button
while plugging in the power, then release the
MENU button.
3.Load & Upgrade
4.System
5.Server
6.Exit
Once the IP SETUP MENU is displayed, you can
4. SYSTEM
move to each menu in the Set Up by using the
navigation buttons and [1]-[9] dial buttons of the
ITP-5012L IP phone.
1. Password (Unused)
5. SERVER
•
•
The UP and DOWN directions buttons in the navigation button assembly are
used to move the highlighted bar up or down to the desired option.
The LEFT and RIGHT buttons in the navigation button assembly are used to
move the highlighted bar left or right, to the desired option, move to a sub
menu and if a menu is at the last line, that menu option will be executed.
1. Server IP
2. ID
3. Password
6. EXIT
10
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Home Page
Network (1/4)
Setting IP Manually
If [1. Manual IP] is selected the Network (1/4) sub
NAVIGATING THE MENUS
1.Mode
When programming within various menu options, information can be entered via
the dial pad keys using [0]-[9] and [ꢀ] dial keys, as well as utilizing the navigation
button assembly.
2.IP
menu will be displayed.
3.Netmask
4.Gateway
The user directly enters the IP address, subnet
mask, and gateway, address as follows:
The button used for editing and their features are summarized below.
•
If the [2. IP] menu is selected, the LCD will display
the following message and the user can enter its
IP address.
BUTTON
FEATURES
* Input IP Address
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Left and Right ......................To move a cursor (highlighted area) or to erase what is
entered.
Check if there is any currently saved IP address of the phone on the LCD. If the IP
address has not been set, the LCD displays nothing. The user can enter the IP
address using [0]-[9] dial buttons and [ꢀ] button can save that IP address by press-
ing the [Enter] button of navigation button assembly.
Enter ........................................To save the current setting and end programming.
End............................................To cancel the current programming and return to the
Main Menu.
Cancel......................................To move back to the previous screen or delete the last
digit of the displayed option value.
•
If the [3. Netmask] menu is selected, the user can
enter a new Netmask IP address.
* Input Netmask
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
[ꢀ] ............................................To enter [.] between IP address fields.
Check if there is any currently saved subnet mask address of the phone on the
LCD. If the subnet mask address has not been set, the display will show nothing.
Press any dial buttons from [0]-[9] and [ꢀ] button to enter the subnet mask IP
address and then save that subnet mask IP address by pressing the [Enter] button
of navigation button assembly.
[0]-[9] ......................................To enter numerical values.
SETTING THE NETWORK PARAMETERS
Utilize the following programming steps to program the ITP-5012L IP keyset to
operate within the users network.
•
If the [4. Gateway] menu is selected the user can
* Input Def. Gateway
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
enter a new gateway address.
Network Parameter Setup
From the Setup, Main Menu, select [2. Network] to
set or modify the network parameters. The LCD
will display the Network (1/1) screen.
The user can check if there is any gateway IP address of the phone that is current-
ly saved on the LCD. If the gateway IP address has not been set, the LCD will show
nothing. Use any dial buttons from [0]-[9] and [ꢀ] button to enter the gateway IP
address and save it by pressing the [Enter] button of navigation buttons.
Network (1/1)
1.Mode
Press ENTER and you will see the Mode (1/2)
screen.
NOTE: In the [2. Network Menu], [1. Mode] option, when [2. DHCP] is selected the
IP address, Netmask, and Gateway will not be displayed on the LCD.
•
•
If [1. Manual IP] is selected, the user must
enter the IP address, subnet mask, and gate-
way value for the customer network that the
5012L resides on.
Mode (1/2)
1.Manual IP
2.DHCP
If [2. DHCP] is selected, the IP address, subnet
mask, and gateway value will be set to the
default values automatically. (Choose this
option only if a DHCP server is available on the
local network).
12
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Home Page
Load and Upgrade Set/Modify
Authentication Server Related Set/Modify
The third item [3. Load & Upgrade] sets or modifies the IP phone’s software ver-
sion. Use extreme caution when upgrading the keyset.
The fifth item [5. Server] sets or modifies settings related to the authentication
server. Select the [5. Server] item and move to the lower level.The screen below is
displayed.
Select the [3. Load & Upgrade] item and move to the lower level. The screen
below is displayed.
1.Server IP
1.Load Option
2.Upgrade Program
You can set/modify the IP address of the authentication server at the [1. Server IP]
item. The screen below is displayed when you enter the item. The server IP is the
IP address of the MCP2.
Item not visible in the first screen:
Input ServerIP
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
3.Upgrade Bootrom
4.Format
In the [1.Load Option] item, move to the lower level and select [2. File System].
You can confirm the current IP address of the authentication server at the LCD
panel.The address is left blank if it is not set. Use the dial buttons from [0]-[9], and
[ꢀ] to set the IP address and press the [ENTER] button among the navigation but-
tons to save and exit.
Each of the items [2. Upgrade Program] and [3. Upgrade Bootrom] are used for
upgrading program and bootrom. Set the IP of the TFTP server you wish to
upgrade and press OK.
4
Input Id
The [4. Format] item is used for deleting all programs and data except bootrom.
xxxx
CAUTION: For engineering purposes only. The format option should not be used
unless instructed by an Authorized Samsung Engineering or Technical Support
Representative.
You must input the ID assigned to your ITP phone. See your phone system admin-
istrator to get this value. Press the [ENTER] button to save and exit.
4
Input Password
xxxx
You must input the password associated with your ID. See your phone system
administrator to get this value. Press the [ENTER] button to save and exit.
Completion of Settings
Verify settings at the first item [1. Information] after setting all of the above items.
Select the sixth item [6.Exit] to save all modified settings and reboot the ITP-5012L
phone.
14
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Home Page
DIALING FROM THE OUTGOING /
INCOMING MENU
OUTSIDE CALLS
Note: When making calls, internal or outside calls, in order to access the program-
mable button screens, press the SCREEN button. Then you can utilize either the
SCROLL button or the UP/DOWN arrow (select) buttons on the display.
•
•
From the station idle screen, press the MENU button and select P-BOOK.
Select DIALED Nos or RECEIVED Nos from the submenu. These menus will
store the last thirty calls made to and from the station.
Press the select button on the display, associated with the number to redial or
use the DIRECTION or SCROLL button to move the cursor to the desired
number. Press the ENTER button to display the detailed information of the
number.
•
MAKING AN OUTSIDE CALL
IMPORTANT: Put phone in OVERLAP MODE:
•
Press the SEND button to dial the number.
•
•
•
Press the MENU button.
Select CONFIG and then select DIAL MODE.
Change it to OVERLAP. If your phone is not in OVERLAP mode you must
always press the SEND button after dialing the digits to send the call.
DIALING THE MOST RECENT OUTGOING /
INCOMING NUMBER
•
Lift the handset and press an idle outside line button,line group button or dial
a line access code to receive dial tone—OR—press an idle outside line button,
line group button or dial a line access code to receive dial tone through the
speaker—OR—lift the handset and dial the Trunk Group access code or sim-
ply start dialing.
•
Press the SEND button. The most recent call (Internal or External) to or from
the station will be displayed.
•
Continue to press the SEND button and the system will automatically dial the
number for you.
•
•
Dial the telephone number or the Intercom number.
Finish the call by replacing the handset. To disconnect a speakerphone call,
press the ANS/RLS or END button.
MAKING CALLS FROM THE CALL LOG
The Station Call Log displays the last outgoing station, and incoming trunk calls.
The total number of calls that can be displayed is 60. You may redial any of these
calls from the Call Log.
NOTES:
1. You will receive No More Calls tone when you attempt to make a call and
•
•
Press the SEND button to display the first page of the CALL LOG.
Use the SCROLL button or the DIRECTION button to navigate to the desired
number. Use the UP and DOWN arrows, associated with the top left and right
soft keys to advance and return through the CALL LOG Screens.
When the desired number is highlighted, press the SEND button.
The number will be automatically dialed.
2. If Least Cost Routing is enabled on your phone system, this button may
be labeled LCR or accessed by dialing an access code (usually 9).
3. If your system is programmed to require an authorization code before
making a call, dial ꢀ plus a valid code before selecting a C.O. line.
4. If your system is programmed to require an account code before making
a call, press the ACCT button or dial 47 plus a valid bin number, press the
ACCT button again and then select a C.O. line.
•
•
ANSWERING A CALL
•
Lift the handset and you are automatically connected to the ringing call. See
Ring Preference under Customizing Your Keyset—OR—press the SEND button
to automatically answer on the speakerphone.
For more information on authorization and account codes, see your system
administrator.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before dialing.
•
While a call is ringing in, the display will indicate the type of call coming in
(station number and name, trunk number and name, etc.)
NOTES:
1. If a call is flashing at your keyset but not ringing, you must press the flashing
button to answer.
16
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Home Page
2. While a call is ringing in, press the SCREEN button to display the programma-
ble button screen. This will enable you to view and invoke any of the station
features that you may wish.
CANCELING CALLBACK
A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds. If you have set a
callback, the cursor associated with the CALLBACK button, will be solid black.
UNIVERSAL ANSWER
To cancel a callback:
Outside lines may be programmed to ring a general alerting device. To answer
calls ringing this device, dial 67—OR—press the UA button.This device can oper-
ate in any one of the six different ring plans.
•
•
Press the CALLBACK button, if programmed, or dial 44.The display will show
the callback details and an option to CLEAR the callback.
Press the CLEAR button,or press the HOLD button.This will cancel the last set
callback and display the next set callback, also with the option to CLEAR.This
process is repeated until all callbacks are cleared from memory.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before dialing.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature is turned off, you must first lift the handset or
press the SPEAKER button before dialing.
RECALL DIAL TONE
•
Press the NEW button to disconnect your existing call, wait for dial tone and
then make a new call on the same line.
NOTE: If this button does not appear on your keyset, the FLASH button may be
programmed to recall dial tone.
SENDING A FLASH
While on an outside call, press the FLASH button to send a flash to the telephone
company. This is required for some custom calling features or CENTREX use.
NOTE: Flash is not available on an ISDN circuit.
BUSY LINE QUEUING WITH CALLBACK
If you receive a busy signal when you are selecting an outside line, this means that
the line or group of lines is busy.
•
Press the CALLBACK button, if programmed, or dial 44, you will hear confir-
mation tone.
•
•
•
Press the ANS/RLS or END button.
When the line becomes free, the system will call you back.
Lift the handset or press the SEND button to answer,wait for dial tone and dial
the telephone number or speed dial number again.
NOTES:
1. A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds. If you have set
a callback, the cursor associated with the CALLBACK button will be solid
black.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before dialing.
18
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Home Page
AUTO ANSWER MODE
INTERCOM CALLS
When another station calls you, your keyset will sound a brief attention tone and
then automatically answer the call.
CALLING OTHER STATIONS
•
•
Your microphone and speaker are turned on and you can speak handsfree.
For privacy, use the handset.
To finish the call, replace the handset or press the ANS/RLS or END button.
•
•
Dial the extension number or group number.
Wait for the party to answer. If you hear a brief tone burst instead of ringback
tone, the station you called is set for Voice Announce or Auto Answer. Begin
speaking immediately after the tone.
NOTE: In order for C.O. calls to be answered handsfree, AUTO ANS CO must be set
to ON.
•
Finish the call by replacing the handset or pressing the ANS/RLS button or
END button.
BUSY STATION CALLBACK
NOTES:
When you call another station and receive a busy signal:
1. If you have a DSS button assigned to an extension or station group, you may
press this button instead of dialing the number.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.
•
•
•
Press the CALLBACK button, if programmed, or dial 44.
When the busy station becomes free, your keyset will ring.
Lift the handset or press the ANS/RLS or SEND button to call the now idle
station.
DIALING THE MOST RECENT OUTGOING /
INCOMING NUMBER
NOTES:
1. A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds. If you have set
a callback, the cursor associated with the CALLBACK button, will be solid
black.
•
Press the SEND button.The most recent call (Internal or External to system) to
or from the station will be displayed.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER or SEND button before dialing.
•
Continue to press the SEND button and the system will automatically dial the
number for you.
BUSY STATION CAMP-ON
ANSWERING INTERCOM CALLS
When you call another station and receive a busy signal but you do not want to
wait for a callback:
•
When your keyset rings, simply lift the handset—OR—press the ANS/RLS or
SEND button to be connected to the calling station.
Finished the call by replacing the handset or pressing the ANS/RLS or END
button.
•
MANUAL CAMP-ON
•
•
Press the CAMP button or dial 45.
See Ringing Preference under Customizing Your Keyset.
The called station will receive off-hook ring tone repeated every few seconds
and the cursor associated with the first available CALL button will flash black
to indicate your call is waiting.
Wait for the called party to answer.
The called station must release its first call or place it on hold before answer-
ing your camp-on.
VOICE ANNOUNCE MODE
When another station calls you, your keyset will sound a brief attention tone and
you will hear the caller’s announcement.
•
•
•
•
Press the ANS/RLS or SEND button to turn on the microphone and speak
handsfree—OR—lift the handset to reply.
To finish the call, replace the handset or press the ANS/RLS or END button.
NOTES:
1. If you receive No More Calls tone, that station has no available button to
accept your call. Hang up or leave a message.
NOTE: In order for C.O. calls to be answered handsfree, AUTO ANS CO must be set
to ON.
20
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Home Page
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before dialing.
CALL PROCESSING
AUTO CAMP-ON
SYSTEM HOLD
When you want to automatically camp on to a busy station without pressing the
camp on button every time you call a busy station,you can set your phone for auto
camp-on.
When you are connected to any call, press HOLD.The call will flash at the keyset. If
this call appears on a line button at other keysets, it will flash at those keysets also.
•
To take the caller off hold, press that button and the flashing LED will go
steady again. Resume the conversation—OR—press the HOLD button. The
flashing LED will go steady again and you will be connected to the call again.
Resume the conversation.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Dial 081 to turn ON auto camp-on or 080 to turn it OFF.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
From the LCD:
NOTE:While on a call, pressing a line button, route button or flashing CALL button
will automatically put your first call on hold and connect you to the new call. See
Automatic Hold under Customizing Your Keyset.
•
•
•
Press the MENU button.
Scroll to CONFIG option and press ENTER.
Scroll to STATION ON/OFF and press ENTER—OR—you may dial 0 and
immediately enter the option.
EXCLUSIVE HOLD
•
•
Scroll to AUTO CAMPON option. Press ENTER to change status.
Press CANCEL to return to main configuration screen—OR—press END to
return to idle screen.
To place an outside call on hold at your phone so that other users cannot get it:
•
•
Press the HOLD button twice. The call will flash on your keyset and this line
will show a steady indication on other keysets.
To retrieve the call, press the flashing line button or press the HOLD button a
third time.
CALLING YOUR SYSTEM OPERATOR
•
Dial 0 and press SEND button to call your system operator or group of opera-
tors.
NOTE: Intercom calls will always be placed on exclusive hold.
•
If you want to call a specific operator, dial that person’s extension number.
NOTE: If the Hot keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.
REMOTE HOLD
When you wish to place a call on hold at another station.
•
•
Press TRANSFER and dial the station number (or press the appropriate DSS
button)
Press the HOLD button.This will place the call on system hold on an available
CALL button or Line button at the remote station and return you to dial tone.
NOTES:
1. If the destination station does not have any free CALL buttons or line buttons
you will hear No More Calls tone and must return to the other party by press-
ing the TRANSFER button (or the RETURN soft key in the display).
2. Intercom calls cannot be put on remote hold.
22
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Home Page
HOLD RECALL
TRANSFERRING CALLS
If you leave a call on hold longer than the hold timer, it will recall your station.The
button that the call appears on will have a slow flashing indicator.
Transfer is used to send any calls to another extension in one of two ways.You can
do a screened transfer by informing the other extension who is calling or you can
do a blind transfer without notification.
•
•
When your phone rings, lift the handset or press the ANS/RLS button—OR—
press the SEND button to answer the recall.
If you do not answer this recall within a pre-programmed period of time, it will
go to the system operator.
•
While on a call, press the TRANSFER button and dial an extension number or
group number. Your call is automatically put on transfer hold—OR—press a
DSS button or station group button.Your call is automatically put on transfer
hold.
CONSULTATION HOLD
When you are talking on an outside line and it is necessary to consult with anoth-
er extension:
•
Hang up when you hear ringing (this is an unscreened or blind transfer)—
OR—wait for the called party to answer and advise him/her of the call and
hang up. If the transfer is refused, you will be reconnected to the outside line
when the called station hangs up or you can press TRANSFER to return to the
outside party.
•
Press the TRANSFER button; you will receive transfer dial tone. Your call is
placed on transfer hold.
Dial the extension number.
Consult with the internal party.
Press TRANSFER to return to the outside party or hang up to transfer the call.
•
•
•
•
•
If you wish to send the call to another extension without waiting for the first
station to hang up, simply press another DSS button—OR—press the CALL
button or C.O. line button to return to the outside party and begin the trans-
fer process again.
When you are transferring a call to a keyset set for Voice Announce or Auto
Answer, the transferred call will always ring.
NOTE:Repeatedly pressing the TRANSFER button will toggle between the outside
party and internal extension. If necessary you may disconnect either one of the
parties by pressing the DROP button.
NOTES:
RETRIEVING CALLS HELD AT ANOTHER
STATION
1. After the inside party answers, you may alternate back and forth between the
parties by pressing the TRANSFER button.
2. If you receive No More Calls tone, that station has no button available to re-
ceive another call. Press TRANSFER to return to the other party.
3. You cannot transfer an Intercom call by pressing a DSS button.You must press
the TRANSFER button and dial the destination extension number.
When a line is on hold and it appears on your keyset, press the LINE button with
the flashing indicator.
When a line is on hold and it does not appear on your keyset, dial 12 plus the line
number or the extension number of the station that placed the call on hold.
TRANSFER WITH CAMP-ON
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.
When you are transferring a call to another station and you receive a busy signal,
you may camp the call on to this station. Simply hang up when you hear the busy
signal. The called party will be alerted that a call is waiting for them.
NOTE: If you receive No More Calls tone, that station has no button available to
receive another call. Press TRANSFER to return to the outside caller.
24
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Home Page
ed together in a trunk to trunk conference, press the CONFERENCE button plus
the CALL button that the call appears on or follow the instructions to drop a party
and use your extension number. When they hang up, the lines will release auto-
matically. Press CONFERENCE to rejoin a trunk to trunk conference.
TRANSFER TO VOICE MAIL
This feature is used to send a call directly to a voice mailbox.Your keyset must have
a correctly programmed VT button to accomplish this.To transfer a call directly to
a voice mailbox:
CONFERENCE SPLITTING
•
•
While on a call, press the VT button and dial the mailbox number.
Hang up when dialing is completed.
If you are the controlling party of a conference and your keyset has the Auto Hold
feature turned on (See Customizing Your Keyset) and all of the outside lines involved
in the conference appear as buttons on your keyset, you can split the conference
into separate calls as follows:
CALL WAITING
If an outside call has been camped-on to your phone or another station has
camped-on to you:
•
Press any one of the outside line buttons. That outside line indicator will
remain steady to indicate you are still connected to it. All other outside lines
in the conference will be placed on system hold at your keyset. All intercom
callers in the conference will be disconnected. You may now speak with each
caller privately and transfer them as usual, or reestablish another conference.
•
•
Your keyset will ring and the call that is waiting for you (camped-on) will flash.
Press the flashing button to answer; your other call will go on hold automati-
cally if your station has the Automatic Hold feature set. If not, you must press
HOLD and then the flashing button—OR—finish the first call and hang up;
the waiting call will ring.
FORWARDING CALLS
•
Lift the handset or press the ANS/RLS or SEND button to answer.
This option allows for one button Call Forward setting.You may forward your calls
to another station, station group or external destination.
NOTE: Intercom calls will not go on Automatic Hold.
Call forwarding may be set in several different manners:
CONFERENCE CALLS
You may conference up to five parties (you and four others) in any combination of
outside lines and internal stations in any order.
1. From the dial pad, dial 60 plus the extender (see below) that corresponds with
the type of forwarding desired, followed by the station number to forward to.
•
•
While engaged in a conversation, press the CONFERENCE button and receive
conference tone.
Make another call, either intercom or outside, press the CONFERENCE button
and receive conference tone.
Make another call or press the CONFERENCE button to join all parties.
Repeat the last step until all parties are added.
60 + 0 Call Forward Cancel. Cancels all call forwarding from the station.
60 + 1 Call Forward All Calls. Forwards all calls under any condition.
60 + 2 Call Forward Busy. Forward calls to another station when you are on
the phone.
•
•
60 + 3 Call Forward No Answer. Forward calls to another station when you
don’t answer.
NOTE: When attempting to add another party to the conference and you are not
able to reach the desired person, hang up. Simply press the CONFERENCE button
again to return to your previous conversation.
60 + 4 Call Forward Busy/No Answer. Sets both Forward Busy and Forward
No Answer.
60 + 5 Call Forward DND. Forwards calls when you activate DND.
To drop a party from your conference call:
60 + 6 Call Forward Follow Me. Forward calls to the station where you cur-
rently are.
•
•
Press CONFERENCE and dial the extension or line number that is to be
dropped.
Press CONFERENCE again to reestablish the conference.
NOTE:To leave the conference, hang up. Control is passed to the next internal sta-
tion. If there are no internal stations and you wish to leave outside lines connect-
26
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Home Page
2. From the LCD:
STATION CALL PICKUP
•
•
•
Press the MENU button, scroll to the FORWARD icon, press ENTER.
Scroll to the desired Forward Option. Press MENU button.
Select MODIFY, enter the Station Number to forward to and press ENTER.
To pick up (answer) a call ringing at another station, lift the handset and dial 65
plus the extension number of the ringing phone.
If you have a DP key assigned with a station number, you only need to press this
DP key with the flashing light to answer this ringing station.
NOTE: Once call forwarding has been initially set, for subsequent settings, you may
scroll to the desired forward type and press ENTER to forward to that same desti-
nation.You may also press the SELECT button associated with the desired forward
type, as opposed to scrolling to it.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the hand-
set or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.
3. From the Station Feature Button:
GROUP CALL PICKUP
To pick up (answer) a call ringing in any pickup group, lift the handset and dial 66
plus the desired group number 01–20 or press the flashing GROUP PICKUP but-
ton if available.
•
Each of the forward types may be assigned its own feature button. Pressing
the desired feature button will set forwarding to the last destination.
NOTES:
NOTES:
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.
2. The station that receives a Forward All call can transfer the call to the for-
warded station. This is useful when you are expecting an important call but
you do not wish to be disturbed by other calls.
3. When a station user places his/her keyset in Forward All mode and he/she
does not have a FORWARD ALL button, the TRANSFER button will light to
indicate Forward All has been set and calls to this station have been trans-
ferred elsewhere.
1. A group pickup button can have an extender for a specific pickup group.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before dialing the access code.
MY GROUP PICKUP
If desired, a new access code can be assigned to pickup ringing calls in the same
pickup group as you are in. Like “66” above except you do not need to dial the
desired group number. See your installation company for the assigned access
code. MY GROUP PICKUP: __________________.
CALL FORWARD OPTIONS
PRIVACY RELEASE
A display keyset may review or change call forward options and destinations. Call
forward access can be done via the keypad or by accessing the keyset display fea-
tures. To review or change call forward options:
This feature will allow another station to join in our conversation by releasing pri-
vacy on the C.O. from your phone.
•
•
Press TRANSFER 102.
To Release Privacy:
Dial 0-6 to select the forward type (e.g., 1) OR
Press UP or DOWN to select the forward type
Press the right soft key to move the cursor
Dial the destination number (e.g., 202) OR
Press UP or DOWN to select the destination
Press the right soft key to move the cursor
Dial 1 to set OR
While you are talking on a C.O. line and you wish to have other internal parties (or
up to three) join the conversation.
•
•
Press the PRB button (the PRB indicator will be steady). Inform the other
party that he/she may now join the conversation.
•
•
After the other party (or parties) has joined the conversation and you wish to
return privacy to the line so that no one else can join the conversation, press the
PRB button a second time, the PRB button LED will be off.
Press UP or DOWN to select YES or NO
Press TRANSFER to store and exit
28
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Home Page
To Join a Non-Private Conversation:
DIALING FEATURES
When someone has informed you that you can join a conversation:
•
•
Press the C.O. line button that he/she has indicated.
OR
Dial the C.O. line number that he/she has indicated.
SPEED DIALING
You can dial a preprogrammed telephone number stored in the system-wide
speed dial list of numbers 500–999 or from your personal list of numbers 00–49.
Your system may be set for 950 system wide numbers. If so the system speed dial
access codes are 050~999 and the station speed dial codes are 000~049.
•
From the Main Fixed Feature screen with the handset on-hook, press the
SPEED DIAL button or dial 16.
•
•
Dial the desired speed dial number.
The telephone number is automatically dialed for you.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.
From the LCD:
•
•
•
•
Press the MENU button.
Scroll to the PHONEBOOK option, press ENTER.
Scroll to SEARCH, press ENTER.
Choose the method to be used to initiate a speed call, as described below.
SEARCH—Search and initiate speed dial calls by: Speed Dial Number, Associated
Names, Telephone Numbers, Assigned Groups or Previous Calls, registered to the
phone.
•
Scroll to, or dial the associated number of the desired function. (Search,
Outgoing, Incoming, New Number, Edit Group, Delete All, My Own Number)
and press ENTER.
•
Once in the menu, you may dial the selected number, change, delete or regis-
ter the number. When the information is displayed, press ENTER to dial the
number, press MENU to display further options.
1. BY SPEED DIAL #: Searches all speed dial numbers assigned to the phone.
Enter the speed dial number of the party you wish to call. When the number
is displayed, press ENTER and the number will be automatically dialed for you.
If you press ENTER without entering a speed dial number, all registered num-
bers will be displayed.
2. BY NAME: Searches for a telephone number by names associated with them.
Enter the name in the“By Name”box and press ENTER.When the name is dis-
played, press ENTER again and all of the numbers associated with that name
30
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Home Page
are displayed. Using the direction button, highlight the desired number. Press
From the LCD:
ENTER and the system will automatically dial it for you.
•
•
•
Press MENU button.
Scroll to PHONEBOOK option, press ENTER.
Scroll to New Number and press ENTER. Or you may dial [4] and immediate-
ly enter the option.
Enter the name and all desired phone numbers for that particular speed dial
entry and press ENTER.
If you press ENTER without entering a name, all registered names will be dis-
played.
3. BY PHONE NUMBER: Searches for an entry by the phone number registered.
Enter the phone number of the party you wish to call. Press ENTER and the
number will be displayed from the PHONEBOOK. When the number is dis-
played, press ENTER and all information associated with that number is dis-
played.
•
ONE TOUCH SPEED DIALING
You may assign any speed dial number to an already existing One Touch Speed
Dial button for quick and easy dialing of frequently used numbers.
If you press ENTER without entering a number, all registered numbers will be
displayed.
Notes:
•
•
•
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 107.
Press a One Touch Speed Dial button.
Dial the speed dial number (00–49 or 500–999) that you want assigned to
this button.
—Entering (*123*) searches all numbers that include the 123 in them.
—Entering 305* searches all numbers that begin with 305.
—Entering *3000 searches all numbers that end with 3000.
•
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
4. BY GROUP: Searches for an entries by group information registered. Scroll to
group or enter associated number, press ENTER. The numbers registered to
that group are displayed. Scroll to the desired number and press SEND. The
number is automatically dialed for you.
To call this telephone number, just press the One Touch Speed Dial button.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the hand-
set or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing.
5. BY TIME: Searches for entries based on incoming calls that have registered
numbers on the set. Scroll to the desired entry and press ENTER. The infor-
mation associated with that call will be displayed. Scroll to the desired num-
ber entry and press SEND to have the number dialed automatically for you.
DIRECTORY DIALING
•
•
•
Press the SCREEN button twice. Scroll to the first Fixed Feature screen.
Press the DIRECTORY button.
Press the soft button associated with the desired option.
PROGRAMMING PERSONAL SPEED
DIAL NUMBERS
STN - Accesses Station name directory,
SYSTEM - Accesses System speed dial name list.
PERS - Accesses your personal speed dial name list.
You can program frequently dialed telephone numbers in a personal speed dial
list. A station may be assigned up to fifty numbers, 00–49. See your system admin-
istrator to determine the amount assigned to your station.The phone itself main-
tains 1000 station speed dial numbers.
•
•
•
Enter the first digit of the desired party.
Press the UP/DOWN buttons to scroll to the desired entry.
Press the appropriate operation soft button:
DIAL - Dials the displayed number.
•
•
•
•
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 105.
Dial a speed dial number (00–49).
Dial a line or line group access code.
Dial the telephone number to be stored (24 digits maximum). It can include
#, ꢀ, FLASH and PAUSE.
PREVIOUS - Moves you to the previous entry.
EXIT - Exit programming and return to idle screen.
NEXT - Moves you to the next entry.
•
Press END to return to idle screen.
•
Press TRANSFER to store the number.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the hand-
set or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing.
32
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Home Page
•
When the called party answers, lift the handset or press the flashing SPEAK-
ER to begin speaking.
LAST NUMBER REDIAL
To redial the last telephone number you dialed, press the REDIAL button or dial
NOTES:
19.
1. If you make another call, auto-redial is canceled.
2. To cancel an auto-retry, lift and replace the handset.
To redial the last telephone number you dialed, from the Main Fixed screen, press
the LAST REDIAL button.
PULSE TO TONE CHANGEOVER
NOTES:
When making an outside call on a dial pulse line, press #. All digits dialed after the
# with be sent as tones.
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.
2. Redial does not apply to intercom calls.
MEMO REDIALING
MANUAL RETRY WITH REDIAL
When you are calling directory information, you can store the number you are
given using the SAVE feature. There is no need for pencil and paper.
While you are on an outside call listening to a busy signal and you want to redial
the same number dialed.
•
•
•
While you are talking on an outside call, press SAVE.
Dial the telephone number as it is dictated to you on the key pad.
Press SAVE to store the number.
•
Press the REDIAL button.
This will hang up your existing call and manually redial the same number dialed.
You can repeat this operation for a limited number of attempts.
To dial the number, press the SAVE/REPEAT button. It will select the same line and
dial the stored number. If necessary, you can select a different line and then press
the SAVE/REPEAT button.
SAVE NUMBER WITH REDIAL
To save the number you just dialed for later use, press the SAVE/REPEAT button
before hanging up.
To redial this saved number at any time, press the SAVE/REPEAT button or dial 17.
The same line will be selected for you.
NOTES:
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.
2. The saved telephone number is stored in memory until you save another
number.
3. Redial does not apply to intercom calls.
AUTOMATIC REDIAL/RETRY
When you are making an outside call and you receive a busy signal, the system can
automatically redial the number for you. It will automatically redial at a pre-pro-
grammed interval for up to 15 attempts.
•
•
When you hear a busy signal, press the AUTO-RETRY button.
The system will reserve the line and automatically redial the same number for
you.You will hear the call being made through the keyset speaker.The micro-
phone is muted.
34
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Home Page
Press WAIT or TRANSFER.
•
•
•
Remain off-hook until the person dials 56 from any phone.
The paged person will be automatically connected with you.
PAGING AND MESSAGING
MAKING AN INTERNAL PAGE
CALL PARK AND PAGE
To make an announcement through the keyset speakers:
When you have an outside call for someone who is not at his/her desk, you can
park the call prior to paging. The iDCS 500 offers two different methods:
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset.
Press the PAGE button or dial 55.
Dial the desired zone number 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4.
After the attention tone, make your announcement.
MANUAL PARK ORBITS
•
•
While in conversation, press the PARK button.
Entered a desired orbit number (0-9), if the orbit number is busy dial another
orbit number. Display users can press ꢀ to automatically place the call in any
available orbit number and see the number in the display.
Remember the selected orbit number.
Replace the handset when finished.
Lift the handset and make a page announcement as previously described
(example:“John Smith park two”).
NOTE: If you have a dedicated page zone button, it is not necessary to press PAGE
and dial a zone number.
•
•
•
MAKING AN EXTERNAL PAGE
To make an announcement through the external paging speakers:
To retrieve a parked call from orbit:
•
•
•
Lift the handset.
Press the PAGE button or dial 55.
Dial the desired zone number 5, 6, 7 or 8—OR—dial 9 to page all external
zones.
•
•
Press the PARK button and dial the announced orbit number (0-9).
You will be connected to the parked call.
NOTES:
•
After the attention tone, make your announcement.
1. You must have a PARK button or park access code to retrieve and place calls
in park orbits.
2. If the parked call is not retrieved within a pre-programmed period of time, it
will recall your keyset and have a slow flashing amber light. You cannot park
and page intercom calls.
NOTE: If you have a dedicated page zone button, it is not necessary to press PAGE
and dial a zone number.
ALL PAGE
3. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.
To page all designated keysets and external speakers at the same time:
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset.
AUTOMATIC PARK WITH PAGE BUTTON
Press the PAGE button or dial 55.
Dial ꢀ or press the ALL PAGE button.
After the attention tone, make your announcement.
•
While in conversation, press the PAGE button.The call is automatically parked
at your station.
•
•
Receive page tone and dial a desired page zone number.
Make announcement indicating your extension number or the line number.
Hang up.
NOTE: The indicator on the PAGE button will be lit steady when an All Page is in
progress.
To retrieve an automatically parked call:
MEET ME PAGE
•
Dial 10 plus the number that was announced. If you have a PAGPK button,
press it and dial the number that was announced. If you have a PARK button,
press it and dial the announced orbit number.
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset.
Press the Meet Me Page (MMPG) button or dial 54.
Dial the desired zone number.
After the attention tone, instruct the paged person to dial 56.
•
You will be connected to the parked call.
36
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Home Page
NOTES:
3. If a message has been left at your keyset by a keyset in Auto Answer, you must
manually cancel the message after it has been returned.
1. If the call is not retrieved within a pre-programmed period of time, it will recall
your keyset and have a slow flashing amber light. You cannot park and page
intercom calls.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.
PROGRAMMED MESSAGES
When you will be away from your phone for any length of time, you can leave a
programmed station message. Display stations calling you will see this message
and be informed of your status or follow your instructions.
SETTING A MESSAGE INDICATION
•
Dial 48 plus any of the message codes (01–20) listed on the back of this user
guide.
When you are calling another station and no one answers or you receive a busy
signal, you can leave a message indication:
•
•
To cancel any of these messages you might have selected, dial 48 plus 00.
Press TRANSFER to exit and store your selection.
•
•
Press the MESSAGE button—OR—dial 43 and receive confirmation tone.
Hang up.
The message button on the Main Programmable Button screen and the TSI
will flash at the called station.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button.
You can have multiple programmed message buttons (PMSG) and each one can
have a different message code:
NOTES:
1. A station can have up to five message indications.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.
•
•
Press any programmed message (PMSG) button. The message is set and the
PGM MSG button indicator will be lit steady. Press the button again to turn off
the programmed message and the indicator will go blank.
Pressing another programmed message (PMSG) button will turn the previous
one off and set a different programmed message.
CANCELING MESSAGES
To cancel a message indication that you left at another station, dial 42 plus the
extension number of the station at which you left a message.
To assign absent messages via the LCD:
To cancel all message indications left at your keyset, dial 42 plus your extension.
Your MESSAGE button indicator will stop flashing and the TSI will go out.
•
Select pre-programmed, or custom messages from the extended absences
(10 pre-programmed and 10 custom messages).
Scroll to or dial [7] and press ENTER.
Scroll UP/DOWN to the desired message.
Press ENTER, display confirms save.
To clear absent message, press MENU at message option and scroll down to
clear, press ENTER, display requires more input, select YES/NO, press ENTER,
display confirms cleared.
•
•
•
•
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.
RETURNING MESSAGES
•
Press the MESSAGE button or dial 43.The first station that left a message will
be called automatically.If that station does not answer, your MESSAGE button
indicator will continue to flash and the TSI will stay on.
•
•
Repeat until all messages have been returned in the order received.
Your MESSAGE button indicator will stop flashing and the TSI will turn off
when all messages have been returned.
NOTES:
1. Display keyset users can view message indications and return them in any
order. See Viewing Message Indications under Display Features.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.
38
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Home Page
ESTABLISHED CALL PICKUP
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
To pick up an established call in progress at a single line extension connected to
a computer modem on your PC.
DO NOT DISTURB
•
•
Press the EP button for that station on your keyset and the call is automati-
cally moved to your keyset.
The single line extension on your modem will be disconnected.
Use this feature when you want to block calls to your keyset.
•
•
While on-hook, press the DND button or dial 401. The DND button indicator
will be lit steady to remind you of this mode.
To cancel DND, press the DND button again or dial 400.The DND button indi-
cator goes blank.You can make calls while in the DND mode.
NOTE: You must have an assigned (EP button) button on your regular keyset, for
the single line station.
APPOINTMENT REMINDER / ALARM
REMINDER
NOTES:
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button.
2. If you place your keyset in DND mode and you do not have a DND button,
your TSI button will flash to indicate DND status.
ALARM CLOCK
This feature works like an alarm clock. Use it to remind yourself of an appointment
later in the day (TODAY ONLY) or as a daily reminder every day (DAILY).You can set
up to three alarms. Each one can be either a TODAY ONLY or a DAILY alarm.
ONE TIME DND
If you are on a call and you do not wish to be interrupted while on that call, you
can press the DND button and place your station in Do Not Disturb. When you
hang up at the end of the call, DND will be automatically canceled and your key-
set will be able to receive new calls. This feature requires a DND button.
When the alarm rings, you will hear three short rings repeated three times. Lift the
handset to answer the alarm. If you do not, the alarm will alert you two more times
at five minute intervals.
Set alarm for desired duration (Everyday, Once). These alarms can be used to
remind you of an appointment later in the day (Once) or as a daily reminder
(Everyday). There are two possible alarms. Each can be either a today (Once) or a
daily (Everyday) alarm.
MUTE
You can mute the handset transmitter or the microphone during any conversa-
tion:
•
•
Press the MUTE button. The MUTE button indicator will be lit steady.
To resume speaking, press the MUTE button again. The MUTE button indica-
tor goes blank.
To set alarms:
•
•
•
Press TRANSFER and then dial 112.
Dial the alarm number 1, 2 or 3.
Dial the time at which you want the alarm to sound. Enter the time as HHMM
(hours and minutes) using the 24 hour clock.
Dial 0 (NOT SET), 1 (TODAY ONLY) or 2 (DAILY) to select the alarm type.
Press TRANSFER to save.
BACKGROUND MUSIC
When a music source is supplied, you may listen to music through the speaker in
your keyset:
•
•
•
Repeat for each alarm if needed.
•
•
While on-hook, press the HOLD button to hear music.
Press the HOLD button again to turn music off.
To cancel individual alarms:
You can set the level of background music by using the VOLUME buttons while lis-
tening to the music. This does not affect the speakerphone level.
•
•
•
Press TRANSFER and then dial 112.
Dial alarm number 1, 2 or 3.
Press the HOLD key.
40
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Home Page
From the LCD:
“T”. Press 2 once to get“A.”Press 5 twice to get“K.”Continue selecting charac-
ters from the following table to complete the message.
Enter ALARM ALERT period.
Set RING TONE.
When all information is set, press ENTER.
•
•
•
Press MENU button.
Scroll to E-DIARY option, press ENTER.
Scroll to ALARM option and press ENTER—OR—you may dial 2 and immedi-
ately enter the option.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Choose the desired ALARM NUMBER (1/2).
Enter TIME via the dial pad in 24-hour format.
Set RING TONE via the direction button (left/right). Each tone is heard.
Set REPEAT DURATION via the direction button.
Press ENTER when finished.
COUNT
DIAL 0
DIAL 1
DIAL 2
DIAL 3
DIAL 4
DIAL 5
DIAL 6
DIAL 7
DIAL 8
DIAL 9
DIAL ꢀ
NOTES:
1
2
3
.
4
)
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ꢀ
<
>
?
space
,
!
A
D
G
J
B
E
C
F
I
@
#
$
%
^
S
Q
Z
]
To clear alarm:
•
Scroll to CLEAR option in Alarm Clock setting screen and press ENTER.
H
K
N
Q
U
X
=
DAILY PLANNER
Scheduling feature with message. Allows the scheduling of up to 30 alarm
reminders. Each of these reminders can have an associated message of up to 32
characters. These reminders can be scheduled to ring one hour before, one half
hour before or right at the exact time set.
L
O
R
V
Y
[
M
P
T
•
•
•
Press TRANSFER and then dial 116.
Dial the alarm number 1, 2 or 3.
Dial the time you want the alarm to go off.Enter the time as HHMM (hours and
minutes) using the 24 hour clock.
Dial 0 (NOT SET), 1 (TODAY) or 2 (DAILY) to select the alarm type.
Write your message using the dial pad keys. Each press of a key selects a char-
acter. Pressing the next key moves the cursor to the next position. For exam-
ple, if your message is “TAKE MEDICATION,” press 8 once to get the letter “T.”
Press 2 once to get “A.” Press 5 twice to get “K.” Continue selecting characters
from the following table to complete your message.
W
:
•
•
1. When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previ-
ous character, press UP to move the cursor one space to the right.
2. Other symbols are available for DIAL #.
•
•
Press the TRANSFER key to store the alarm and reminder message.
Repeat for each alarm if needed.
ANSWERING THE DOOR PHONE
When you are programmed to receive calls from a door phone:
From the LCD:
•
•
You will receive three short rings repeated.
Lift the handset or press ANS/RLS button. You are connected to the door
phone.
•
Press direction button UP/DOWN to set the month. Press direction button
LEFT/RIGHT to set the date. Press ENTER on the desired date.
Press MENU then ADD.
Enter the TIME desired for the alarm (in 24 hour format).
Enter the message in the CONTENTS field.
Write your message using the dial pad buttons. Each press of a key selects a
character. Pressing the next key moves the cursor to the next position. For
example, if your message is “TAKE MEDICATION”, press 8 once to get the letter
•
•
•
•
•
If an electric door lock release is installed, dial 13 to unlock the door.
42
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Home Page
message and press ENTER (while maintaining contact with t he caller). This
method does not give you the option to transfer the call to another station.
Take necessary action (take message, etc.)
CALLING THE DOOR PHONE/
ROOM MONITOR
•
You may call the door phone and listen to what may be happening outside or in
another room.
To set up the Executive/Secretary messages (10 each):
•
•
Press BOSS/SECR button and establish a connection.
Press the EXE/SECR MSG button. The first message screen is displayed.
Pressing the DOWN arrow in the upper left corner of the LCD will scroll you to
the second screen. Pressing the UP arrow in the upper right corner of the LCD
will return you to the first screen.
•
•
Dial the extension number of the door phone.
You will be connected to the door phone and you can listen or have a con-
versation.
•
If an electric door lock release is installed, dial 13 to unlock the door.
•
This method gives you the option to transfer the call to another station if so
desired.
Scroll to the desired message.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the hand-
set or press the SPEAKER button.
•
•
Press MENU button for options (Send, Edit, and Remove)
EXECUTIVE/SECRETARY HOT LINE
SEND - Sends the message to the other end.
EDIT - Enter message from the dial pad.
REMOVE - Deletes message.Use remove option to delete the“Blank Message”
default message.
If programmed, an executive and a secretary can have a hot line between them.
When the executive station is in the DND mode, all of its calls will ring the secre-
tary station.
When an Executive/Secretary hotline is programmed to this keyset, the keyset
offers an additional screen option.This screen has options for setting the status of
the keyset user. This status update is viewable to EasySet users only.
From the BOSS station in DND:
•
•
Receive three short, double ring bursts, followed by the text message from the
Secretary.
Press ENTER to invoke REPLY option—OR—scroll to OK option and press
ENTER.
•
•
Either person can press the BOSS button to make a voice call to the other sta-
tion.
Using the hot line will override DND at the other station.This button will have
a flashing indication when the other station is in use.
•
•
If REPLY option is activated, the Select Message screen is displayed.
Scroll to the desired message and press ENTER. The message is sent to the
Secretary keyset display and the Secretary station has the option to reply, if so
desired.
To transfer a call to a Boss in DND:
•
•
Press the TRANSFER button followed by the BOSS button.
Wait for the BOSS to answer to announce the call and hang up to complete
the transfer—OR—hang up to complete a blind transfer after pressing the
BOSS button.
Sending a text message from the BOSS keyset to the Secretary keyset, from
the idle condition:
•
•
Press the EXE/SECR MSG button.
Press the NEXT button (if there are more than two Secretary stations assigned
to that BOSS station, all Secretary keysets will be displayed), in the case of mul-
tiple Secretary stations, scroll to the desired Secretary, press the soft key asso-
ciated with that Secretary and press NEXT button.
To send a text message to the Boss display:
•
•
Press the TRANSFER button followed by the EXE/SECR MSG soft button.
Scroll to the desired message and press ENTER (the BOSS station gets three
short ring bursts, followed by the message).
This method gives you the option to transfer the call to another station if so
desired.
Press the TRANSFER button again to be reconnected to the caller.
Take the necessary action (the BOSS cancels DND and transfer the call or take
a message)—OR—press the EXE/SECR MSG soft button, scroll to the desired
•
•
Scroll to the desired message and press the associated soft key or ENTER.
The message is sent.
•
Executive Divert:
•
•
•
From the BOSS keyset when the keyset rings, press the EXEC DIVERT button.
The call is forwarded to the Secretary station.
44
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Home Page
•
Pressing the EXEC DIVERT button, when the keyset is in idle status, will divert
all calls after, to the Secretary station. Pressing the EXEC DIVERT button again,
will cancel the divert function.
•
Press CANCEL to return to Main Config Menu—OR—press END to return to
idle screen.
MANUAL SIGNALLING
GROUP LISTENING
Use this feature when you want to send a brief 500ms ring burst to another sta-
tion, regardless of the status of your phone (on-hook, off-hook, handsfree, DND, or
ringing).
When you are engaged on a call and you are using the handset, you may want
other people to hear the distant party’s voice over the speaker:
•
Press the LISTEN button to turn on the speaker.The microphone is not in use,
so the distant party does not hear other parties present in your office.
Press LISTEN again to turn the speaker off and resume private conversation.
Repeat if necessary.
To send a signal to another station:
•
•
Press the Manual Signalling (MS) button.
You may press the MS button repeatedly to send multiple signals to the des-
ignated station.
•
•
NOTE: Depending on speaker volume and the acoustics of your office, it may be
advisable to turn the group listening feature off before hanging up.This will elim-
inate a momentary squeal.
NOTE: Your phone must have a Manual Signalling (MS) button with a station
number extender assigned to it.
OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE
ACCOUNT CODES
Keysets may receive a voice announcement while on another call. The calling sta-
tion must have an OHVA button. When you are in DND, you cannot receive OHVA
calls. The OHVA feature will work with intercom and transferred calls.
When equipped with optional equipment, your system will allow calls to be
charged to a specific account.
•
•
During any outside C.O. call, press the account (ACC) button.
Enter the 3 digit account code bin number when prompted, OR
If your button has an extender of 000 enter the account code (maximum 12
characters including ꢀ and #) and press ACC000 again, OR
If your button has an extender other than 000 (001~999) account code con-
tained in that bin will automatically be entered for your.
When you receive an OHVA and secure OHVA is ON, you will hear the announce-
ment in the handset receiver, if you are using the handset. If secure OHVA is OFF
then you will hear the announcement on the speaker, if you are talking on the
handset. If you are using the speakerphone the announcement will always be
heard through the speaker.
To make an off-hook voice announcement:
LOCKING YOUR KEYSET
•
•
•
•
•
Dial the extension number or press the DSS button.
When you receive a busy signal, press the OHVA button.
After the attention tone, begin speaking.
Finish the call by replacing the handset or pressing the ANS/RLS button.
Press the flashing CALL button on your keyset. This will place the original
party on hold and allow you to talk to the announcing party.
To return to your first party, press the button corresponding to your original
call. This will disconnect the OHVA call.
You can lock your keyset to control misuse of your phone while you are away.You
can unlock it when you return.Your default station passcode is 1234.
•
•
•
Press MENU button.
Scroll to CONFIG option. Press ENTER.
Scroll to LOCK option and press ENTER—OR—you may press 2 and immedi-
ately access option.
•
•
•
Enter the PASSWORD. Press ENTER.
Use Direction button to scroll LEFT/RIGHT to choose desired mode.
NOTES:
1. UNLOCK - No restrictions. User may complete internal and outside calls.
2. DIS. CALL ORG - Restricted to incoming calls only. No outside calls can be
made.
1. When you are voice announcing to a station close to you, use the handset to
avoid an echo effect.
2. You cannot off-hook voice announce to single line telephones.
3. LOCK ALL - No calls, incoming or outgoing allowed to or from the set.
•
Press ENTER.
46
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Home Page
OHVA BLOCK
CUSTOMIZING YOUR KEYSET
Your keyset can be programmed with an OHVA Block (BLOCK) button. Pressing
this button will prevent anyone from making an OHVA to you until you press the
button again and cancel the blocking.
AME PASSWORD
This feature allows people using the AME feature to enable password protection.
This will prevent unauthorized people from listening to your messages being left.
The passcode is the same as your station passcode. This feature only applies if
there is a SVM card installed in the system and your keyset has a programmed
AME button.
OHVA REJECT
Your keyset can be programmed with an OHVA Reject (REJECT) button. Pressing
this button while receiving an OHVA call will disconnect the voice announcing
party and return you to your original call.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Dial 101 to turn on AME PASSCODE or 100 to turn it off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
IN GROUP/OUT OF GROUP
If your keyset is assigned to a station ring group, you can remove your keyset from
the group and then put it back in.While you are out of the group, you can receive
calls to your extension number but not calls to the group number. If you have an
IN/OUT button with the group number assigned.
From the LCD:
•
•
•
Press MENU button.
•
•
Press the IN/OUT button. The button indicator will be lit steady when your
keyset is in the group.
Press the IN/OUT button again to exit the group and the indicator will go
blank. Repeat as necessary.
Scroll to CONFIGURATION option and press ENTER.
Scroll to STATION ON/OFF and press ENTER—OR—you may dial 0 and
immediately enter the option.
Scroll to AME password and press ENTER to change status.
Press CANCEL to return to the Main Option Page—OR—press END to return
to the idle screen.
•
•
If you do not have an IN/OUT button:
•
Dial the IN/OUT access code number ________________, then the group
number, then 0 to exit the group or 1 to enter the group.
AUTO CAMP-ON
This option allows intercom calls to be automatically camped on, if possible, when
a busy station is called.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the hand-
set or press SPEAKER button.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Press 081 to turn CAMP-ON on or 080 to turn it off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
The IN/OUT button can include an extender to indicate the specific group that
this button will affect. This means that if you are in multiple groups, you can de-
cide for which groups you will receive calls.
From the LCD:
•
•
•
Press MENU button.
Scroll to CONFIGURATION option and press ENTER.
Scroll to STATION ON/OFF and press ENTER—OR—you may dial 0 and
immediately enter the option.
•
•
Scroll to AUTO CAMP-ON and press ENTER to change status.
Press CANCEL to return to the Main Option Page—OR—press END to return
to the idle screen.
48
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Home Page
SET ANSWER MODE (INTERCOM)
SELECT RING TONE
You can receive internal calls in one of three modes (see Answering Intercom Calls
Each keyset user can select any one of eight ring frequencies.
under Intercom Calls for descriptions).
•
•
•
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 111.
Dial 1–8 or press the UP and DOWN keys to hear each tone.
When you hear the tone that you prefer, press TRANSFER to save it.
•
•
•
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 103.
Dial 0 for Ringing, 1 for Auto Answer or 2 for Voice Announce.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
NOTE: Specific lines or stations may be programmed to ring with a different
tone than what you have selected for your keyset.
From the LCD:
•
•
•
Press MENU button.
From the LCD:
Scroll to CONFIGURATION option and press ENTER.
Scroll to ANSWERING MODE and press ENTER—OR—you may dial 3 and
immediately enter the option.
Scroll RIGHT/LEFT to select desired station ring type setting.(Ring,Automatic,
Broadcast [Voice Announce]).
•
•
•
Press MENU button.
Scroll to VOLUME option and press ENTER.
Scroll to RING TYPE and press ENTER—OR—you may dial 1 and immediate-
ly enter the option.
•
•
•
•
Scroll to RIGHT/LEFT to choose tone and press ENTER at the desired tone.
Press CANCEL to return to the Main Option Page—OR—press END to return
to idle screen.
Press CANCEL to return to the Main Option Page—OR—press END to return
to idle screen.
NOTE: When your keyset is programmed for Auto Answer and you have Forward
No Answer (FNA) turned on, you must answer screened transfers by pressing the
CHANGE YOUR PASSCODE
From the factory, your station passcode is 0000.You can change your station pass-
code whenever you desire.
SET ANSWER MODE (CO)
•
•
•
•
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 101.
Dial your old passcode.
Dial a new passcode (must be four characters).You can use 0–9.
Redial the new passcode to verify. If successful, you will hear two beeps. Four
beeps indicate an incorrect code. Reenter the code again.
Press TRANSFER to store the new passcode.
Your incoming CO calls can be set to follow the intercom answer mode.
•
•
•
•
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Dial 15 to access AUTO ANS CO.
Press the VOLUME UP or DOWN key to change status.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
•
From the LCD:
AUTOMATIC HOLD
•
•
•
Press MENU button.
While on an outside call, pressing a line button, route button or a flashing CALL
button will automatically put your call on hold and connect you to the next call.
This feature can be turned on or off at your keyset.
Scroll to CONFIGURATION option and press ENTER.
Scroll to PASSWORD and press ENTER—OR—you may dial 1 and immediate-
ly enter the option.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Dial 001 to turn Automatic Hold on or 000 to turn it off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
•
•
•
•
Enter CURRENT PASSWORD, press ENTER.
Enter NEW PASSWORD and press ENTER.
Enter NEW PASSWORD again, for confirmation and press ENTER.
Press CANCEL to return to the Main Option Page—OR—press END to return
to idle screen.
From the LCD:
•
•
Press MENU button
Scroll to CONFIGURATION option and press ENTER.
50
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Home Page
•
Scroll to STATION ON/OFF and press ENTER—OR—you may dial 0 and
immediately enter the option.
•
Scroll to STATION ON/OFF and press ENTER—OR—you may dial 0 and
immediately enter the option.
•
•
Scroll to AUTO HOLD, press ENTER to change option status.
Press CANCEL to enter change and return to the Main Configuration Menu—
OR—press END to return to idle screen.
•
•
Scroll to HOT KEYPAD, press ENTER to change option status.
Press CANCEL to enter change and return to Main Configuration Menu—
OR—press END to return to idle screen.
NOTE: Intercom calls can be automatically put on hold by pressing TRANSFER.
KEY CONFIRMATION TONE
You can hear a short beep (confirmation tone) each time you press a button on the
dial pad. This tone can be turned on or off.
HEADSET OPERATION
Keyset users can switch between headset mode and handset mode. When using
headset mode, press the ANS/RLS button to answer and release calls.
•
•
•
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Dial 040 to turn tones off or 041 to turn tones on.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Dial 021 to use the headset or 020 to use the handset.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
REJOINING A PAGE
From the LCD:
This feature allows you to hear the remaining portion of an ongoing internal page
after you return your keyset to idle. To enable this feature:
•
•
•
Press MENU button.
Scroll to CONFIGURATION option and press ENTER.
Scroll to STATION ON/OFF and press ENTER—OR—you may dial 0 and
immediately enter the option.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Dial 051 to turn this feature on or 050 to turn it off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
•
•
Scroll to HEADSET USE and press ENTER to change option status.
Press CANCEL to enter change and return to Main Configuration Menu—
OR—press END to return to idle screen.
From the LCD:
•
•
•
Press MENU button.
Your keyset may be equipped with a Headset mode button. If it is so equipped
pressing this button while the button indicator is blank will cause the keyset to
enter headset mode and the button indicator to be lit solid to indicate this.
Pressing the button while the button indicator is lit solid will cause the keyset to
return to handset mode and the button indicator will go blank.
Scroll to CONFIGURATION OPTION and press ENTER.
Scroll to STATION ON/OFF and press ENTER—OR—you may dial 0 and
immediately enter the option.
Scroll to PAGE REJOIN, press ENTER to change option status.
Press CANCEL to enter change and return to the Main Configuration Menu—
OR—press END to return to idle screen.
•
•
HOT KEYPAD
RING PREFERENCE
On your phone system your keyset’s keypad can be made“live”or“hot”so that it is
not necessary to lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin
dialing. Calls can be made and features activated by simply dialing the C.O. line
number, trunk group access code, intercom number or feature access code.
This feature automatically answers ringing calls when you lift the handset or press
the ANS/RLS button.This method will always answer calls in the order they arrived
at your keyset.When you turn ring preference off, you must press the flashing but-
ton to answer a call, allowing you to answer calls in the order you choose.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Dial 031 to turn the Hot Keypad on or 030 to turn it off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Dial 061 to turn ring preference on or 060 to turn it off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
From the LCD:
•
•
Press MENU button.
Scroll to CONFIGURATION option, press ENTER.
52
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Home Page
From the LCD:
•
Press CANCEL to enter change and return to Main Configuration Menu—
OR—press END to return to idle screen.
•
•
•
Press MENU button.
Scroll to CONFIGURATION option, press ENTER.
Scroll to STATION ON/OFF and press ENTER—OR—you may dial 0 and imme-
diately enter the option.
Scroll to RING PREF, press ENTER to change option status.
Press CANCEL to enter change and return to Main Configuration Menu—
OR—press END to return to idle screen.
CALLER ID REVIEW ALL
This feature allows display keyset users to review Caller ID information for calls
sent to their stations.This list can be from ten to fifty calls in a first in,first out basis.
The list includes calls that you answered and calls that rang your station but that
you did not answer.When reviewing this list, you can press one button to dial the
person back. The system must be using LCR to dial the stored number.
•
•
AUTO ANSWER CO CALLS
•
•
•
With you handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Press 121 to turn CID REVIEW ALL on or 120 to turn it off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
This option will allow CO calls that directly ring your phone to auto answer.When
a CO call arrives at your station and this option set for ON your phone will sound
two beeps, the same as when a screened transfer is completed, and you will be
connected to the CO call. In order for this option to work the station must also be
programmed for auto answer (see Set Answer Mode).
From the LCD:
•
•
•
Press MENU button.
Scroll to CONFIGURATION option, press ENTER.
Scroll to STATION ON/OFF and press ENTER—OR—you may dial 0 and imme-
diately enter the option.
Scroll to CID REVIEW ALL, press ENTER to change option status.
Press CANCEL to enter change and return to Main Configuration Menu—
OR—press END to return to idle screen.
•
•
•
Press MENU button.
Scroll to CONFIGURATION option, press ENTER.
Scroll to STATION ON/OFF and press ENTER—OR—you may dial 0 and imme-
diately enter the option.
•
•
•
•
Scroll to AUTO ANS CO CALL, press ENTER to change option status.
Press CANCEL to enter change and return to Main Configuration Menu—
OR—press END to return to idle screen.
SECURE OHVA
NOTE: Outside lines must ring your station directly for the Auto Answer CO to
work. Lines ringing a station group will not cause your phone to Auto Answer the
call.
This option allows you to receive OHVA calls via the speaker while you are on the
handset.
•
•
•
With you handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Press 131 to turn AUTO CAMP-ON on or 130 to turn it off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
DISPLAY SPEED DIAL NAME
This option allows you to view the name associated with a speed dial number as
it is dialed.
From the LCD:
•
•
•
With you handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Press 111 to turn DISP SPDNAME on or 110 to turn it off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
•
Scroll to CONFIG and press ENTER—OR—you may press 0 and immediately
enter the option.
Scroll to AUTO CAMP-ON and press ENTER to change status.
Press CANCEL to return to option Main Screen.
Press the MENU button—or press the END to return to idle screen.
•
•
•
From the LCD:
•
•
•
Press MENU button.
Scroll to CONFIGURATION option, press ENTER.
Scroll to STATION ON/OFF and press ENTER—OR—you may dial 0 and imme-
diately enter the option.
•
Scroll to DISP SPDNAME, press ENTER to change option status.
54
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Home Page
DIAL BY NAME
DISPLAY FEATURES
Each station or speed dial number can have an associated directory name. A sta-
tion or speed dial number can be selected by scrolling alphabetically through a
directory name list. This on-line “phone book” allows the user to look up and dial
any station or speed dial number in seconds.
DIRECTORY INFORMATION
An 11 character directory name can be assigned to each extension number.
Display keyset users can view the name of the called or calling station before an-
swering.
•
•
•
Press MENU button
Scroll to P-BOOK option, press ENTER.
Scroll to SEARCH and press ENTER—OR—you may dial 1 and immediately
enter the option.
Each outside line can have an 11 character directory name. Incoming calls can be
easily identified and answered with different greetings.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Scroll to BY NAME, press ENTER.
Enter NAME to search for and press ENTER.
Name is displayed, press ENTER, number is displayed.
Press SEND button to automatically call by number.
Press MENU button for more options.
Press CANCEL to enter change and return to Main Configuration Menu—
OR—press END to return to idle screen.
Outside and internal calls ringing to a station group will display [CALL FOR xxx]
where xxx is the station group number.This allows you to answer calls directed to
you differently than calls directed to your group.
CALL LOG
The system can log both incoming and outgoing calls placed from or to your tele-
phone. You must have a LOG button programmed on your keyset and assigned a
review list.
You can also use the Dial by Name feature by following these steps:
•
•
Press the DIR button (DIRECTORY).
Select the directory you wish to use:PERS (personal speed dial numbers), SYS
(system speed dial numbers) or STN (station names).
Dial the button on the keypad that corresponds to the first letter of the name
you wish to search for.
Each IN and OUT list can be up to 50 numbers maximum. They are assigned in
blocks of 10 each.
•
•
•
•
Press the LOG key.
Press either the IN or OUT key.
•
•
Use the UP and DOWN arrows to scroll through the names.
Press the DIAL soft key to dial the number.
View the first IN/OUT telephone number. At this point you may select one of
the three options related to this number or use the UP/DOWN keys to scroll
through your list of calls.
Press the CLEAR button to erase this number from the list.
Press the NND key repeatedly to view the Name, Number, or Date associated
with this call.
NOTE: A DIR button can have an extender to take you directly to one of the above
lists (PERS, SYS, or STN).
•
•
CALL PROGRESS DISPLAYS
During everyday call handling, your keyset display will provide information that is
helpful and in some cases invaluable. Displays like [CALL FROM 203], [TRANSFER
TO 202], [701: RINGING], [TRANSFER FM 203], [708 busy], [Camp on to 204], [Recall
from 204], [Call for 501], [message frm 204] and [FWD ALL to 204] keep you in-
formed of what is happening and where you are. In some conditions you are
prompted to take an action and in other cases you receive directory information.
•
Press the DIAL key to call this number.
These options are the same for the incoming or outgoing call logs.
56
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Home Page
DISPLAY NUMBER DIALED
VIEWING MESSAGE INDICATIONS
Display keysets begin showing digits as they are dialed. They will stay in the dis-
play until the call duration timer comes on automatically or the TIMER button is
pressed. If the call duration timer is not used, the number dialed will be displayed
until the call is released, transferred or put on hold.
You can view all of your message indications before you return them:
•
With the handset on-hook, press the MESSAGE button with the flashing indi-
cator.
•
•
The first station that left a message indication will be displayed.
Press the UP and DOWN arrows to scroll through the stations that left mes-
sage indications. Use the soft keys to reply, clear or advance to the next mes-
sage.
CALL DURATION TIMER
The system can be set to automatically time outside calls. A few seconds after you
dial a telephone number, the timer appears in the display. It appears immediately
for incoming calls. The call timer continues for the duration of the call. Call dura-
tion times are displayed in minutes and seconds. If a call lasts longer than 60 min-
utes, the timer restarts.
•
Press the END button to return your keyset to the idle condition.
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NAMES
Each personal speed dial number can have an 11 character name assigned to it.
This name is used to select the speed dial bin when you are dialing by directory.
You can press the TIMER button to manually begin timing a call. Press it again to
stop timing. If you press it while the automatic timer is on, the call duration time
is restarted.
•
•
•
•
•
Press TRANSFER and then dial 106.
Dial the speed dial bin number 00–49.
Write your message using the procedure described in Alarm Reminder.
Press the TRANSFER key to store the speed dial name.
Repeat for each speed dial bin if necessary.
AUTO TIMER
Display keyset users may have the timer automatically start when they answer
incoming calls or after a short delay on an outgoing call.
See Programming Personal Speed Dial Numbers Section.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Dial 011 to turn the auto timer on or 010 to turn it off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
STATION NAMES
See Application Program Menus—My Phone.
From the LCD:
•
•
•
Press MENU button.
MANAGING KEY ASSIGNMENTS
Scroll to CONFIGURATION option, press ENTER.
Scroll to STATION ON/OFF and press ENTER—OR—you may dial 0 and
immediately enter the option.
You can view your key assignments and add extenders to some of your program-
mable keys for easy one touch operation of frequently used features.
•
•
•
Scroll to AUTO TIMER, press ENTER.
Press ENTER to change option status.
Press CANCEL to enter change and return to Main Configuration Menu—
OR—press END to return to idle screen.
•
•
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 107.
Use the VOLUME buttons to scroll through all of your programmable buttons
OR press the programmable button to which you want to add the extender.
When you reach a key listed below, dial the corresponding extender.
Press TRANSFER to store and exit programming.
•
•
TIMER FUNCTION
Please refer to the Enhanced Display Programming Section provided by your instal-
lation company when requested for a complete list of descriptions and extenders
for any keys you may have programmed on your keyset.
Display keyset users may use this feature as a simple stopwatch.
•
•
•
•
When the keyset is idle, press the TIMER button to start timing.
Press the TIMER button again to stop timing.
Read the elapsed time in the display.
NOTE: Confirm that the cursor is placed correctly before you enter the extender.
Lift the handset and replace it. The display will return to date and time.
58
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
STATION 205: JOHN
Home Page
STATION 201: LINDA
received a call on line 702
LCR WITH CLEAR
is talking on line 701
When you are making outside call using LCR and dial an incorrect digit, you can
press the CLEAR soft key to reenter the telephone number. You do not need to
redial 9 to reaccess LCR.
Talking on line 702
702:
01:15
701:
05:25
CONF PAGE MUTE
BACKSPACE WITH LCR
Press TRANSFER
If you misdial while using LCR, you can delete digits shown in the display by press-
ing the BACKSPACE soft key as many times as necessary.
Transfer:
RETURN
TEXT MESSAGING
Dial 205
See also MESSAGE option in the Application Program Menus section.
205:busy
This feature allows two digital keyset users to respond to each other with prepro-
grammed messages. After receiving an Off Hook Voice Announcement or Station
Camp-On, you may respond with a text message while continuing to talk and lis-
ten to your outside party. The other station can view this message and take the
appropriate action or respond back with another text message.
OHVA
CAMP ON
Ð
OHVA to 205
OHVA from 201
TMSG
REJECT
There are 1000 messages assignable to stations in blocks of 10, stored in system
memory that can be sent to another display keyset. Only the display keysets that
are allowed in system programming (MMC 611) will receive the TEXT MESSAGE
soft key in the display and use this feature.
Wait for reply
GIVE THE CALL
TMSG:01
SEND
Familiarization with the two digit message numbers you will use the most will
make this procedure quick and easy. However if you do not know them, use the
UP/DOWN button to scroll to the desired message, then press SEND.
Dial 03 or press Ï twice
ASK THEM TO HOLD
TMSG:03
SEND
The basics steps in text messaging are:
Ð
1. Press TEXT MESSAGE soft key to begin text messaging.
2. Dial the 2 digit number for the desired message.
3. Confirm this is the intended message then press SEND.
4. Wait for a reply from the other station (steps 1, 2 & 3)
5. When any station presses EXIT the displays at both stations return to their
previous call progress condition.
ASK THEM TO HOLD
Wait for reply
TMSG
EXIT
Ð
702:
01:45
701:
05:55
CONF PAGE MUTE
CONF PAGE MUTE
At all times after step 1 you can talk and listen to your caller while repeating steps
2.
The example on the following page will better demonstrate how to use Text
Messaging. In this example station 201 is making an off hook voice announce-
ment to station 205 who after hearing the announcement will respond with a text
message.
60
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Home Page
REDIALING A SAVED CALLER ID NUMBER
CALLER ID
To redial a number that has been saved, press the SNR button or dial 17.
NOTES:
SELECTING YOUR CALLER ID DISPLAY
1. Your telephone system must be LCR correctly programmed to redial the
saved number.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin.
You can decide if you want to see the Caller ID name or Caller ID number in the
display.Regardless of which one is selected, you can press the NND button to view
the other pieces of Caller ID information. To select the type of Caller ID informa-
tion you wish to view first.
STORING A CALLER ID NUMBER
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 119.
Dial 0 for CID options, 1 for ANI options, or 2 for CLI options.
Dial 0 if you do not wish to view CID information, 1 to view the NUMBER first
or 2 to view the NAME first.
At any time during an incoming call that provides CID information, you may save
the CID number as a speed dial number in your personal speed dial list.To store a
Caller ID number in a personal speed dial bin:
•
Press TRANSFER to exit and store your selection.
•
Press the STORE button. The system displays the speed dial bin in which the
number was stored—OR—press the CID button and then press the SCROLL
button.
Press the STORE soft key.
The system displays the speed dial bin in which the number was stored.
From the LCD:
•
•
•
Press the MENU button.
•
•
Scroll to CONFIGURATION option, press ENTER.
Scroll to CID DISPLAY and press ENTER—OR—you may dial 6 and immedi-
ately enter the option.
Scroll LEFT/RIGHT to desired display option.
Press CANCEL to enter change and return to Main Configuration Menu—
OR—press END to return to idle screen.
NOTE: Your telephone system must have LCR correctly programmed to redial the
saved number. If LCR is not being used on your system, you will not be allowed to
STORE CID numbers.
•
•
INQUIRE CALLER ID PARK/HOLD INFO
VIEWING THE NEXT CALLER ID CALL
If you are informed that an incoming call is on hold or has been parked for you,
you may view the Caller ID information before you retrieve the call.This may influ-
ence how you choose to handle the call.
In the event that you have a call waiting or a camped-on call at your keyset, you
can press the NEXT button to display the Caller ID information associated with
the call in queue at you keyset. Either the CID name or CID number will show in
the display depending on you Name/Number selection.
From an idle keyset:
•
Press the INQUIRE button—OR—press the CID button and then the
INQUIRE soft key.
Dial the trunk number.
You may now answer the call by pressing the ANS button—OR—you may
use NND to view more information about this call—OR—you can return to
the idle condition by pressing IGNORE.
To view Caller ID information for calls that have been camped-on to your keyset,
press the NEXT button.
•
•
SAVING THE CALLER ID NUMBER
At any time during an incoming call that provides CID information, you may press
the SAVE button to save the CID number. The system must be using LCR to dial
the saved number.
If you are on a call:
•
Press the INQUIRE button.Your existing call will go on hold—OR—press the
CID button and then the INQUIRE soft key to place the first call on hold.
62
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Home Page
•
•
Dial the trunk number.
You may now answer the call by pressing the ANS button—OR—you may
use NND to view more information about this call—OR—you can return to
the idle condition by pressing IGNORE.
APPLICATION PROGRAM MENUS
Much of the call processing of the ITP 5012L can be accomplished by using the
various feature/function screens on the LCD. Below are instructions for additional
call processing and special applications that can be accomplished via the LCD
programming. These screens, features and functions can be accessed by pressing
the MENU button. Follow the below user information to utilize these features and
functions.
NOTES:
1. If you are on an intercom call or you have Automatic Hold turned off, you
must finish the existing call or place it on hold before inquiring.
2. If you inquire about an outgoing call, you will receive a [call no longer avail-
able] display.
After pressing the MENU button,
use the direction button to high-
light desired menu icon. For multi-
ple screen options, the UP/DOWN
arrows at the top left and right
sides of the LCD may be used to
scroll on a per page basis. Press
ENTER to access that menu.To nav-
igate within the menu, you may
scroll to the desired option/func-
tion, dial the associated option
function number or press the asso-
REVIEWING PAST CALLER ID CALLS
This feature allows you to review CID information for calls sent to your keyset.This
list can contain 10–50 calls in a last-in,first-out basis.The list includes calls that you
answered and calls that rang your keyset but that you did not answer. When
reviewing this list, you can press one button to dial the person back. The system
must be using LCR to dial the stored number.To access the CID information stored
in your REVIEW list:
•
Press the REVIEW button—OR—press the CID button and then press the
REVIEW soft key.
•
•
If you have entries in your review list, the most recent call will be shown first.
You can now CLEAR this entry—OR—use NND to view more information
about this call, OR
Application Program Main Menu Screen
ciated select button on either side
of the display.
Press DIAL to call this person back—OR—press SCROLL and then press
STORE to save this number in a personal speed dial bin.
Press END button to exit programming.
NOTES:
1. Each keyset defaults with ten review bins. Please see your system administra-
tor to determine the number of bins assigned to your keyset.
bers from the review list or to STORE entries from the review list.
PHONEBOOK
Refer to Speed Dialing and Programming Section.
E-DIARY
1. WAKE UP CALL: Set Wake Up call for desired duration (Everyday, Monday-
Saturday, Monday-Friday). Using the direction button scroll UP/DOWN to the
desired option and LEFT/RIGHT to scroll to desired option setting.
•
•
•
•
Enter TIME via dial pad in 24-hour format.
Set RING TONE via direction button (LEFT/RIGHT) Each tone is heard.
Set REPEAT DURATION via direction button.
Press ENTER when finished.
2. ALARM: See Alarm Reminder Programming Section.
64
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Home Page
3. DAILY PLANNER: See Alarm Reminder Programming Section.
•
Return calls by highlighting the desired phone/station number and press
the SEND button.
4. MEMO PAD: Self memo feature. Allows you to set text message notes. Up to
5 memos may be stored.
TEXTMSG. SETUP: Set incoming text message signal for specific func-
tionality. Scroll DOWN to desired option, scroll LEFT/RIGHT to desired
option setting.
INDIVIDUAL INTERVAL: Sets notification for Once, Every Two Minutes,
No Tone.
•
•
•
Add NEW MEMO:Type in memo on keypad, press ENTER.
Press MENU button to change fonts or add characters.
SEARCH displays all memos saved and REMOVE ALL deletes all memos.
INDIVIDUAL TONE: Sets incoming notifications signal.
SHOW CONTENTS: Sets display option of received message. (Save - On,
Clear - Off)
5. CALCULATOR
•
•
Enter FIRST NUMBER, press SOFT KEY associated with the proper oper-
ation.
Enter SECOND NUMBER and press ENTER to display answer.
2. SENT: Used to store and view text messages sent from the station.
WRITE MESSAGE :
6. WORLD TIME: Displays times throughout the world.
Use direction button, LEFT/RIGHT to view desired time zone.
•
•
•
Write NEW MESSAGE, enter STATION NUMBER to send message to.
Scroll DOWN, enter MESSAGE via dial pad.
Press ENTER.
•
7. D-DAY PLUS: Scheduling feature that allows the user to view the time left
until an event, or time since event occurred. Use to monitor deadlines, sched-
ules, etc.
INVOKE MESSAGE : Allows saved messages in Draft option for future deliv-
ery.
•
•
•
Enter DATE, FREQUENCY and MEMO, press ENTER.
When entering Memo, press MENU to change fonts or add characters.
Enter Base Date and number of days before or after to begin reminder.
•
•
Press ENTER, displays all saved messages.
Press MENU for message options (Add - New message to list, Modify - a
current message in the list, Send - selected message, Delete - selected
message.)
8. UNIT CONVERT: Weights and Measures conversion application. Allows you
to convert units of weights and measures into other units.
3. DRAFT: Allows creating and storage of messages for future delivery, or as
reminders. You can view stored messages, Search through stored messages,
Remove all stored messages.
•
Choose desired function (LENGTH, WEIGHT, AREA, VOLUME,
TEMPERATURE), press ENTER.
•
•
•
•
Scroll LEFT/RIGHT to select base unit.
•
NEW MESSAGE: Use keypad to add new message to list, for future deliv-
ery.
SEARCH MESSAGE: Displays all messages in list.
RM, ALL MESSAGE: Deletes all messages in the list.
Scroll DOWN and ENTER VALUE to be converted.
Scroll DOWN, select CONVERSION UNIT.
Press ENTER to display answer.
•
•
MESSAGE
VOLUME
1. RECEIVED: View received text message information. (Station number, text
message, time/date) and set notification of messages received. A maximum
of 10 messages may be stored.
Used to set volume levels of the various functions of the keyset. Scroll left/right to
select desired option setting. When setting Ring Type and Ringer volume, each
tone level will be heard as you scroll through them.
•
•
MSG. CHARGE: Number of messages saved, press ENTER to view mes-
sages.
Press MENU button to display further options.
1. Ring Type: Assigns ringer tone to station. (8 tone options)
2. Ringer: Sets ringer volume level. (8 volume levels)
3. Offhook: Sets off hook ringer volume level. (8 volume levels)
66
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Home Page
4. Handset : Sets handset receive volume level. (8 volume levels)
5. Speaker: Sets station speaker volume level. (16 volume levels
6. Broadcast: Voice Announce feature volume. (16 volume levels)
plete the call, or overlap - direct out dial)
•
•
•
Scroll to or dial 9, press ENTER.
Scroll LEFT/RIGHT to select desired display option.
Press ENTER, display confirms save.
CALL FORWARD
See Transferring Calls Section, Forwarding Calls.
0. STATION ON/OFF: Turn various features/functions on/off in the keyset.
CONFIGURATION
These features are:
1. PASSWORD: See Customizing Your Keyset Section, Change your Passcode.
AUTO HOLD: When on an outside call, pressing a line button, route button or
flashing CALL button will automatically put your call on hold and connect
you to the next call.
2. LOCK: Station Lock programming. See Convenience Feature Section, Locking
Your keyset.
AUTO TIMER: Timer in LCD that monitors call duration.
HEADSET USE: Switches between headset and handset use.
HOT KEYPAD: Allows for dialing without lifting handset first.
3. ANSWERING MODE: See Customizing Your Keyset Section, Station Answering
Mode Programming.
4. BOSS ANSWERING: Allows setting of ring type for Bosses station, from
PAGE REJOIN: Allows remaining portion of internal page to be played
through keyset speaker, after handset is replaced.
Secretary station.
RING PREF: Allows for automatically answering of calls when handset is lift-
ed. (Does not require button press)
•
•
Scroll to or dial 4, press ENTER.
Scroll LEFT/RIGHT to select desired Bosses RING TYPE setting. (Ring,
Automatic, Broadcast(voice announce).
AME PASSWORD: Allows password protection of AME feature on set. This
•
Press ENTER, display confirms save.
prevents unauthorized listening to messages being left.
AUTO CAMPON: Allows intercom calls to be automatically camped on to,
when a busy station is called.
5. LANGUAGE: Select station display language programming.
•
•
•
Scroll to or dial 5, press ENTER.
Scroll LEFT/RIGHT to select desired display language.
Press ENTER, display confirms save.
DIS SPDNAME: Allows the speed dial associated name to be displayed while
number is being dialed.
SECURE OHVA: Allows OHVA calls to be received by station in conversation
on handset.
6. CID DISPLAY: Select station incoming CID information display.
CALL COST DISP: Display in LCD that monitors call cost, for duration of call.
•
•
•
Scroll to or dial 6, press ENTER.
Scroll LEFT/RIGHT to select desired display option.
Press ENTER, display confirms save.
CID REVIEW ALL: Allows user to review Caller ID information for calls sent to
the station.The list is programming dependent and operates on a first in first
out basis. Calls to displayed numbers can be returned with a single button
press, provided LCR is being used.
7. ABSENT MESSAGE: See Paging and Messaging Section.
STOP CID DISPLAY: Discontinues CID information after call is answered.
8. INTERNAL CALL: Select incoming information display from internal caller.
AUTO ANS CO CALL: Allows CO calls to be auto answered on incoming calls.
(Number or Name)
•
•
•
Scroll to or dial 0, press ENTER.
Scroll to desired feature, press ENTER to change option status.
Press CANCEL to enter change and return to main Configuration menu.
•
•
•
Scroll to or dial 8, press ENTER.
Scroll LEFT/RIGHT to select desired display option.
Press ENTER, display confirms save.
68
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Home Page
MY PHONE
STATUS SCREEN OF THE LCD PANEL
Used to personalize your keyset.
1. SELECT BG: Select LCD background scenery. (Calendar, Seasons)
•
•
•
Scroll to or dial 1, press ENTER.
Scroll UP/DOWN to desired background.
Press ENTER, saves selection and returns to My-Phone option screen.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Executive-Secretary: Station is programmed for Executive-Secretary feature.
Forward: Call Forwarding is set to station.
Answer Mode: Station is set for Auto Answer or Voice Announce mode.
Do Not Disturb: Station is set for Do Not Disturb.
2. MY NAME: Allows an 11character name to be assigned to the keyset. This
information is sent to internal display keysets on incoming and outgoing
calls.
Headset: Station is set for Headset mode operation.
Group Listen: Station has enabled Group Listen feature.
Mute: Station has enabled Mute feature.
•
•
Press TRANSFER and then dial 104.
Enter the 11 character name using the procedure described in Alarm Re-
minder.
Alarm: Station has set an Alarm Reminder.
Message: Station has received a message from another station.
Network Connection: Indicates Network Connection is operational.
•
Press TRANSFER to store the name.
From the LCD:
•
•
Scroll to or dial 2, press ENTER.
Enter name. (Press MENU button to change form upper to lower case,
etc.)
•
Press ENTER, display confirms save.
3. NETWORK INFO: View IP information for the keyphone.(IP Address,NetMask,
Gateway, Server IP, MAC Address).
4. STATUS INFO: Status Info - Displays status of various station features.
•
•
•
Scroll to or dial 4, press ENTER.
Displays status of station forwarding. Absent message, DND and Lock.
Press CANCEL to return to MY-Phone Main Menu.
5. ENBLOCK TIMEOUT: When enblock dialing used, this is the screen clear time,
if call is not sent. (SEND button not pressed)
•
•
•
Scroll to or dial 5 press ENTER.
Scroll LEFT/RIGHT to desired time option.
Press ENTER, display confirms save.
70
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Home Page
ACCESSING YOUR MAILBOX
[Also known as Subscriber Services Menu]
SVMi-8/SVMi-16E
This section describes how to setup and use the various features available to a
Subscriber. A Subscriber is a person that has been authorized access to the vari-
ous features and services available in the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E. Please review this sec-
tion carefully before you use your Authorized Features and Services, known as
Subscriber Services.
Inside Callers [Subscriber logging in from their Desk]
•
Dial the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E access number or press the key assigned to ring
SVMi-8/SVMi-16E [VMMSG].
•
Enter your personal password when prompted (the default password is
0000).
Voice Mail is one of the Subscriber Services available. Your voice mail box has the
capability of storing private messages, and offers a number of options for sending
or redirecting messages as well as provides several ways to notify you of new mes-
sages.
Outside Callers [Subscribers calling from Cell Phones or outside of the
office environment]
•
•
•
Dial the phone number that will be answered by the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E. The
main greeting will answer.
At the main greeting dial [#] plus your Subscriber (or mailbox) number
(Subscriber and Mailbox numbers will usually match your extension number).
Enter your personal password when prompted (the default password is
0000).
Another very common Subscriber Service is Access Manager.This allows you con-
trol over when and where you receive your calls as well as what to speak to your
callers in the event you are unable to speak to them directly. The ‘events’ are
referred to as “Call Conditions”. No-Answer, Busy, and Blocked are the most com-
monly used Call Conditions.
Access your Subscriber Services (or Mailbox) from a Station
other than your Own (or checking a mailbox associated with a
different station)
This guide can be used by Subscribers from within the office or from telephones
outside the office. The basic operation is the same, but the access method will be
different. See the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E Subscriber Services Menu Diagram for more
details.
•
Press the [VMMSG] key or dial the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E group number.You will
be prompted to enter a password.
Note that some features and prompts detailed here may not be available to all
Subscribers. See your System Administrator if you have questions about feature
availability.
•
•
Press [ꢀ]. This will take you to the Main Auto Attendant Menu.
Press [#] plus the Subscriber number of your choice.You will be prompted to
enter you password.
At this point the inside and outside callers follow the same instructions. You will
hear a message stating the number of messages left in your mailbox.You will then
hear the Subscriber Services Menu with the following options:
1
2
3
4
5
6
#
ꢀ
Listen to New Messages - See Listening to your Message.
Record and Send Message - See Sending Messages.
Review Saved Messages - See Listening to your Message.
Access Manager - See Access Manager.
Personal Greetings - See Personal Greetings.
Mailbox Administration - See Mailbox Administration.
Personal Services - See Personal Services.
Return to Main Menu.
72
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Home Page
SVMi-8/SVMi-16E Subscriber Services Menu
Group New
Messages
Group Saved
Messages
Listen to New Review Saved
Messages
Record & Send
Messages
Access
Manager
Personal
Greetings
Mailbox
Administration
Personal
Services
Pause, Resume
Play Menu
Options
Exit
Messages
11
33
1
3
2
4
5
6
#
8
0
*
Assign and/or Edit
Primary Greeting
Change
Message Alert
Review
Workload
Group Messages Menu
Listen Menu
Record Menu
Follow Me
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
0
1
Group
Urgent Messages
Play
Message
For a Directory
of Subscribers
Assign and/or Edit
Busy Greeting
Change
Pager Notification
Edit Stored
Telephone Numbers
Block All Calls
Call forwarding
Call Screening
Find Me
1
1
11
2
#
3
4
5
6
7
8
#
0
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
2
3
5
7
8
9
#
0
Play Previous
Message
To Create a
Reminder
Group
Callback Requests
Assign and/or Edit
Blocking Greeting
Review Deleted
Messages
Change
Weekly Schedule
Change
Password
##
2
3
4
5
8
9
#
0
1
2
Save
Message
Group
Reminders
Assign and/or Edit
Night Greeting
Review Undelivered
Messages
Place a
Direct Call
Record
Name
"Enter the Recipient's Number"
Discard
Message
Review
Recording
3
Group
Private Messages
1
Assign and/or Edit
Screened Greeting
Auto Play
New Messages
Enter Directory
Name
3
3
Reply to Sender
4
Stop, Append to
Recording
2
Group
Fax Only Messages
Edit Only
Personal Greetings
Auto Play Message
Information
Extended
Prompting
Personal
Administration
4
8
0
Place
Call to Sender
5
Discard Recording
and Rerecord
3
Auto Set
Night Intercept
Edit Only
Mailbox Greeting
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
Deliver Copy
of Fax Message
55
6
Set
Delivery Options
4
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
R
e
c
o
r
d
an
d
S
e
nd
Subscriber
Administration
Play
Menu Options
Forward a
Copy of Message
Broadcast Message
Specify
Future Delivery
5
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
Play
Access Coverage
Play
Menu Options
Play
Menu Options
Record
a Reminder
Cancel, Return
Rewind
5 Seconds
7
t
o
S
u
b
s
c
r
i
be
r
S
ervices
SEND Message,
Then Copy
*
6
Change
Playback Volume
Group
A Specific Sender
Play
Menu Options
Cancel, Return
t
to Subscriber Services
Cancel, Return
Play
Menu Options
77
8
t
o S cr r Services
u
b
s
i
b
e
Rewind
5 Seconds
*
*
7
Pause, Resume
Message Playback
Play
Message Inventory
Cancel, Return
Cancel, Return
r Services
e
o
sc
Sub riber Services
t
o
S
u
b
s
c
ri
b
Change
Playback Volume
*
*
77
Fast Forward
5 Seconds
9
Play
Menu Options
Pause, Resume
Record/Playback
8
Change
Playback Speed
99
#
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
t
Fast Forward
5 Seconds
9
Skip to
Next Message
*
Change
Playback Speed
99
Scan Messages
##
0
SEND Message,
Then Exit Record
Play
Menu Options
#
Play
Menu Options
Play Message
Information
0
00
C
S
a
n
u
ce
b
l
s
,
R
e
t
e
u
r
n
Ca
n
c
e
l
,
R
e
t
u
r
n
Subscriber Services
t
o
c
ib
r Services
t
*
*
NOTE: All options shown MAY NOT be authorized. If an option is not available
please speak to your system administrator.
74
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Home Page
PLAY MENU OPTIONS
0
ꢀ
#
GETTING STARTED
EXIT TO AUTO ATTENDANT
PERSONAL SERVICES
Using your new SVMi-8/SVMi-16E Subscriber Services is as simple as following a
few simple spoken instructions. First time users should read this section as a tuto-
rial.You should start with the following steps:
•
Access your Subscriber Services Menu - You already know how to do this.
1 or 3
From the Subscriber Services Menu:
LISTENING TO OLD OR NEW MESSAGES
•
•
•
•
•
Record a Primary/No-Answer Personal Greeting. Dial [5][1].
Record a Mailbox Greeting. Dial [5][7].
Change your access code (Password). Dial [#][7][1].
Record your name. Dial [#][7][2].
1
Play / replay the message you just heard.
Play the previous message.
11
2
Enter your directory name. Dial [#][7][3].
Save the message you just heard and listen to the next message.
Delete the message you just heard and listen to the next message.
Reply to the message.
3
After you have completed the steps above your Subscriber Services are set up and
ready to use.
4
This will allow you to leave a message in the mailbox of the sender (if the
sender has a mailbox on this system).
LISTEN TO YOUR MESSAGES
5
Return the call directly to the telephone number that left the message.
If there are new messages in your mailbox your [VMMSG] key will be lit. Call the
SVMi-8/SVMi-16E by pressing this key, and when prompted enter your password.
You will then be at the Subscriber Services Menu. Select [1] to listen to new mes-
sages or [3] to listen to saved messages.
This will work for internal and external callers, but Caller ID service is need-
ed to use this feature on an outside call.
55
Deliver a fax copy.
This will allow you to receive attached faxmail document(s). Faxmail docu-
ments can be delivered to any fax machine of your choice as long as out
calling is authorized. You can also have faxmail messages automatically
delivered to the fax machine of your choice.
Note:After you enter your password, if“Autoplay of New Messages”is enabled and
you have new messages the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E will begin to play them automati-
cally. A subscriber can control this feature. From the Subscriber Services Menu [6]
[5] toggles “Autoplay of New Messages” ON/OFF.
6
Forward the message and saves a copy.
SUBSCRIBER SERVICES MENU
The subscriber can be selected by dialing their mailbox number (nnn),
using the directory service (#) or you may also add comments and leave it
as a memo to yourself (##).
The following is a list of all the options available in the Subscriber Main Menu.
1
LISTENING TO NEW MESSAGES
GROUP NEW MESSAGES
RECORD AND SEND A MESSAGE
LISTENING TO OLD MESSAGES
GROUP OLD MESSAGES
ACCESS MANAGER
The Send and Copy Service (option 6) allows a user to send copies of a mes-
sage to multiple recipients easily. A different introduction message may be
left for each recipient.
11
2
7
Rewind the message 5 seconds.
3
77
Change playback volume of the recording.
33
4
There are two levels of volume during playback. Dialing this code will tog-
gle between the two levels.
5
PERSONAL GREETINGS
8
9
Pause or resume during message playback.
Fast forward the message 5 seconds.
6
MAILBOX ADMINISTRATION
PAUSE / RESUME
8
76
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Home Page
99
0
Change playback speed of the recording.
b) Record your message at the tone. After recording the message, you will hear
the Send Menu with the following functions:
There are two levels of speed during playback. Dialing this code will toggle
between the two speeds.
1
2
3
4
5
6
#
Review
Continue Recording
Discard and Re-Record
Set Message Attributes (Delivery Options)
Schedule Future Delivery
Play options.
Pressing this key will play all the menu options available to you from this
point.
00
#
Hear the time and date, and sender's information of the message you just
heard. Sender information is not available on outside calls.
Save and Send then Send a Copy to Someone Else
Save and Send the Recording
Move to the next message. This does not Save or Discard the current mes-
sage - it is retained as new.
Setting Message Attributes
##
Scan. Plays first 7 seconds of a message then skips to next message. This is
similar to the scan button on a radio. It will allow you to find a specific mes-
sage quickly. To stop scanning press [1].
If after recording a message you select [4] you can set up any combination of the
following delivery options:
1
2
3
4
5
ꢀ
Urgent Delivery
Return Receipt Requested
Request a Call Back
Private Delivery
Reply Required
Exit
ꢀ
Cancel and return to previous menu.
11 or 33
GROUP NEW OR OLD MESSAGES
Scheduling Future Delivery
Messages can be grouped as either Reminders, press [3] or Messages from a spe-
cific sender, press [9].
If after recording a message you select [5] to schedule future delivery, you will be
able to set message attributes and set this message as:
Additionally you can press [#] and hear a summary of your mailbox contents:
#
1
2
3
4
5
ꢀ
Immediate Delivery
Next Few Hours
End of Current Business Day (based on your Availability Schedule)
Beginning of Next Business Day (based on your Availability Schedule)
A Coming Day of the Week
Specific Day / Time
Exit
a) Number of messages
b) Number of reminders
c) Number of urgent messages
d) Number of messages needing a callback
e) Number of private messages
f) Number of fax messages
2
4
RECORD AND SEND A MESSAGE
ACCESS MANAGER
This option is used to send a message to another subscriber.The steps are simple:
The Access Manager allows the subscriber to set a number of options for when,
where and how, and/or if the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E contacts you when a caller dials
your extension number. All of the options are toggled on/off based on their cur-
rent status when you access them.
a) Enter the recipient’s mailbox number, or if this is not known enter [#] to use
the system directory.
78
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Home Page
Note: ALL Access Manager options MUST be individually allowed by the System
Administrator for each Subscriber. They are:
then play your primary, No Answer greeting during the day (when you are
available) and will NOT ring your extension but simply play your Night greet-
ing during the night (when you are not available).
1
Follow Me
Note: This does NOT use the Day and Night schedules of the phone system. It
Allows the subscriber to enter an alternate location and set how long the new
destination (Designated Location) will be active. This number may be an
internal or external number. This is useful if you are frequently traveling or
changing the number where you can be reached.
is solely controlled by the Subscriber’s Availability Schedule.
8
ꢀ
0
#
Pause / Resume
Exit from Access Manager
Play All Options
When Follow Me is activated, the transfer will be supervised and confirmed.
This means that if the call is not answered or if rejected by the Subscriber at
the designated location it will be recalled to the Subscriber’s mailbox.
Play Access Coverage
This feature is useful for finding out how you current access settings are set.
It will also tell you what greetings will play under each of the call conditions
you have setup.
3
4
Call Blocking
When this feature is active, callers will not be transferred to your extension,
they will hear your 'blocked' greeting (if recorded) and will go directly to your
mailbox if they do not select any or are not offered any other options.
5
Call Forwarding
Unlike Follow Me where the subscriber wants to take their calls at an alter-
nate location this feature allows the subscriber to pass control of his calls to
another Subscriber. The “Forwarded To” Subscriber will now be in control of
the caller and the caller will NOT return to originating Subscriber’s Mailbox. If
the “Forwarded To” Subscriber does not answer the caller it will now follow
what ever the “Forwarded To” Subscriber has set up for their call conditions.
The Caller will hear“Forwarding to”“{Subscriber Name}”before actually being
forwarded.
PERSONAL GREETINGS
The options available in this menu will be determined by your System
Administrator, and not all of them may be available to you. In the simplest sys-
tems, only a mailbox greeting will be available, additional greetings may be acces-
sible in more complex systems.
Your Personal Greeting will be played every time someone dials your extension
and you do not answer.
5
6
Call Screening
You may record up to 9 Personal Greetings, and you may assign any one of them
to be active. There are several different 'Call Coverage' conditions to which you
may assign any of your 9 greetings.The Call Coverage Conditions are: No-Answer,
Busy, and Do Not Disturb (or Forwarded All). This will allow different greetings to
play depending on the type of call forward that you have set, or the condition of
your telephone.
If this is turned on, the caller will be asked their name and the SVMi-8/SVMi-
16E will play this name to you before the transfer, giving you an option to
accept or reject the call.
Find Me
Find Me, when enabled, will attempt to locate the subscriber by calling a list
of preprogrammed phone numbers. The stored phone numbers are entered
in 'Personal Services' [#][2] (if allowed by the Administrator). The stored tele-
phone number list can contain up to 9 preprogrammed telephone numbers.
The Find Me feature only use the first five.
The Call Coverage conditions that you can assign specific greetings to are select-
ed by the following digits:
1
Primary/No Answer Greeting
Used when in your office, away from your desk or during the time period you
are scheduled available. If this is the only Personal Greeting you record, it will
play for all call coverage conditions.
7
Night Intercept
This feature is dependent on your weekly availability schedule, which is
entered in 'Personal Services' [#][3] (if allowed by the Administrator). When
Night Intercept is active the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E will first ring your extension
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Basic
Greeting' feature.
80
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Home Page
Edit Personal Greetings
Example:“Hi this is John Smith.I'm sorry I am not available to answer your call.
If someone else can help you, please enter the extension number now. Or, to
leave me a message, press 1.”
6
You may also edit/record each one of the greetings (1-9) at any time.
Select a greeting number to edit and follow the instructions to record your
greeting. When you are done recording your greeting, you will be able to lis-
ten to the greeting you recorded, save the greeting you recorded and return
to the previous menu, record the greeting again, or exit without saving the
greeting.
2
Busy Greeting
Played to a caller when you are already talking to someone on your extension
or the telephone at your Designated Location.
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Busy
Greeting' feature.
Note: If you record only the greeting assigned to the No-Answer Call
Coverage Condition,then that greeting will play to callers for all Call Coverage
Conditions (No-Answer, Busy, Blocked, Night, and Rejected Caller). In this case,
the salutation part of the greeting should be very general.
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. I'm on another line right now. If someone else
can help you, please enter the extension number now. Or, to leave a message,
press 1.”
7
Edit Mailbox Greeting
3
Call Blocking Greeting
Used whenever a caller reaches your mailbox or if you have not recorded any
of the Call Coverage greetings.The way a caller is transferred to your mailbox
greeting directly, is by another subscriber transferring the caller to your mail-
box using the VT (VoiceMail Transfer) key.
Used while Call Blocking is enabled in your Access Manager or if your phone
is forwarded ALL or DND.
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Call
Blocking' feature.
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the
'Mailbox Greeting Option' feature.
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. Sorry I missed your call, but I'm going to be
out of the office for the next few hours. If someone else can help you, please
enter the extension number now. Or, to leave me a message, press 1.”
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. Please leave me a message, I will call you as
soon as I can.”
4
Night Greeting
Note: This greeting will only play if none of the 5 personal greetings has
played to the caller. A common usage for this Greeting is when another
Subscriber is talking with a caller and uses the VT key on their phone to trans-
fer the caller directly to your Mailbox.
Used during the time period you are scheduled UNAVAILABLE, usually after
business hours during the evening and at night.
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the
'Scheduling' feature.
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. I've left the office for the evening. If you would
like to try someone else, please enter the extension number now. Or, to leave
me a message, press 1.”
6
MAILBOX ADMINISTRATION
5
Call Screening Greeting
Used while Call Screening is enabled, and you REJECT a caller after listening
to the caller's record name.
The Mailbox Administration menu is used to turn on and off your pager notifica-
tion, message alert options and other message control features.
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Call
Screening' feature.
1
Message Alert
When this function is activated, the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E will call any outside or
inside telephone number, after each message is left in your voice mailbox.
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. I'm sorry, but I am not available to speak with
you at this time. If someone else can help you, please enter the extension
number now. Or, to leave me a message, press 1.”
To hear your message at the remote location when the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E calls
you, after you pick up the telephone and answer you will be instructed that
there is a message and to enter your password. Simply enter your password
and you will now be logged in.
82
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Home Page
Setting Up Message Alert:
This useful feature will allow you to cancel any messages that have NOT yet
been picked up by the recipient.
■
■
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
Press [1] for Message Alert.
5
6
Auto Play New Messages
There are 4 options available to you:
If this option is enabled, after you enter your password correctly any new
messages will immediately begin to play. To enable (or if already enabled
toggle and disable) this feature:
Press [1] to toggle message alert on and off.
Press [2] to set the schedule when you would like to be notified.
Press [3] to be notified on urgent messages only.
Press [4] to set the destination phone number.
■
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
Press [5] to Set Auto Play of New Messages.
2
Pager Notification
Auto Play Message Information
When this function is activated, the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E will call your beeper
service and notify you after each message is left in your voice mailbox.
If this option is enabled, the date, time and sender’s name will be played
automatically before each message. If this is disabled, the information must
be requested manually by pressing ‘00’. To enable (or if already enabled tog-
gle and disable) this feature:
■
■
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
Press [2] for pager notification.
■
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
There are 4 options available to you:
Press [6] to Set Auto Play of Message Information.
Press [1] to toggle pager notification on and off.
Press [2] to set the schedule when you would like to be paged.
Press [3] to be notified on urgent messages only.
Press [4] to set the pager phone number.
9
MESSAGE BROADCAST
3
Undelete
When this function is activated, the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E will allow you to
undelete any messages that you have recently deleted (up to the pro-
grammed Daily Maintenance Time, which is set to 3 a.m. by Default the fol-
lowing morning).
This option will only be available if it has been allowed by the System
Administrator.
Broadcast to All Mailboxes
■
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
If you have been designated as a Subscriber Administrator, you may send a
message to ALL mailboxes in the system.
Press [3] for Deleted Messages.
Deleted voice mail messages are temporarily stored in memory until 3 a.m.
the following day. Select this option to recover ("undelete") previously delet-
ed messages, during this period of time.
■
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
Press [9] for Broadcast Messages.
This option will only be available if your mailbox has been assigned
Subscriber Administration privileges.
4
Undelivered Retrieval
When this function is activated, the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E will allow you to recall
any messages you have sent that have NOT yet been picked up by the recip-
ient.
■
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
Press [4] for Undelivered Messages.
84
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Home Page
PERSONAL ADMINISTRATION SETTINGS
#
This menu allows you to make changes to basic setup settings, that are rarely
changed. Use these when you initially set up your personal Subscriber settings.
You probably will not need to change them after that.
PERSONAL SERVICES
The Personal Administration Menu is used to set your password and record your
name. Many of these features must be allowed by the System Administrator.
1
Setting your Password
■
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [#][7][1].
1
Workload Management
The current password will be played and you will have the chance to
change it.
Allows you to access to all reminders, both Active and Pending. If authorized
you can group your reminders as Commitments, Follow-Ups or Tasks for bet-
ter organization. The system will flag each reminder as Active or Pending
(pending means scheduled for future delivery).
2
Recording your Name
Use this option to record your name.Your recorded name is played in several
different situations. It is important to record your name for proper operation
of the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E system.
2
Stored Numbers
Allows you to enter up to 9 stored phone numbers. The first five of these are
used in the 'Find Me' feature, but any of them (1-9) can be easily dialed using
only one digit followed by the pound key, to be used by many other features
from within your subscriber space. (ie: “Follow Me, “Message Alert”, “Pager
Alert”, and “Direct Call”).
■
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [#][7][2].
The current name will be played and you will have the chance to change
it.
Note: It is possible that if you do not record your name and/or enter your
Directory Name (described below), you will not be included in the Dial by
Name Directory.
3
5
Schedule Availability
Allows you to enter a weekly availability schedule for use with Night Personal
Greeting and the Auto Night Intercept feature. Follow the spoken directions
to enter the days of the week and times you are generally available to talk to
your callers. All other times you will be considered unavailable.
3
Entering your Directory Name
Use this option to enter your Directory Name.Your Directory Name is used by
callers to find you if they do not know your extension number.
■
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [#][7][3].
Place a Direct Call
The current Directory Name will be played as a string of digits that are
equal to your name spelled out on your telephone keypad. Follow the
instructions to enter a new name.You will be prompted to enter your last
name and then your first name.
Allows you to place a direct call out of the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E from anywhere.
You may either dial the number or dial a single digit 1-5 that corresponds to
a stored number (See Personal Services, 2 - Stored Numbers). This feature
must be authorized by the System Administrator and can be limited or
opened to internal, local, and long distance calls.
This must be done in order for the directory feature to work correctly.
Note: It is possible that if you do not record your name (described above)
and/or enter your Directory Name, you will not be included in the Dial by
Name Directory.
7
Personal Administration
This area is used during the initial set up of your Subscriber Settings (see next
section).
4
Extended Prompting
Use this option to drastically reduce the number of prompts played in the
subscriber interface (mailbox prompts). Change this setting only if you are
very familiar with the user operation of the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E.
86
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Home Page
Note: Remember if you know what digits to press, you can enter them at any
time you do not have to wait to be prompted. This feature can be toggled
on/off at anytime. Also if it is off you will be prompted within each subscriber
menu to press zero for more options. This enables you to still be able to find
out what to do if you were to get lost and extended prompting was disabled.
AME Password
If your keyset has AME PASSWORD (MMC 110) set to YES, you must enter your
station password to listen to messages being left. This will prevent unauthorized
people from listening to messages being left for you.
If the password option is turned on, while a message is being left, press the flash-
ing AME indicator and enter your station password (not your SVMi-8/SVMi-16E
password).You will then hear the message being left.
KEYSET USER FEATURES
The following options are available if you have a display keyset.They require setup
by the System Administrator.
Call Record
Message Waiting Lights
If you have a call record button assigned to your phone, you may press it at any
time, to record the conversation in progress. If you have a display keyset, you will
also have the soft key options to pause and time the message.
When new messages are left in your mailbox,the voice mail message light on your
keyset will flash. Press this flashing key [VMMSG] and follow the prompts to
retrieve messages.This key may be pressed at any time to log into your Subscriber
Main Menu.
Answer Machine Emulation
If you have an Answer Machine Emulation key programmed on your keyset, you
can use it to monitor calls going to your voice mail, and optionally answer them.
The operation of this feature is similar to screening a call on a home answering
machine.
Your keyset must be set to forward on no answer to voice mail. After ringing your
station the caller will be connected to your voice mail and hear your personal
greeting before leaving a message. During this time you will be monitoring the
connection between the caller and your voice mail box. At this time you will only
be monitoring the call, you can not talk to the other party until you answer. You
may pick up the call at any time or ignore it.
To activate this feature press the AME button. The associated indicator will be lit
steady. Press again to turn off. If this key is pressed while a station is ringing (dur-
ing forward no answer), the feature will be turned on for the current call only.
While the caller is leaving a message or ringing you may:
■
■
Press [#] to immediately put the caller in your voice mailbox and monitor it.
Press [ꢀ] to immediately disconnect your station. The caller continues to
leave a message normally.
■
■
Pick up the handset and monitor privately.
Press ANS / RLS to answer the call (using the handset or speaker).
88
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Home Page
SHORTCUTS
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS
Calling
CODE
NAME
TELEPHONE NUMBER
Calling a station that is busy or does not answer you can press [#] to immediately
send the call to the called parties mailbox.
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
Being Called
If your phone rings and you want to send the caller directly to your mailbox, sim-
ply press [#].
Direct Messaging
[#] + DSS To make it easy to leave messages for others in your office without hav-
ing to dial their extension number first, keyset users may simply dial [#] plus a
mailbox (extension) number and leave a message directly. If you dial a busy
extension press [#] to connect directly with the mailbox.
Self Memo (Reminder)
Pressing [##] will leave a message in your own mailbox. This is useful to remind
yourself of things to do now or in the future. Messages can be sent with future
delivery so you can have the system call you when items become due.
INTERACTIVE DISPLAYS
Display keyset users have the added advantage of using the soft keys and displays
to play, save, delete, reply, call, forward, rewind, pause, fast forward, change the vol-
ume, get message information, or help.
Viewing Mailbox Contents
If you have new messages, in addition to the Terminal Status Indicator (TSI) you
will be able to use the keyset displays and soft keys to communicate with the
SVMi-8/SVMi-16E.
90
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5012L
Table of Contents
Home Page
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS
CODE
NAME
TELEPHONE NUMBER
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Home Page
Table of Contents
ITP-5021D
™
ITP-5021D User Guide
03/2004
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5021D
Table of Contents
Home Page
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ABOUT THIS BOOK ....................................................................................1
THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW ................................................2–7
ASSEMBLING YOUR KEYSET ........................................................8
ITP-5021D SETUP ..................................................................................9–15
OUTSIDE CALLS
Making an Outside Call................................................................................................16
Answering an Outside Call..........................................................................................16
Universal Answer ..........................................................................................................16
Recall/Flash ......................................................................................................................17
Busy Line Queuing with Callback ............................................................................17
Canceling Callback ........................................................................................................17
INTERCOM CALLS
Calling Other Stations ..................................................................................................18
Answering Intercom Calls ..........................................................................................18
Answer Modes ................................................................................................................18
Busy Station Callback....................................................................................................19
Busy Station Camp-on..................................................................................................19
Calling Your System Operator....................................................................................20
CALL PROCESSING
Holding Calls ............................................................................................................21–22
Transferring Calls ....................................................................................................22–23
Transfer with Camp-On................................................................................................23
Transfer to Voice Mail....................................................................................................23
Call Waiting ......................................................................................................................23
Conference Calls ............................................................................................................24
Forwarding Calls......................................................................................................25–26
Call Pickup ........................................................................................................................27
My Group Pickup............................................................................................................27
Privacy Release ........................................................................................................27–28
Copyright 2004 Samsung Telecommunications America.
All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form or by any means—graphic,
electronic or mechanical, including recording, taping, photocopying or information retrieval systems—
without express written permission of the publisher of this material.
Samsung Telecommunications America reserves the right without prior notice to revise information in
this guide for any reason. Samsung Telecommunications America also reserves the right without prior
notice to make changes in design or components of equipment as engineering and manufacturing
may warrant. Samsung Telecommunications America disclaims all liabilities for damages arising from
the erroneous interpretation or use of information presented in this guide.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5021D
Table of Contents
DIALING FEATURES
CUSTOMIZING YOUR KEYSET
Speed Dialing ..................................................................................................................29
Programming Personal Speed Dial Numbers ..............................................29–30
One Touch Speed Dialing............................................................................................30
Last Number Redial ......................................................................................................30
Manual Retry with Redial ............................................................................................31
Save Number with Redial............................................................................................31
Chain Dialing....................................................................................................................31
Automatic Redial/Retry................................................................................................31
Pulse to Tone Changeover ..........................................................................................32
Memo Redialing..............................................................................................................32
AME Password ................................................................................................................43
Auto Camp-On ................................................................................................................43
Select Ring Tone ............................................................................................................43
Change Your Passcode ................................................................................................43
Set Answer Mode (Intercom) ....................................................................................44
Set Answer Mode (CO) ................................................................................................44
Automatic Hold ..............................................................................................................44
Headset Operation ........................................................................................................44
Hot Keypad ......................................................................................................................45
Key Confirmation Tone ................................................................................................45
Rejoining a Page ............................................................................................................45
Ring Preference ..............................................................................................................45
Auto Answer CO Calls ..................................................................................................46
Display Speed Dial Name............................................................................................46
Caller ID Review All........................................................................................................46
Secure OHVA ....................................................................................................................46
Enblock Dialing ..............................................................................................................47
PAGING AND MESSAGING
Making an Internal Page..............................................................................................33
Making an External Page ............................................................................................33
All Page ..............................................................................................................................33
Meet Me Page..................................................................................................................34
Call Park and Page..........................................................................................................34
Messages—Set and Cancel ........................................................................................35
Returning Messages......................................................................................................35
Programmed Messages................................................................................................36
DISPLAY FEATURES
Interactive Display Keys ..............................................................................................48
Directory Information ................................................................................................ 48
Dial by Name....................................................................................................................49
Call Progress Displays ..................................................................................................50
Display Number Dialed ................................................................................................50
Call Duration Timer........................................................................................................50
Auto Timer ........................................................................................................................50
Timer Function ................................................................................................................50
Viewing Message Indications ....................................................................................51
Alarm Reminder Messages..................................................................................51–52
Personal Speed Dial Names........................................................................................52
Station Names .................................................................................................................52
Managing Key Assignments .......................................................................................53
LCR with Clear .................................................................................................................53
Backspace with LCR ......................................................................................................53
Text Messaging ......................................................................................................54–55
Caller ID .....................................................................................................................56–60
ANI .............................................................................................................................57–60
CLI ..............................................................................................................................57–60
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
Do Not Disturb ................................................................................................................37
One Time DND ................................................................................................................37
Mute ....................................................................................................................................37
Background Music ........................................................................................................37
Established Call Pick-Up ..............................................................................................38
Appointment Reminder/Alarm Clock ....................................................................38
Door Phone Calls............................................................................................................39
Executive/Secretary Hotline ......................................................................................39
Group Listening ..............................................................................................................40
Account Codes ................................................................................................................40
Locking Your Keyset ......................................................................................................40
Manual Signalling ..........................................................................................................41
Off-Hook Voice Announce ..........................................................................................41
OHVA Block ......................................................................................................................42
OHVA Reject ....................................................................................................................42
In Group/Out of Group ................................................................................................42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5021D
Table of Contents
SPECIAL APPLICATION MENU ..................................................61
Menu Options.........................................................................................................61–63
Outgoing Call Log ....................................................................................................61
Incoming Call Log ...................................................................................................61
Speed Dial...................................................................................................................62
Directory Dial ..........................................................................................................62
Forward Set .........................................................................................................62
Alarm Reminder .......................................................................................................62
SVMi-8 / SVMi-16E ....................................................................................64
ABOUT THIS BOOK
Accessing your Mailbox ............................................................................................65
SVMi-8/SVMi-16E Subscriber Services Menu Diagram .............................66–67
Getting Started ...............................................................................................................68
Listen to your Messages .............................................................................................68
Subscriber Services Menu .........................................................................................68
Listening to Old or New Messages .........................................................................69
Group New or Old Messages ....................................................................................70
Record and Send a Message ..............................................................................70–71
Access Manager ......................................................................................................71
Personal Greetings ................................................................................................73
Mailbox Administration .......................................................................................75
Message Broadcast ......................................................................................................77
Personal Services ....................................................................................................78
Personal Administration Settings ............................................................................79
Keyset User Features .............................................................................................80
Shortcuts .........................................................................................................................82
Interactive Displays .......................................................................................................82
Samsung’s new OfficeServ Technology keyset model, ITP-5021D, is part of the iDCS
500 Release 2.
The ITP-5021D IP keyset represents a new concept of Internet phone, in that it uses
an IP address to Send/Receive voice and data. For voice communications, the ITP-
5021D uses the data network line already in place in most offices and increasing
number of homes.
The ITP-5021D keysets incorporate an LCD screen, which provides important infor-
mation for the user, to make using the keyset easier and more convenient.
Your keyset is the most visible part of your telephone system. Please take the time
to study this guide and to become familiar with the operation of your keyset. Keep
this guide handy, as you may need to look up instructions for infrequently used
features.
Learning to use your keyset correctly will make everyday telephone communica-
tions a breeze.
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS ............................83–84
This book is written based on the factory default settings for the feature access
codes. Sometimes, due to programming requirements, these codes may be
changed. If you find that a feature code does not work as described in this book,
please contact your installation and service company to determine the correct
code.
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5021D
Table of Contents
Home Page
Some simple rules to remember:
THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW
•
•
•
•
Any steady LED indicates the line or feature is in use.
A fast flashing green LED indicates a new call ringing in.
A slow flashing green or red LED indicates a call is on hold.
A slow flashing amber LED indicates a recall to your keyset.
USER ORIENTATION
The ITP model telephones are called IP keysets.The IP keyset incorporates buttons
or“keys”that are used to access or activate the many features of your office phone
system. The ITP-5021D keyset incorporates 21 programmable buttons. These 21
buttons are arranged in three rows of seven across the face of the keyset. Any of
the system features or functions can be programmed to these buttons.
SPEAKERPHONE
All ITP keysets are speakerphones. Pressing the SEND button will answer an
incoming call on the speakerphone. Pressing the END button will release the call
on the speakerphone.
The three buttons above the top row of programmable buttons are soft keys.
These buttons assist in the use of the system features and functions.
Switching from the handset to the speakerphone is easy. Simply press the SPEAK-
ER button and hang up the handset.
Lines from the telephone company are“C.O. lines.”Calls on these lines are referred
to as “outside calls.”Your system can have individual C.O. line keys or lines may be
assigned to groups. When they are in a group, you access a line by dialing an
access code or pressing a route button. For example, dial 9 or press a“LOCAL”but-
ton to get a local outside line. If Least Cost Routing is used, pressing the“LCR”but-
ton will automatically select a preprogrammed C.O. line according to what digits
are dialed. Each line in the system is numbered, beginning with 701, then 702, 703,
etc.
VOLUME CONTROLS
The ITP-5021D keyset uses the UP and DOWN buttons to adjust the ringer volume
while the keyset is ringing, the speaker volume while the speakerphone is in use
and the handset volume while you are listening. These three levels will be stored
in memory until changed. If background music is turned on at your keyset, the vol-
ume buttons will also control the level of music. The volume of pages heard
through the speaker of a keyset can be adjusted during a page announcement by
using the volume buttons.There are 16 levels for each volume setting.The volume
of off-hook ring is controlled by a user-programmable setting.
Direct Station Selection (DSS) buttons are programmed to ring specific stations.
You can press a DSS button instead of dialing the extension number.
TERMINAL STATUS INDICATOR
CALL INDICATIONS
The terminal status indicator light is positioned on the top right corner of the key-
set above the display. The terminal status indicator is a tri-colored (red, green, and
amber) light that provides greater visibility of your keysets status than the indi-
vidual button LEDs. The terminal status indicator provides the following indica-
tions:
The buttons on your phone have light emitting diodes (LEDs).These are tri-colored
LEDs that light green, red or amber (green and red together).
Intercom calls, also called internal calls, always appear on your CALL buttons.They
will always light green.You can have up to eight CALL buttons, but at least two are
recommended.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Busy/Off Hook
Intercom Ring
Outside Call Ring
Recall Ring
Message Waiting
Do Not Disturb
Steady Red
Flashing Red
Flashing Green
Flashing Amber
Flashing Red
Outside calls appear on individual line buttons if they are assigned. When an indi-
vidual line is not assigned to its own button, it will appear on a CALL button.
Your outside calls will light green on your keyset and red on other keysets. You
never lose sight of your calls while they are on hold.They stay right where you put
them and are identified with a green flashing light.
Fast Flash Red at 1 Second Intervals
2
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5021D
Table of Contents
Home Page
•
SEND BUTTON: If the station is programmed for Enblok Dial Mode, when
dialing an outside telephone number or internal station number, you must
press the SEND button to initiate the call. This button is also used when
reviewing recently received or called numbers and answering incoming calls.
CONFERENCE BUTTON
The CONFERENCE button allows the user to set up a call with up to 5 parties (sta-
tion or trunk).
When reviewing recently received calls, continue to press the SEND button
for more than 2 seconds and the last outside number called will be redialed.
TRANSFER BUTTON
Transfer is used to send any call to another extension in one of two ways.You can
do a screened transfer by informing the other extension who is calling or you can
do a blind transfer without notification.
The SEND button operates as the ANS portion of the ANS/RLS button. An
ANS/RLS button may be assigned to the station as a programmable button.
•
•
ENTER BUTTON: This button is used to select a menu option, or to save
changes made to a menu or submenu option.
HOLD BUTTON
DIRECTION BUTTON: The DIRECTION BUTTON is the donut shaped ring,
which surrounds the ENTER button. This button is used to navigate within
the menus.There are directional arrows stenciled into this button, which indi-
cate which direction the cursor will be moved.
The HOLD button maintains the call at your keyset, while enabling you to call
other stations or consult coworkers in confidence.
SPEAKER BUTTON
•
•
END BUTTON: This button is used to disconnect a call after a conversation or
to move to the initial screen.
The SPEAKER button allows you to have a conversation from the keyset without
lifting the handset.
The END button operates as the RLS portion of the ANS/RLS button. An
ANS/RLS button may be assigned to the station as a programmable button.
NAVIGATION BUTTON
CANCEL BUTTON: This button is used to erase any characters or numbers
entered by the dial pad or to move to the previous screen.
The ITP-5021D keyset incorporates a NAVIGATION button.This button is designed
to assist the user in activating and using various station features, more easily.
These features include:
FEATURE ACCESS CODES
This user guide is written based on the default access code for using system fea-
tures. If the system numbering plan has been changed some of the access codes
may not be correct.Your installing company can inform you of the correct codes.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Outgoing Call Log
Incoming Call Log
Speed Number Search
Name Search
Call Forward Assign
Alarm Assign
With the NAVIGATION button the station user is no longer required to enter sta-
tion level programming to activate these frequently used features. A few button
presses and these features are activated.
The NAVIGATION button is divided into separate feature buttons. These buttons
are described below.
•
MENU BUTTON: This button displays the station feature main menu so that
the users can easily utilize various settings and helpful functions.
4
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5021D
Table of Contents
Home Page
ITP-5021D
SYSTEM TONES
The system provides several tones to assist you. Some of these tones are already
familiar to you.
LCD Panel
Programmable Buttons (21)
Intercom Dial Tone—A steady tone that indicates you can begin dialing.
Soft Button
Scroll Button
DIAL TONE
CONTINUOUS
Status Indicator
Speaker
Ringback Tone—Indicates the station you dialed is ringing.
Volume
Button
RINGBACK TONE—1000 ms ON/3000 ms OFF
CONTINUOUS
Redial
Button
Keyset
Support
Navigation
Button
Busy Tone—Indicates the station you dialed is busy.
Dial Button
Speaker Button
Hold Button
Microphone
BUSY TONE—500 ms ON/500 ms OFF
CONTINUOUS
Conference Button
Transfer Button
DND/No More Calls Tone—Fast busy tone indicates the station you dialed
is in the Do Not Disturb mode or cannot receive any more calls.
DND/NO MORE CALLS TONE—250 ms ON/250 ms OFF
FOR TEN SECONDS
Transfer/Conference Tone—Indicates your call is being held and you
can dial another party.
TRANSFER/CONF TONE—100 ms ON/100 ms OFF
CONTINUOUS
Confirmation Tone—Very short beeps followed by dial tone indicate you
have correctly set or canceled a system feature.
CONFIRMATION TONE—50 ms ON/50 ms OFF
FOR ONE SECOND
(programmable)
Error Tone—A distinctive two level beeping tone indicates you have done
something incorrectly.Try again.
ERROR TONE—50 ms of tone 1/50 ms of tone 2
FOR THREE SECONDS
6
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5021D
Table of Contents
Home Page
ASSEMBLING YOUR KEYSET
ITP-5021D SETUP
•
•
Place the keyset face down on a flat surface.
INITIALIZING THE ITP-5021D
Insert notched ends of the support bracket into the channels located in the
upper section of the bottom panel. Push towards the top of the keyset to lock
in.
Initially the ITP-5021D IP keyset will need to be setup to operate within the users
network.The Setup Menu is also used to make changes to the keyset, in the event
that the system information should change. The option chosen via scroll key will
be highlighted.
•
•
Plug the handset cord into the jack marked with the
symbol.
The station numbers will be automatically set by the iDCS 500 system once the
necessary information has been entered into the IP keyset. Enter ID and password
of the server, as described below to register the phone.
Route the handset cord out the RIGHT side of the keyset as you look at it face
down.
•
Plug the eight-conductor LAN cable, from the wall, into the jack marked LAN
on the back of the keyset. (Connect the ITP keyset to any port on the local net-
work).
See your system administrator for specific Network and Server addresses. The
addresses necessary to set up the ITP-5021D are:
•
•
•
•
•
IP Address of Station
Network Gateway Address of Station
Subnet Mask
iDCS 500 MCP2 Server Address
User ID
•
•
Plug the eight-conductor PC cable, from the PC, into the jack marked PC on
the back of the keyset.
Plug the power connector, from the power adapter provided, into the power
jack on the back of the keyset.
To get to the Set-Up Menu, unplug the power from the ITP-5021D phone, press
and hold the MENU button while plugging in the power cord back into the
phone. Now release the MENU button.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
•
•
•
Be careful not to connect the Network LAN cable into the PC connector of the
phone.
>1.Infomation
2.Network
To prevent damaging the keyset, only use the Power Adapter that came with
the 5021D keyset.
Other items not shown on screen:
This manual assumes that the ITP keysets are connected to a functioning local
IP network.The local IP network must be able to communicate with the MCP2
and MGI card in the iDCS 500 system over IP. This is assumed regardless of
whether the IP keyset is on a local or remote network.
3.Load & Upgrade
4.System
5.Server
6.Exit
8
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5021D
Table of Contents
Home Page
IP SETUP MENU
MENU STRUCTURE
To enter the IP SETUP MENU, press the MENU button as soon as the ITP-5021D
The IP SETUP MENU is configured as follows:
phone is connected to the power supply.
1. INFORMATION
When entering the IP setup menu, the LCD displays the following options:
1. Version
2. Network
3. Load Option
4. MAC Address
>1.Infomation
2.Network
2. NETWORK
Other items not shown on screen:
1. Mode
2. IP
3. Netmask
4. Gateway
3.Load & Upgrade
4.System
5.Server
6.Exit
Note that items 2 to 4 are only displayed when setting Manual IP.
Once the IP SETUP MENU is displayed, you can move to each menu in the Set Up
by using the navigation buttons or the [1]-[9] dial buttons of the ITP-5021D IP
phone.
3. LOAD & UPGRADE
1. Load Option
2. Upgrade Program
3. Upgrade Bootrom
4. Format
•
•
The UP and DOWN directions buttons in the navigation button assembly are
used to move the highlighted bar up or down to the desired option.
The LEFT and RIGHT buttons in the navigation button assembly are used to
move the highlighted bar left or right, to the desired option, move to a sub
menu and if a menu is at the last line, that menu option will be executed.
The [0]-[9] dial buttons are used to directly choose a menu, or sub menu
options.
4. SYSTEM
1. Password
•
•
•
•
•
5. SERVER
1. Server IP
2. ID
3. Password
The [ENTER] button in the navigation button assembly is used when saving
a modification.
The [MENU] button in the navigation button assembly is used to to display
the IP Setup Main Menu.
6. EXIT
The [END] button in the navigation button assembly is used when canceling
or editing the modification, or existing programming.
The [CANCEL] button in the navigation button assembly is used to go back
to the previous screen or to delete the last digit of a displayed option value.
10
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5021D
Table of Contents
Home Page
Setting IP Manually
NAVIGATING THE MENUS
•
If [1. Manual IP] is selected, press
ENTER and this sub menu will be dis-
played on the LCD.
When programming within various menu options, information can be entered via
the dial pad keys using [0]-[9] and [ꢀ] dial keys, as well as utilizing the navigation
button assembly.
>1.Mode
2.IP
Items not visible in the first screen:
The button used for editing and their features are summarized below.
3.Netmask
4.Gateway
BUTTON
FEATURES
Left and Right ......................To move a cursor (highlighted area) or to erase what is
entered.
Enter the IP address of the IP keyset.Next, enter the netmask and gateway address
for the customer network.
Enter ........................................To save the current setting and end programming.
•
If the [2. IP] menu is selected, press
ENTER, the LCD will display this mes-
sage and the user can enter its IP
address.
End............................................To cancel the current programming and return to the
Main Menu.
Input IP Address
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Cancel......................................To move back to the previous screen or delete the last
digit of the displayed option value.
Check if there is any currently saved IP address of the phone on the LCD. If the IP
address has not been set, the LCD displays nothing. The user can enter the IP
address using [0]-[9] dial buttons and [ꢀ] button can save that IP address by press-
ing the [Enter] button of navigation button assembly.
[ꢀ] ............................................To enter [.] between IP address fields.
[0]-[9] ......................................To enter numerical values.
SETTING THE NETWORK PARAMETERS
•
If the [3. Netmask] menu is selected,
press ENTER, the LCD will display the
following message and the user can
enter a new Netmask IP address.
Input Netmask
Utilize the following programming steps to program the ITP-5021D keyset to
operate within the users network.
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Network Parameter Setup
From the Setup, Main Menu, select [2.
Network] to set or modify the network
parameters.
Check if there is any currently saved subnet mask address of the phone on the
LCD. If the subnet mask address has not been set, the display will show nothing.
Press any dial buttons from [0]-[9] and [ꢀ] button to enter the subnet mask IP
address and then save that subnet mask IP address by pressing the [Enter] button
of navigation button assembly.
>1.Mode
Press ENTER, the LCD will display this mes-
sage.
>1.Manual IP
•
If the [4. Gateway] menu is selected,
press ENTER, the LCD will display the
following message and the user can
enter a new gateway address.
2.DHCP
Input Def. Gateway
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
•
•
If [1. Manual IP] is selected, the user must enter the IP address of the IP key-
set. Then enter the subnet mask, and gateway value for the customer net-
work.
Check if there is any currently saved Gateway IP address of the phone on the LCD.
If the gateway IP address has not been set, the LCD displays nothing.The user can
enter the gateway IP address by using [0]-[9] and [ꢀ] button and can save that IP
address by pressing the [ENTER] button of the navigation button assembly.
If [2. DHCP] is selected, the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway value will
be obtained automatically (if a DHCP server is present).
NOTE: In the [2. Network Menu], [1. Mode] option, when [2. DHCP] is selected the
IP address, Netmask, and Gateway will not be displayed on the LCD.
12
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5021D
Table of Contents
Home Page
Load and Upgrade Set/Modify
Authentication Server Related Set/Modify
The third item [3. Load & Upgrade] sets or modifies the IP phone’s software ver-
sion. Use extreme caution when upgrading the keyset.
The fifth item [5. Server] sets or modifies settings related to the authentication
server. Select the [5. Server] item and move to the lower level.The screen below is
displayed.
Select the [3. Load & Upgrade] item and move to the lower level. The screen
below is displayed.
1.Server IP
1.Load Option
2.Upgrade Program
You can set/modify the IP address of the authentication server at the [1. Server IP]
item. The screen below is displayed when you enter the item. The server IP is the
IP address of the MCP2.
Item not visible in the first screen:
3.Upgrade Bootrom
4.Format
Input ServerIP
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
In the [1.Load Option] item, move to the lower level and select [2. File System].
You can confirm the current IP address of the authentication server at the LCD
panel.The address is left blank if it is not set. Use the dial buttons from [0]-[9], and
[ꢀ] to set the IP address and press the [ENTER] button among the navigation but-
tons to save and exit.
Each of the items [2. Upgrade Program] and [3. Upgrade Bootrom] are used for
upgrading program and bootrom. Set the IP of the TFTP server you wish to
upgrade and press OK.
The [4. Format] item is used for deleting all programs and data except bootrom.
4
Input Id
xxxx
CAUTION: For engineering purposes only. The format option should not be used
unless instructed by an Authorized Samsung Engineering or Technical Support
Representative.
You must input the ID assigned to your ITP phone. See your phone system admin-
istrator to get this value. Press the [ENTER] button to save and exit.
4
Input Password
xxxx
You must input the password associated with your ID. See your phone system
administrator to get this value. Press the [ENTER] button to save and exit.
Completion of Settings
Verify settings at the first item [1. Information] after setting all of the above items.
Select the sixth item [6. Exit] to save all modified settings and reboot the ITP-
5021D phone.
14
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5021D
Table of Contents
Home Page
RECALL DIAL TONE
OUTSIDE CALLS
Press the NEW button to disconnect your existing call, wait for dial tone and then
make a new call on the same line.
MAKING AN OUTSIDE CALL
NOTE: If this button does not appear on your keyset, the FLASH button may be
programmed to recall dial tone.
•
a line access code to receive dial tone—OR—press an idle outside line button,
line group button or dial a line access code to receive dial tone through the
speaker—OR—press SPEAKER, receive intercom dial tone and dial a line
access code.
SENDING A FLASH
While on an outside call, press the FLASH button to send a flash to the telephone
company. This is required for some custom calling features or CENTREX use.
•
•
Dial the telephone number.
Finish the call by replacing the handset or pressing the END button.
NOTE: Flash is not available on an ISDN circuit.
NOTE: You will receive No More Calls tone when you attempt to make a call and
there is no button available for that line.
BUSY LINE QUEUING WITH CALLBACK
If you receive a busy signal when you are selecting an outside line, this means that
the line or group of lines is busy.
•
•
•
If Least Cost Routing is enabled on your phone system, this button may be
labeled LCR or accessed by dialing an access code (usually 9).
If your system is programmed to require an authorization code before making
•
Press the CBK button, if programmed, or dial 44. You will hear confirmation
tone.
a call, dial ꢀ plus a valid code before selecting a C.O. line.
If your system is programmed to require an account code before making a
call, press the ACC button or dial 47 plus a valid bin number, press the ACC
button again and then select a C.O.line.See Account Codes for more information.
•
•
When the line becomes free, the system will call you back.
Lift the handset or press the SEND button to answer,wait for dial tone and dial
the telephone number or speed dial number again.
For more information on authorization and account codes, see your system
administrator.
NOTES:
1. A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds. If you have set
a callback, your CBK button will light.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before dialing.
or press the SPEAKER button before dialing.
ANSWERING AN OUTSIDE CALL
CANCELING CALLBACK
•
Lift the handset and you are automatically connected to the ringing call.
See Ring Preference under Customizing Your Keyset—OR—press the SEND but-
ton to automatically answer on the speakerphone.
A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds. If you have set a
callback, your CBK button will light.
Your phone may have a maximum of five callbacks to lines and/or stations set at a
time. To cancel a callback:
NOTE: If a call is flashing at your keyset but not ringing, you must press the flash-
ing button to answer.
•
•
Press the CBK button, if programmed, or dial 44. You will hear confirmation
tone.
While you are listening to confirmation tone, press the HOLD button.This will
cancel the oldest set callback.
UNIVERSAL ANSWER
Outside lines may be programmed to ring a general alerting device. To answer
calls ringing this device, dial 67 or press the UA button.This device can operate in
any one of the six different ring plans.
NOTE: If the hot keypad feature is turned off,you must first lift the handset or press
the SPEAKER button before dialing.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before dialing.
16
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5021D
Table of Contents
Home Page
BUSY STATION CALLBACK
INTERCOM CALLS
When you call another station and receive a busy signal:
•
•
•
Press the CBK button, if programmed, or dial 44.
When the busy station becomes free, your keyset will ring.
Lift the handset or press SEND to call the now idle station.
CALLING OTHER STATIONS
•
•
Dial the extension number or group number.
Wait for the party to answer. If you hear a brief tone burst instead of ringback
tone, the station you called is set for Voice Announce or Auto Answer. Begin
speaking immediately after the tone.
NOTES:
1. A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds. If you have set
a callback, your CBK button will light.
•
Finish the call by replacing the handset or press the END button.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before dialing.
NOTES:
1. If you have a DSS button assigned to an extension or station group, you may
press this button instead of dialing the number.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.
BUSY STATION CAMP-ON
When you call another station and receive a busy signal but you do not want to
wait for a callback:
ANSWERING INTERCOM CALLS
MANUAL CAMP-ON
•
When your keyset rings, simply lift the handset—OR—press the SEND button
to be connected to the calling station.
•
•
Press the CAMP button or dial 45.
The called station will receive off-hook ring tone repeated every few seconds
and its first available CALL button will flash green to indicate your call is wait-
ing.
•
To finish the call, replace the handset or press the END button.
See Ring Preference under Customizing Your Keyset.
•
•
Wait for the called party to answer.
The called station must release its first call or place it on hold before answer-
ing your camp-on.
VOICE ANNOUNCE MODE
When another station calls you, your keyset will sound a brief attention tone and
you will hear the caller’s announcement.
NOTES:
1. If you receive No More Calls tone, that station has no available button to
accept your call. Hang up or leave a message.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before dialing.
•
•
Press SEND to turn on the microphone and speak handsfree—OR— lift the
handset to reply.
To finish the call, replace the handset or press the END button.
NOTE: In order for C.O. calls to be answered handsfree, AUTO ANS CO must be set
ON.
AUTO CAMP-ON
When you want to automatically camp on to a busy station without pressing the
camp on button every time you call a busy station, you can set your phone for
auto camp-on.
AUTO ANSWER MODE
When another station calls you, your keyset will sound a brief attention tone and
then automatically answer the call.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Dial 081 to turn on auto camp-on or 080 to turn it off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
•
•
Your microphone and speaker are turned on and you can speak handsfree.For
privacy, use the handset.
To finish the call, replace the handset or press the END button.
NOTE: In order for C.O. calls to be answered handsfree, AUTO ANS CO must be set
ON.
18
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5021D
Table of Contents
Home Page
CALLING YOUR SYSTEM OPERATOR
CALL PROCESSING
•
•
Dial 0 to call your system operator or group of operators.
If you want to call a specific operator, dial that person’s extension number.
SYSTEM HOLD
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the hand-
set or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.
•
When you are connected to any call, press HOLD. The call will flash green at
your keyset.If this call appears on a line button at other keysets, it will flash red
at those keysets.
•
To take the caller off hold, press that button and the green flashing light will
go steady green again. Resume the conversation.
NOTE:While on a call, pressing a line button, route button or flashing CALL button
will automatically put your first call on hold and connect you to the new call. See
Automatic Hold under Customizing Your Keyset.
EXCLUSIVE HOLD
To place an outside call on hold at your phone so that other users cannot get it:
•
Press the HOLD button twice.The call will flash green on your keyset and this
line will show a steady red light on other keysets.
•
To retrieve the call, press the flashing green line button or press the HOLD
button a third time.
NOTE: Intercom calls will always be placed on exclusive hold.
REMOTE HOLD
When you wish to place a call on hold at another station. Press TRANSFER and a
dial the station number (or press the appropriate DSS button). Press the HOLD
button.This will place the call on system hold on an available CALL button or Line
Button at the remote station and return you to dial tone.
NOTES:
1. If the destination station does not have any free CALL buttons or line buttons
you will hear No More Calls tone and must return to the other party by press-
ing the TRANSFER button (or the RETURN soft key in the display).
2. Intercom calls cannot be remote held.
HOLD RECALL
If you leave a call on hold longer than the hold timer, it will recall your station.The
button that the call appears on will have a slow flashing amber light.
•
When your phone rings, lift the handset or press the SEND button to answer
the recall.
20
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5021D
Table of Contents
first station to hang up, simply press another DSS button. OR
Home Page
•
If you do not answer this recall within a pre-programmed period of time, it will
go to the system operator.
Press the CALL button or C.O. line button to return to the outside party and
begin the transfer process again.
CONSULTATION HOLD
When you are transferring a call to a keyset set for Voice Announce or Auto
Answer, the transferred call will always ring.
When you are talking on an outside line and it is necessary to consult with anoth-
er extension:
NOTES:
•
Press the TRANSFER button; you will receive transfer dial tone. Your call is
placed on transfer hold.
Dial the extension number.
Consult with the internal party.
Press TRANSFER to return to the outside party or hang up to transfer the call.
1. After the inside party answers, you may alternate back and forth between the
parties by pressing the TRANSFER button.
2. If you receive No More Calls tone, that station has no button available to re-
ceive another call. Press TRANSFER to return to the other party.
3. You cannot transfer an Intercom call by pressing a DSS button.You must press
the TRANSFER button and dial the destination extension number.
•
•
•
NOTE:Repeatedly pressing the TRANSFER button will toggle between the outside
party and internal extension. If necessary you may disconnect either one of the
parties by pressing the DROP button.
TRANSFER WITH CAMP-ON
When you are transferring a call to another station and you receive a busy signal,
you may camp the call on to this station. Simply hang up when you hear the busy
signal. The called party will be alerted that a call is waiting for them.
RETRIEVING CALLS HELD AT
ANOTHER STATION
NOTE: If you receive No More Calls tone, that station has no button available to
receive another call. Press TRANSFER to return to the outside caller.
When a line is on hold and it appears on your keyset, press the line button with the
red flashing light.
TRANSFER TO VOICE MAIL
When a line is on hold and it does not appear on your keyset, dial 12 plus the line
number or the extension number of the station that placed the call on hold.
This feature is used to send a call directly to a voice mailbox.Your keyset must have
a correctly programmed VT button to accomplish this.To transfer a call directly to
a voice mailbox:
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.
•
•
While on a call, press the VT button and dial the mailbox number.
Hang up when dialing is completed.
TRANSFERRING CALLS
Transfer is used to send any call to another extension in one of two ways. You can
do a screened transfer by informing the other extension who is calling or you can
do a blind transfer without notification.
NOTE: The VT button will not work with a Centralized Voice Mail in a Network
System.
•
•
While on a call, press the TRANSFER button and dial an extension number or
group number.Your call is automatically put on transfer hold. OR
Press a DSS button or station group button. Your call is automatically put on
transfer hold.
Hang up when you hear ringing (this is an unscreened or blind transfer).
OR
Wait for the called party to answer and advise him/her of the call and hang up.
If the transfer is refused, you will be reconnected to the outside line when the
called station hangs up or you can press TRANSFER to return to the outside
party. If you wish to send the call to another extension without waiting for the
CALL WAITING
If an outside call has been camped-on to your phone or another station has
camped-on to you:
•
•
Your keyset will ring and the call that is waiting for you (camped-on) will flash
green.
Press the flashing button to answer; your other call will go on hold automati-
cally if your station has the Automatic Hold feature set. If not, you must press
HOLD and then the flashing button. OR
Finish the first call and hang up; the waiting call will ring.
22
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5021D
Table of Contents
Home Page
•
Lift the handset or press the SEND or ANS/RLS button to answer.
FORWARDING CALLS
NOTE: Intercom calls will not go on Automatic Hold.
You may forward your calls to another station, group of stations or an external
telephone number. Program a destination for the type of forwarding you want as
detailed below. If you have FWD ALL, FWD BUSY and FWD NO ANSWER buttons,
press one to turn that forward feature on. A steady red light reminds you what for-
ward condition is activated.
CONFERENCE CALLS
You may conference up to five parties (you and four others) in any combination of
outside lines and internal stations in any order.
You can clear all call forward conditions set at your station by lifting the handset
and dialing 600.
•
•
While engaged in a conversation, press the CONF button and receive confer-
ence tone.
Make another call, either intercom or outside, press the CONF button and
receive conference tone.
Make another call or press the CONF button to join all parties.
Repeat the last step until all parties are added.
FORWARD ALL CALLS
•
•
To forward all your calls under any condition to another station:
•
•
Dial 601 plus the extension or group number.
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.
NOTE: When attempting to add another party to the conference and you are not
able to reach the desired person, hang up. Simply press the CONF button again to
return to your previous conversation.
NOTES:
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.
2. The station that receives a Forwarded All call can transfer the call to the for-
warded station. This is useful when you are expecting an important call but
you do not wish to be disturbed by other calls.
3. When a station user places his/her keyset in Forward All mode and he/she
does not have a FORWARD ALL button, the TRANSFER button will light to in-
dicate Forward All has been set and calls to this station have been transferred
elsewhere.
To drop a party from your conference call:
•
•
Press CONF and dial the extension or line number that is to be dropped.
Press CONF again to reestablish the conference.
NOTE:To leave the conference, hang up. Control is passed to the next internal sta-
tion. If there are no internal stations and you wish to leave outside lines connect-
ed together in a trunk to trunk conference, press the CONF button plus the CALL
button that the call appears on or follow the instructions to drop a party and use
your extension number. When they hang up, the lines will release automatically.
Press CONF to rejoin a trunk to trunk conference.
FORWARD BUSY
CONFERENCE SPLITTING
To forward calls to another station when you are on the phone:
If you are the controlling party of a conference and your keyset has the Auto Hold
feature turned on (See Customizing Your Keyset) and all of the outside lines involved
in the conference appear as buttons on your keyset, you can split the conference
into separate calls as follows:
•
•
Dial 602 plus the extension or group number.
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press SPEAKER before you begin dialing.
•
Press any one of the outside line buttons.That outside line will remain steady
green to indicate you are still connected to it. All other outside lines in the
conference will be placed on system hold at your keyset. All intercom callers
in the conference will be disconnected. You may now speak with each caller
privately and transfer them as usual or reestablish another conference.
FORWARD NO ANSWER
To forward calls to another station when you do not answer:
•
•
Dial 603 plus the extension or group number.
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.
24
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5021D
Table of Contents
Home Page
•
•
Dial 0 to cancel current condition OR
Dial 1-5 to select the forward type OR
FORWARD BUSY/NO ANSWER
If you have both a Forward on Busy destination and a Forward No Answer desti-
nation programmed, you may set both of these at the same time:
Press UP or DOWN to select the forward type.
Press the right soft key to move the cursor.
Dial the destination number (e.g., 202) OR
Press UP or DOWN to select the destination
Press the right soft key to move the cursor
Dial 1 to set OR
•
•
Dial 604.
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.
•
•
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.
Press UP or DOWN to select YES or NO
Press TRANSFER to store and exit
FORWARD FOLLOW ME
STATION CALL PICKUP
When you want all calls to your extension forwarded to the extension where you
are now:
To pick up (answer) a call ringing at another station, lift the handset and dial 65
plus the extension number of the ringing phone.
•
•
Dial 606 plus your extension number.
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.
If you have a DP key assigned with a station number, you only need to press this
DP key with the flashing light to answer this ringing station.
If you want a specific extension's calls forwarded to your phone (Remote Call
Forward):
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.
•
•
Dial 606 plus the desired extension number.
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.
GROUP CALL PICKUP
To pick up (answer) a call ringing in any pickup group, lift the handset and dial 66
plus the desired group number 01–20 or press the flashing GROUP PICKUP but-
ton if available.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.
FORWARD DND
NOTES:
1. A group pickup button can have an extender for a specific pickup group.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before dialing the access code.
To forward your phone when you activate DND.
•
•
Dial 605 plus the extension number or group number.
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.
MY GROUP PICKUP
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.
If desired, a new access code can be assigned to pickup ringing calls in the same
pickup group as you are in. Like “66” above except you do not need to dial the
desired group number. See your installation company for the assigned access
code. MY GROUP PICKUP: __________________.
CALL FORWARD OPTIONS
A display keyset may review or change call forward options and destinations. Call
forward access can be done via the keypad or by accessing the keyset display fea-
tures. To review or change call forward options:
•
Press TRANSFER 102.
The display will indicate the current call forward condition and destination
OR
Show 0:FORWARD CANCEL to indicate no forward is set.
26
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5021D
Table of Contents
Home Page
PRIVACY RELEASE
DIALING FEATURES
This feature will allow another station to join in our conversation by releasing pri-
vacy on the C.O. from your phone.
SPEED DIALING
To Release Privacy:
You can dial a preprogrammed telephone number stored in the system-wide
speed dial list of numbers 500~999 or from your personal list of numbers 00~49.
While you are talking on a C.O. line and you wish to have other internal parties (or
up to three) join the conversation.
Your system may be set for 950 system wide numbers. If so the system speed dial
access codes are 050~999 and the station speed dial codes are 000~049.
•
Press the PRB button (the PRB button will light steady red). Inform the other
party that he/she may now join the conversation.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press the MEMORY button or dial 16.
Dial the desired speed dial number.
The telephone number is automatically dialed for you.
After the other party (or parties) has joined the conversation and you wish to
return privacy to the line so that no one else can join the conversation, press the
PRB button a second time, the PRB button will be off.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.
To Join a Non-Private Conversation:
PROGRAMMING PERSONAL SPEED
DIAL NUMBERS
When someone has informed you that you can join a conversation:
•
•
Press the C.O. line button that he/she has indicated.
OR
Dial the C.O. line number that he/she has indicated.
You can program frequently dialed telephone numbers in a personal speed dial
list. A station may be assigned up to fifty numbers, 00–49. See your system admin-
istrator to determine the amount assigned to your station.
•
•
•
•
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 105.
Dial a speed dial number (00–49).
Dial a line or line group access code.
Dial the telephone number to be stored (24 digits maximum). It can include #,
ꢀ, FLASH and PAUSE.
•
Press TRANSFER to store the number.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.
A B C D E F
For the purposes of pro-
gramming speed dial num-
bers, the programmable but-
tons are known as A, B, C, D, E
and F and are defined on the
next page.
28
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5021D
Table of Contents
Home Page
•
•
•
•
The A button is not used.
The B button inserts a flash.
The C button inserts a pause.
MANUAL RETRY WITH REDIAL
While you are on an outside call listening to a busy signal and you want to redial
the same number dialed.
The D button is used for pulse to tone conversion. If your system uses rotary
(or pulse) dialing C.O. lines, pressing D while entering a speed dial number
causes all subsequent digits to be sent as DTMF tones.
The E button is used to hide digits. Display keyset users may want to hide
some speed dial numbers so that they will not show in the display. When you
are entering a telephone number, press E. All subsequent digits will be hid-
den. Press E again to begin displaying digits.
The F button is used to enter a name. See Personal Speed Dial Names under
Display Features.
Use the HOLD button to clear a speed dial number.
•
Press the REDIAL button.
•
This will hang up your existing call and manually redial the same number dialed.
You can repeat this operation for a limited number of attempts.
NOTE: If your keyset is programmed with Call Log Blocks then the Redial will
access the call log when pressed.
•
•
SAVE NUMBER WITH REDIAL
To save the number you just dialed for later use, press the SNR button before
ONE TOUCH SPEED DIALING
hanging up.
You may assign any speed dial number to an already existing One Touch Speed
Dial button for quick and easy dialing of frequently used numbers.
To redial this saved number at any time, press the SNR button or dial 17.The same
line will be selected for you.
•
•
•
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 107.
Press a One Touch Speed Dial button.
Dial the speed dial number (00–49 or 500–999) that you want assigned to
this button.
NOTES:
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.
2. The saved telephone number is stored in memory until you save another
number.
•
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
3. Redial does not apply to intercom calls.
To call this telephone number, just press the One Touch Speed Dial button.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.
CHAIN DIALING
You may manually dial additional digits following a speed dial number or chain as
many speed dial numbers together as required:
LAST NUMBER REDIAL
•
After the first speed number is dialed, press MEMORY again and dial another
To redial the last telephone number you dialed, press the REDIAL button or dial
speed number OR manually dial additional digits following a speed dial num-
ber.
19.
NOTES:
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.
2. Redial does not apply to intercom calls.
AUTOMATIC REDIAL/RETRY
When you are making an outside call and you receive a busy signal, the system
can automatically redial the number for you. It will automatically redial at a pre-
programmed interval for up to 15 attempts.
•
•
When you hear a busy signal, press the RETRY button.
The system will reserve the line and automatically redial the same number for
you.You will hear the call being made through the keyset speaker.The micro-
phone is muted.
30
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5021D
Table of Contents
Home Page
•
When the called party answers, lift the handset or press the flashing SPEAK-
ER to begin speaking.
PAGING AND MESSAGING
NOTES:
1. If you make another call, auto-redial is canceled.
2. To cancel a retry, lift and replace the handset.
MAKING AN INTERNAL PAGE
To make an announcement through the keyset speakers:
PULSE TO TONE CHANGEOVER
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset.
Press the PAGE button or dial 55.
Dial the desired zone number 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4.
After the attention tone, make your announcement.
When making an outside call on a dial pulse line, press #. All digits dialed after the
# with be sent as tones.
MEMO REDIALING
NOTE: If you have a dedicated page zone button, it is not necessary to press PAGE
and dial a zone number.
When you are calling directory information, you can store the number you are
given using the SAVE feature. There is no need for pencil and paper.
MAKING AN EXTERNAL PAGE
•
•
•
While you are talking on an outside call, press SAVE.
Dial the telephone number as it is dictated to you on the keypad.
Press SAVE to store the number.
To make an announcement through the external paging speakers:
•
•
•
Lift the handset.
Press the PAGE button or dial 55.
Dial the desired zone number 5, 6, 7 or 8.
OR
To dial the number, press the SNR button. It will select the same line and dial the
stored number. If necessary, you can select a different line and then press the SNR
button.
Dial 9 to page all external zones.
After the attention tone, make your announcement.
•
NOTE: If you have a dedicated page zone button, it is not necessary to press PAGE
and dial a zone number.
ALL PAGE
To page all designated keysets and external speakers at the same time:
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset.
Press the PAGE button or dial 55.
Dial ꢀ or press the ALL PAGE button.
After the attention tone, make your announcement.
NOTE:The LED on the PAGE button will only light when an All Page is in progress.
32
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5021D
Table of Contents
Home Page
To retrieve an automatically parked call:
MEET ME PAGE
•
Dial 10 plus the number that was announced. If you have a PAGPK button,
press it and dial the number that was announced. If you have a PARK button,
press it and dial the announced orbit number.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset.
Press the Meet Me Page (MMPG) button or dial 54.
Dial the desired zone number.
After the attention tone, instruct the paged person to dial 56.
Press WAIT or TRANSFER.
Remain off-hook until the person dials 56 from any phone.
The paged person will be automatically connected with you.
•
You will be connected to the parked call.
NOTES:
1. If the call is not retrieved within a pre-programmed period of time, it will recall
your keyset and have a slow flashing amber light. You cannot park and page
intercom calls.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.
CALL PARK AND PAGE
When you have an outside call for someone who is not at his/her desk, you can
park the call prior to paging. The iDCS 500 offers two different methods:
SETTING A MESSAGE INDICATION
MANUAL PARK ORBITS
When you are calling another station and no one answers or you receive a busy
signal, you can leave a message indication:
•
•
While in conversation, press the PARK button.
Entered a desired orbit number (0-9), if the orbit number is busy dial another
orbit number. Display users can press ꢀ to automatically place the call in any
available orbit number and see the number in the display.
Remember the selected orbit number.
Replace the handset when finished.
Lift the handset and make a page announcement as previously described
(example:“John Smith park two”).
•
•
Press the MESSAGE button or dial 43 and receive confirmation tone.
Hang up. The MESSAGE button on the called station will light. Standard tele-
phones receive special dial tone as a message indication or a lit message
lamp,if the phone is equipped with one and they are connected to an 8MWSLI
card or a 16MWSLI card on the system.
•
•
•
NOTES:
1. A station can have up to five message indications.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.
To retrieve a parked call from orbit:
•
•
Press the PARK button and dial the announced orbit number (0-9).
You will be connected to the parked call.
CANCELING MESSAGES
NOTES:
1. You must have a PARK button or park access code to retrieve and place calls
in park orbits.
2. If the parked call is not retrieved within a pre-programmed period of time, it
will recall your keyset and have a slow flashing amber light. You cannot park
and page intercom calls.
To cancel a message indication that you left at another station, dial 42 plus the
extension number of the station at which you left a message.
To cancel all message indications left at your keyset, dial 42 plus your extension.
Your MESSAGE light will go out.
3. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.
AUTOMATIC PARK WITH PAGE BUTTON
RETURNING MESSAGES
•
While in conversation, press the PAGE button.The call is automatically parked
at your station.
Receive page tone and dial a desired page zone number.
Make announcement indicating your extension number or the line number.
Hang up.
•
Press the MESSAGE button or dial 43.The first station that left a message will
be called automatically. If that station does not answer, your MESSAGE light
will stay on.
•
•
•
•
Repeat until all messages have been returned in the order received.
Your MESSAGE light will turn off when all messages have been returned.
34
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5021D
Table of Contents
Home Page
NOTES:
1. Display keyset users can view message indications and return them in any
order. See Viewing Message Indications under Display Features.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.
3. If a message has been left at your keyset by a keyset in Auto Answer, you must
manually cancel the message after it has been returned.
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
DO NOT DISTURB
Use this feature when you want to block calls to your keyset.
•
•
While on-hook, press the DND button or dial 401. The DND button lights
steady red to remind you of this mode.
To cancel DND, press the DND button again or dial 400. The DND light turns
off.You can make calls while in the DND mode.
PROGRAMMED MESSAGES
When you will be away from your phone for any length of time, you can leave a
programmed station message. Display stations calling you will see this message
and be informed of your status or follow your instructions.
NOTES:
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button.
2. If you place your keyset in DND mode and you do not have a DND button,
your TSI button will flash to indicate DND status.
•
Dial 48 plus any of the message codes (01–20) listed on the back of this user
guide.
To cancel any of these messages you might have selected, dial 48 plus 00.
Press TRANSFER to exit and store your selection.
•
•
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button.
ONE TIME DND
If you are on a call and you do not wish to be interrupted while on that call, you
can press the DND button and place your station in Do Not Disturb. When you
hang up at the end of the call, DND will be automatically canceled and your key-
set will be able to receive new calls. This feature requires a DND button.
You can have multiple programmed message buttons (PMSG) and each one can
have a different message code:
•
•
Press any programmed message (PMSG) button. The message is set and the
button will light red. Press the button again to turn off.
Pressing another programmed message (PMSG) button will turn the previous
one off and set a different programmed message.
MUTE
You can mute the handset transmitter or the microphone during any conversa-
tion:
•
•
Press the MUTE button. It will light red.
To resume speaking, press the MUTE button again. The light turns off.
BACKGROUND MUSIC
When a music source is supplied, you may listen to music through the speaker in
your keyset:
•
•
While on-hook, press the HOLD button to hear music.
Press the HOLD button again to turn music off.
You can set the level of background music by using the VOLUME buttons while lis-
tening to the music. This does not affect the speakerphone level.
36
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5021D
Table of Contents
Home Page
ESTABLISHED CALL PICKUP
ANSWERING THE DOOR PHONE
To pick up an established call in progress at a single line extension connected to a
computer modem on your PC.
When you are programmed to receive calls from a door phone:
•
•
•
You will receive three short rings repeated.
Lift the handset or press SEND button.You are connected to the door phone.
If an electric door lock release is installed, dial 13 to unlock the door.
•
•
Press the EP button for that station on your keyset and the call is automati-
cally moved to your keyset.
The single line extension on your modem will be disconnected.
CALLING THE DOOR PHONE/
ROOM MONITOR
the single line station.
You may call the door phone and listen to what may be happening outside or in
another room.
APPOINTMENT REMINDER/ALARM CLOCK
This feature works like an alarm clock. Use it to remind yourself of an appointment
later in the day (TODAY ONLY) or as a daily reminder every day (DAILY).You can set
up to three alarms. Each one can be either a TODAY ONLY or a DAILY alarm.
•
•
Dial the extension number of the door phone.
You will be connected to the door phone and you can listen or have a con-
versation.
When the alarm rings, you will hear three short rings repeated three times. Lift the
handset to answer the alarm. If you do not, the alarm will alert you two more times
at five minute intervals.
•
If an electric door lock release is installed, dial 13 to unlock the door.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button.
To set alarms:
EXECUTIVE/SECRETARY HOT LINE
•
•
•
Press TRANSFER and then dial 112.
Dial the alarm number 1, 2 or 3.
Dial the time at which you want the alarm to sound. Enter the time as HHMM
(hours and minutes) using the 24 hour clock.
Dial 0 (NOT SET), 1 (TODAY ONLY) or 2 (DAILY) to select the alarm type.
Press TRANSFER to save.
If programmed, an executive and a secretary can have a hot line between them.
When the executive station is in the DND mode, all of its calls will ring the secre-
tary station.
•
•
•
•
•
Either person can press the BOSS button to make a voice call to the other sta-
tion.
Using the hot line will override DND at the other station.This button will light
red when the other station is in use.
Repeat for each alarm if needed.
To cancel individual alarms:
To transfer a call to a Boss in DND:
•
•
•
Press TRANSFER and then dial 112.
Dial alarm number 1, 2 or 3.
Press the HOLD button.
•
•
Press the TRANSFER button followed by the BOSS button.
Wait for the BOSS to answer to announce the call and hang up to complete
the transfer OR
NOTE: Display keysets can show a reminder message. See Alarm Reminder
Messages under Display Features.
•
Hang up to complete a blind transfer after pressing the BOSS button.
38
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5021D
Table of Contents
Home Page
GROUP LISTENING
MANUAL SIGNALLING
When you are engaged on a call and you are using the handset, you may want
other people to hear the distant party’s voice over the speaker:
Use this feature when you want to send a brief 500ms ring burst to another sta-
tion, regardless of the status of your phone (on-hook, off-hook, handsfree, DND, or
ringing).
•
Press the LISTEN button to turn on the speaker.The microphone is not in use,
so the distant party does not hear other parties present in your office.
Press LISTEN again to turn the speaker off and resume private conversation.
Repeat if necessary.
To send a signal to another station:
•
•
•
•
Press the Manual Signalling (MS) button.
You may press the MS button repeatedly to send multiple signals to the des-
ignated station.
NOTE: Depending on speaker volume and the acoustics of your office, it may be
advisable to turn the group listening feature off before hanging up.This will elim-
inate a momentary squeal.
NOTE: Your phone must have a Manual Signalling (MS) button with a station
number extender assigned to it.
ACCOUNT CODES
OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE
When equipped with optional equipment, your system will allow calls to be
charged to a specific account.
Keysets may receive a voice announcement while on another call. The calling sta-
tion must have an OHVA button. When you are in DND, you cannot receive OHVA
calls. The OHVA feature will work with intercom and transferred calls.
•
•
During any outside C.O. call, press the account (ACC) button.
Enter the 3 digit account code bin number when prompted, OR
If your button has an extender of 000 enter the account code (maximum 12
characters including Q and #) and press ACC000 again, OR
When you receive an OHVA and secure OHVA is ON, you will hear the announce-
ment in the handset receiver, if you are using the handset. If secure OHVA is OFF
then you will hear the announcement on the speaker, if you are talking on the
handset. If you are using the speakerphone the announcement will always be
heard through the speaker.
If your button has an extender other than 000 (001~999) account code con-
tained in that bin will automatically be entered for your.
LOCKING YOUR KEYSET
To make an off-hook voice announcement:
You can lock your keyset to control misuse of your phone while you are away.You
can unlock it when you return.Your default station passcode is 1234.
•
•
•
•
•
Dial the extension number or press the DSS button.
When you receive a busy signal, press the OHVA button.
After the attention tone, begin speaking.
Finish the call by replacing the handset or pressing the ANS/RLS button.
Press the flashing CALL button on your keyset. This will place the original
party on hold and allow you to talk to the announcing party.
To return to your first party, press the button corresponding to your original
call. This will disconnect the OHVA call.
•
•
•
•
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 100.
Dial your four digit station passcode.
Dial 1 to locking outgoing, 2 for locked all calls, or 0 to unlock.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
•
1
2
0
LOCKED
OUTGOING
LOCKED
ALL CALLS
UNLOCKED
NOTES:
1. When you are voice announcing to a station close to you, use the handset to
avoid an echo effect.
2. You cannot off-hook voice announce to single line telephones.
NO
Make outside calls
Receive outside calls
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
ACCESS DENIED
YES
NO
NO
NO
Make intercom calls
YES
YES
Receive intercom calls
40
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5021D
Table of Contents
Home Page
OHVA BLOCK
CUSTOMIZING YOUR KEYSET
Your keyset can be programmed with an OHVA Block (BLOCK) button. Pressing
this button will prevent anyone from making an OHVA to you until you press the
button again and cancel the blocking.
AME PASSWORD
This feature allows people using the AME feature to enable password protection.
This will prevent unauthorized people from listening to your messages being left.
The passcode is the same as your station passcode. This feature only applies if
there is an SVM card installed in the system and your keyset has a programmed
AME button.
OHVA REJECT
Your keyset can be programmed with an OHVA Reject (REJECT) button. Pressing
this button while receiving an OHVA call will disconnect the voice announcing
party and return you to your original call.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Dial 101 to turn on AME PASSCODE or 100 to turn it off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
IN GROUP/OUT OF GROUP
If your keyset is assigned to a station ring group, you can remove your keyset from
the group and then put it back in.While you are out of the group, you can receive
calls to your extension number but not calls to the group number. If you have an
IN/OUT button with the group number assigned.
AUTO CAMP-ON
This option allows intercom calls to be automatically camped on, if possible, when
a busy station is called.
•
•
Press the IN/OUT button. It will light red when your keyset is in the group.
Press the IN/OUT button again to exit the group and turn the light off. Repeat
as necessary.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Press 081 to turn CAMP-ON on or 080 to turn it off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
If you do not have an IN/OUT button:
•
Dial the IN/OUT access code number ________________, then the group
number, then 0 to exit the group or 1 to enter the group.
SELECT RING TONE
Each keyset user can select any one of eight ring frequencies:
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the hand-
set or press SPEAKER button.
•
•
•
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 111.
Dial 1–8 or press the UP and DOWN buttons to hear each tone.
When you hear the tone that you prefer, press TRANSFER to save it.
The IN/OUT button can include an extender to indicate the specific group that
this button will affect. This means that if you are in multiple groups, you can de-
cide for which groups you will receive calls.
NOTE: Specific lines or stations may be programmed to ring with a different
tone than what you have selected for your keyset.
CHANGE YOUR PASSCODE
From the factory, your station passcode is 1234.You can change your station pass-
code whenever you desire.
•
•
•
•
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 101.
Dial your old passcode.
Dial a new passcode (must be four characters).You can use 0–9.
Redial the new passcode to verify. If successful, you will hear two beeps. Four
beeps indicate an incorrect code. Reenter the code again.
Press TRANSFER to store the new passcode.
•
42
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5021D
Table of Contents
Home Page
Your keyset may be equipped with a Headset mode button. If it is so equipped
pressing this button while the light is out will cause the keyset to enter headset
mode and the light will illuminate to indicate this. Pressing the button while the
light is lit will cause the keyset to return to handset mode and the light will go out.
SET ANSWER MODE (INTERCOM)
You can receive internal calls in one of three modes (see Answering Intercom Calls
under Intercom Calls for descriptions):
•
•
•
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 103.
Dial 0 for Ringing, 1 for Auto Answer or 2 for Voice Announce.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
HOT KEYPAD
On your phone system your keyset’s keypad can be made“live”or“hot”so that it is
dialing. Calls can be made and features activated by simply dialing the C.O. line
number, trunk group access code, intercom number or feature access code. To ac-
tivate this feature:
NOTE: When your keyset is programmed for Auto Answer and you have Forward
No Answer (FNA) turned on, you must answer screened transfers by pressing the
ANS/RLS button before your FNA timer expires or the call will forward.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Dial 031 to turn the Hot Keypad on or 030 to turn it off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
SET ANSWER MODE (CO)
Your incoming CO calls can be set to follow the intercom answer mode.
•
•
•
•
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110
Dial 15 to access AUTO ANS CO.
Press the VOLUME UP or DOWN key to change status.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
KEY CONFIRMATION TONE
You can hear a short beep (confirmation tone) each time you press a button on the
dial pad. This tone can be turned on or off.
NOTE: When your keyset is programmed for Auto Answer and you have Forward
No Answer (FNA) turned on, you must answer screened transfers by pressing the
ANS/RLS button before your FNA timer expires or the call will forward.
•
•
•
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Dial 040 to turn tones off or 041 to turn tones on.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
AUTOMATIC HOLD
REJOINING A PAGE
While on an outside call, pressing a line button, route button or a flashing CALL
button will automatically put your call on hold and connect you to the next call.
This feature can be turned on or off at your keyset.
This feature allows you to hear the remaining portion of an ongoing internal page
after you return your keyset to idle. To enable this feature:
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Dial 051 to turn this feature on or 050 to turn it off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Dial 001 to turn Automatic Hold on or 000 to turn it off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
RING PREFERENCE
NOTE: Intercom calls can be automatically put on hold by pressing TRANSFER.
This feature automatically answers ringing calls when you lift the handset or press
the SEND or ANS/RLS button. This method will always answer calls in the order
they arrived at your keyset. When you turn ring preference off, you must press the
flashing button to answer a call, allowing you to answer calls in the order you
choose.
HEADSET OPERATION
Keyset users can switch between headset mode and handset mode. When using
headset mode, press the SEND/END or ANS/RLS button to answer and release
calls.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Dial 061 to turn ring preference on or 060 to turn it off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Dial 021 to use the headset or 020 to use the handset.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
45
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5021D
Table of Contents
Home Page
ENBLOCK DIALING
AUTO ANSWER CO CALLS
This option allows you to dial digits then press the SEND button to make the call
This option will allow CO calls that directly ring your phone to auto answer.When
a CO call arrives at your station and this option set for ON your phone will sound
two beeps, the same as when a screened transfer is completed, and you will be
connected to the CO call. In order for this option to work the station must also be
programmed for auto answer (see SET ANSWER MODE).
(like a cellphone).
•
•
•
While the handset on-hook press TRANSFER then dial 110.
Dial 161 to turn Enblock Dialing ON or 160 to turn it off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
•
•
•
While on hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Dial 151 to turn Auto Answer CO on or 150 to turn it off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
NOTE: Outside lines must ring your station directly for the Auto Answer CO to
work. Lines ringing a station group will not cause your phone to Auto Answer.
DISPLAY SPEED DIAL NAME
This option allows you to view the name associated with a speed dial number as
it is dialed.
•
•
•
With you handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Press 111 to turn DISP SPDNAME on or 110 to turn it off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
CALLER ID REVIEW ALL
This feature allows display keyset users to review Caller ID information for calls
sent to their stations.This list can be from ten to fifty calls in a first in,first out basis.
The list includes calls that you answered and calls that rang your station but that
you did not answer.When reviewing this list, you can press one button to dial the
person back. The system must be using LCR to dial the stored number.
•
•
•
With you handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Press 121 to turn CID REVIEW ALL on or 120 to turn it off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
SECURE OHVA
This option allows you to receive OHVA calls via the speaker while you are on the
handset.
•
•
•
With you handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Press 131 to turn AUTO CAMP-ON on or 130 to turn it off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
46
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5021D
(See also Special Application Menu-Outgoing Call Log)
Table of Contents
Home Page
CALL LOG
DISPLAY FEATURES
The system can log both incoming and outgoing calls placed from or to your tele-
phone. You must have a LOG button programmed on your keyset and assigned a
review list.
INTERACTIVE DISPLAY KEYS
The three keys below the display are substitutes for dedicated feature keys and ac-
cess codes. Pressing one of these buttons has the same effect as pressing a pro-
grammable button. These buttons are called soft keys as their functions are not
fixed.They change to present you with the best options for that call condition.The
use of soft keys allows the programmable buttons to be used for more DSS and
speed dial buttons.
Each IN and OUT list can be up to 50 numbers maximum. They are assigned in
blocks of 10 each.
•
•
•
Press the LOG key.
Press either the IN or OUT key.
View the first IN/OUT telephone number. At this point you may select one of
the three options related to this number or use the UP/DOWN keys to scroll
through your list of calls.
Press the CLEAR button to erase this number from the list.
Press the NND key repeatedly to view the Name, Number, or Date associated
with this call.
The SCROLL button is used to display options available to the user at a particular
time or during a specific procedure. Press this button once while in the idle state
to view the three main categories available.
•
•
201: STN NAME
•
Press the DIAL key to call this number.
CALL OTHER ANS
ANSWER: Guides you through the options to answer calls.
OTHER: Guides you through features other than making or answering calls.
CALL: Guides you through the options to make a call.
These options are the same for the incoming or outgoing call logs.
DIAL BY NAME
(See also Special Application Menu-Name Search)
Each station or speed dial number can have an associated directory name. A sta-
tion or speed dial number can be selected by scrolling alphabetically through a
directory name list. This on-line “phone book” allows the user to look up and dial
any station or speed dial number in seconds.
Select one of the main categories: CALL, OTHER or ANS (ANSWER). Press the
SCROLL button to display additional options available under each of the three
main categories.The symbol ꢁ displayed as the last character on the lower line of
the display indicates that there are additional options. Press the SCROLL button to
display these additional options.
•
•
Press the DIR button (DIRECTORY).
Select the directory you wish to use: PERS (personal speed dial numbers), SYS
(system speed dial numbers) or STN (station names).
Dial the key on the keypad that corresponds to the first letter of the name you
wish to search for.
User instructions will be displayed in lower case letters. Options assigned to soft
keys will be in upper case letters.
•
DIRECTORY INFORMATION
•
•
Use the UP and DOWN arrows to scroll through the names.
Press the DIAL soft key to dial the number.
An 11 character directory name can be assigned to each extension number.
Display keyset users can view the name of the called or calling station before an-
swering.
NOTE: A DIR button can have an extender to take you directly to one of the above
lists (PERS, SYS, or STN).
Each outside line can have an 11 character directory name. Incoming calls can be
easily identified and answered with different greetings.
Outside and internal calls ringing to a station group will display [CALL FOR xxx]
where xxx is the station group number.This allows you to answer calls directed to
you differently than calls directed to your group.
48
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5021D
Table of Contents
Home Page
CALL PROGRESS DISPLAYS
VIEWING MESSAGE INDICATIONS
During everyday call handling, your keyset display will provide information that is
helpful and in some cases invaluable. Displays like [CALL FROM 203], [TRANSFER
TO 202], [701: RINGING], [TRANSFER FM 203], [708 busy], [Camp on to 204], [Recall
from 204], [Call for 501], [message frm 204] and [FWD ALL to 204] keep you in-
formed of what is happening and where you are. In some conditions you are
prompted to take an action and in other cases you receive directory information.
You can view all of your message indications before you return them:
•
With the handset on-hook, press the MESSAGE button with the red flashing
light.
•
•
The first station that left a message indication will be displayed.
Press the UP and DOWN arrows to scroll through the stations that left mes-
sage indications. Use the soft keys to reply, clear or advance to the next mes-
sage.
DISPLAY NUMBER DIALED
•
Press the END or ANS/RLS button to return your keyset to the idle condition.
Display keysets begin showing digits as they are dialed. They will stay in the dis-
play until the call duration timer comes on automatically or the TIMER button is
pressed. If the call duration timer is not used, the number dialed will be displayed
until the call is released, transferred or put on hold.
ALARM REMINDER MESSAGES
(See also Special Application Menu-Name Search)
When you use the alarm/appointment reminder feature, you create a 16 charac-
ter reminder message. When the alarm rings, your message will appear instead of
[ALARM REMINDER]. To program reminder messages:
CALL DURATION TIMER
The system can be set to automatically time outside calls. A few seconds after you
dial a telephone number, the timer appears in the display. It appears immediately
for incoming calls. The call timer continues for the duration of the call. Call dura-
tion times are displayed in minutes and seconds. If a call lasts longer than 60 min-
utes, the timer restarts.
•
•
•
Press TRANSFER and then dial 116.
Dial the alarm number 1, 2 or 3.
Dial the time you want the alarm to go off.Enter the time as HHMM (hours and
minutes) using the 24 hour clock.
•
•
Dial 0 (NOT SET), 1 (TODAY) or 2 (DAILY) to select the alarm type.
Write your message using the dial pad keys. Each press of a key selects a char-
acter. Pressing the next key moves the cursor to the next position. For exam-
ple, if your message is “TAKE MEDICATION,” press 8 once to get the letter “T.”
Press 2 once to get “A.” Press 5 twice to get “K.” Continue selecting characters
from the following table to complete your message.
You can press the TIMER button to manually begin timing a call. Press it again to
stop timing. If you press it while the automatic timer is on, the call duration time is
restarted.
AUTO TIMER
Display keyset users may have the timer automatically start when they answer
incoming calls or after a short delay on an outgoing call.
•
•
Press the TRANSFER button to store the alarm and reminder message.
Repeat for each alarm if needed.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Dial 011 to turn the auto timer on or 010 to turn it off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
COUNT
DIAL 0
DIAL 1
DIAL 2
DIAL 3
DIAL 4
DIAL 5
DIAL 6
1
2
>
?
3
.
4
)
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
<
TIMER FUNCTION
space
,
!
Display keyset users may use this feature as a simple stopwatch.
A
D
G
J
B
E
C
F
I
@
#
$
%
^
•
•
•
•
When the keyset is idle, press the TIMER button to start timing.
Press the TIMER button again to stop timing.
Read the elapsed time in the display.
H
K
N
Lift the handset and replace it. The display will return to date and time.
L
O
M
50
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5021D
Table of Contents
Home Page
DIAL 7
DIAL 8
DIAL 9
DIAL ꢀ
NOTES:
P
T
W
:
Q
U
X
=
R
V
Y
[
S
Q
Z
]
7
8
9
ꢀ
MANAGING KEY ASSIGNMENTS
You can view your key assignments and add extenders to some of your program-
mable keys for easy one touch operation of frequently used features.
•
•
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 107.
Use the VOLUME buttons to scroll through all of your programmable buttons
OR press the programmable button to which you want to add the extender.
When you reach a key listed below, dial the corresponding extender.
Press TRANSFER to store and exit programming.
•
•
1. When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previ-
ous character, press UP to move the cursor one space to the right.
2. Other symbols are available for DIAL #.
Please refer to the Enhanced Display Programming Section provided by your instal-
lation company when requested for a complete list of descriptions and extenders
for any keys you may have programmed on your keyset.
To cancel an individual alarm and reminder message:
•
•
•
•
Press TRANSFER and then dial 112.
Dial alarm number 1, 2 or 3.
Press the HOLD button.
NOTE: Confirm that the cursor is placed correctly before you enter the extender.
LCR WITH CLEAR
Press the TRANSFER button.
When you are making an outside call using LCR and dial an incorrect digit, you can
press the CLEAR soft key to reenter the telephone number. You do not need to
redial 9 to reaccess LCR.
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NAMES
Each personal speed dial number can have an 11 character name assigned to it.
This name is used to select the speed dial bin when you are dialing by directory.
BACKSPACE WITH LCR
•
•
•
Press TRANSFER and then dial 106.
Dial the speed dial bin number 00–49.
Write your message using the procedure described in Alarm Reminder Mes-
sages.
If you misdial while using LCR, you can delete digits shown in the display by press-
ing the BSPC soft key as many times as necessary.
•
•
Press the TRANSFER button to store the speed dial name.
Repeat for each speed dial bin if necessary.
STATION NAMES
You can assign an 11 character name to your keyset.This allows other display key-
set users to call you using the directory dial feature.
To program a station name:
•
•
Press TRANSFER and then dial 104.
Enter the 11 character name using the procedure described in Alarm Remind-
er Messages.
•
Press TRANSFER to store the name.
52
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5021D
Table of Contents
Home Page
Press TRANSFER
TEXT MESSAGING
Transfer:
RETURN
This feature allows two digital keyset users to respond to each other with prepro-
grammed text messages. After receiving an Off Hook Voice Announcement or
Station Camp-On, you may respond with a text message while continuing to talk
and listen to your outside party.The other station can view this message and take
the appropriate action or respond back with another text message.
Dial 205
205:busy
OHVA
CAMP ON
You must be permitted to use the Text Messaging feature. See your System
Administrator or Technician to be assigned this feature. They will assign you ten
(10) blank messages.You can create any 16 character messages (01 to 10) that are
appropriate for your use.
Ð
OHVA to 205
OHVA from 201
TMSG
REJECT
NOTE: See ALARM REMINDER MESSAGES for instructions on how to enter charac-
ters to create a text message.
Wait for reply
GIVE THE CALL
TMSG:01
SEND
Familiarization with the two digit message numbers you will use the most will
make this procedure quick and easy. However if you do not know them, use the
UP/DOWN button to scroll to the desired message, then press SEND.
Dial 03 or press Ï twice
The basics steps in text messaging are:
ASK THEM TO HOLD
TMSG:03
SEND
1. Press TMSG soft key to begin text messaging.
2. Dial the 2 digit number for the desired message.
3. Confirm this is the intended message then press SEND.
4. Wait for a reply from the other station (steps 1, 2 & 3)
5. When any station presses EXIT the displays at both stations return to their
previous call progress condition.
Ð
ASK THEM TO HOLD
Wait for reply
TMSG
EXIT
Ð
702:
01:45
701:
05:55
At all times after step 1 you can talk and listen to your caller while repeating steps
2.
CONF PAGE MUTE
CONF PAGE MUTE
The following example will better demonstrate how to use Text Messaging. In this
example station 201 is making an off hook voice announcement to station 205
who after hearing the announcement will respond with a text message.
STATION 201: LINDA
STATION 205: JOHN
received a call on line 702
is talking on line 701
Talking on line 702
702:
01:15
701:
05:25
CONF PAGE MUTE
54
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5021D
Table of Contents
Home Page
NO CID DSP
Caller ID Digital Signal Processors (CIDDSP’s) are resources
in the iDCS system required for receiving CID data. If there
are no CIDDSP’s available at the time a call comes in, this is
the message you will see on your display.
CALLER ID
WHAT IS CALLER ID?
NOTE:The Caller ID features require optional software and/or hardware.Please see
your service and installation company for details.
Caller ID is the name given to the telephone company-provided feature that de-
livers the telephone number and sometimes the name of the person calling your
phone. There are two types of Caller ID; the first delivers the calling party’s tele-
phone number only and the second (sometimes referred to as “Deluxe” Caller ID)
delivers both the calling party’s telephone number and name as listed in the tele-
phone directory.
WHAT IS ANI?
ANI (Automatic Number Identification) is a feature offered by some telephone
service providers that provides the calling party’s telephone number. This service
is only available on E&M Tie Lines on a T1, digital trunk. ANI is similar to Caller
Identification (CID) but the format and information of the calling person is differ-
ent. CID uses FSK signalling and ANI uses DTMF signalling. Usually, with ANI, a call-
ing party’s identity is the Listed Directory Number (LDN) unless a separate bill-to-
number has been specified, (in which case the bill-to-number will be sent). Note
that ANI does not provide calling party NAME,only the number.The phone system
can provide calling number to name translation table.
The phone system can handle both types of Caller ID; in fact, in the case of num-
ber only delivery, the system can be programmed to insert a name for a specific
telephone number. However, even though you are paying to receive Caller ID
information, there are some circumstances that mean you will not receive this in-
formation. The six most common reasons are listed below along with the display
information that the system will provide.
PRIVATE
The caller does not wish his/her name or number to be re-
vealed to you. This type of call can be stopped at the tele-
phone company by dialing an access code on your outside
lines. This will redirect these PRIVATE calls to an announce-
ment that states that you do not wish to receive calls that
have had Caller ID blocked.The code to block these calls can
usually be found in the front section of the telephone direc-
tory.
WHAT IS CLI?
On ISDN circuits, calling party information is called CLI and is supported on both
BRI and PRI type circuits on the iDCS. On BRI circuits the iDCS only supports num-
ber delivery and, like ANI, a name can be attached to the telephone number of fre-
quent callers via the Caller ID translation table. On 5ESS and NI2 PRI circuits both
name and number support is provided on the iDCS system. On a DMS100 circuit
only number service is provided.
OUT OF AREA
PAYPHONE
The caller is calling from an area that cannot provide Caller
ID information (for example, international calls) or he/she is
calling from a type of circuit that cannot provide Caller ID
information, for example, some outbound WATS lines.
SELECTING YOUR CALLER ID
DISPLAY
You can decide if you want to see the Caller ID name or Caller ID number in the
display.Regardless of which one is selected,you can press the NND button to view
the other pieces of Caller ID information. To select the type of Caller ID informa-
tion you wish to view first:
The caller is calling from a coin-operated telephone. The
telephone company will send this information as there are
no directory listings for pay phones.The number will be de-
livered as usual.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 119.
Dial 0 for CID options, 1 for ANI options, or 2 for CLI options.
Dial 0 if you do not wish to view CID information, 1 to view the NUMBER first
or 2 to view the NAME first.
INVALID CID INFO
NO CID RECEIVED
This is a message that will be displayed when CID informa-
tion is sent on the line but was somehow corrupted.
This is a message that will be displayed when there was no
CID information sent on the line.
•
Press TRANSFER to exit and store your selection.
56
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5021D
Table of Contents
Home Page
VIEWING THE NEXT CALLER ID CALL
INQUIRE CALLER ID PARK/HOLD INFO
In the event that you have a call waiting or a camped-on call at your keyset, you
can press the NEXT button to display the Caller ID information associated with
the call in queue at your keyset. Either the CID name or CID number will show in
the display depending on your Name/Number selection.
If you are informed that an incoming call is on hold or has been parked for you,
you may view the Caller ID information before you retrieve the call.This may influ-
ence how you choose to handle the call.
From an idle keyset:
To view Caller ID information for calls that have been camped-on to your keyset,
press the NEXT button. If your keyset does not have a NEXT button, press the CID
button and then the NEXT soft key.
•
Press the INQUIRE button, OR
Press the CID button and then the INQUIRE soft key.
Dial the trunk number.
You may now answer the call by pressing the ANS button, OR
You may use NND to view more information about this call, OR
You can return to the idle condition by pressing IGNORE.
•
•
SAVING THE CALLER ID NUMBER
At any time during an incoming call that provides CID information, you may press
the SAVE button to save the CID number.If your keyset does not have a SAVE but-
ton, press the CID button, the SCROLL button and then the SAVE soft key.The sys-
tem must be using LCR to dial the saved number.
If you are on a call:
•
Press the INQUIRE button.Your existing call will go on hold, OR
Press the CID button and then the INQUIRE soft key to place the first call on
hold.
REDIALING A SAVED CALLER ID
•
•
Dial the trunk number.
NUMBER
You may now answer the call by pressing the ANS button, OR
You may use NND to view more information about this call, OR
You can return to the idle condition by pressing IGNORE.
To redial a number that has been saved, press the SNR button or dial 17.
NOTES:
NOTES:
1. Your telephone system must have LCR correctly programmed to redial the
saved number.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.
1. If you are on an intercom call or you have Automatic Hold turned off, you
must finish the existing call or place it on hold before inquiring.
2. If you inquire about an outgoing call, you will receive a [call no longer avail-
able] display.
STORING A CALLER ID NUMBER
REVIEWING PAST CALLER ID CALLS
At any time during an incoming call that provides CID information, you may save
the CID number as a speed dial number in your personal speed dial list.To store a
Caller ID number in a personal speed dial bin:
This feature allows you to review CID information for calls sent to your keyset.This
list can contain 10–50 calls in a last-in,first-out basis.The list includes calls that you
answered and calls that rang your keyset but that you did not answer. When
reviewing this list, you can press one button to dial the person back. The system
must be using LCR to dial the stored number.To access the CID information stored
in your REVIEW list:
•
Press the STORE button. The system displays the speed dial bin in which the
number was stored, OR
•
•
•
Press the CID button and then press the SCROLL button.
Press the STORE soft key.
The system displays the speed dial bin in which the number was stored.
•
Press the REVIEW button, OR
Press the CID button and then press the REVIEW button.
NOTE: Your telephone system must have LCR correctly programmed to redial the
saved number. If LCR is not being used on your system, you will not be allowed to
STORE CID numbers.
58
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5021D
Table of Contents
Home Page
•
•
If you have entries in your review list, the most recent call will be shown first.
You can now CLEAR this entry, OR
Use NND to view more information about this call, OR
Press DIAL to call this person back, OR
Press SCROLL and then press STORE to save this number in a personal speed
dial bin.
SPECIAL APPLICATION MENU
Below are instructions for additional call processing and special applications that
can be accomplished via the LCD programming.These features and functions can
be accessed by pressing the MENU button. Follow the user instructions below to
utilize these features and functions.
NOTES:
1. Each keyset defaults with ten review bins. Please see your system administra-
tor to determine the number of bins assigned to your keyset.
2. Your system must have LCR correctly programmed to allow you to DIAL num-
bers from the review list or to STORE entries from the review list.
After pressing the MENU button, use the direction button to scroll to the desired
menu option. Press ENTER to access the menu. To navigate within the menu you
may scroll to the desired option/function or dial the associated option function
number.
Press END button to exit programming.
MENU OPTIONS
Note that some of the features listed here may require system programming and
configuration in order to function. See your system administrator for details.
Press the MENU button to access the options below. Use the UP/DOWN direc-
tional button to scroll to, and within option menus and sub menus. You may also
dial the option number, after pressing the MENU button.
1. OUTGOING LOGS: Allows you to view a list of the 30 most recent outgoing
calls from the keyset. You may return the call directly from the displayed sta-
tus.
•
•
•
Scroll or dial option number 1. Outgoing Call Log.
Press ENTER.
Scroll to the desired PHONE NUMBER and press the SEND button to
automatically dial the number.
OR
•
Press CANCEL to return to Main Menu.
OR
•
Press END to exit programming.
2. INCOMING LOGS: Allows you to view a list of the 30 most recent incoming
calls to the keyset.You may return the call directly from the displayed status.
•
•
Scroll or dial option number 2. Incoming Call Log.
Scroll to the desired PHONE NUMBER and press the SEND button to
automatically dial the number.
OR
•
Press CANCEL to return to Main Menu.
60
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5021D
Table of Contents
Home Page
2. ALL FWD NO.
OR
•
Press END to exit programming.
3. BUSY FWD NO.
4. NOANS FWD NO.
5. DND FWD NO.
0. FWD CANCEL
3. SPEED DIAL: Allows you to search through Station and System Speed Dial
Numbers.You may dial the number directly from the displayed status.
•
•
Press ENTER.
•
•
•
Scroll or dial option number 3. Speed Dial.
Press ENTER.
Scroll to option or dial desired option.
Scroll to or dial 1. FORWARD TYPE and scroll to or dial the desired for-
ward type.
Press ENTER to activate the desired call forward type.
Press CANCEL to return to main menu.
•
•
1. Personal Speed
2. System Speed
OR
•
•
Press ENTER.
Press END to exit programming.
OR
•
6. ALARM REMINDER: Allows you to set an Alarm Reminder. Up to three alarms
Scroll to the desired number and press the SEND button to automatical-
may be set.
ly dial the number.
OR
•
OR
•
•
•
•
•
Scroll or dial option number 6. Alarm Reminder.
Scroll or dial the desired Alarm number (Alarm 1-3).
Press ENTER.
Press CANCEL to return to main menu.
Press END to exit programming.
Enter Alarm Type.
4. DIRECTORY DIAL: Allows you to search for station speed, system speed and
0. NOT SET: Disables alarm.
1. TODAY: Rings alarm one time only, on the day set.
2. DAILY: Rings alarm daily at time set.
station numbers based on their associated programmed name.
•
•
•
Scroll or dial option number 4. Directory Dial.
Press ENTER.
Scroll to option or dial desired option.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press ENTER.
Display confirms setting and returns to that alarm set menu.
Scroll up to set ALARM TIME.
Press ENTER.
Enter ALARM TIME (Military Format).
Press ENTER.
1. Personal Speed
2. System Speed
3. Station Number
•
•
Enter the name associated with that speed number or station number.
Press the SEND button to automatically dial the number.
Display confirms setting.
Press CANCEL to return to main menu.
OR
•
OR
•
Press CANCEL to return to main menu.
Press END to exit programming.
OR
•
Press END to exit programming.
5. FORWARD SET: Allows you to assign station call forward condition for the
phone.You must first set the forward type and destination (Options 2-5) then
activate the forwarding in option 1.
•
•
•
Scroll or dial option number 5. Forward Set.
Press ENTER.
Scroll to or dial the desired forward option and assign station number to
forward your station to.
62
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5021D
Table of Contents
Home Page
ACCESSING YOUR MAILBOX
[Also known as Subscriber Services Menu]
SVMi-8/SVMi-16E
This section describes how to setup and use the various features available to a
Subscriber. A Subscriber is a person that has been authorized access to the vari-
ous features and services available in the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E. Please review this sec-
tion carefully before you use your Authorized Features and Services, known as
Subscriber Services.
Inside Callers [Subscriber logging in from their Desk]
•
Dial the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E access number or press the key assigned to ring
SVMi-8/SVMi-16E [VMMSG].
•
Enter your personal password when prompted (the default password is
0000).
Voice Mail is one of the Subscriber Services available. Your voice mail box has the
capability of storing private messages, and offers a number of options for sending
or redirecting messages as well as provides several ways to notify you of new mes-
sages.
Outside Callers [Subscribers calling from Cell Phones or outside of the
office environment]
•
•
•
Dial the phone number that will be answered by the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E. The
main greeting will answer.
At the main greeting dial [#] plus your Subscriber (or mailbox) number
(Subscriber and Mailbox numbers will usually match your extension number).
Enter your personal password when prompted (the default password is
0000).
Another very common Subscriber Service is Access Manager.This allows you con-
trol over when and where you receive your calls as well as what to speak to your
callers in the event you are unable to speak to them directly. The ‘events’ are
referred to as “Call Conditions”. No-Answer, Busy, and Blocked are the most com-
monly used Call Conditions.
Access your Subscriber Services (or Mailbox) from a Station
other than your Own (or checking a mailbox associated with a
different station)
This guide can be used by Subscribers from within the office or from telephones
outside the office. The basic operation is the same, but the access method will be
different. See the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E Subscriber Services Menu Diagram for more
details.
•
Press the [VMMSG] key or dial the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E group number.You will
be prompted to enter a password.
Note that some features and prompts detailed here may not be available to all
Subscribers. See your System Administrator if you have questions about feature
availability.
•
•
Press [ꢀ]. This will take you to the Main Auto Attendant Menu.
Press [#] plus the Subscriber number of your choice.You will be prompted to
enter you password.
At this point the inside and outside callers follow the same instructions. You will
hear a message stating the number of messages left in your mailbox.You will then
hear the Subscriber Services Menu with the following options:
1
2
3
4
5
6
#
ꢀ
Listen to New Messages - See Listening to your Message.
Record and Send Message - See Sending Messages.
Review Saved Messages - See Listening to your Message.
Access Manager - See Access Manager.
Personal Greetings - See Personal Greetings.
Mailbox Administration - See Mailbox Administration.
Personal Services - See Personal Services.
Return to Main Menu.
64
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5021D
Table of Contents
Home Page
SVMi-8/SVMi-16E Subscriber Services Menu
Group New
Messages
Group Saved
Messages
Listen to New Review Saved
Messages
Record & Send
Messages
Access
Manager
Personal
Greetings
Mailbox
Administration
Personal
Services
Pause, Resume
Play Menu
Options
Exit
Messages
11
33
1
3
2
4
5
6
#
8
0
*
Assign and/or Edit
Primary Greeting
Change
Message Alert
Review
Workload
Group Messages Menu
Listen Menu
Record Menu
Follow Me
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
0
1
Group
Urgent Messages
Play
Message
For a Directory
of Subscribers
Assign and/or Edit
Busy Greeting
Change
Pager Notification
Edit Stored
Telephone Numbers
Block All Calls
Call forwarding
Call Screening
Find Me
1
1
11
2
#
3
4
5
6
7
8
#
0
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
2
3
5
7
8
9
#
0
Play Previous
Message
To Create a
Reminder
Group
Callback Requests
Assign and/or Edit
Blocking Greeting
Review Deleted
Messages
Change
Weekly Schedule
Change
Password
##
2
3
4
5
8
9
#
0
1
2
Save
Message
Group
Reminders
Assign and/or Edit
Night Greeting
Review Undelivered
Messages
Place a
Direct Call
Record
Name
"Enter the Recipient's Number"
Discard
Message
Review
Recording
3
Group
Private Messages
1
Assign and/or Edit
Screened Greeting
Auto Play
New Messages
Enter Directory
Name
3
3
Reply to Sender
4
Stop, Append to
Recording
2
Group
Fax Only Messages
Edit Only
Personal Greetings
Auto Play Message
Information
Extended
Prompting
Personal
Administration
4
8
0
Place
Call to Sender
5
Discard Recording
and Rerecord
3
Auto Set
Night Intercept
Edit Only
Mailbox Greeting
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
Deliver Copy
of Fax Message
55
6
Set
Delivery Options
4
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
R
e
c
o
r
d
an
d
S
e
nd
Subscriber
Administration
Play
Menu Options
Forward a
Copy of Message
Broadcast Message
Specify
Future Delivery
5
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
Play
Access Coverage
Play
Menu Options
Play
Menu Options
Record
a Reminder
Cancel, Return
Rewind
5 Seconds
7
t
o
S
u
b
s
c
r
i
be
r
S
ervices
SEND Message,
Then Copy
*
6
Change
Playback Volume
Group
A Specific Sender
Play
Menu Options
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
Cancel, Return
Play
Menu Options
77
8
t
o S cr r Services
u
b
s
i
b
e
Rewind
5 Seconds
*
*
7
Pause, Resume
Message Playback
Play
Message Inventory
Cancel, Return
Cancel, Return
r Services
e
o
sc
Sub riber Services
t
o
S
u
b
s
c
ri
b
Change
Playback Volume
*
*
77
Fast Forward
5 Seconds
9
Play
Menu Options
Pause, Resume
Record/Playback
8
Change
Playback Speed
99
#
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
Fast Forward
5 Seconds
9
Skip to
Next Message
*
Change
Playback Speed
99
Scan Messages
##
0
SEND Message,
Then Exit Record
Play
Menu Options
#
Play
Menu Options
Play Message
Information
0
00
C
S
a
n
u
ce
b
l
s
,
R
e
t
e
u
r
n
Ca
n
c
e
l
,
R
e
t
u
r
n
Subscriber Services
t
o
c
ib
r Services
t
*
*
NOTE: All options shown MAY NOT be authorized. If an option is not available
please speak to your system administrator.
66
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5021D
Table of Contents
Home Page
PLAY MENU OPTIONS
0
ꢀ
#
GETTING STARTED
EXIT TO AUTO ATTENDANT
PERSONAL SERVICES
Using your new SVMi-8/SVMi-16E Subscriber Services is as simple as following a
few simple spoken instructions. First time users should read this section as a tuto-
rial.You should start with the following steps:
•
Access your Subscriber Services Menu - You already know how to do this.
1 or 3
From the Subscriber Services Menu:
LISTENING TO OLD OR NEW MESSAGES
•
•
•
•
•
Record a Primary/No-Answer Personal Greeting. Dial [5][1].
Record a Mailbox Greeting. Dial [5][7].
Change your access code (Password). Dial [#][7][1].
Record your name. Dial [#][7][2].
1
Play / replay the message you just heard.
Play the previous message.
11
2
Enter your directory name. Dial [#][7][3].
Save the message you just heard and listen to the next message.
Delete the message you just heard and listen to the next message.
Reply to the message.
3
After you have completed the steps above your Subscriber Services are set up and
ready to use.
4
This will allow you to leave a message in the mailbox of the sender (if the
sender has a mailbox on this system).
LISTEN TO YOUR MESSAGES
5
Return the call directly to the telephone number that left the message.
If there are new messages in your mailbox your [VMMSG] key will be lit. Call the
SVMi-8/SVMi-16E by pressing this key, and when prompted enter your password.
You will then be at the Subscriber Services Menu. Select [1] to listen to new mes-
sages or [3] to listen to saved messages.
This will work for internal and external callers, but Caller ID service is need-
ed to use this feature on an outside call.
55
Deliver a fax copy.
This will allow you to receive attached faxmail document(s). Faxmail docu-
ments can be delivered to any fax machine of your choice as long as out
calling is authorized. You can also have faxmail messages automatically
delivered to the fax machine of your choice.
Note:After you enter your password, if“Autoplay of New Messages”is enabled and
you have new messages the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E will begin to play them automati-
cally. A subscriber can control this feature. From the Subscriber Services Menu [6]
[5] toggles “Autoplay of New Messages” ON/OFF.
6
Forward the message and saves a copy.
SUBSCRIBER SERVICES MENU
The subscriber can be selected by dialing their mailbox number (nnn),
using the directory service (#) or you may also add comments and leave it
as a memo to yourself (##).
The following is a list of all the options available in the Subscriber Main Menu.
1
LISTENING TO NEW MESSAGES
GROUP NEW MESSAGES
RECORD AND SEND A MESSAGE
LISTENING TO OLD MESSAGES
GROUP OLD MESSAGES
ACCESS MANAGER
The Send and Copy Service (option 6) allows a user to send copies of a mes-
sage to multiple recipients easily. A different introduction message may be
left for each recipient.
11
2
7
Rewind the message 5 seconds.
3
77
Change playback volume of the recording.
33
4
There are two levels of volume during playback. Dialing this code will tog-
gle between the two levels.
5
PERSONAL GREETINGS
8
9
Pause or resume during message playback.
Fast forward the message 5 seconds.
6
MAILBOX ADMINISTRATION
PAUSE / RESUME
8
68
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5021D
Table of Contents
Home Page
99
0
Change playback speed of the recording.
b) Record your message at the tone. After recording the message, you will hear
the Send Menu with the following functions:
There are two levels of speed during playback. Dialing this code will toggle
between the two speeds.
1
2
3
4
5
6
#
Review
Continue Recording
Discard and Re-Record
Set Message Attributes (Delivery Options)
Schedule Future Delivery
Play options.
Pressing this key will play all the menu options available to you from this
point.
00
#
Hear the time and date, and sender's information of the message you just
heard. Sender information is not available on outside calls.
Save and Send then Send a Copy to Someone Else
Save and Send the Recording
Move to the next message. This does not Save or Discard the current mes-
sage - it is retained as new.
Setting Message Attributes
##
Scan. Plays first 7 seconds of a message then skips to next message. This is
similar to the scan button on a radio. It will allow you to find a specific mes-
sage quickly. To stop scanning press [1].
If after recording a message you select [4] you can set up any combination of the
following delivery options:
1
2
3
4
5
ꢀ
Urgent Delivery
Return Receipt Requested
Request a Call Back
Private Delivery
Reply Required
Exit
ꢀ
Cancel and return to previous menu.
11 or 33
GROUP NEW OR OLD MESSAGES
Scheduling Future Delivery
Messages can be grouped as either Reminders, press [3] or Messages from a spe-
cific sender, press [9].
If after recording a message you select [5] to schedule future delivery, you will be
able to set message attributes and set this message as:
Additionally you can press [#] and hear a summary of your mailbox contents:
#
1
2
3
4
5
ꢀ
Immediate Delivery
Next Few Hours
End of Current Business Day (based on your Availability Schedule)
Beginning of Next Business Day (based on your Availability Schedule)
A Coming Day of the Week
Specific Day / Time
Exit
a) Number of messages
b) Number of reminders
c) Number of urgent messages
d) Number of messages needing a callback
e) Number of private messages
f) Number of fax messages
2
4
RECORD AND SEND A MESSAGE
ACCESS MANAGER
This option is used to send a message to another subscriber.The steps are simple:
The Access Manager allows the subscriber to set a number of options for when,
where and how, and/or if the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E contacts you when a caller dials
your extension number. All of the options are toggled on/off based on their cur-
rent status when you access them.
a) Enter the recipient’s mailbox number, or if this is not known enter [#] to use
the system directory.
70
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5021D
Table of Contents
Home Page
Note: ALL Access Manager options MUST be individually allowed by the System
Administrator for each Subscriber. They are:
then play your primary, No Answer greeting during the day (when you are
available) and will NOT ring your extension but simply play your Night greet-
ing during the night (when you are not available).
1
Follow Me
Note: This does NOT use the Day and Night schedules of the phone system. It
Allows the subscriber to enter an alternate location and set how long the new
destination (Designated Location) will be active. This number may be an
internal or external number. This is useful if you are frequently traveling or
changing the number where you can be reached.
is solely controlled by the Subscriber’s Availability Schedule.
8
ꢀ
0
#
Pause / Resume
Exit from Access Manager
Play All Options
When Follow Me is activated, the transfer will be supervised and confirmed.
This means that if the call is not answered or if rejected by the Subscriber at
the designated location it will be recalled to the Subscriber’s mailbox.
Play Access Coverage
This feature is useful for finding out how you current access settings are set.
It will also tell you what greetings will play under each of the call conditions
you have setup.
3
4
Call Blocking
When this feature is active, callers will not be transferred to your extension,
they will hear your 'blocked' greeting (if recorded) and will go directly to your
mailbox if they do not select any or are not offered any other options.
5
Call Forwarding
Unlike Follow Me where the subscriber wants to take their calls at an alter-
nate location this feature allows the subscriber to pass control of his calls to
another Subscriber. The “Forwarded To” Subscriber will now be in control of
the caller and the caller will NOT return to originating Subscriber’s Mailbox. If
the “Forwarded To” Subscriber does not answer the caller it will now follow
what ever the “Forwarded To” Subscriber has set up for their call conditions.
The Caller will hear“Forwarding to”“{Subscriber Name}”before actually being
forwarded.
PERSONAL GREETINGS
The options available in this menu will be determined by your System
Administrator, and not all of them may be available to you. In the simplest sys-
tems, only a mailbox greeting will be available, additional greetings may be acces-
sible in more complex systems.
Your Personal Greeting will be played every time someone dials your extension
and you do not answer.
5
6
Call Screening
You may record up to 9 Personal Greetings, and you may assign any one of them
to be active. There are several different 'Call Coverage' conditions to which you
may assign any of your 9 greetings.The Call Coverage Conditions are: No-Answer,
Busy, and Do Not Disturb (or Forwarded All). This will allow different greetings to
play depending on the type of call forward that you have set, or the condition of
your telephone.
If this is turned on, the caller will be asked their name and the SVMi-8/SVMi-
16E will play this name to you before the transfer, giving you an option to
accept or reject the call.
Find Me
Find Me, when enabled, will attempt to locate the subscriber by calling a list
of preprogrammed phone numbers. The stored phone numbers are entered
in 'Personal Services' [#][2] (if allowed by the Administrator). The stored tele-
phone number list can contain up to 9 preprogrammed telephone numbers.
The Find Me feature only use the first five.
The Call Coverage conditions that you can assign specific greetings to are select-
ed by the following digits:
1
Primary/No Answer Greeting
Used when in your office, away from your desk or during the time period you
are scheduled available. If this is the only Personal Greeting you record, it will
play for all call coverage conditions.
7
Night Intercept
This feature is dependent on your weekly availability schedule, which is
entered in 'Personal Services' [#][3] (if allowed by the Administrator). When
Night Intercept is active the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E will first ring your extension
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Basic
Greeting' feature.
72
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5021D
Table of Contents
Home Page
Edit Personal Greetings
Example:“Hi this is John Smith.I'm sorry I am not available to answer your call.
If someone else can help you, please enter the extension number now. Or, to
leave me a message, press 1.”
6
You may also edit/record each one of the greetings (1-9) at any time.
Select a greeting number to edit and follow the instructions to record your
greeting. When you are done recording your greeting, you will be able to lis-
ten to the greeting you recorded, save the greeting you recorded and return
to the previous menu, record the greeting again, or exit without saving the
greeting.
2
Busy Greeting
Played to a caller when you are already talking to someone on your extension
or the telephone at your Designated Location.
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Busy
Greeting' feature.
Note: If you record only the greeting assigned to the No-Answer Call
Coverage Condition,then that greeting will play to callers for all Call Coverage
Conditions (No-Answer, Busy, Blocked, Night, and Rejected Caller). In this case,
the salutation part of the greeting should be very general.
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. I'm on another line right now. If someone else
can help you, please enter the extension number now. Or, to leave a message,
press 1.”
7
Edit Mailbox Greeting
3
Call Blocking Greeting
Used whenever a caller reaches your mailbox or if you have not recorded any
of the Call Coverage greetings.The way a caller is transferred to your mailbox
greeting directly, is by another subscriber transferring the caller to your mail-
box using the VT (VoiceMail Transfer) key.
Used while Call Blocking is enabled in your Access Manager or if your phone
is forwarded ALL or DND.
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Call
Blocking' feature.
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the
'Mailbox Greeting Option' feature.
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. Sorry I missed your call, but I'm going to be
out of the office for the next few hours. If someone else can help you, please
enter the extension number now. Or, to leave me a message, press 1.”
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. Please leave me a message, I will call you as
soon as I can.”
4
Night Greeting
Note: This greeting will only play if none of the 5 personal greetings has
played to the caller. A common usage for this Greeting is when another
Subscriber is talking with a caller and uses the VT key on their phone to trans-
fer the caller directly to your Mailbox.
Used during the time period you are scheduled UNAVAILABLE, usually after
business hours during the evening and at night.
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the
'Scheduling' feature.
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. I've left the office for the evening. If you would
like to try someone else, please enter the extension number now. Or, to leave
me a message, press 1.”
6
MAILBOX ADMINISTRATION
5
Call Screening Greeting
Used while Call Screening is enabled, and you REJECT a caller after listening
to the caller's record name.
The Mailbox Administration menu is used to turn on and off your pager notifica-
tion, message alert options and other message control features.
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Call
Screening' feature.
1
Message Alert
When this function is activated, the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E will call any outside or
inside telephone number, after each message is left in your voice mailbox.
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. I'm sorry, but I am not available to speak with
you at this time. If someone else can help you, please enter the extension
number now. Or, to leave me a message, press 1.”
To hear your message at the remote location when the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E calls
you, after you pick up the telephone and answer you will be instructed that
there is a message and to enter your password. Simply enter your password
and you will now be logged in.
74
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5021D
Table of Contents
Home Page
Setting Up Message Alert:
This useful feature will allow you to cancel any messages that have NOT yet
been picked up by the recipient.
■
■
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
Press [1] for Message Alert.
5
6
Auto Play New Messages
There are 4 options available to you:
If this option is enabled, after you enter your password correctly any new
messages will immediately begin to play.To enable (or if already enabled tog-
gle and disable) this feature:
Press [1] to toggle message alert on and off.
Press [2] to set the schedule when you would like to be notified.
Press [3] to be notified on urgent messages only.
Press [4] to set the destination phone number.
■
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
Press [5] to Set Auto Play of New Messages.
2
Pager Notification
Auto Play Message Information
When this function is activated, the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E will call your beeper
service and notify you after each message is left in your voice mailbox.
If this option is enabled, the date, time and sender’s name will be played auto-
matically before each message. If this is disabled, the information must be
requested manually by pressing ‘00’. To enable (or if already enabled toggle
and disable) this feature:
■
■
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
Press [2] for pager notification.
■
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
There are 4 options available to you:
Press [6] to Set Auto Play of Message Information.
Press [1] to toggle pager notification on and off.
Press [2] to set the schedule when you would like to be paged.
Press [3] to be notified on urgent messages only.
Press [4] to set the pager phone number.
9
MESSAGE BROADCAST
3
Undelete
When this function is activated, the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E will allow you to
undelete any messages that you have recently deleted (up to the pro-
grammed Daily Maintenance Time, which is set to 3 a.m. by Default the fol-
lowing morning).
This option will only be available if it has been allowed by the System
Administrator.
Broadcast to All Mailboxes
■
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
If you have been designated as a Subscriber Administrator, you may send a
message to ALL mailboxes in the system.
Press [3] for Deleted Messages.
Deleted voice mail messages are temporarily stored in memory until 3 a.m.
the following day. Select this option to recover ("undelete") previously delet-
ed messages, during this period of time.
■
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
Press [9] for Broadcast Messages.
This option will only be available if your mailbox has been assigned
Subscriber Administration privileges.
4
Undelivered Retrieval
When this function is activated, the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E will allow you to recall
any messages you have sent that have NOT yet been picked up by the recip-
ient.
■
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
Press [4] for Undelivered Messages.
76
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5021D
Table of Contents
Home Page
PERSONAL ADMINISTRATION SETTINGS
#
This menu allows you to make changes to basic setup settings, that are rarely
changed. Use these when you initially set up your personal Subscriber settings.
You probably will not need to change them after that.
PERSONAL SERVICES
The Personal Administration Menu is used to set your password and record your
name. Many of these features must be allowed by the System Administrator.
1
Setting your Password
■
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [#][7][1].
1
Workload Management
The current password will be played and you will have the chance to
change it.
Allows you to access to all reminders, both Active and Pending. If authorized
ter organization. The system will flag each reminder as Active or Pending
(pending means scheduled for future delivery).
2
Recording your Name
Use this option to record your name.Your recorded name is played in several
different situations. It is important to record your name for proper operation
of the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E system.
2
Stored Numbers
Allows you to enter up to 9 stored phone numbers. The first five of these are
used in the 'Find Me' feature, but any of them (1-9) can be easily dialed using
only one digit followed by the pound key, to be used by many other features
from within your subscriber space. (ie: “Follow Me, “Message Alert”, “Pager
Alert”, and “Direct Call”).
■
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [#][7][2].
The current name will be played and you will have the chance to change
it.
Note: It is possible that if you do not record your name and/or enter your
Directory Name (described below), you will not be included in the Dial by
Name Directory.
3
5
Schedule Availability
Allows you to enter a weekly availability schedule for use with Night Personal
Greeting and the Auto Night Intercept feature. Follow the spoken directions
to enter the days of the week and times you are generally available to talk to
your callers. All other times you will be considered unavailable.
3
Entering your Directory Name
Use this option to enter your Directory Name.Your Directory Name is used by
callers to find you if they do not know your extension number.
■
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [#][7][3].
Place a Direct Call
The current Directory Name will be played as a string of digits that are
equal to your name spelled out on your telephone keypad. Follow the
instructions to enter a new name.You will be prompted to enter your last
name and then your first name.
Allows you to place a direct call out of the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E from anywhere.
You may either dial the number or dial a single digit 1-5 that corresponds to
a stored number (See Personal Services, 2 - Stored Numbers). This feature
must be authorized by the System Administrator and can be limited or
opened to internal, local, and long distance calls.
This must be done in order for the directory feature to work correctly.
Note: It is possible that if you do not record your name (described above)
and/or enter your Directory Name, you will not be included in the Dial by
Name Directory.
7
Personal Administration
This area is used during the initial set up of your Subscriber Settings (see next
section).
4
Extended Prompting
Use this option to drastically reduce the number of prompts played in the
subscriber interface (mailbox prompts). Change this setting only if you are
very familiar with the user operation of the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E.
78
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5021D
Table of Contents
Home Page
Note: Remember if you know what digits to press, you can enter them at any
time you do not have to wait to be prompted. This feature can be toggled
on/off at anytime. Also if it is off you will be prompted within each subscriber
menu to press zero for more options. This enables you to still be able to find
out what to do if you were to get lost and extended prompting was disabled.
AME Password
If your keyset has AME PASSWORD (MMC 110) set to YES, you must enter your
station password to listen to messages being left. This will prevent unauthorized
people from listening to messages being left for you.
If the password option is turned on, while a message is being left, press the flash-
ing AME indicator and enter your station password (not your SVMi-8/SVMi-16E
password).You will then hear the message being left.
KEYSET USER FEATURES
The following options are available if you have a display keyset.They require setup
by the System Administrator.
Call Record
If you have a call record button assigned to your phone, you may press it at any
time, to record the conversation in progress. If you have a display keyset, you will
also have the soft key options to pause and time the message.
Message Waiting Lights
When new messages are left in your mailbox,the voice mail message light on your
keyset will flash. Press this flashing key [VMMSG] and follow the prompts to
retrieve messages.This key may be pressed at any time to log into your Subscriber
Main Menu.
Answer Machine Emulation
If you have an Answer Machine Emulation key programmed on your keyset, you
can use it to monitor calls going to your voice mail, and optionally answer them.
The operation of this feature is similar to screening a call on a home answering
machine.
Your keyset must be set to forward on no answer to voice mail. After ringing your
station the caller will be connected to your voice mail and hear your personal
greeting before leaving a message. During this time you will be monitoring the
connection between the caller and your voice mail box. At this time you will only
be monitoring the call, you can not talk to the other party until you answer. You
may pick up the call at any time or ignore it.
To activate this feature press the AME button. The associated indicator will be lit
steady. Press again to turn off. If this key is pressed while a station is ringing (dur-
ing forward no answer), the feature will be turned on for the current call only.
While the caller is leaving a message or ringing you may:
■
■
Press [#] to immediately put the caller in your voice mailbox and monitor it.
Press [ꢀ] to immediately disconnect your station. The caller continues to
leave a message normally.
■
■
Pick up the handset and monitor privately.
Press ANS / RLS to answer the call (using the handset or speaker).
80
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITP-5021D
Table of Contents
Home Page
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS
SHORTCUTS
Calling
CODE
NAME
TELEPHONE NUMBER
Calling a station that is busy or does not answer you can press [#] to immediately
send the call to the called parties mailbox.
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
Being Called
If your phone rings and you want to send the caller directly to your mailbox, sim-
ply press [#].
Direct Messaging
[#] + DSS To make it easy to leave messages for others in your office without hav-
ing to dial their extension number first, keyset users may simply dial [#] plus a
mailbox (extension) number and leave a message directly.If you dial a busy exten-
sion press [#] to connect directly with the mailbox.
Self Memo (Reminder)
Pressing [##] will leave a message in your own mailbox. This is useful to remind
yourself of things to do now or in the future. Messages can be sent with future
delivery so you can have the system call you when items become due.
INTERACTIVE DISPLAYS
Display keyset users have the added advantage of using the soft keys and displays
to play, save, delete, reply, call, forward, rewind, pause, fast forward, change the
volume, get message information, or help.
Viewing Mailbox Contents
If you have new messages, in addition to the Terminal Status Indicator (TSI) you
will be able to use the keyset displays and soft keys to communicate with the
SVMi-8/SVMi-16E.
82
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS
CODE
NAME
TELEPHONE NUMBER
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Home Page
Table of Contents
iDCS Keyset
iDCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ABOUT THIS BOOK ....................................................................................1
THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW ..............................................2–10
ASSEMBLING YOUR KEYSET ......................................................11
ADDING AN iDCS 14B KEY STRIP ........................................12
iDCS KEYSET
USER GUIDE
ADDING A KEYSET DAUGHTERBOARD
MODULE ..........................................................................................................13
™
iDCS 500 Release 2/OfficeServ System
OUTSIDE CALLS
Making an Outside Call................................................................................................14
Answering an Outside Call..........................................................................................14
Universal Answer ..........................................................................................................14
Recall/Flash ......................................................................................................................15
Busy Line Queuing with Callback ............................................................................15
Canceling Callback ........................................................................................................15
INTERCOM CALLS
Calling Other Stations ..................................................................................................16
Answering Intercom Calls ..........................................................................................16
Answer Modes ................................................................................................................16
Busy Station Callback....................................................................................................17
Busy Station Camp-on..................................................................................................17
Calling Your System Operator....................................................................................18
CALL PROCESSING
Samsung Telecommunications America reserves the right without prior notice to revise information in
this guide for any reason. Samsung Telecommunications America also reserves the right without prior
notice to make changes in design or components of equipment as engineering and manufacturing
may warrant. Samsung Telecommunications America disclaims all liabilities for damages arising from
the erroneous interpretation or use of information presented in this guide.
Holding Calls ............................................................................................................19–20
Transferring Calls ....................................................................................................20–21
Transfer with Camp-On................................................................................................21
Transfer to Voice Mail....................................................................................................21
Call Waiting ......................................................................................................................21
Conference Calls ............................................................................................................22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iDCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Forwarding Calls......................................................................................................23–25
Call Pickup ........................................................................................................................25
My Group Pickup............................................................................................................25
Privacy Release................................................................................................................26
Off-Hook Voice Announce ..................................................................................39–40
OHVA Block ......................................................................................................................40
OHVA Reject ....................................................................................................................40
In Group/Out of Group ................................................................................................40
DIALING FEATURES
CUSTOMIZING YOUR KEYSET
Speed Dialing ..................................................................................................................27
Programming Personal Speed Dial Numbers ..............................................27–28
One Touch Speed Dialing............................................................................................28
Last Number Redial ......................................................................................................28
Manual Retry with Redial ............................................................................................29
Save Number with Redial............................................................................................29
Chain Dialing....................................................................................................................29
Automatic Redial/Retry................................................................................................29
Pulse to Tone Changeover ..........................................................................................30
Memo Redialing..............................................................................................................30
AME Password ................................................................................................................41
Auto Camp-On ................................................................................................................41
Select Ring Tone ............................................................................................................41
Change Your Passcode ................................................................................................41
Set Answer Mode (Intercom) ....................................................................................42
Set Answer Mode (CO) ................................................................................................42
Automatic Hold ..............................................................................................................42
Headset Operation ........................................................................................................42
Hot Keypad ......................................................................................................................43
Key Confirmation Tone ................................................................................................43
Rejoining a Page ............................................................................................................43
Ring Preference ..............................................................................................................43
Auto Answer CO Calls ..................................................................................................44
Display Speed Dial Name............................................................................................44
Caller ID Review All........................................................................................................44
Secure OHVA ....................................................................................................................44
PAGING AND MESSAGING
Making an Internal Page..............................................................................................31
Making an External Page ............................................................................................31
Meet Me Page..................................................................................................................32
Call Park and Page..........................................................................................................32
Messages—Set and Cancel ........................................................................................33
Returning Messages......................................................................................................33
Programmed Messages................................................................................................34
Interactive Display Keys ..............................................................................................45
Directory Information ................................................................................................ 45
Call Log ..............................................................................................................................46
Dial by Name....................................................................................................................46
Call Progress Displays ..................................................................................................46
Display Number Dialed ................................................................................................47
Call Duration Timer........................................................................................................47
Auto Timer ........................................................................................................................47
Timer Function ................................................................................................................47
Viewing Message Indications ....................................................................................48
Alarm Reminder Messages..................................................................................48–49
Personal Speed Dial Names........................................................................................49
Station Names ................................................................................................................49
Managing Key Assignments ......................................................................................50
LCR with Clear .................................................................................................................50
Backspace with LCR ......................................................................................................50
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
Do Not Disturb ................................................................................................................35
One Time DND ................................................................................................................35
Mute ....................................................................................................................................35
Background Music ........................................................................................................35
Established Call Pick-Up ..............................................................................................36
Appointment Reminder/Alarm Clock ....................................................................36
Door Phone Calls............................................................................................................37
Executive/Secretary Hotline ......................................................................................37
Group Listening ..............................................................................................................38
Account Codes ................................................................................................................38
Locking Your Keyset ......................................................................................................38
Manual Signalling ..........................................................................................................39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iDCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Text Messaging ......................................................................................................51–52
Caller ID .....................................................................................................................53–57
ANI .............................................................................................................................54–57
CLI ..............................................................................................................................54–57
iDCS 64B MODULE WITH KEYSET ........................................58
SVMi-8/SVMi-16E ......................................................................................59
SVMi-8/SVMi-16E Subscriber Services Menu Diagram .............................60–61
Accessing your Mailbox ............................................................................................62
Getting Started ...............................................................................................................63
Listen to your Messages .............................................................................................63
Subscriber Services Menu .........................................................................................63
Listening to Old or New Messages .........................................................................64
Group New or Old Messages ....................................................................................65
Record and Send a Message......................................................................................65
Access Manager ............................................................................................................66
Personal Greetings ........................................................................................................68
Mailbox Administration ..............................................................................................70
Message Broadcast ......................................................................................................72
Personal Services ...........................................................................................................73
Personal Administration Settings ............................................................................74
Keyset User Features ...................................................................................................75
Shortcuts .........................................................................................................................77
Interactive Displays .......................................................................................................77
ABOUT THIS BOOK
Your iDCS keyset is the most visible part of your telephone system.No matter what
model keyset you are using telephone calls are handled the same way. The 28D
and 18D keysets have additional conveniences that are not available to 8D keyset
users. These are noted throughout this guide.
Please take the time to study this guide and to become familiar with the operation
of your keyset. Keep this guide handy. You may need to look up instructions for
infrequently used features.
Learning to use your keyset correctly will make everyday telephone communica-
tions a breeze.
This book is written based on the factory default settings for the feature access
codes. Sometimes, due to programming requirements, these codes may be
changed. If you find that a feature code does not work as described in this book,
please contact your installation and service company to determine the correct
code.
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS ............................78–79
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iDCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
Your outside calls will light green on your keyset and red on other keysets. You
never lose sight of your calls while they are on hold.They stay right where you put
them and are identified with a green flashing light.
THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW
Some simple rules to remember:
USER ORIENTATION
iDCS telephones are called “keysets.”They contain buttons or “keys” that are used
to access or activate the many features of your office phone system.The keys with
paper designation strips are programmable keys. This means they can be pro-
grammed for a specific function on your keyset and that same button can be
something different on another keyset. See the system manager to get your most
frequently used features assigned to your programmable keys. When changes are
made, be sure that your programmable keys are relabeled properly.
•
•
•
•
Any steady LED indicates the line or feature is in use.
A fast flashing green LED indicates a new call ringing in.
A slow flashing green or red LED indicates a call is on hold.
A slow flashing amber LED indicates a recall to your keyset.
SPEAKERPHONE
All iDCS keysets are speaker phones. Pressing the ANS/RLS key will answer or
release a call on the speakerphone. Switching from the handset to the speaker-
phone is easy. Press the SPEAKER key and hang up the handset.
Lines from the telephone company are“C.O. lines.”Calls on these lines are referred
to as “outside calls.”Your system can have individual C.O. line keys or lines may be
assigned to groups. When they are in a group, you access a line by dialing an
access code or pressing a route button. For example, dial 9 or press a “LOCAL” key
to get a local outside line. If Least Cost Routing is used, pressing the “LCR” key will
automatically select a preprogrammed C.O. line according to what digits are
dialed. Each line in the system is numbered, beginning with 701, then 702, 703, etc.
VOLUME CONTROLS
The iDCS keysets use the UP and DOWN keys to adjust the ringer volume while the
keyset is ringing, the speaker volume while the speakerphone is in use and the
handset volume while you are listening. These three levels will be stored in mem-
ory until changed. If background music is turned on at your keyset, the volume
keys will also control the level of music. The volume of pages heard through the
speaker of a keyset can be adjusted during a page announcement by using the
volume keys. There are 16 levels for each volume setting. The volume of off-hook
ring is controlled by a user-programmable setting.
Direct Station Selection (DSS) keys are programmed to ring specific stations. You
can press a DSS key instead of dialing the extension number. A DSS key lights red
when that station is busy (Busy Lamp Indication).
iDCS keysets provide distinctive ring patterns:
•
•
•
Outside calls have a single ring tone repeated.
Internal calls have a double ring tone repeated.
Door phone calls and alarm/appointment reminders have a triple ring tone
repeated.
TERMINAL STATUS INDICATOR
The terminal status indicator light is positioned on the top right corner of the key-
set above the display. The terminal status indicator is a tri-colored (red, green, and
amber) light that provides greater visibility of your keysets status than the indi-
vidual key LEDs. The terminal status indicator provides the following indications:
CALL INDICATIONS
•
•
•
•
•
•
Busy/Off Hook
Intercom Ring
Outside Call Ring
Recall Ring
Message Waiting
Do Not Disturb
Steady Red
Flashing Red
Flashing Green
Flashing Amber
Flashing Red
The keys on your phone have light emitting diodes (LEDs). These are tri-colored
LEDs that light green, red or amber (green and red together).
Intercom calls, also called internal calls, always appear on your CALL buttons.They
will always light green.You can have up to eight CALL buttons, but at least two are
recommended.
Fast Flash Red at 1 Second Intervals
Outside calls appear on individual line keys if they are assigned. When an individ-
ual line is not assigned to its own key, it will appear on a CALL button.
2
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iDCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
iDCS 28D KEYSET
FEATURE ACCESS CODES
This user guide is written based on the default access code for using system fea-
tures. If the system numbering plan has been changed some of the access codes
may not be correct.Your installing company can inform you of the correct codes.
32 CHARACTER DISPLAY
Two lines with 16 characters each.
TERMINAL STATUS INDICATOR Used
to provide your keyset status.
SYSTEM TONES
The system provides several tones to assist you. Some of these tones are already
familiar to you.
SOFT KEYS
Used to activate
features via the
display.
Intercom Dial Tone—A steady tone that indicates you can begin dialing.
DIAL TONE
CONTINUOUS
iDCS 28D
Scroll
Ringback Tone—Indicates the station you dialed is ringing.
Call 1
Call 2
Message
RINGBACK TONE—1000 ms ON/3000 ms OFF
SCROLL KEY
Used to scroll
through dis-
plays.
CONTINUOUS
Busy Tone—Indicates the station you dialed is busy.
BUSY TONE—500 ms ON/500 ms OFF
CONTINUOUS
SPEAKER
For handsfree
operation and
ringing.
1
2
ABC
JKL
3
6
DEF
DND/No More Calls Tone—Fast busy tone indicates the station you dialed
is in the Do Not Disturb mode or cannot receive any more calls.
4
GHI
5
8
MNO
DND/NO MORE CALLS TONE—250 ms ON/250 ms OFF
FOR TEN SECONDS
Memory Redial
Transfer Speaker
7PQRS
TUV
9WXYZ
Transfer/Conference Tone—Indicates your call is being held and you
can dial another party.
0OPER
ANS/RLS
Volume
HOLD
TRANSFER/CONF TONE—100 ms ON/100 ms OFF
CONTINUOUS
ANSWER/RELEASE KEY
HOLD KEY
Confirmation Tone—Very short beeps followed by dial tone indicate you
have correctly set or canceled a system feature.
MICROPHONE
For handsfree
operation.
CONFIRMATION TONE—50 ms ON/50 ms OFF
FOR ONE SECOND
(programmable)
20 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS WITH
TRI-COLORED LIGHTS Used for CALL
buttons, intercom calls, outside lines
and many other system features.
VOLUME CONTROL KEYS
Used to set independent
levels for handset, speaker,
background music, ring and
page volumes.
8 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS WITH TRI-
COLORED LIGHTS Used to call
stations directly, to indicate busy
conditions of other stations, for One
Touch dialing and many other system
features.
Error Tone—A distinctive two level beeping tone indicates you have done
something incorrectly.Try again.
ERROR TONE—50 ms of tone 1/50 ms of tone 2
FOR THREE SECONDS
4
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iDCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
iDCS 18D KEYSET
iDCS 8D KEYSET
32 CHARACTER DISPLAY
32 CHARACTER DISPLAY
Two lines with 16 characters each.
Two lines with 16 characters each.
TERMINAL STATUS INDICATOR Used
to provide your keyset status.
TERMINAL STATUS INDICATOR Used
to provide your keyset status.
SOFT KEYS
Used to activate
features via the
display.
SCROLL KEY Used to scroll
through displays.
iDCS 8D
iDCS 18D
Scroll
Scroll
SOFT KEYS Used to
activate features via the
display.
VOLUME
SCROLL KEY
Used to scroll
through dis-
plays.
Call 1
Call 2
Message
VOLUME CONTROL KEYS
Used to set independent
levels for handset, speaker,
background music, ring
and page volumes.
Call 1
Call 2
Message
Transfer
Speaker
SPEAKER
1
4
2
5
8
ABC
3
6
DEF
For handsfree
operation and
ringing.
1
2
ABC
JKL
3
6
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
GHI
5
8
MNO
Memory Redial
7PQRS
TUV
9WXYZ
7PQRS
TUV
9WXYZ
Transfer Speaker
0OPER
ANS/RLS
0OPER
HOLD
ANS/RLS
Volume
HOLD
MICROPHONE
For handsfree operation.
ANSWER/RELEASE KEY
HOLD KEY
MICROPHONE
For handsfree
operation.
HOLD KEY
ANSWER/
RELEASE KEY
SPEAKER
For handsfree
operation and
ringing.
8 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS WITH
TRI-COLORED LIGHTS Used to call
stations directly, to indicate busy
conditions of other stations, for One
Touch dialing and many other system
features.
10 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS WITH
TRI-COLORED LIGHTS Used for CALL
buttons, intercom calls, outside lines
and many other system features.
VOLUME CONTROL KEYS
Used to set independent
levels for handset, speaker,
background music, ring and
page volumes.
8 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS WITH TRI-
COLORED LIGHTS Used to call
stations directly, to indicate busy
conditions of other stations, for One
Touch dialing and many other system
features.
6
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iDCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
iDCS 64B AOM
iDCS 14B STRIP
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
10
11
16
12
17
13
18
14
19
15
20
21
26
22
27
23
28
24
29
25
30
31
36
32
37
33
38
34
39
35
40
14 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS WITH
RED LIGHTS Used to call stations
directly, to indicate busy conditions of
other stations, for One Touch dialing
and many other system features.
41
46
42
47
43
48
44
49
45
50
51
56
52
57
53
58
54
59
55
60
61
62
63
64
64 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS WITH
RED LIGHTS Used to call stations
directly, to indicate busy conditions of
other stations, for One Touch dialing
and many other system features.
8
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iDCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
KEYSET DAUGHTER MODULES
ASSEMBLING YOUR KEYSET
[28 AND 18 BUTTON KEYSETS ONLY]
iDCS 28D and 18D button keysets can have one of three different types of daugh-
ter module installed on them to enhance the operation of the keyset or to provide
an additional local port depending on the type of module.
•
•
Place the keyset face down on a flat surface.
Remove the base pedestal by placing your thumbs over the attachment clips
and press outward while simultaneously pressing down on the keyset body
with your fingertips.
iDCS KDB-DIGITAL LINE
INTERFACE (FKDBD)
•
•
Plug the handset cord into the jack marked with the symbol.
If your keyset is connected to a Digital Line Interface (DLI) port that supports 2B+D
operation (your installing company can determine this) you may install a daugh-
ter module that provides a Digital Line Interface (DLI) port for connection of a dig-
ital station device such as a keyset or 64 button module.
Route the handset cord out the RIGHT side of the keyset as you look at it face
down.
•
•
Reattach the base pedestal.
Plug the line cord into the jack on the base of the keyset marked with the
symbol and route it through one of the cable channels in the bottom
of the base pedestal.
iDCS KDB-SINGLE LINE
INTERFACE (FKDBS)
If your keyset is connected to a Digital Line Interface (DLI) port that supports 2B+D
operation (your installing company can determine this) you may install a daugh-
ter module that provides a Single Line Interface (SLI) port for connection of a stan-
dard telephone device such as a cordless phone.
iDCS KDB-FULL DUPLEX (FKDBF)
The standard speakerphone mode of operation for a iDCS keyset is “half duplex”.
This means that you cannot transmit and receive speech at the same time. Adding
a FKDBF to your keyset will convert the speakerphone into full duplex mode
enhancing its operation. In addition the FKDBF may have up to three (3) external
microphones attached to it for conference room type applications. These micro-
phones require an “EXTMIC” key programmed on the keyset to activate or deacti-
vate them.
10
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iDCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
ADDING AN
ADDING A KEYSET
iDCS 14 BUTTON KEY STRIP
DAUGHTERBOARD MODULE
•
•
Place the keyset face down on a flat surface.
•
•
Place the keyset face down on a flat surface.
Remove the base pedestal by placing your thumbs over the attachment clips
and press outward while simultaneously pressing down on the keyset body
with your fingertips.
Remove the base pedestal by placing your thumbs over the attachment clips
and press outward while simultaneously pressing down on the keyset body
with your fingertips.
•
•
•
Remove the ribbon cable knockout from the bottom of the keyset.
Clip the 14 button strip to the side of the keyset.
Plug one end of the ribbon cable into the keyset and the other end into the
14 button strip.
•
•
Remove the two knockouts from the bottom of the keyset.
Plug in the daughter module and secure with the two screws provided.
•
•
Place the support bracket over the ribbon cable and secure with the six
screws provided.
Reattach the base pedestal.
SECURING
SCREWS
REMOVE
KNOCKOUTS
REMOVE KNOCKOUTS
CONNECT RIBBON CABLE
12
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iDCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
RECALL DIAL TONE
OUTSIDE CALLS
Press the NEW button to disconnect your existing call, wait for dial tone and then
make a new call on the same line.
MAKING AN OUTSIDE CALL
NOTE: If this button does not appear on your keyset, the FLASH key may be pro-
grammed to recall dial tone.
•
Lift the handset and press an idle outside line button,line group button or dial
a line access code to receive dial tone—OR—press an idle outside line button,
line group button or dial a line access code to receive dial tone through the
speaker—OR—press SPEAKER, receive intercom dial tone and dial a line
access code.
SENDING A FLASH
While on an outside call, press the FLASH key to send a flash to the telephone
company. This is required for some custom calling features or CENTREX use.
•
•
Dial the telephone number.
Finish the call by replacing the handset or pressing the ANS/RLS key.
NOTE: Flash is not available on an ISDN circuit.
NOTE: You will receive No More Calls tone when you attempt to make a call and
there is no key available for that line.
BUSY LINE QUEUING WITH CALLBACK
If you receive a busy signal when you are selecting an outside line, this means that
the line or group of lines is busy.
•
•
•
If Least Cost Routing is enabled on your phone system, this button may be
labeled LCR or accessed by dialing an access code (usually 9).
If your system is programmed to require an authorization code before making
a call, dial Q plus a valid code before selecting a C.O. line.
If your system is programmed to require an account code before making a
call, press the ACC button or dial 47 plus a valid bin number, press the ACC
button again and then select a C.O. line. See Account Codes for more informa-
tion.
•
•
•
Press the CBK key, if programmed, or dial 44.You will hear confirmation tone.
When the line becomes free, the system will call you back.
Lift the handset or press the ANS/RLS key to answer,wait for dial tone and dial
the telephone number or speed dial number again.
NOTES:
1. A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds. If you have set
a callback, your CBK key will light.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER key before dialing.
For more information on authorization and account codes, see your system
administrator.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER key before dialing.
CANCELING CALLBACK
ANSWERING AN OUTSIDE CALL
A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds. If you have set a
callback, your CBK key will light.
•
Lift the handset and you are automatically connected to the ringing call.
See Ring Preference under Customizing Your Keyset—OR—press the ANS/RLS
key to automatically answer on the speakerphone.
Your phone may have a maximum of five callbacks to lines and/or stations set at a
time. To cancel a callback:
NOTE: If a call is flashing at your keyset but not ringing, you must press the flash-
ing button to answer.
•
•
Press the CBK key, if programmed, or dial 44.You will hear confirmation tone.
While you are listening to confirmation tone, press the HOLD key. This will
cancel the oldest set callback.
UNIVERSAL ANSWER
NOTES:
Outside lines may be programmed to ring a general alerting device. To answer
calls ringing this device, dial 67 or press the UA key.This device can operate in any
one of the six different ring plans.
1. If the hot keypad feature is turned off, you must first lift the handset or press
the SPEAKER key before dialing.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER key before dialing.
14
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iDCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
BUSY STATION CALLBACK
INTERCOM CALLS
When you call another station and receive a busy signal:
•
•
•
Press the CBK key, if programmed, or dial 44.
When the busy station becomes free, your keyset will ring.
Lift the handset or press ANS/RLS to call the now idle station.
CALLING OTHER STATIONS
•
•
Dial the extension number or group number.
Wait for the party to answer. If you hear a brief tone burst instead of ringback
tone, the station you called is set for Voice Announce or Auto Answer. Begin
speaking immediately after the tone.
NOTES:
1. A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds. If you have set
a callback, your CBK key will light.
•
Finish the call by replacing the handset or pressing the ANS/RLS key.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER key before dialing.
NOTES:
1. If you have a DSS key assigned to an extension or station group, you may
press this key instead of dialing the number.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing.
BUSY STATION CAMP-ON
When you call another station and receive a busy signal but you do not want to
wait for a callback:
ANSWERING INTERCOM CALLS
MANUAL CAMP-ON
•
When your keyset rings, simply lift the handset—OR—press the ANS/RLS key
to be connected to the calling station.
•
•
Press the CAMP key or dial 45.
The called station will receive off-hook ring tone repeated every few seconds
and its first available CALL button will flash green to indicate your call is wait-
ing.
•
Finish the call by replacing the handset or pressing the ANS/RLS key.
See Ring Preference under Customizing Your Keyset.
•
•
Wait for the called party to answer.
The called station must release its first call or place it on hold before answer-
ing your camp-on.
VOICE ANNOUNCE MODE
When another station calls you, your keyset will sound a brief attention tone and
you will hear the caller’s announcement.
NOTES:
1. If you receive No More Calls tone, that station has no available key to accept
your call. Hang up or leave a message.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER key before dialing.
•
•
Press ANS/RLS to turn on the microphone and speak handsfree—OR— lift
the handset to reply.
To finish the call, replace the handset or press the ANS/RLS key.
NOTE: In order for C.O. calls to be answered handsfree, AUTO ANS CO must be set
ON.
AUTO CAMP-ON
When you want to automatically camp on to a busy station without pressing the
camp on button every time you call a busy station,you can set your phone for auto
camp-on.
AUTO ANSWER MODE
When another station calls you, your keyset will sound a brief attention tone and
then automatically answer the call.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Dial 081 to turn on auto camp-on or 080 to turn it off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
•
•
Your microphone and speaker are turned on and you can speak handsfree.For
privacy, use the handset.
To finish the call, replace the handset or press the ANS/RLS key.
NOTE: In order for C.O. calls to be answered handsfree, AUTO ANS CO must be set
ON.
16
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iDCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
CALLING YOUR SYSTEM OPERATOR
CALL PROCESSING
•
•
Dial 0 to call your system operator or group of operators.
If you want to call a specific operator, dial that person’s extension number.
SYSTEM HOLD
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the hand-
set or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing.
•
When you are connected to any call, press HOLD. The call will flash green at
your keyset. If this call appears on a line key at other keysets, it will flash red at
those keysets.
•
To take the caller off hold, press that key and the green flashing light will go
steady green again. Resume the conversation.
NOTE: While on a call, pressing a line key, route key or flashing CALL button will
automatically put your first call on hold and connect you to the new call. See
Automatic Hold under Customizing Your Keyset.
EXCLUSIVE HOLD
To place an outside call on hold at your phone so that other users cannot get it:
•
Press the HOLD button twice.The call will flash green on your keyset and this
line will show a steady red light on other keysets.
•
To retrieve the call, press the flashing green line button or press the HOLD
button a third time.
NOTE: Intercom calls will always be placed on exclusive hold.
REMOTE HOLD
When you wish to place a call on hold at another station. Press TRANSFER and a
dial the station number (or press the appropriate DSS key). Press the HOLD key.
This will place the call on system hold on an available CALL button or Line Key at
the remote station and return you to dial tone.
NOTES:
1. If the destination station does not have any free CALL buttons or line keys you
will hear No More Calls tone and must return to the other party by pressing
the TRANSFER key (or the RETURN soft key in the display).
2. Intercom calls cannot be remote held.
HOLD RECALL
If you leave a call on hold longer than the hold timer, it will recall your station.The
button that the call appears on will have a slow flashing amber light.
•
When your phone rings, lift the handset or press the ANS/RLS key to answer
the recall.
18
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iDCS Keyset
Table of Contents
first station to hang up, simply press another DSS button. OR
Home Page
•
If you do not answer this recall within a pre-programmed period of time, it will
go to the system operator.
Press the CALL button or C.O.line key to return to the outside party and begin
the transfer process again.
CONSULTATION HOLD
When you are transferring a call to a keyset set for Voice Announce or Auto
Answer, the transferred call will always ring.
When you are talking on an outside line and it is necessary to consult with anoth-
er extension:
NOTES:
•
Press the TRANSFER key; you will receive transfer dial tone.Your call is placed
on transfer hold.
Dial the extension number.
Consult with the internal party.
Press TRANSFER to return to the outside party or hang up to transfer the call.
1. After the inside party answers, you may alternate back and forth between the
parties by pressing the TRANSFER key.
2. If you receive No More Calls tone, that station has no key available to receive
another call. Press TRANSFER to return to the other party.
3. You cannot transfer an Intercom call by pressing a DSS key.You must press the
TRANSFER key and dial the destination extension number.
•
•
•
NOTE: Repeatedly pressing the TRANSFER key will toggle between the outside
party and internal extension. If necessary you may disconnect either one of the
parties by pressing the DROP button.
TRANSFER WITH CAMP-ON
When you are transferring a call to another station and you receive a busy signal,
you may camp the call on to this station. Simply hang up when you hear the busy
signal. The called party will be alerted that a call is waiting for them.
RETRIEVING CALLS HELD AT
ANOTHER STATION
NOTE:If you receive No More Calls tone,that station has no key available to receive
another call. Press TRANSFER to return to the outside caller.
When a line is on hold and it appears on your keyset, press the line button with the
red flashing light.
TRANSFER TO VOICE MAIL
When a line is on hold and it does not appear on your keyset, dial 12 plus the line
number or the extension number of the station that placed the call on hold.
This feature is used to send a call directly to a voice mailbox.Your keyset must have
a correctly programmed VT key to accomplish this. To transfer a call directly to a
voice mailbox:
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing.
•
•
While on a call, press the VT key and dial the mailbox number.
Hang up when dialing is completed.
TRANSFERRING CALLS
Transfer is used to send any call to another extension in one of two ways. You can
do a screened transfer by informing the other extension who is calling or you can
do a blind transfer without notification.
NOTE: The VT key will not work with a Centralized Voice Mail in a Network System.
CALL WAITING
•
•
While on a call, press the TRANSFER key and dial an extension number or
group number.Your call is automatically put on transfer hold. OR
Press a DSS key or station group key.Your call is automatically put on transfer
hold.
Hang up when you hear ringing (this is an unscreened or blind transfer).
OR
Wait for the called party to answer and advise him/her of the call and hang up.
If the transfer is refused, you will be reconnected to the outside line when the
called station hangs up or you can press TRANSFER to return to the outside
party. If you wish to send the call to another extension without waiting for the
If an outside call has been camped-on to your phone or another station has
camped-on to you:
•
•
Your keyset will ring and the call that is waiting for you (camped-on) will flash
green.
Press the flashing button to answer; your other call will go on hold automati-
cally if your station has the Automatic Hold feature set. If not, you must press
HOLD and then the flashing button. OR
Finish the first call and hang up; the waiting call will ring.
20
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iDCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
•
Lift the handset or press the ANS/RLS key to answer.
FORWARDING CALLS
NOTE: Intercom calls will not go on Automatic Hold.
You may forward your calls to another station, group of stations or an external
telephone number. Program a destination for the type of forwarding you want as
detailed below. If you have FWD ALL, FWD BUSY and FWD NO ANSWER keys,
press one to turn that forward feature on. A steady red light reminds you what for-
ward condition is activated.
CONFERENCE CALLS
You may conference up to five parties (you and four others) in any combination of
outside lines and internal stations in any order.
You can clear all call forward conditions set at your station by lifting the handset
and dialing 600.
•
•
While engaged in a conversation, press the CONF key and receive conference
tone.
Make another call, either intercom or outside, press the CONF key and receive
conference tone.
Make another call or press the CONF key to join all parties.
Repeat the last step until all parties are added.
FORWARD ALL CALLS
•
•
To forward all your calls under any condition to another station:
•
•
Dial 601 plus the extension or group number.
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.
NOTE: When attempting to add another party to the conference and you are not
able to reach the desired person, hang up. Simply press the CONF key again to
return to your previous conversation.
NOTES:
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing.
2. The station that receives a Forwarded All call can transfer the call to the for-
warded station. This is useful when you are expecting an important call but
you do not wish to be disturbed by other calls.
3. When a station user places his/her keyset in Forward All mode and he/she
does not have a FORWARD ALL key, the TRANSFER key will light to indicate
Forward All has been set and calls to this station have been transferred else-
where.
To drop a party from your conference call:
•
•
Press CONF and dial the extension or line number that is to be dropped.
Press CONF again to reestablish the conference.
NOTE:To leave the conference, hang up. Control is passed to the next internal sta-
tion. If there are no internal stations and you wish to leave outside lines connect-
ed together in a trunk to trunk conference, press the CONF key plus the CALL but-
ton that the call appears on or follow the instructions to drop a party and use your
extension number. When they hang up, the lines will release automatically. Press
CONF to rejoin a trunk to trunk conference.
FORWARD BUSY
CONFERENCE SPLITTING
To forward calls to another station when you are on the phone:
If you are the controlling party of a conference and your keyset has the Auto Hold
feature turned on (See Customizing Your Keyset) and all of the outside lines involved
in the conference appear as buttons on your keyset, you can split the conference
into separate calls as follows:
•
•
Dial 602 plus the extension or group number.
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press SPEAKER before you begin dialing.
•
Press any one of the outside line buttons.That outside line will remain steady
green to indicate you are still connected to it. All other outside lines in the
conference will be placed on system hold at your keyset. All intercom callers
in the conference will be disconnected. You may now speak with each caller
privately and transfer them as usual or reestablish another conference.
FORWARD NO ANSWER
To forward calls to another station when you do not answer:
•
•
Dial 603 plus the extension or group number.
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing.
22
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iDCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
•
•
Dial 0 to cancel current condition OR
Dial 1-5 to select forward type OR
FORWARD BUSY/NO ANSWER
If you have both a Forward on Busy destination and a Forward No Answer desti-
nation programmed, you may set both of these at the same time:
Press UP or DOWN to select forward type.
Press the right soft key to move the cursor.
Dial the destination number (e.g., 202) OR
Press UP or DOWN to select the destination
Press the right soft key to move the cursor
Dial 1 to set OR
•
•
Dial 604.
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.
•
•
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing.
Press UP or DOWN to select YES or NO
Press TRANSFER to store and exit
FORWARD FOLLOW ME
STATION CALL PICKUP
When you want all calls to your extension forwarded to the extension where you
are now:
To pick up (answer) a call ringing at another station, lift the handset and dial 65
plus the extension number of the ringing phone.
•
•
Dial 604 plus your extension number.
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.
If you have a DP key assigned with a station number, you only need to press this
DP key with the flashing light to answer the ringing station.
If you want a specific extension's calls forwarded to your phone (Remote Call
Forward):
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing.
•
•
Dial 606 plus the desired extension number.
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.
GROUP CALL PICKUP
To pick up (answer) a call ringing in any pickup group, lift the handset and dial 66
plus the desired group number 01–20 or press the flashing GROUP PICKUP key if
available.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing.
FORWARD DND
NOTES:
1. A group pickup key can have an extender for a specific pickup group.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER key before dialing the access code.
To forward your phone when you activate DND.
•
•
Dial 605 plus the extension number or group number.
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.
MY GROUP PICKUP
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing.
If desired, a new access code can be assigned to pickup ringing calls in the same
pickup group as you are in. Like “66” above except you do not need to dial the
desired group number. See your installation company for the assigned access
code. MY GROUP PICKUP: __________________.
CALL FORWARD OPTIONS
A display keyset may review or change call forward options and destinations. Call
forward access can be done via the keypad or by accessing the keyset display fea-
tures. To review or change call forward options:
•
Press TRANSFER 102.
The display will indicate the current current call forward condition and desti-
nation OR
Show 0:FORWARD CANCEL to indicate no forward is set.
24
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iDCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
PRIVACY RELEASE
DIALING FEATURES
This feature will allow another station to join in our conversation by releasing pri-
vacy on the C.O. from your phone.
SPEED DIALING
To Release Privacy:
You can dial a preprogrammed telephone number stored in the system-wide
speed dial list of numbers 500–999 or from your personal list of numbers 00–49.
While you are talking on a C.O. line and you wish to have other internal parties (or
up to three) join the conversation.
You system may be set for 950 system wide numbers. If so the system speed dial
access codes are 050~999 and the station speed dial codes are 000~049.
•
Press the PRB key (the PRB key will light steady red). Inform the other party
that he/she may now join the conversation.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press the MEMORY key or dial 16.
Dial the desired speed dial number.
The telephone number is automatically dialed for you.
After the other party (or parties) has joined the conversation and you wish to
return privacy to the line so that no one else can join the conversation, press the
PRB key a second time, the PRB key LED will be off.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing.
To Join a Non-Private Conversation:
When someone has informed you that you can join a conversation:
PROGRAMMING PERSONAL SPEED
DIAL NUMBERS
•
•
Press the C.O. line key that he/she has indicated.
OR
Dial the C.O. line number that he/she has indicated.
You can program frequently dialed telephone numbers in a personal speed dial
list. A station may be assigned up to fifty numbers, 00–49. See your system admin-
istrator to determine the amount assigned to your station.
•
•
•
•
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 105.
Dial a speed dial number (00–49).
Dial a line or line group access code.
Dial the telephone number to be stored (24 digits maximum). It can include #,
ꢀ, FLASH and PAUSE.
•
Press TRANSFER to store the number.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing.
8D KEYSET DEFAULT
PROGRAMMING
A
C
E
B
D
F
KEYS LAYOUT
28D KEYSET
18D KEYSET
DEFAULT
VOLUME
PROGRAMMING KEYS
LAYOUT
Transfer
Speaker
C
E
F
A
B
Transfer Speaker
D
26
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iDCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
For the purposes of programming speed dial numbers, the programmable keys
are known as A, B, C, D, E and F and are defined below.
MANUAL RETRY WITH REDIAL
While you are on an outside call listening to a busy signal and you want to redial
the same number dialed.
•
•
•
•
The A key is not used.
The B key inserts a flash.
The C key inserts a pause.
The D key is used for pulse to tone conversion. If your system uses rotary (or
pulse) dialing C.O. lines, pressing D while entering a speed dial number caus-
es all subsequent digits to be sent as DTMF tones.
The E key is used to hide digits. Display keyset users may want to hide some
speed dial numbers so that they will not show in the display.When you are en-
tering a telephone number, press E. All subsequent digits will be hidden. Press
E again to begin displaying digits.
•
Press the REDIAL key.
This will hang up your existing call and manually redial the same number dialed.
You can repeat this operation for a limited number of attempts.
•
NOTE: If your keyset is programmed with Call Log Blocks then the Redial will
access the call log when pressed.
SAVE NUMBER WITH REDIAL
•
•
The F key is used to enter a name. See Personal Speed Dial Names under
Display Features.
Use the HOLD key to clear a speed dial number.
To save the number you just dialed for later use, press the SNR key before hang-
ing up.
To redial this saved number at any time, press the SNR key or dial 17. The same
line will be selected for you.
ONE TOUCH SPEED DIALING
You may assign any speed dial number to an already existing One Touch Speed
Dial button for quick and easy dialing of frequently used numbers.
NOTES:
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing.
2. The saved telephone number is stored in memory until you save another
number.
•
•
•
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 107.
Press a One Touch Speed Dial button.
Dial the speed dial number (00–49 or 500–999) that you want assigned to
this button.
3. Redial does not apply to intercom calls.
•
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
CHAIN DIALING
To call this telephone number, just press the One Touch Speed Dial button.
You may manually dial additional digits following a speed dial number or chain as
many speed dial numbers together as required:
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing.
•
After the first speed number is dialed, press MEMORY again and dial another
speed number OR manually dial additional digits following a speed dial num-
ber.
LAST NUMBER REDIAL
To redial the last telephone number you dialed, press the REDIAL key or dial 19.
AUTOMATIC REDIAL/RETRY
NOTES:
When you are making an outside call and you receive a busy signal, the system
can automatically redial the number for you. It will automatically redial at a pre-
programmed interval for up to 15 attempts.
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing.
2. Redial does not apply to intercom calls.
•
•
When you hear a busy signal, press the RETRY button.
The system will reserve the line and automatically redial the same number for
you.You will hear the call being made through the keyset speaker.The micro-
phone is muted.
28
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iDCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
•
When the called party answers, lift the handset or press the flashing SPEAK-
ER to begin speaking.
PAGING AND MESSAGING
NOTES:
1. If you make another call, auto-redial is canceled.
2. To cancel a retry, lift and replace the handset.
MAKING AN INTERNAL PAGE
To make an announcement through the keyset speakers:
PULSE TO TONE CHANGEOVER
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset.
Press the PAGE key or dial 55.
Dial the desired zone number 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4.
After the attention tone, make your announcement.
When making an outside call on a dial pulse line, press #. All digits dialed after the
# with be sent as tones.
MEMO REDIALING
NOTE: If you have a dedicated page zone key, it is not necessary to press PAGE and
dial a zone number.
When you are calling directory information, you can store the number you are
given using the SAVE feature. There is no need for pencil and paper.
MAKING AN EXTERNAL PAGE
•
•
•
While you are talking on an outside call, press SAVE.
Dial the telephone number as it is dictated to you on the key pad.
Press SAVE to store the number.
To make an announcement through the external paging speakers:
•
•
•
Lift the handset.
Press the PAGE key or dial 55.
Dial the desired zone number 5, 6, 7 or 8.
OR
To dial the number, press the SNR button. It will select the same line and dial the
stored number. If necessary, you can select a different line and then press the SNR
button.
Dial 9 to page all external zones.
After the attention tone, make your announcement.
•
NOTE: If you have a dedicated page zone key, it is not necessary to press PAGE and
dial a zone number.
ALL PAGE
To page all designated keysets and external speakers at the same time:
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset.
Press the PAGE key or dial 55.
Dial ꢀ or press the ALL PAGE key.
After the attention tone, make your announcement.
NOTE:The LED on the PAGE key will only light when an All Page is in progress.
30
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iDCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
To retrieve an automatically parked call:
MEET ME PAGE
•
Dial 10 plus the number that was announced. If you have a PAGPK key, press
it and dial the number that was announced. If you have a PARK key, press it
and dial the announced orbit number.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset.
Press the Meet Me Page (MMPG) key or dial 54.
Dial the desired zone number.
After the attention tone, instruct the paged person to dial 56.
Press WAIT or TRANSFER.
Remain off-hook until the person dials 56 from any phone.
The paged person will be automatically connected with you.
•
You will be connected to the parked call.
NOTES:
1. If the call is not retrieved within a pre-programmed period of time, it will recall
your keyset and have a slow flashing amber light. You cannot park and page
intercom calls.
3. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing.
CALL PARK AND PAGE
When you have an outside call for someone who is not at his/her desk, you can
park the call prior to paging. The iDCS 500 offers two different methods:
SETTING A MESSAGE INDICATION
MANUAL PARK ORBITS
When you are calling another station and no one answers or you receive a busy
signal, you can leave a message indication:
•
•
While in conversation, press the PARK button.
Entered a desired orbit number (0-9), if the orbit number is busy dial another
orbit number. Display users can press ꢀ to automatically place the call in any
available orbit number and see the number in the display.
Remember the selected orbit number.
Replace the handset when finished.
Lift the handset and make a page announcement as previously described
(example:“John Smith park two”).
•
•
Press the MESSAGE key or dial 43 and receive confirmation tone.
Hang up. The MESSAGE key on the called station will light. Standard tele-
phones receive special dial tone as a message indication or a lit message
lamp,if the phone is equipped with one and they are connected to an 8MWSLI
card or a 16MWSLI card on the system.
•
•
•
NOTES:
1. A station can have up to five message indications.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing.
To retrieve a parked call from orbit:
•
•
Press the PARK button and dial the announced orbit number (0-9).
You will be connected to the parked call.
CANCELING MESSAGES
NOTES:
1. You must have a PARK button or park access code to retrieve and place calls
in park orbits.
2. If the parked call is not retrieved within a pre-programmed period of time, it
will recall your keyset and have a slow flashing amber light. You cannot park
and page intercom calls.
To cancel a message indication that you left at another station, dial 42 plus the
extension number of the station at which you left a message.
To cancel all message indications left at your keyset, dial 42 plus your extension.
Your MESSAGE light will go out.
3. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing.
AUTOMATIC PARK WITH PAGE KEY
RETURNING MESSAGES
•
While in conversation, press the PAGE button.The call is automatically parked
at your station.
Receive page tone and dial a desired page zone number.
Make announcement indicating your extension number or the line number.
Hang up.
•
Press the MESSAGE key or dial 43.The first station that left a message will be
called automatically. If that station does not answer, your MESSAGE light will
stay on.
•
•
•
Repeat until all messages have been returned in the order received.
32
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iDCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
•
Your MESSAGE light will turn off when all messages have been returned.
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
NOTES:
1. Display keyset users can view message indications and return them in any
order. See Viewing Message Indications under Display Features.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing.
DO NOT DISTURB
Use this feature when you want to block calls to your keyset.
3. If a message has been left at your keyset by a keyset in Auto Answer, you must
manually cancel the message after it has been returned.
•
•
While on-hook, press the DND key or dial 401. The DND key lights steady red
to remind you of this mode.
To cancel DND, press the DND key again or dial 400. The DND light turns off.
You can make calls while in the DND mode.
PROGRAMMED MESSAGES
When you will be away from your phone for any length of time, you can leave a
programmed station message. Display stations calling you will see this message
and be informed of your status or follow your instructions.
NOTES:
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER key.
•
Dial 48 plus any of the message codes (01–20) listed on the back of this user
guide.
2. If you place your keyset in DND mode and you do not have a DND key, your
TSI key will flash to indicate DND status.
•
•
To cancel any of these messages you might have selected, dial 48 plus 00.
Press TRANSFER to exit and store your selection.
ONE TIME DND
If you are on a call and you do not wish to be interrupted while on that call, you
can press the DND key and place your station in Do Not Disturb. When you hang
up at the end of the call, DND will be automatically canceled and your keyset will
be able to receive new calls. This feature requires a DND key.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER key.
You can have multiple programmed message keys (PMSG) and each one can have
a different message code:
MUTE
•
•
Press any programmed message (PMSG) button. The message is set and the
button will light red. Press the button again to turn off.
Pressing another programmed message (PMSG) button will turn the previous
one off and set a different programmed message.
You can mute the handset transmitter or the microphone during any conversa-
tion:
•
•
Press the MUTE key. It will light red.
To resume speaking, press the MUTE button again. The light turns off.
BACKGROUND MUSIC
When a music source is supplied, you may listen to music through the speaker in
your keyset:
•
•
While on-hook, press the HOLD button to hear music.
Press the HOLD button again to turn music off.
You can set the level of background music by using the VOLUME keys while listen-
ing to the music. This does not affect the speakerphone level.
34
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iDCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
ESTABLISHED CALL PICKUP
ANSWERING THE DOOR PHONE
To pick up an established call in progress at a single line extension connected to a
computer modem on your PC.
When you are programmed to receive calls from a door phone:
•
•
•
You will receive three short rings repeated.
Lift the handset or press ANS/RLS key.You are connected to the door phone.
If an electric door lock release is installed, dial 13 to unlock the door.
•
•
Press the EP key for that station on your keyset and the call is automatically
moved to your keyset.
The single line extension on your modem will be disconnected.
CALLING THE DOOR PHONE/
ROOM MONITOR
single line station.
You may call the door phone and listen to what may be happening outside or in
another room.
APPOINTMENT REMINDER/ALARM CLOCK
This feature works like an alarm clock. Use it to remind yourself of an appointment
later in the day (TODAY ONLY) or as a daily reminder every day (DAILY).You can set
up to three alarms. Each one can be either a TODAY ONLY or a DAILY alarm.
•
•
Dial the extension number of the door phone.
You will be connected to the door phone and you can listen or have a con-
versation.
When the alarm rings, you will hear three short rings repeated three times. Lift the
handset to answer the alarm. If you do not, the alarm will alert you two more times
at five minute intervals.
•
If an electric door lock release is installed, dial 13 to unlock the door.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER key.
To set alarms:
EXECUTIVE/SECRETARY HOT LINE
•
•
•
Press TRANSFER and then dial 112.
Dial the alarm number 1, 2 or 3.
Dial the time at which you want the alarm to sound. Enter the time as HHMM
(hours and minutes) using the 24 hour clock.
Dial 0 (NOT SET), 1 (TODAY ONLY) or 2 (DAILY) to select the alarm type.
Press TRANSFER to save.
If programmed, an executive and a secretary can have a hot line between them.
When the executive station is in the DND mode, all of its calls will ring the secre-
tary station.
•
•
•
•
•
Either person can press the BOSS key to make a voice call to the other station.
Using the hot line will override DND at the other station.This key will light red
when the other station is in use.
Repeat for each alarm if needed.
To cancel individual alarms:
To transfer a call to a Boss in DND:
•
•
•
Press TRANSFER and then dial 112.
Dial alarm number 1, 2 or 3.
Press the HOLD key.
•
•
Press the TRANSFER key followed by the BOSS key.
Wait for the BOSS to answer to announce the call and hang up to complete
the transfer OR
•
Hang up to complete a blind transfer after pressing the BOSS key.
NOTE: Display keysets can show a reminder message. See Alarm Reminder
Messages under Display Features.
36
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iDCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
GROUP LISTENING
MANUAL SIGNALLING
When you are engaged on a call and you are using the handset, you may want
other people to hear the distant party’s voice over the speaker:
Use this feature when you want to send a brief 500ms ring burst to another sta-
tion, regardless of the status of your phone (on-hook, off-hook, handsfree, DND, or
ringing).
•
Press the LISTEN key to turn on the speaker. The microphone is not in use, so
the distant party does not hear other parties present in your office.
Press LISTEN again to turn the speaker off and resume private conversation.
Repeat if necessary.
To send a signal to another station:
•
•
•
•
Press the Manual Signalling (MS) key.
You may press the MS key repeatedly to send multiple signals to the desig-
nated station.
NOTE: Depending on speaker volume and the acoustics of your office, it may be
advisable to turn the group listening feature off before hanging up.This will elim-
inate a momentary squeal.
NOTE: Your phone must have a Manual Signalling (MS) key with a station
number extender assigned to it.
ACCOUNT CODES
OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE
When equipped with optional equipment, your system will allow calls to be
charged to a specific account.
Keysets may receive a voice announcement while on another call. The calling sta-
tion must have an OHVA key.When you are in DND, you cannot receive OHVA calls.
The OHVA feature will work with intercom and transferred calls.
•
•
During any outside C.O. call, press the account (ACC) key.
Enter the 3 digit account code bin number when prompted, OR
If your key has an extender of 000 enter the account code (maximum 12 char-
acters including Q and #) and press ACC000 again, OR
When you receive an OHVA and secure OHVA is ON, you will hear the announce-
ment in the handset receiver, if you are using the handset. If secure OHVA is OFF
then you will hear the announcement on the speaker, if you are talking on the
handset. If you are using the speakerphone the announcement will always be
heard through the speaker.
If your key has an extender other than 000 (001~999) account code contained
in that bin will automatically be entered for your.
LOCKING YOUR KEYSET
To make an off-hook voice announcement:
You can lock your keyset to control misuse of your phone while you are away.You
can unlock it when you return.Your default station passcode is 1234.
•
•
•
•
•
Dial the extension number or press the DSS key.
When you receive a busy signal, press the OHVA key.
After the attention tone, begin speaking.
Finish the call by replacing the handset or pressing the ANS/RLS key.
Press the flashing CALL button on your keyset. This will place the original
party on hold and allow you to talk to the announcing party.
To return to your first party, press the key corresponding to your original call.
This will disconnect the OHVA call.
•
•
•
•
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 100.
Dial your four digit station passcode.
Dial 1 to locking outgoing, 2 for locked all calls, or 0 to unlock.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
•
1
2
0
LOCKED
OUTGOING
LOCKED
ALL CALLS
UNLOCKED
NOTES:
1. When you are voice announcing to a station close to you, use the handset to
avoid an echo effect.
2. You cannot off-hook voice announce to single line telephones.
NO
Make outside calls
Receive outside calls
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
ACCESS DENIED
YES
NO
NO
NO
If your keyset is associated with a DCS 32 Button Add-On Module, you can receive
Executive OHVA calls. Executive Off-Hook Voice Announce allows you to engage in
conversation on your keyset and simultaneously receive and reply handsfree to an
OHVA through your DCS 32 Button Add-On Module (AOM). Use caution because
Make intercom calls
YES
YES
Receive intercom calls
38
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iDCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
the conversation through the AOM may possibly be heard by the caller on the
keyset. When you receive an executive OHVA through your AOM:
CUSTOMIZING YOUR KEYSET
•
•
•
Reply by speaking in the direction of the microphone in the AOM unit.
Adjust the volume with the VOLUME keys on the AOM unit.
Press the SPK key on the AOM to disconnect the announcing party.
AME PASSWORD
This feature allows people using the AME feature to enable password protection.
This will prevent unauthorized people from listening to your messages being left.
The passcode is the same as your station passcode. This feature only applies if
there is an SVM card installed in the system and your keyset has a programmed
AME key.
NOTES:
1. Executive off-hook voice announce can only be accomplished when an AOM
is attached to your phone.
2. If the MUTE key on the AOM is lit, you must press the AOM’s SPK key to
answer the OHVA call.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Dial 101 to turn on AME PASSCODE or 100 to turn it off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
OHVA BLOCK
Your keyset can be programmed with an OHVA Block (BLOCK) key. Pressing this
key will prevent anyone from making an OHVA to you until you press the button
again and cancel the blocking.
AUTO CAMP-ON
This option allows intercom calls to be automatically camped on, if possible, when
a busy station is called.
OHVA REJECT
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Press 081 to turn CAMP-ON on or 080 to turn it off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
Your keyset can be programmed with an OHVA Reject (REJECT) key. Pressing this
key while receiving an OHVA call will disconnect the voice announcing party and
return you to your original call.
SELECT RING TONE
IN GROUP/OUT OF GROUP
Each keyset user can select any one of eight ring frequencies:
If your keyset is assigned to a station ring group, you can remove your keyset from
the group and then put it back in.While you are out of the group, you can receive
calls to your extension number but not calls to the group number. If you have an
IN/OUT key with the group number assigned.
•
•
•
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 111.
Dial 1–8 or press the UP and DOWN keys to hear each tone.
When you hear the tone that you prefer, press TRANSFER to save it.
•
•
Press the IN/OUT key. It will light red when your keyset is in the group.
Press the IN/OUT key again to exit the group and turn the light off. Repeat as
necessary.
NOTE: Specific lines or stations may be programmed to ring with a different
tone than what you have selected for your keyset.
If you do not have an IN/OUT key:
CHANGE YOUR PASSCODE
From the factory, your station passcode is 1234.You can change your station pass-
code whenever you desire.
•
Dial the IN/OUT access code number ________________, then the group
number, then 0 to exit the group or 1 to enter the group.
•
•
•
•
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 101.
Dial your old passcode.
Dial a new passcode (must be four characters).You can use 0–9.
Redial the new passcode to verify. If successful, you will hear two beeps. Four
beeps indicate an incorrect code. Reenter the code again.
Press TRANSFER to store the new passcode.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the hand-
set or press SPEAKER key.
The IN/OUT key can include an extender to indicate the specific group that this
key will affect. This means that if you are in multiple groups, you can decide for
which groups you will receive calls.
•
40
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iDCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
Your keyset may be equipped with a Headset mode key. If it is so equipped press-
ing this key while the light is out will cause the keyset to enter headset mode and
the light will illuminate to indicate this. Pressing the key while the light is lit will
cause the keyset to return to handset mode and the light will go out.
SET ANSWER MODE (INTERCOM)
You can receive internal calls in one of three modes (see Answering Intercom Calls
under Intercom Calls for descriptions):
•
•
•
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 103.
Dial 0 for Ringing, 1 for Auto Answer or 2 for Voice Announce.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
HOT KEYPAD
On your phone system your keyset’s keypad can be made“live”or“hot”so that it is
ing. Calls can be made and features activated by simply dialing the C.O. line num-
ber, trunk group access code, intercom number or feature access code.To activate
this feature:
NOTE: When your keyset is programmed for Auto Answer and you have Forward
No Answer (FNA) turned on, you must answer screened transfers by pressing the
ANS/RLS key before your FNA timer expires or the call will forward.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Dial 031 to turn the Hot Keypad on or 030 to turn it off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
SET ANSWER MODE (CO)
Your incoming CO calls can be set to follow the intercom answer mode.
•
•
•
•
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Dial 15 to access AUTO ANS CO.
Press the VOLUME UP or DOWN key to change status.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
KEY CONFIRMATION TONE
You can hear a short beep (confirmation tone) each time you press a button on the
dial pad. This tone can be turned on or off.
NOTE: When your keyset is programmed for Auto Answer and you have Forward
No Answer (FNA) turned on, you must answer screened transfers by pressing the
ANS/RLS key before your FNA timer expires or the call will forward.
•
•
•
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Dial 040 to turn tones off or 041 to turn tones on.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
AUTOMATIC HOLD
REJOINING A PAGE
While on an outside call, pressing a line key, route key or a flashing CALL button
will automatically put your call on hold and connect you to the next call. This fea-
ture can be turned on or off at your keyset.
This feature allows you to hear the remaining portion of an ongoing internal page
after you return your keyset to idle. To enable this feature:
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Dial 051 to turn this feature on or 050 to turn it off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Dial 001 to turn Automatic Hold on or 000 to turn it off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
RING PREFERENCE
NOTE: Intercom calls can be automatically put on hold by pressing TRANSFER.
This feature automatically answers ringing calls when you lift the handset or press
the ANS/RLS key.This method will always answer calls in the order they arrived at
your keyset.When you turn ring preference off, you must press the flashing button
to answer a call, allowing you to answer calls in the order you choose.
HEADSET OPERATION
Keyset users can switch between headset mode and handset mode. When using
headset mode, press the ANS/RLS key to answer and release calls.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Dial 061 to turn ring preference on or 060 to turn it off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Dial 021 to use the headset or 020 to use the handset.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
42
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iDCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
AUTO ANSWER CO CALLS
DISPLAY FEATURES
This option will allow CO calls that directly ring your phone to auto answer.When
a CO call arrives at your station and this option set for ON your phone will sound
two beeps, the same as when a screened transfer is completed, and you will be
connected to the CO call. In order for this option to work the station must also be
programmed for auto answer (see SET ANSWER MODE).
INTERACTIVE DISPLAY KEYS
The three keys below the display are substitutes for dedicated feature keys and ac-
cess codes. Pressing one of these keys has the same effect as pressing a program-
mable key. These keys are called soft keys as their functions are not fixed. They
change to present you with the best options for that call condition.The use of soft
keys allows the programmable keys to be used for more DSS and speed dial keys.
•
•
•
While on hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Dial 151 to turn Auto Answer CO on or 150 to turn it off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
The SCROLL key is used to display options available to the user at a particular time
or during a specific procedure. Press this key once while in the idle state to view
the three main categories available.
NOTE: Outside lines must ring your station directly for the Auto Answer CO to
work. Lines ringing a station group will not cause your phone to Auto Answer the
call.
201: STN NAME
CALL OTHER ANS
DISPLAY SPEED DIAL NAME
This option allows you to view the name associated with a speed dial number as
it is dialed.
ANSWER: Guides you through the options to answer calls.
OTHER: Guides you through features other than making or answering calls.
CALL: Guides you through the options to make a call.
•
•
•
With you handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Press 111 to turn DISP SPDNAME on or 110 to turn it off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
Select one of the main categories: CALL, OTHER or ANS (ANSWER). Press the
SCROLL key to display additional options available under each of the three main
categories. The symbol ꢁ displayed as the last character on the lower line of the
display indicates that there are additional options.Press the SCROLL key to display
these additional options.
CALLER ID REVIEW ALL
This feature allows display keyset users to review Caller ID information for calls
sent to their stations. This list can be from ten to fifty calls in a first in, first out
basis. The list includes calls that you answered and calls that rang your station
but that you did not answer. When reviewing this list, you can press one button
to dial the person back. The system must be using LCR to dial the stored num-
ber.
User instructions will be displayed in lower case letters. Options assigned to soft
keys will be in upper case letters.
DIRECTORY INFORMATION
An 11 character directory name can be assigned to each extension number.
Display keyset users can view the name of the called or calling station before an-
swering.
•
•
•
With you handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Press 121 to turn CID REVIEW ALL on or 120 to turn it off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
Each outside line can have an 11 character directory name. Incoming calls can be
easily identified and answered with different greetings.
SECURE OHVA
This option allows you to receive OHVA calls via the speaker while you are on the
handset.
Outside and internal calls ringing to a station group will display [CALL FOR xxx]
where xxx is the station group number.This allows you to answer calls directed to
you differently than calls directed to your group.
•
•
•
With you handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Press 131 to turn AUTO CAMP-ON on or 130 to turn it off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
44
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iDCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
CALL LOG
CALL PROGRESS DISPLAYS
This system can log both incoming and outgoing calls placed from or to your tele-
phone. You must have a LOG button programmed on your keyset and assigned a
review list.
During everyday call handling, your keyset display will provide information that is
helpful and in some cases invaluable. Displays like [CALL FROM 203], [TRANSFER
TO 202], [701: RINGING], [TRANSFER FM 203], [708 busy], [Camp on to 204], [Recall
from 204], [Call for 501], [message frm 204] and [FWD ALL to 204] keep you in-
formed of what is happening and where you are. In some conditions you are
prompted to take an action and in other cases you receive directory information.
Each IN and OUT list can be up to 50 numbers maximum. They are assigned in
blocks of 10 each.
To view your incoming and outbound call logs:
DISPLAY NUMBER DIALED
Display keysets begin showing digits as they are dialed. They will stay in the dis-
play until the call duration timer comes on automatically or the TIMER button is
pressed. If the call duration timer is not used, the number dialed will be displayed
until the call is released, transferred or put on hold.
•
•
•
Press the LOG key.
Press either the IN or OUT key.
View the first IN/OUT telephone number. At this point you may select one of
the three options related to this number or use the UP/DOWN keys to scroll
through your list of calls.
CALL DURATION TIMER
•
•
Press the CLEAR key to erase this number from the list.
Press the NND key repeatedly to view the Name, Number, or Date associated
with this call.
The system can be set to automatically time outside calls. A few seconds after you
dial a telephone number, the timer appears in the display. It appears immediately
for incoming calls. The call timer continues for the duration of the call. Call dura-
tion times are displayed in minutes and seconds. If a call lasts longer than 60 min-
utes, the timer restarts.
•
Press the DIAL key to call this number.
This options are the same for the incoming or outgoing call logs.
You can press the TIMER key to manually begin timing a call. Press it again to stop
timing. If you press it while the automatic timer is on, the call duration time is
restarted.
DIAL BY NAME
Each station or speed dial number can have an associated directory name. A sta-
tion or speed dial number can be selected by scrolling alphabetically through a
directory name list. This on-line “phone book” allows the user to look up and dial
any station or speed dial number in seconds.
AUTO TIMER
Display keyset users may have the timer automatically start when they answer
incoming calls or after a short delay on an outgoing call.
•
•
Press the DIR key (DIRECTORY).
Select the directory you wish to use: PERS (personal speed dial numbers), SYS
(system speed dial numbers) or STN (station names).
Dial the key on the keypad that corresponds to the first letter of the name you
wish to search for.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Dial 011 to turn the auto timer on or 010 to turn it off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
•
•
•
Use the UP and DOWN arrows to scroll through the names.
Press the DIAL soft key to dial the number.
TIMER FUNCTION
Display keyset users may use this feature as a simple stopwatch.
NOTE:A DIR key can have an extender to take you directly to one of the above lists
(PERS, SYS, or STN).
•
•
•
•
When the keyset is idle, press the TIMER button to start timing.
Press the TIMER button again to stop timing.
Read the elapsed time in the display.
Lift the handset and replace it. The display will return to date and time.
46
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iDCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
DIAL 8
DIAL 9
DIAL ꢀ
NOTES:
T
W
:
U
X
=
V
Y
[
Q
Z
]
8
VIEWING MESSAGE INDICATIONS
9
You can view all of your message indications before you return them:
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press the MESSAGE key with the red flashing light.
The first station that left a message indication will be displayed.
Press the UP and DOWN arrows to scroll through the stations that left mes-
sage indications. Use the soft keys to reply, clear or advance to the next mes-
sage.
ꢀ
1. When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previ-
ous character, press UP to move the cursor one space to the right.
2. Other symbols are available for DIAL #.
•
Press the ANS/RLS key to return your keyset to the idle condition.
To cancel an individual alarm and reminder message:
ALARM REMINDER MESSAGES
When you use the alarm/appointment reminder feature, you create a 16 charac-
ter reminder message. When the alarm rings, your message will appear instead of
[ALARM REMINDER]. To program reminder messages:
•
•
•
•
Press TRANSFER and then dial 112.
Dial alarm number 1, 2 or 3.
Press the HOLD key.
Press the TRANSFER key.
•
•
•
Press TRANSFER and then dial 116.
Dial the alarm number 1, 2 or 3.
Dial the time you want the alarm to go off.Enter the time as HHMM (hours and
minutes) using the 24 hour clock.
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NAMES
Each personal speed dial number can have an 11 character name assigned to it.
This name is used to select the speed dial bin when you are dialing by directory.
•
•
Dial 0 (NOT SET), 1 (TODAY) or 2 (DAILY) to select the alarm type.
Write your message using the dial pad keys. Each press of a key selects a char-
acter. Pressing the next key moves the cursor to the next position. For exam-
ple, if your message is “TAKE MEDICATION,” press 8 once to get the letter “T.”
Press 2 once to get “A.” Press 5 twice to get “K.” Continue selecting characters
from the following table to complete your message.
•
•
•
Press TRANSFER and then dial 106.
Dial the speed dial bin number 00–49.
Write your message using the procedure described in Alarm Reminder Mes-
sages.
•
•
Press the TRANSFER key to store the speed dial name.
Repeat for each speed dial bin if necessary.
•
•
Press the TRANSFER key to store the alarm and reminder message.
Repeat for each alarm if needed.
STATION NAMES
COUNT
DIAL 0
DIAL 1
DIAL 2
DIAL 3
DIAL 4
DIAL 5
DIAL 6
DIAL 7
1
2
3
.
4
)
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
You can assign an 11 character name to your keyset.This allows other display key-
set users to call you using the directory dial feature.
<
>
?
space
,
!
To program a station name:
A
D
G
J
B
E
C
F
I
@
#
$
%
^
S
•
•
Press TRANSFER and then dial 104.
Enter the 11 character name using the procedure described in Alarm Remind-
er Messages.
H
K
N
Q
•
Press TRANSFER to store the name.
L
O
R
M
P
48
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iDCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
MANAGING KEY ASSIGNMENTS
TEXT MESSAGING
You can view your key assignments and add extenders to some of your program-
mable keys for easy one touch operation of frequently used features.
This feature allows two digital keyset users to respond to each other with prepro-
grammed text messages. After receiving an Off Hook Voice Announcement or
Station Camp-On, you may respond with a text message while continuing to talk
and listen to your outside party.The other station can view this message and take
the appropriate action or respond back with another text message.
•
•
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 107.
Use the VOLUME keys to scroll through all of your programmable keys OR
Press the programmable key to which you want to add the extender.
When you reach a key listed below, dial the corresponding extender.
Press TRANSFER to store and exit programming.
•
•
You must be permitted to use the Text Messaging feature. See you System
Administrator or Technician to be assigned this feature. They will assign you ten
(10) blank messages.You can create any 16 character messages (01 to 10) that are
appropriate for your use.
Please refer to the Enhanced Display Programming Section provided by your
installation company when requested for a complete list of descriptions and
extenders for any keys you may have programmed on your keyset.
NOTE: See ALARM REMINDER MESSAGES for instructions on how to enter charac-
ters to create a text message.
NOTE: Confirm that the cursor is placed correctly before you enter the extender.
Familiarization with the two digit message numbers you will use the most will
make this procedure quick and easy. However if you do not know them, use the
UP/DOWN key to scroll to the desired message, then press SEND.
LCR WITH CLEAR
When you are making an outside call using LCR and dial an incorrect digit, you can
press the CLEAR soft key to reenter the telephone number. You do not need to
redial 9 to reaccess LCR.
The basics steps in text messaging are:
1. Press TMSG soft key to begin text messaging.
BACKSPACE WITH LCR
2. Dial the 2 digit number for the desired message.
3. Confirm this is the intended message then press SEND.
4. Wait for a reply from the other station (steps 1, 2 & 3)
5. When any station presses EXIT the displays at both stations return to their
previous call progress condition.
If you misdial while using LCR, you can delete digits shown in the display by press-
ing the BSPC soft key as many times as necessary.
At all times after step 1 you can talk and listen to your caller while repeating steps
2.
The example on the following page will better demonstrate how to use Text
Messaging. In this example station 201 is making an off hook voice announce-
ment to station 205 who after hearing the announcement will respond with a text
message.
50
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iDCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
STATION 201: LINDA
STATION 205: JOHN
received a call on line 702
is talking on line 701
CALLER ID
Talking on line 702
WHAT IS CALLER ID?
702:
01:15
701:
05:25
Caller ID is the name given to the telephone company-provided feature that de-
livers the telephone number and sometimes the name of the person calling your
phone. There are two types of Caller ID; the first delivers the calling party’s tele-
phone number only and the second (sometimes referred to as “Deluxe” Caller ID)
delivers both the calling party’s telephone number and name as listed in the tele-
phone directory.
CONF PAGE MUTE
Press TRANSFER
Transfer:
RETURN
Dial 205
The phone system can handle both types of Caller ID; in fact, in the case of num-
ber only delivery, the system can be programmed to insert a name for a specific
telephone number. However, even though you are paying to receive Caller ID
information, there are some circumstances that mean you will not receive this in-
formation. The six most common reasons are listed below along with the display
information that the system will provide.
205:busy
OHVA
CAMP ON
Ð
OHVA to 205
OHVA from 201
TMSG
REJECT
PRIVATE
The caller does not wish his/her name or number to be re-
vealed to you. This type of call can be stopped at the tele-
phone company by dialing an access code on your outside
lines. This will redirect these PRIVATE calls to an announce-
ment that states that you do not wish to receive calls that
have had Caller ID blocked.The code to block these calls can
usually be found in the front section of the telephone direc-
tory.
Wait for reply
GIVE THE CALL
TMSG:01
SEND
Dial 03 or press Ï twice
ASK THEM TO HOLD
OUT OF AREA
PAYPHONE
The caller is calling from an area that cannot provide Caller
ID information (for example, international calls) or he/she is
calling from a type of circuit that cannot provide Caller ID
information, for example, some outbound WATS lines.
TMSG:03
SEND
Ð
ASK THEM TO HOLD
Wait for reply
TMSG
EXIT
The caller is calling from a coin-operated telephone. The
telephone company will send this information as there are
no directory listings for pay phones.The number will be de-
livered as usual.
Ð
702:
01:45
701:
05:55
CONF PAGE MUTE
CONF PAGE MUTE
INVALID CID INFO
NO CID RECEIVED
This is a message that will be displayed when CID informa-
tion is sent on the line but was somehow corrupted.
This is a message that will be displayed when there was no
CID information sent on the line.
52
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iDCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
NO CID DSP
Caller ID Digital Signal Processors (CIDDSP’s) are resources
in the iDCS system required for receiving CID data. If there
are no CIDDSP’s available at the time a call comes in, this is
the message you will see on your display.
VIEWING THE NEXT CALLER ID CALL
In the event that you have a call waiting or a camped-on call at your keyset, you
can press the NEXT key to display the Caller ID information associated with the
call in queue at your keyset. Either the CID name or CID number will show in the
display depending on your Name/Number selection.
NOTE:The Caller ID features require optional software and/or hardware.Please see
your service and installation company for details.
To view Caller ID information for calls that have been camped-on to your keyset,
press the NEXT key. If your keyset does not have a NEXT key, press the CID key
and then the NEXT soft key.
WHAT IS ANI?
ANI (Automatic Number Identification) is a feature offered by some telephone
service providers that provides the calling party’s telephone number. This service
is only available on E&M Tie Lines on a T1, digital trunk. ANI is similar to Caller
Identification (CID) but the format and information of the calling person is differ-
ent. CID uses FSK signalling and ANI uses DTMF signalling. Usually, with ANI, a call-
ing party’s identity is the Listed Directory Number (LDN) unless a separate bill-to-
number has been specified, (in which case the bill-to-number will be sent). Note
that ANI does not provide calling party NAME,only the number.The phone system
can provide calling number to name translation table.
SAVING THE CALLER ID NUMBER
At any time during an incoming call that provides CID information, you may press
the SAVE key to save the CID number. If your keyset does not have a SAVE key,
press the CID key, the SCROLL key and then the SAVE soft key. The system must
be using LCR to dial the saved number.
REDIALING A SAVED CALLER ID
NUMBER
WHAT IS CLI?
To redial a number that has been saved, press the SNR key or dial 17.
On ISDN circuits, calling party information is called CLI and is supported on both
BRI and PRI type circuits on the iDCS. On BRI circuits the iDCS only supports num-
ber delivery and, like ANI, a name can be attached to the telephone number of fre-
quent callers via the Caller ID translation table. On 5ESS and NI2 PRI circuits both
name and number support is provided on the iDCS system. On a DMS100 circuit
only number service is provided.
NOTES:
1. Your telephone system must have LCR correctly programmed to redial the
saved number.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing.
SELECTING YOUR CALLER ID
DISPLAY
STORING A CALLER ID NUMBER
At any time during an incoming call that provides CID information, you may save
the CID number as a speed dial number in your personal speed dial list.To store a
Caller ID number in a personal speed dial bin:
You can decide if you want to see the Caller ID name or Caller ID number in the
display. Regardless of which one is selected, you can press the NND key to view
the other pieces of Caller ID information. To select the type of Caller ID informa-
tion you wish to view first:
•
Press the STORE key. The system displays the speed dial bin in which the
number was stored, OR
•
•
•
Press the CID key and then press the SCROLL key.
Press the STORE soft key.
The system displays the speed dial bin in which the number was stored.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 119.
Dial 0 for CID options, 1 for ANI options, or 2 for CLI options.
Dial 0 if you do not wish to view CID information, 1 to view the NUMBER first
or 2 to view the NAME first.
NOTE: Your telephone system must have LCR correctly programmed to redial the
saved number. If LCR is not being used on your system, you will not be allowed to
STORE CID numbers.
•
Press TRANSFER to exit and store your selection.
54
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iDCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
•
You can now CLEAR this entry, OR
Use NND to view more information about this call, OR
Press DIAL to call this person back, OR
Press SCROLL and then press STORE to save this number in a personal speed
INQUIRE CALLER ID PARK/HOLD INFO
If you are informed that an incoming call is on hold or has been parked for you,
you may view the Caller ID information before you retrieve the call.This may influ-
ence how you choose to handle the call.
dial bin.
From an idle keyset:
NOTES:
1. Each keyset defaults with ten review bins. Please see your system administra-
tor to determine the number of bins assigned to your keyset.
2. Your system must have LCR correctly programmed to allow you to DIAL num-
bers from the review list or to STORE entries from the review list.
•
Press the INQUIRE key, OR
Press the CID key and then the INQUIRE soft key.
Dial the trunk number.
You may now answer the call by pressing the ANS key, OR
You may use NND to view more information about this call, OR
You can return to the idle condition by pressing IGNORE.
•
•
If you are on a call:
•
Press the INQUIRE key.Your existing call will go on hold, OR
Press the CID key and then the INQUIRE soft key to place the first call on hold.
Dial the trunk number.
You may now answer the call by pressing the ANS key, OR
You may use NND to view more information about this call, OR
You can return to the idle condition by pressing IGNORE.
•
•
NOTES:
1. If you are on an intercom call or you have Automatic Hold turned off, you
must finish the existing call or place it on hold before inquiring.
2. If you inquire about an outgoing call, you will receive a [call no longer avail-
able] display.
REVIEWING PAST CALLER ID CALLS
This feature allows you to review CID information for calls sent to your keyset.This
list can contain 10–50 calls in a last-in,first-out basis.The list includes calls that you
answered and calls that rang your keyset but that you did not answer. When
reviewing this list, you can press one button to dial the person back. The system
must be using LCR to dial the stored number.To access the CID information stored
in your REVIEW list:
•
•
Press the REVIEW key, OR
Press the CID key and then press the REVIEW soft key.
If you have entries in your review list, the most recent call will be shown first.
56
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iDCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
iDCS 64 BUTTON MODULE
SVMi-8/SVMi-16E
This section describes how to setup and use the various features available to a
Subscriber. A Subscriber is a person that has been authorized access to the vari-
ous features and services available in the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E. Please review this sec-
tion carefully before you use your Authorized Features and Services, known as
Subscriber Services.
WITH KEYSET
The 64 button module is used when you need more programmable keys added to
your keyset. The 64 red LED’s provide visual indication of calls and features. The
extra programmable keys are used exactly like the ones on your keyset. Make
them DSS/BLF keys or feature keys. As a DSS/BLF the size of the 64 button module
allows for greater call status and faster call processing.The 64 button module does
not support executive off-hook voice announce (OHVA) and does not have a
microphone. A maximum of two 64 button modules can be assigned to any key-
set.
Voice Mail is one of the Subscriber Services available. Your voice mail box has the
capability of storing private messages, and offers a number of options for sending
or redirecting messages as well as provides several ways to notify you of new mes-
sages.
Another very common Subscriber Service is Access Manager.This allows you con-
trol over when and where you receive your calls as well as what to speak to your
callers in the event you are unable to speak to them directly. The ‘events’ are
referred to as “Call Conditions”. No-Answer, Busy, and Blocked are the most com-
monly used Call Conditions.
This guide can be used by Subscribers from within the office or from telephones
outside the office. The basic operation is the same, but the access method will be
different. See the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E Subscriber Services Menu Diagram for more
details.
Note that some features and prompts detailed here may not be available to all
Subscribers. See your System Administrator if you have questions about feature
availability.
58
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iDCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
SVMi-8/SVMi-16E Subscriber Services Menu
Group New
Messages
Group Saved
Messages
Listen to New Review Saved
Messages
Record & Send
Messages
Access
Manager
Personal
Greetings
Mailbox
Administration
Personal
Services
Pause, Resume
Play Menu
Options
Exit
Messages
11
33
1
3
2
4
5
6
#
8
0
*
Assign and/or Edit
Primary Greeting
Change
Message Alert
Review
Workload
Group Messages Menu
Listen Menu
Record Menu
Follow Me
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
0
1
Group
Urgent Messages
Play
Message
For a Directory
of Subscribers
Assign and/or Edit
Busy Greeting
Change
Pager Notification
Edit Stored
Telephone Numbers
Block All Calls
Call forwarding
Call Screening
Find Me
1
1
11
2
#
3
4
5
6
7
8
#
0
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
2
3
5
7
8
9
#
0
Play Previous
Message
To Create a
Reminder
Group
Callback Requests
Assign and/or Edit
Blocking Greeting
Review Deleted
Messages
Change
Weekly Schedule
Change
Password
##
2
3
4
5
8
9
#
0
1
2
Save
Message
Group
Reminders
Assign and/or Edit
Night Greeting
Review Undelivered
Messages
Place a
Direct Call
Record
Name
"Enter the Recipient's Number"
Discard
Message
Review
Recording
3
Group
Private Messages
1
Assign and/or Edit
Screened Greeting
Auto Play
New Messages
Enter Directory
Name
3
3
Reply to Sender
4
Stop, Append to
Recording
2
Group
Fax Only Messages
Edit Only
Personal Greetings
Auto Play Message
Information
Extended
Prompting
Personal
Administration
4
8
0
Place
Call to Sender
5
Discard Recording
and Rerecord
3
Auto Set
Night Intercept
Edit Only
Mailbox Greeting
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
Deliver Copy
of Fax Message
55
6
Set
Delivery Options
4
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
R
e
c
o
r
d
an
d
S
e
nd
Subscriber
Administration
Play
Menu Options
Forward a
Copy of Message
Broadcast Message
Specify
Future Delivery
5
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
Play
Access Coverage
Play
Menu Options
Play
Menu Options
Record
a Reminder
Cancel, Return
Rewind
5 Seconds
7
t
o
S
u
b
s
c
r
i
be
r
S
ervices
SEND Message,
Then Copy
*
6
Change
Playback Volume
Group
A Specific Sender
Play
Menu Options
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
Cancel, Return
Play
Menu Options
77
8
t
o S cr r Services
u
b
s
i
b
e
Rewind
5 Seconds
*
*
7
Pause, Resume
Message Playback
Play
Message Inventory
Cancel, Return
Cancel, Return
r Services
e
o
sc
Sub riber Services
t
o
S
u
b
s
c
ri
b
Change
Playback Volume
*
*
77
Fast Forward
5 Seconds
9
Play
Menu Options
Pause, Resume
Record/Playback
8
Change
Playback Speed
99
#
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
Fast Forward
5 Seconds
9
Skip to
Next Message
*
Change
Playback Speed
99
Scan Messages
##
0
SEND Message,
Then Exit Record
Play
Menu Options
#
Play
Menu Options
Play Message
Information
0
00
C
S
a
n
u
ce
b
l
s
,
R
e
t
e
u
r
n
Ca
n
c
e
l
,
R
e
t
u
r
n
Subscriber Services
t
o
c
ib
r Services
t
*
*
NOTE: All options shown MAY NOT be authorized. If an option is not available
please speak to your system administrator.
60
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iDCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
ACCESSING YOUR MAILBOX
GETTING STARTED
Using your new SVMi-8/SVMi-16E Subscriber Services is as simple as following a
few simple spoken instructions. First time users should read this section as a tuto-
rial.You should start with the following steps:
Inside Callers [Subscriber logging in from their Desk]
•
Dial the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E access number or press the key assigned to ring
SVMi-8/SVMi-16E [VMMSG].
•
Access your Subscriber Services Menu - You already know how to do this.
•
Enter your personal password when prompted (the default password is
From the Subscriber Services Menu:
0000).
•
•
•
•
•
Record a Primary/No-Answer Personal Greeting. Dial [5][1].
Record a Mailbox Greeting. Dial [5][7].
Change your access code (Password). Dial [#][7][1].
Record your name. Dial [#][7][2].
Outside Callers [Subscribers calling from Cell Phones or outside of the
office environment]
•
•
•
Dial the phone number that will be answered by the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E. The
main greeting will answer.
At the main greeting dial [#] plus your Subscriber (or mailbox) number
(Subscriber and Mailbox numbers will usually match your extension number).
Enter your personal password when prompted (the default password is
0000).
Enter your directory name. Dial [#][7][3].
After you have completed the steps above your Subscriber Services are set up and
ready to use.
LISTEN TO YOUR MESSAGES
If there are new messages in your mailbox your [VMMSG] key will be lit. Call the
SVMi-8/SVMi-16E by pressing this key, and when prompted enter your password.
You will then be at the Subscriber Services Menu. Select [1] to listen to new mes-
sages or [3] to listen to saved messages.
Access your Subscriber Services (or Mailbox) from a Station
other than your Own (or checking a mailbox associated with a
different station)
•
Press the [VMMSG] key or dial the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E group number.You will
be prompted to enter a password.
Press [ꢀ]. This will take you to the Main Auto Attendant Menu.
Press [#] plus the Subscriber number of your choice.You will be prompted to
enter you password.
Note:After you enter your password, if“Autoplay of New Messages”is enabled and
you have new messages the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E will begin to play them automati-
cally. A subscriber can control this feature. From the Subscriber Services Menu [6]
[5] toggles “Autoplay of New Messages” ON/OFF.
•
•
At this point the inside and outside callers follow the same instructions. You will
hear a message stating the number of messages left in your mailbox.You will then
hear the Subscriber Services Menu with the following options:
SUBSCRIBER SERVICES MENU
The following is a list of all the options available in the Subscriber Main Menu.
1
LISTENING TO NEW MESSAGES
GROUP NEW MESSAGES
RECORD AND SEND A MESSAGE
LISTENING TO OLD MESSAGES
GROUP OLD MESSAGES
ACCESS MANAGER
1
2
3
4
5
6
#
ꢀ
Listen to New Messages - See Listening to your Message.
Record and Send Message - See Sending Messages.
Review Saved Messages - See Listening to your Message.
Access Manager - See Access Manager.
11
2
3
33
4
Personal Greetings - See Personal Greetings.
Mailbox Administration - See Mailbox Administration.
Personal Services - See Personal Services.
5
PERSONAL GREETINGS
6
MAILBOX ADMINISTRATION
PAUSE / RESUME
8
Return to Main Menu.
62
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iDCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Change playback speed of the recording.
Home Page
0
ꢀ
#
PLAY MENU OPTIONS
EXIT TO AUTO ATTENDANT
PERSONAL SERVICES
99
0
There are two levels of speed during playback. Dialing this code will toggle
between the two speeds.
Play options.
Pressing this key will play all the menu options available to you from this
point.
1 or 3
00
#
Hear the time and date, and sender's information of the message you just
heard. Sender information is not available on outside calls.
LISTENING TO OLD OR NEW MESSAGES
Move to the next message. This does not Save or Discard the current mes-
sage - it is retained as new.
1
Play / replay the message you just heard.
Play the previous message.
11
2
##
Scan. Plays first 7 seconds of a message then skips to next message. This is
similar to the scan button on a radio. It will allow you to find a specific mes-
sage quickly. To stop scanning press [1].
Save the message you just heard and listen to the next message.
Delete the message you just heard and listen to the next message.
Reply to the message.
3
ꢀ
Cancel and return to previous menu.
4
This will allow you to leave a message in the mailbox of the sender (if the
sender has a mailbox on this system).
11 or 33
5
Return the call directly to the telephone number that left the message.
This will work for internal and external callers, but Caller ID service is need-
ed to use this feature on an outside call.
GROUP NEW OR OLD MESSAGES
Messages can be grouped as either Reminders, press [3] or Messages from a spe-
cific sender, press [9].
55
Deliver a fax copy.
This will allow you to receive attached faxmail document(s). Faxmail docu-
ments can be delivered to any fax machine of your choice as long as out
calling is authorized. You can also have faxmail messages automatically
delivered to the fax machine of your choice.
Additionally you can press [#] and hear a summary of your mailbox contents:
a) Number of messages
b) Number of reminders
6
Forward the message and saves a copy.
c) Number of urgent messages
d) Number of messages needing a callback
e) Number of private messages
f) Number of fax messages
The subscriber can be selected by dialing their mailbox number (nnn),
using the directory service (#) or you may also add comments and leave it
as a memo to yourself (##).
The Send and Copy Service (option 6) allows a user to send copies of a mes-
sage to multiple recipients easily. A different introduction message may be
left for each recipient.
2
7
Rewind the message 5 seconds.
RECORD AND SEND A MESSAGE
77
Change playback volume of the recording.
There are two levels of volume during playback. Dialing this code will tog-
gle between the two levels.
This option is used to send a message to another subscriber.The steps are simple:
8
9
Pause or resume during message playback.
Fast forward the message 5 seconds.
a) Enter the recipient’s mailbox number, or if this is not known enter [#] to use
the system directory.
64
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iDCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
b) Record your message at the tone. After recording the message, you will hear
the Send Menu with the following functions:
Note: ALL Access Manager options MUST be individually allowed by the System
Administrator for each Subscriber. They are:
1
2
3
4
5
6
#
Review
Continue Recording
Discard and Re-Record
Set Message Attributes (Delivery Options)
Schedule Future Delivery
1
Follow Me
Allows the subscriber to enter an alternate location and set how long the new
destination (Designated Location) will be active. This number may be an
internal or external number. This is useful if you are frequently traveling or
changing the number where you can be reached.
Save and Send then Send a Copy to Someone Else
Save and Send the Recording
When Follow Me is activated, the transfer will be supervised and confirmed.
This means that if the call is not answered or if rejected by the Subscriber at
the designated location it will be recalled to the Subscriber’s mailbox.
Setting Message Attributes
3
4
Call Blocking
If after recording a message you select [4] you can set up any combination of the
following delivery options:
When this feature is active, callers will not be transferred to your extension,
they will hear your 'blocked' greeting (if recorded) and will go directly to your
mailbox if they do not select any or are not offered any other options.
1
2
3
4
5
ꢀ
Urgent Delivery
Return Receipt Requested
Request a Call Back
Private Delivery
Reply Required
Exit
Call Forwarding
Unlike Follow Me where the subscriber wants to take their calls at an alter-
nate location this feature allows the subscriber to pass control of his calls to
another Subscriber. The “Forwarded To” Subscriber will now be in control of
the caller and the caller will NOT return to originating Subscriber’s Mailbox. If
the “Forwarded To” Subscriber does not answer the caller it will now follow
what ever the “Forwarded To” Subscriber has set up for their call conditions.
The Caller will hear“Forwarding to”“{Subscriber Name}”before actually being
forwarded.
Scheduling Future Delivery
If after recording a message you select [5] to schedule future delivery, you will be
able to set message attributes and set this message as:
#
1
2
3
4
5
ꢀ
Immediate Delivery
Next Few Hours
End of Current Business Day (based on your Availability Schedule)
Beginning of Next Business Day (based on your Availability Schedule)
A Coming Day of the Week
Specific Day / Time
Exit
5
6
Call Screening
If this is turned on, the caller will be asked their name and the SVMi-8/SVMi-
16E will play this name to you before the transfer, giving you an option to
accept or reject the call.
Find Me
Find Me, when enabled, will attempt to locate the subscriber by calling a list
of preprogrammed phone numbers. The stored phone numbers are entered
in 'Personal Services' [#][2] (if allowed by the Administrator). The stored tele-
phone number list can contain up to 9 preprogrammed telephone numbers.
The Find Me feature only use the first five.
4
ACCESS MANAGER
7
Night Intercept
The Access Manager allows the subscriber to set a number of options for when,
where and how, and/or if the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E contacts you when a caller dials
your extension number. All of the options are toggled on/off based on their cur-
rent status when you access them.
This feature is dependent on your weekly availability schedule, which is
entered in 'Personal Services' [#][3] (if allowed by the Administrator). When
Night Intercept is active the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E will first ring your extension 0
66
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iDCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
then play your primary, No Answer greeting during the day (when you are
available) and will NOT ring your extension but simply play your Night greet-
ing during the night (when you are not available).
Example:“Hi this is John Smith.I'm sorry I am not available to answer your call.
If someone else can help you, please enter the extension number now. Or, to
leave me a message, press 1.”
Note: This does NOT use the Day and Night schedules of the phone system. It
is solely controlled by the Subscriber’s Availability Schedule.
2
Busy Greeting
Played to a caller when you are already talking to someone on your extension
or the telephone at your Designated Location.
8
ꢀ
0
#
Pause / Resume
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Busy
Greeting' feature.
Exit from Access Manager
Play All Options
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. I'm on another line right now. If someone else
can help you, please enter the extension number now. Or, to leave a message,
press 1.”
Play Access Coverage
This feature is useful for finding out how you current access settings are set.
It will also tell you what greetings will play under each of the call conditions
you have setup.
3
Call Blocking Greeting
Used while Call Blocking is enabled in your Access Manager or if your phone
is forwarded ALL or DND.
5
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Call
Blocking' feature.
PERSONAL GREETINGS
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. Sorry I missed your call, but I'm going to be
out of the office for the next few hours. If someone else can help you, please
enter the extension number now. Or, to leave me a message, press 1.”
The options available in this menu will be determined by your System
Administrator, and not all of them may be available to you. In the simplest sys-
tems, only a mailbox greeting will be available, additional greetings may be acces-
sible in more complex systems.
4
Night Greeting
Used during the time period you are scheduled UNAVAILABLE, usually after
business hours during the evening and at night.
Your Personal Greeting will be played every time someone dials your extension
and you do not answer.
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the
'Scheduling' feature.
You may record up to 9 Personal Greetings, and you may assign any one of them
to be active. There are several different 'Call Coverage' conditions to which you
may assign any of your 9 greetings.The Call Coverage Conditions are: No-Answer,
Busy, and Do Not Disturb (or Forwarded All). This will allow different greetings to
play depending on the type of call forward that you have set, or the condition of
your telephone.
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. I've left the office for the evening. If you would
like to try someone else, please enter the extension number now. Or, to leave
me a message, press 1.”
5
Call Screening Greeting
Used while Call Screening is enabled, and you REJECT a caller after listening
to the caller's record name.
The Call Coverage conditions that you can assign specific greetings to are select-
ed by the following digits:
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Call
Screening' feature.
1
Primary/No Answer Greeting
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. I'm sorry, but I am not available to speak with
you at this time. If someone else can help you, please enter the extension
number now. Or, to leave me a message, press 1.”
Used when in your office, away from your desk or during the time period you
are scheduled available. If this is the only Personal Greeting you record, it will
play for all call coverage conditions.
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Basic
Greeting' feature.
68
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iDCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
Setting Up Message Alert:
6
Edit Personal Greetings
You may also edit/record each one of the greetings (1-9) at any time.
■
■
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
Press [1] for Message Alert.
Select a greeting number to edit and follow the instructions to record your
greeting. When you are done recording your greeting, you will be able to lis-
ten to the greeting you recorded, save the greeting you recorded and return
to the previous menu, record the greeting again, or exit without saving the
greeting.
There are 4 options available to you:
Press [1] to toggle message alert on and off.
Press [2] to set the schedule when you would like to be notified.
Press [3] to be notified on urgent messages only.
Press [4] to set the destination phone number.
Note: If you record only the greeting assigned to the No-Answer Call
Coverage Condition,then that greeting will play to callers for all Call Coverage
Conditions (No-Answer, Busy, Blocked, Night, and Rejected Caller). In this case,
the salutation part of the greeting should be very general.
2
Pager Notification
When this function is activated, the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E will call your beeper
service and notify you after each message is left in your voice mailbox.
7
Edit Mailbox Greeting
Used whenever a caller reaches your mailbox or if you have not recorded any
of the Call Coverage greetings.The way a caller is transferred to your mailbox
greeting directly, is by another subscriber transferring the caller to your mail-
box using the VT (VoiceMail Transfer) key.
■
■
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
Press [2] for pager notification.
There are 4 options available to you:
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the
'Mailbox Greeting Option' feature.
Press [1] to toggle pager notification on and off.
Press [2] to set the schedule when you would like to be paged.
Press [3] to be notified on urgent messages only.
Press [4] to set the pager phone number.
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. Please leave me a message, I will call you as
soon as I can.”
Note: This greeting will only play if none of the 5 personal greetings has
played to the caller. A common usage for this Greeting is when another
Subscriber is talking with a caller and uses the VT key on their phone to trans-
fer the caller directly to your Mailbox.
3
Undelete
When this function is activated, the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E will allow you to
undelete any messages that you have recently deleted (up to the pro-
grammed Daily Maintenance Time, which is set to 3 a.m. by Default the fol-
lowing morning).
6
■
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
Press [3] for Deleted Messages.
MAILBOX ADMINISTRATION
Deleted voice mail messages are temporarily stored in memory until 3 a.m.
the following day. Select this option to recover ("undelete") previously delet-
ed messages, during this period of time.
The Mailbox Administration menu is used to turn on and off your pager notifica-
tion, message alert options and other message control features.
1
Message Alert
4
Undelivered Retrieval
When this function is activated, the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E will call any outside or
inside telephone number, after each message is left in your voice mailbox.
When this function is activated, the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E will allow you to recall
any messages you have sent that have NOT yet been picked up by the recip-
ient.
To hear your message at the remote location when the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E calls
you, after you pick up the telephone and answer you will be instructed that
there is a message and to enter your password. Simply enter your password
and you will now be logged in.
■
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
Press [4] for Undelivered Messages.
70
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iDCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
This useful feature will allow you to cancel any messages that have NOT yet been
picked up by the recipient.
#
PERSONAL SERVICES
5
Auto Play New Messages
If this option is enabled, after you enter your password correctly any new
messages will immediately begin to play.To enable (or if already enabled tog-
gle and disable) this feature:
The Personal Administration Menu is used to set your password and record your
name. Many of these features must be allowed by the System Administrator.
1
Workload Management
■
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
Allows you to access to all reminders, both Active and Pending. If authorized
you can group your reminders as Commitments, Follow-Ups or Tasks for bet-
ter organization. The system will flag each reminder as Active or Pending
(pending means scheduled for future delivery).
Press [5] to Set Auto Play of New Messages.
6
Auto Play Message Information
If this option is enabled, the date, time and sender’s name will be played auto-
matically before each message. If this is disabled, the information must be
requested manually by pressing ‘00’. To enable (or if already enabled toggle
and disable) this feature:
2
Stored Numbers
Allows you to enter up to 9 stored phone numbers. The first five of these are
used in the 'Find Me' feature, but any of them (1-9) can be easily dialed using
only one digit followed by the pound key, to be used by many other features
from within your subscriber space. (ie: “Follow Me, “Message Alert”, “Pager
Alert”, and “Direct Call”).
■
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
Press [6] to Set Auto Play of Message Information.
9
3
5
Schedule Availability
Allows you to enter a weekly availability schedule for use with Night Personal
Greeting and the Auto Night Intercept feature. Follow the spoken directions
to enter the days of the week and times you are generally available to talk to
your callers. All other times you will be considered unavailable.
MESSAGE BROADCAST
This option will only be available if it has been allowed by the System
Administrator.
Place a Direct Call
Broadcast to All Mailboxes
Allows you to place a direct call out of the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E from anywhere.
You may either dial the number or dial a single digit 1-5 that corresponds to
a stored number (See Personal Services, 2 - Stored Numbers). This feature
must be authorized by the System Administrator and can be limited or
opened to internal, local, and long distance calls.
If you have been designated as a Subscriber Administrator, you may send a
message to ALL mailboxes in the system.
■
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
Press [9] for Broadcast Messages.
This option will only be available if your mailbox has been assigned
Subscriber Administration privileges.
7
Personal Administration
This area is used during the initial set up of your Subscriber Settings (see next
section).
72
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iDCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
Note: Remember if you know what digits to press, you can enter them at any
time you do not have to wait to be prompted. This feature can be toggled
on/off at anytime. Also if it is off you will be prompted within each subscriber
menu to press zero for more options. This enables you to still be able to find
out what to do if you were to get lost and extended prompting was disabled.
PERSONAL ADMINISTRATION SETTINGS
This menu allows you to make changes to basic setup settings, that are rarely
changed. Use these when you initially set up your personal Subscriber settings.
You probably will not need to change them after that.
KEYSET USER FEATURES
The following options are available if you have a display keyset.They require setup
by the System Administrator.
1
Setting your Password
■
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [#][7][1].
The current password will be played and you will have the chance to
change it.
Message Waiting Lights
2
Recording your Name
When new messages are left in your mailbox,the voice mail message light on your
keyset will flash. Press this flashing key [VMMSG] and follow the prompts to
retrieve messages.This key may be pressed at any time to log into your Subscriber
Main Menu.
Use this option to record your name.Your recorded name is played in several
different situations. It is important to record your name for proper operation
of the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E system.
■
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [#][7][2].
Answer Machine Emulation
The current name will be played and you will have the chance to change
it.
If you have an Answer Machine Emulation key programmed on your keyset, you
can use it to monitor calls going to your voice mail, and optionally answer them.
The operation of this feature is similar to screening a call on a home answering
machine.
Note: It is possible that if you do not record your name and/or enter your
Directory Name (described below), you will not be included in the Dial by
Name Directory.
Your keyset must be set to forward on no answer to voice mail. After ringing your
station the caller will be connected to your voice mail and hear your personal
greeting before leaving a message. During this time you will be monitoring the
connection between the caller and your voice mail box. At this time you will only
be monitoring the call, you can not talk to the other party until you answer. You
may pick up the call at any time or ignore it.
3
Entering your Directory Name
Use this option to enter your Directory Name.Your Directory Name is used by
callers to find you if they do not know your extension number.
■
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [#][7][3].
The current Directory Name will be played as a string of digits that are
equal to your name spelled out on your telephone keypad. Follow the
instructions to enter a new name.You will be prompted to enter your last
name and then your first name.
To activate this feature press the AME button. The associated indicator will be lit
steady. Press again to turn off. If this key is pressed while a station is ringing (dur-
ing forward no answer), the feature will be turned on for the current call only.
This must be done in order for the directory feature to work correctly.
While the caller is leaving a message or ringing you may:
Note: It is possible that if you do not record your name (described above)
and/or enter your Directory Name, you will not be included in the Dial by
Name Directory.
■
■
Press [#] to immediately put the caller in your voice mailbox and monitor it.
Press [ꢀ] to immediately disconnect your station. The caller continues to
leave a message normally.
4
Extended Prompting
■
■
Pick up the handset and monitor privately.
Use this option to drastically reduce the number of prompts played in the
subscriber interface (mailbox prompts). Change this setting only if you are
very familiar with the user operation of the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E.
Press ANS / RLS to answer the call (using the handset or speaker).
74
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iDCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
AME Password
SHORTCUTS
If your keyset has AME PASSWORD (MMC 110) set to YES, you must enter your
station password to listen to messages being left. This will prevent unauthorized
people from listening to messages being left for you.
Calling
Calling a station that is busy or does not answer you can press [#] to immediately
send the call to the called parties mailbox.
If the password option is turned on, while a message is being left, press the flash-
ing AME indicator and enter your station password (not your SVMi-8/SVMi-16E
password).You will then hear the message being left.
Being Called
If your phone rings and you want to send the caller directly to your mailbox, sim-
ply press [#].
Call Record
Direct Messaging
If you have a call record button assigned to your phone, you may press it at any
time, to record the conversation in progress. If you have a display keyset, you will
also have the soft key options to pause and time the message.
[#] + DSS To make it easy to leave messages for others in your office without hav-
ing to dial their extension number first, keyset users may simply dial [#] plus a
mailbox (extension) number and leave a message directly.If you dial a busy exten-
sion press [#] to connect directly with the mailbox.
Self Memo (Reminder)
Pressing [##] will leave a message in your own mailbox. This is useful to remind
yourself of things to do now or in the future. Messages can be sent with future
delivery so you can have the system call you when items become due.
INTERACTIVE DISPLAYS
Display keyset users have the added advantage of using the soft keys and displays
to play, save, delete, reply, call, forward, rewind, pause, fast forward, change the
volume, get message information, or help.
Viewing Mailbox Contents
If you have new messages, in addition to the Terminal Status Indicator (TSI) you
will be able to use the keyset displays and soft keys to communicate with the
SVMi-8/SVMi-16E.
76
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iDCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS
CODE
NAME
TELEPHONE NUMBER
CODE
NAME
TELEPHONE NUMBER
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
78
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Home Page
Table of Contents
DCS Keyset
DCS KEYSET
USER GUIDE
™
iDCS 500 Release 2 / OfficeServ
March 2004
Samsung Telecommunications America reserves the right without prior notice to revise information in this
guide for any reason. Samsung Telecommunications America also reserves the right without prior notice to
make changes in design ir components of equipment as engineering and manufacturing may warrant.
Samsung Telecommunications America disclaims all liabilities for damages arising from the erroneous inter-
pretation or use of information presented in this guide.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCS Keyset
Table of Contents
DIALING FEATURES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Speed Dialing ..................................................................................................................25
Programming Personal Speed Dial Numbers ..............................................25–26
One Touch Speed Dialing............................................................................................26
Last Number Redial ......................................................................................................27
Manual Retry with LNR ................................................................................................27
Save Number with Redial............................................................................................27
Chain Dialing....................................................................................................................27
Automatic Redial/Retry................................................................................................28
Pulse to Tone Changeover ..........................................................................................28
Memo Redialing..............................................................................................................28
ABOUT THIS BOOK ....................................................................................1
THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW ................................................2–9
OUTSIDE CALLS
Making an Outside Call................................................................................................10
Answering an Outside Call..........................................................................................10
Universal Answer ..........................................................................................................11
Recall/Flash ......................................................................................................................11
Busy Line Queuing with Callback ............................................................................11
Cancelling Callback........................................................................................................12
PAGING AND MESSAGING
Making an Internal Page..............................................................................................29
Making an External Page ............................................................................................29
All Page ..............................................................................................................................29
Meet Me Page..................................................................................................................30
Call Park and Page ..................................................................................................30–31
Messages—Set and Cancel ........................................................................................31
Returning Messages......................................................................................................32
Programmed Messages................................................................................................32
INTERCOM CALLS
Calling Other Stations ..................................................................................................13
Answering Intercom Calls ..........................................................................................13
Answer Modes ................................................................................................................14
Busy Station Callback....................................................................................................14
Busy Station Camp-on..................................................................................................14
Calling Your System Operator....................................................................................15
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
Do Not Disturb ................................................................................................................33
One Time DND ................................................................................................................33
Mute ....................................................................................................................................33
Background Music ........................................................................................................33
Established Call Pick-Up ..............................................................................................34
Appointment Reminder/Alarm Clock ....................................................................34
Door Phone Calls............................................................................................................35
Executive/Secretary Hot Line ....................................................................................35
Group Listening ..............................................................................................................36
Account Codes ................................................................................................................36
Locking Your Keyset ......................................................................................................36
Manual Signalling ..........................................................................................................37
Off-Hook Voice Announce ..........................................................................................37
OHVA Block ......................................................................................................................38
OHVA Reject ....................................................................................................................38
In Group/Out of Group ................................................................................................39
CALL PROCESSING
Holding Calls ............................................................................................................16–17
Transferring Calls ....................................................................................................18–19
Transfer with Camp-On................................................................................................18
Transfer to Voice Mail....................................................................................................19
Call Waiting ......................................................................................................................19
Conference Calls ............................................................................................................19
Forwarding Calls......................................................................................................20–22
Call Pickup ........................................................................................................................23
My Group Pickup............................................................................................................23
Privacy Release................................................................................................................23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCS Keyset
Table of Contents
CUSTOMIZING YOUR KEYSET
ADD-ON MODULE
AME PASSWORD ............................................................................................................40
Auto Camp-On ................................................................................................................40
Select Ring Tone ............................................................................................................40
Change Your Passcode ................................................................................................40
Set Answer Mode (Intercom) ....................................................................................41
Set Answer Mode (CO) ................................................................................................41
Automatic Hold ..............................................................................................................41
Headset Operation ........................................................................................................41
Hot Keypad ......................................................................................................................42
Key Confirmation Tone ................................................................................................42
Rejoining a Page ............................................................................................................42
Ring Preference ..............................................................................................................42
Display Speed Dial Name............................................................................................43
Caller ID Review All........................................................................................................43
Secure OHVA ....................................................................................................................43
32 Button Module with Keyset / 64 Button Module with Keyset...................57
SVMi-8/SVMi-16E ......................................................................................58
Accessing your Mailbox ...............................................................................................59
SVMi-8/SVMi-16E Subscriber Services Menu Diagram .............................60–61
Getting Started ...............................................................................................................62
Listen to your Messages ..............................................................................................62
Subscriber Services Menu ..........................................................................................62
Listening to Old or New Messages ..........................................................................63
Group New or Old Messages .....................................................................................64
Record and Send a Message......................................................................................64
Access Manager ............................................................................................................65
Personal Greetings ........................................................................................................67
Mailbox Administration ...............................................................................................69
Message Broadcast .......................................................................................................71
Personal Services ...........................................................................................................72
Personal Administration Settings ...........................................................................73
Keyset User Features ....................................................................................................74
Shortcuts .................................................................................................................76
Interactive Displays ....................................................................................................76
DISPLAY FEATURES
Interactive Display Keys ..............................................................................................44
Directory Information ................................................................................................ 44
Call Log ..............................................................................................................................45
Dial by Name....................................................................................................................45
Call Progress Displays ..................................................................................................45
Display Number Dialed ................................................................................................46
Call Duration Timer........................................................................................................46
Auto Timer ........................................................................................................................46
Timer Function ................................................................................................................46
Viewing Message Indications ....................................................................................47
Alarm Reminder Messages ........................................................................................47
Personal Speed Dial Names........................................................................................48
Station Names ................................................................................................................48
Managing Key Assignments ......................................................................................48
LCR with Clear..................................................................................................................49
Backspace with LCR ......................................................................................................49
Text Messaging........................................................................................................50–51
Caller ID / ANI / CLI ................................................................................................52–56
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS ..............................77–78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
ABOUT THIS BOOK
Your keyset is the most visible part of the iDCS 500 / OfficeServ Digital Communi-
cations System. No matter what model keyset you are using, with or without a dis-
play, telephone calls are handled in the same way. The LCD 12B and LCD 24B key-
sets have a few additional conveniences that are not available to STD 24B, Basic
12B and 7B keyset users. These are noted throughout this guide.
Please take the time to study this guide and to become familiar with the operation
of your keyset. Keep this guide handy. You may need to look up instructions for
infrequently used features.
Learning to use your keyset correctly will make everyday telephone communica-
tions a breeze.
This book is written based on the factory default settings for the feature access
codes. Sometimes, due to programming requirements, these codes may be
changed. If you find that a feature code does not work as described in this book,
please contact your installation and service company to determine the correct
code.
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
Outside calls appear on individual line keys if they are assigned. When an individ-
ual line is not assigned to its own key, it will appear on a CALL button.Your outside
calls will light green on your keyset and red on other keysets.
You never lose sight of your calls while they are on hold.They stay right where you
put them and are identified with a green flashing light if the key has a tri-colored
LED.
THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW
USER ORIENTATION
DCS telephones are called “keysets.” They contain buttons or “keys” that are used
to access or activate the many features of your office phone system.The keys with
paper designation strips are programmable keys. This means they can be pro-
grammed for a specific function on your keyset and that same button can be
something different on another keyset. See the system manager to get your most
frequently used features assigned to your programmable keys. When changes are
made, be sure that your programmable keys are relabeled properly.
Some simple rules to remember:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Any steady LED indicates the line or feature is in use.
A fast flashing green LED indicates a new call ringing in.
A slow flashing green or red LED indicates a call is on hold.
A slow flashing amber LED indicates a recall to your keyset.
A steady red LED on the HOLD key indicates the keyset is locked.
A steady red LED on the TRSF key indicates the keyset is Forward All.
A steady red LED on the ANS/RLS key indicates the keyset is in Headset mode.
A flashing red LED on the ANS/RLS key indicates the keyset is in DND mode.
Lines from the telephone company are“C.O. lines.”Calls on these lines are referred
to as “outside calls.”Your system can have individual C.O. line keys or lines may be
assigned to groups. When they are in a group, you access a line by dialing an
access code or pressing a route button. For example, dial 9 or press the LOCAL key
to get a local outside line. If Least Cost Routing is used, pressing the LCR key will
automatically select a preprogrammed C.O. line according to what digits are
dialed. Each line in the system is numbered, beginning with 701, then 702, 703, etc.
SPEAKERPHONE
Pressing the ANS/RLS or the MONITOR key will answer or release a call on the
speakerphone. Switching from the handset to the speakerphone is easy. Press the
SPK key and hang up the handset.
Direct Station Selection (DSS) keys are programmed to ring specific stations. You
can press a DSS key instead of dialing the extension number. A DSS key lights red
when that station is busy (Busy Lamp Indication).
NOTE:The 7B phone is not a speaker phone. If you are using a 7B phone, you must
lift the handset in order to speak to the other party.
iDCS 500 provides distinctive ring patterns to your keyset:
VOLUME CONTROLS
•
•
•
Outside calls have a single ring tone repeated.
Internal calls have a double ring tone repeated.
Door phone calls and alarm/appointment reminders have a triple ring tone
repeated.
DCS keysets use the UP and DOWN keys to adjust the ringer volume while the
keyset is ringing, the speaker volume while the speakerphone or monitor speaker
is in use and the handset volume while you are listening.These three levels will be
stored in memory until changed. If background music is turned on at your keyset,
the volume keys will also control the level of music. The volume of pages heard
through the speaker of a keyset can be adjusted during a page announcement by
using the volume keys. There are 16 levels for each volume setting. The volume of
off-hook ring is controlled by a user-programmable setting.
CALL INDICATIONS
The keys on your phone have light emitting diodes (LEDs). Some of these are tri-
colored LEDs that light green, red or amber (green and red together). Some of the
keys can only light red.
Intercom calls, also called internal calls, always appear on your CALL buttons.They
will always light green.You can have up to eight CALL buttons, but at least two are
recommended.
2
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
SYSTEM TONES
The system provides several tones to assist you. Some of these tones are already
LCD 24B KEYSET LAYOUT
LABELING PROGRAMMABLE KEYS
familiar to you.
Insert the end of a paper clip into the notch of the clear cover. Push
the cover sideways. Lift the cover and remove the designation strip.
Label the designation strip. Replace the strip and cover.
Intercom Dial Tone—A steady tone that indicates you can begin dialing.
DIAL TONE
CONTINUOUS
Ringback Tone—Indicates the station you dialed is ringing.
SOFT KEYS Used to
activate features via
thedisplay.
SCROLL KEY Used to
scrollthroughdisplays.
32 CHARACTER DISPLAY Two
lineswith16characterseach.
RINGBACK TONE—1000 ms ON/3000 ms OFF
CONTINUOUS
16 PROGRAMMABLE
KEYS WITH TRI-
COLORED LIGHTS
Used for CALL buttons,
intercom calls, outside
lines and many other
systemfeatures.
Busy Tone—Indicates the station you dialed is busy.
BUSY TONE—500 ms ON/500 ms OFF
CONTINUOUS
DND/No More Calls Tone—Fast busy tone indicates the station you
dialed is in the Do Not Disturb mode or cannot receive any more calls.
SCROLL
8 PROGRAMMABLE
KEYS WITH RED
LIGHTS Used to call
stations directly, to in-
dicate busy condi-
tions of other sta-
tions, forOneTouchdi-
aling and many other
systemfeatures.
DND/NO MORE CALLS TONE—250 ms ON/250 ms OFF
FOR TEN SECONDS
Transfer/Conference Tone—Indicates your call is being held and you
can dial another party.
VOL
1
4
7
2
5
8
ABC
JKL
3
6
9
DEF
TRANSFER/CONF TONE—100 ms ON/100 ms OFF
CONTINUOUS
SPK
HOLD
TRSF
GHI
MNO
WXY
VOLUME CONTROL
KEYS Used to set inde-
pendent levels for hand-
PRS
TUV
Confirmation Tone—Very short beeps followed by dial tone indicate you
have correctly set or canceled a system feature.
set,
speaker, back-
ANS/
RLS
0OPER
ground music, ring and
pagevolumes.
CONFIRMATION TONE—50 ms ON/50 ms OFF
FOR ONE SECOND
(programmable)
SPEAKER For handsfree
operationandringing.
MICROPHONE For
handsfreeoperation.
Error Tone—A distinctive two level beeping tone indicates you have
done something incorrectly. Try again.
PULLOUT
DIRECTORY TRAY
ANSWER/RELEASE KEY
TRANSFER KEY
HOLD KEY
ERROR TONE—50 ms of tone 1/50 ms of tone 2
SPEAKER KEY Used to switch
FOR THREE SECONDS
callto speakerphone.
4
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
LCD 12B KEYSET LAYOUT
STD 24B KEYSET LAYOUT
LABELING PROGRAMMABLE KEYS
LABELING PROGRAMMABLE KEYS
Insert the end of a paper clip into the notch of the clear cover. Push
the cover sideways. Lift the cover and remove the designation strip.
Label the designation strip. Replace the strip and cover.
Insert the end of a paper clip into the notch of the clear cover. Push
the cover sideways. Lift the cover and remove the designation strip.
Label the designation strip. Replace the strip and cover.
16 PROGRAMMABLE
K E Y S W I T H T R I -
COLORED LIGHTS Used
for CALL buttons, inter-
com calls, outside lines
SOFT KEYS Used to
activate features via
thedisplay.
SCROLL KEY Used to
scrollthroughdisplays.
32 CHARACTER DISPLAY Two
lineswith16characterseach.
6
PROGRAMMABLE
DIGITAL
COMMUNICATION
SYSTEM
KEYS WITH TRI-
COLORED LIGHTS
Used for CALL buttons,
intercom calls, outside
lines and many other
systemfeatures.
and many other system
features.
8
PROGRAMMABLE
KEYS WITH RED
LIGHTSUsedtocallsta-
tions directly, to indicate
busy conditions of other
stations, for One Touch
dialing and many other
systemfeatures.
SCROLL
6 PROGRAMMABLE
KEYS WITH RED
LIGHTS Used to call
stations directly, to in-
dicate busy condi-
tions of other sta-
tions, forOneTouchdi-
aling and many other
systemfeatures.
VOL
1
4
7
2
5
8
ABC
JKL
3
6
9
DEF
VOLUME CONTROL
KEYS Used to set inde-
pendent levels for hand-
SPK
HOLD
TRSF
GHI
MNO
WXY
VOL
PRS
TUV
set,
speaker, back-
1
4
7
2
5
8
ABC
JKL
3
6
9
DEF
ground music, ring and
pagevolumes.
SPK
HOLD
TRSF
ANS/
RLS
0OPER
GHI
MNO
WXY
VOLUME CONTROL
KEYS Used to set inde-
pendent levels for hand-
PRS
TUV
SPEAKER KEY Used
to switch call to
speakerphone.
set,
speaker, back-
ANS/
RLS
0OPER
ANSWER/
RELEASE KEY
ground music, ring and
pagevolumes.
PULLOUT
DIRECTORY TRAY
HOLD KEY
SPEAKER For handsfree
operationandringing.
SPEAKER For handsfree
operationandringing.
MICROPHONE For
handsfreeoperation.
PULLOUT
DIRECTORY TRAY
TRANSFER KEY
MICROPHONE For
handsfreeoperation.
ANSWER/RELEASE KEY
TRANSFER KEY
HOLD KEY
SPEAKER KEY Used to switch
callto speakerphone.
6
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
BASIC 12B KEYSET LAYOUT
7B KEYSET LAYOUT
LABELING PROGRAMMABLE KEYS
LABELING PROGRAMMABLE KEYS
Insert the end of a paper clip into the notch of the clear cover. Push
the cover sideways. Lift the cover and remove the designation strip.
Label the designation strip. Replace the strip and cover.
Insert the end of a paper clip into the notch of the clear cover. Push
the cover sideways. Lift the cover and remove the designation strip.
Label the designation strip. Replace the strip and cover.
3 PROGRAMMABLE
KEYS WITH TRI-
COLORED LIGHTS
(1, 2, 3) Used for CALL
buttons, intercom
6
PROGRAMMABLE
K E Y S W I T H T R I -
COLORED LIGHTS Used
f o r C A L L b u t t o n s ,
intercom calls, outside
lines and many other
systemfeatures.
DIGITAL
COMMUNICATION
SYSTEM
calls, outside
lines
and many other sys-
temfeatures.
6
PROGRAMMABLE
KEYS WITH RED LIGHTS
Used to call stations
directly, to indicate busy
conditions of other
stations, for One Touch
dialing and many other
systemfeatures.
4 PROGRAMMABLE
KEYS WITH RED
LIGHTS (4, 5, 6, 7)
Used to call stations
directly, to indicate
busy conditions of
other stations, for One
Touch dialing and
manyothersystemfea-
tures.
CALL 1
CALL 2
FLASH
1
2
3
4
5
7
6
VOL
TRANSFER
HOLD
1
4
7
2
5
8
ABC
JKL
3
6
9
DEF
SPK
HOLD
TRSF
VOLUME
MONITOR
VOLUME CONTROL
KEYS U s e d t o s e t
independent levels for
GHI
MNO
WXY
PRS
TUV
HOLD KEY
handset,
speaker,
ANS/
RLS
0OPER
background music, ring
andpagevolumes.
1
2
ABC
JKL
3
6
9
DEF
4
7
GHI
5
MNO
WXY
SPEAKER KEY Used to
switch call to speaker-
phone.
MONITOR KEY
PRS
8
TUV
VOLUME CONTROL
KEYSUsedtosetinde-
pendent levels for
HOLD KEY
SPEAKER
0OPER
For handsfree operation and
ringing.
handset,
background
speaker,
music,
PULLOUT
DIRECTORY
TRAY
TRANSFER KEY
ring and page vol-
umes.
TRANSFER KEY
MICROPHONE
For handsfree operation.
ANSWER/RELEASE KEY
PULLOUT
DIRECTORY TRAY
SPEAKER For handsfree
operationandringing.
8
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
UNIVERSAL ANSWER
Outside lines may be programmed to ring a general alerting device. To answer
calls ringing this device, dial 67 or press the UA key.This device can operate in any
one of the six different ring plans.
OUTSIDE CALLS
MAKING AN OUTSIDE CALL
•
Lift the handset and press an idle outside line button, line group button or dial
a line access code to receive dial tone—OR—to use the speakerphone, press
an idle outside line button, line group button or dial a line access code to
receive dial tone through the speaker—OR—press SPK or the MONITOR key
if you are using a 7B phone, receive intercom dial tone and dial a line access
code.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press SPK or the MONITOR key if you are using a 7B phone before dialing.
RECALL DIAL TONE
Press the NEW button to disconnect your existing call, wait for dial tone and then
•
•
Dial the telephone number.
Finish the call by replacing the handset or pressing the ANS/RLS key.
make a new call on the same line.
NOTE: If this button does not appear on your keyset, the FLASH key may be pro-
grammed to recall dial tone.
NOTE: You will receive No More Calls tone when you attempt to make a call and
there is no key available for that line.
SENDING A FLASH
While on an outside call, press the FLASH key to send a flash to the telephone
•
•
•
If Least Cost Routing is enabled on your phone system, this button may be
labeled LCR or accessed by dialing an access code (usually 9).
If your system is programmed to require an authorization code before making
a call, dial ꢀ plus a valid code before selecting a C.O. line.
If your system is programmed to require an account code before making a call,
press the ACCT button or dial 47 plus a valid bin number, press the ACCT but-
ton again and then select a C.O. line.
company. This is required for some custom calling features or CENTREX use.
NOTE: Flash is not available on an ISDN circuit.
BUSY LINE QUEUING WITH CALLBACK
If you receive a busy signal when you are selecting an outside line, this means that
the line or group of lines is busy.
For more information on authorization and account codes, see your system
administrator.
•
•
•
Press the CBK key or dial 44.You will hear confirmation tone.
When the line becomes free, the system will call you back.
Lift the handset or press the ANS/RLS key to answer, wait for dial tone and dial
the telephone number or speed dial number again.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press SPK or the MONITOR key if you are using a 7B phone before dialing.
ANSWERING AN OUTSIDE CALL
NOTES:
•
Lift the handset and you are automatically connected to the ringing call.
See Ring Preference under Customizing Your Keyset—OR—press the ANS/RLS
key to automatically answer on the speakerphone.
1. A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds. If you have set a
callback, your CBK key will light.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset or
press SPK before dialing.
NOTE: If a call is flashing at your keyset but not ringing, you must press the flash-
ing button to answer.
10
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
CANCELLING CALLBACK
A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds. If you have set a
INTERCOM CALLS
callback, your CBK key will light.
CALLING OTHER STATIONS
Your phone may have a maximum of five callbacks to lines and/or stations set at
a time. To cancel a callback:
•
Dial the extension number or group number.
•
Wait for the party to answer. If you hear a brief tone burst instead of ringback
tone, the station you called is set for Voice Announce or Auto Answer. Begin
speaking immediately after the tone.
•
•
Press the CBK key or dial 44.You will hear confirmation tone.
While you are listening to confirmation tone, press the HOLD key.This will can-
cel the oldest set callback.
•
Finish the call by replacing the handset or pressing the ANS/RLS or the MON-
ITOR key if you are using a 7B phone.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the hand-
set or press SPK or the MONITOR key if you are using the 7B phone before dial-
NOTES:
1. If you have a DSS key assigned to an extension or station group, you may press
this key instead of dialing the number. If you are using a 7 Button Set you must
pick up the handset to speak to the calling party.
ing.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset or
press SPK or the MONITOR key if you are using a 7B phone before you begin
dialing.
ANSWERING INTERCOM CALLS
•
When your keyset rings, simply lift the handset—OR—press the ANS/RLS key
to be connected to the calling station. If you are using a 7B phone you must
pick up the handset to speak to the calling party.
•
Finish the call by replacing the handset or pressing the ANS/RLS or the MON-
ITOR key if you are using a 7B phone.
See Ring Preference under Customizing Your Keyset.
VOICE ANNOUNCE MODE
When another station calls you, your keyset will sound a brief attention tone and
you will hear the caller’s announcement.
•
•
Press ANS/RLS to turn on the microphone and speak handsfree—OR— lift the
handset to reply.
To finish the call, replace the handset or press the ANS/RLS key.
NOTE: In order for C.O. calls to be answered handsfree, AUTO ANS CO must be set
to ON.
12
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset or
AUTO ANSWER MODE
press SPK before you begin dialing.
When another station calls you, your keyset will sound a brief attention tone and
then automatically answer the call.
AUTO CAMP-ON
When you want to automatically camp on to a busy station without pressing the
camp on button every time you call a busy station,you can set your phone for auto
camp-on.
•
Your microphone and speaker are turned on and you can speak handsfree. For
privacy, use the handset. If you are using a 7B phone you must pick up the
handset to speak to the calling party.
•
To finish the call, replace the handset or press the ANS/RLS or the MONITOR
key if you are using a 7B phone.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press TRSF and then dial 110.
Dial 081 to turn on auto camp-on or 080 to turn it off.
Press TRSF to store your selection.
NOTE: In order for C.O. calls to be answered handsfree, AUTO ANS CO must be set
to ON.
CALLING YOUR SYSTEM OPERATOR
BUSY STATION CALLBACK
•
Dial 0 to call your system operator or group of operators.
When you call another station and receive a busy signal:
•
If you want to call a specific operator, dial that person’s extension number.
•
•
•
Press the CBK key or dial 44.
When the busy station becomes free, your keyset will ring.
Lift the handset or press ANS/RLS to call the now idle station.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press SPK before you begin dialing.
NOTES:
1. A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds. If you have set a
callback, your CBK key will light.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset or
press SPK before dialing.
BUSY STATION CAMP-ON
When you call another station and receive a busy signal but you do not want to
wait for a callback:
MANUAL CAMP-ON
•
•
Press the CAMP key or dial 45.
The called station will receive off-hook ring tone repeated every few seconds
and its first available CALL button will flash green to indicate your call is wait-
ing.
•
•
Wait for the called party to answer.
The called station must release its first call or place it on hold before answering
your camp-on.
NOTES:
1. If you receive No More Calls tone, that station has no available key to accept
your call. Hang up or leave a message.
14
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
HOLD RECALL
If you leave a call on hold longer than the hold timer, it will recall your station.The
CALL PROCESSING
button that the call appears on will have a slow flashing amber light.
SYSTEM HOLD
•
•
When your phone rings, lift the handset or press the ANS/RLS key to answer
the recall. If you are using a 7B phone you must use the handset to talk to the
calling party.
If you do not answer this recall within a pre-programmed period of time, it will
go to the system operator.
•
When you are connected to any call, press HOLD. The call will flash green at
your keyset. If this call appears on a line key at other keysets, it will flash red at
those keysets.
•
To take the caller off hold, press that key and the green flashing light will go
steady green again. Resume the conversation.
CONSULTATION HOLD
When you are talking on an outside line and it is necessary to consult with anoth-
NOTE: While on a call, pressing a line key, route key or flashing CALL button will
automatically put your first call on hold and connect you to the new call. See
Automatic Hold under Customizing Your Keyset.
er extension:
EXCLUSIVE HOLD
To place an outside call on hold at your phone so that other users cannot get it:
•
Press the TRSF key; you will receive transfer dial tone. Your call is placed on
transfer hold.
Dial the extension number.
Consult with the internal party.
Press TRSF to return to the outside party or hang up to transfer the call.
•
•
•
•
•
Press the HOLD button twice. The call will flash green on your keyset and this
line will show a steady red light on other keysets.
To retrieve the call, press the flashing green line button or press the HOLD but-
ton a third time.
NOTE: Repeatedly pressing the TRSF key will toggle between the outside party
and internal extension. If necessary you may disconnect either one of the parties
by pressing the DROP button.
NOTE: Intercom calls will always be placed on exclusive hold.
RETRIEVING CALLS HELD AT
ANOTHER STATION
When a line is on hold and it appears on your keyset, press the line button with the
red flashing light.
REMOTE HOLD
When you wish to place a call on hold at another station.Press TRSF and dial the sta-
tion number (or press the appropriate DSS key). Press the HOLD key. This will place
the call on system hold on an available CALL button or Line Key at the remote sta-
tion and return you to dial tone.
When a line is on hold and it does not appear on your keyset, dial 12 plus the line
number or the extension number of the station that placed the call on hold.
NOTES:
1. If the destination station does not have any free CALL buttons or line keys you
will hear No More Calls tone and must return to the other party by pressing the
TRSF key (or the RETURN soft key on a display keyset).
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press the SPK key before you begin dialing.
2. Intercom calls cannot be remote held.
16
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
TRANSFERRING CALLS
Transfer is used to send any call to another extension in one of two ways. You can
do a screened transfer by informing the other extension who is calling or you can
do a blind transfer without notification.
TRANSFER TO VOICE MAIL
This feature is used to send a call directly to a voice mailbox.Your keyset must have
a correctly programmed VT key to accomplish this. To transfer a call directly to a
voice mailbox:
•
While on a call, press the TRSF key and dial an extension number or group
number.Your call is automatically put on transfer hold.
OR
•
•
While on a call, press the VT key and dial the mailbox number.
Hang up when dialing is completed.
Press a DSS key or station group key. Your call is automatically put on transfer
hold.
CALL WAITING
If an outside call has been camped-on to your phone or another station has
•
Hang up when you hear ringing (this is an unscreened or blind transfer). OR
Wait for the called party to answer and advise him/her of the call and hang up.
If the transfer is refused, you will be reconnected to the outside line when the
called station hangs up or you can press TRSF to return to the outside party. If
you wish to send the call to another extension without waiting for the first sta-
tion to hang up, simply press another DSS button.
OR
camped-on to you:
•
•
Your keyset will ring and the call that is waiting for you (camped-on) will flash
green.
Press the flashing button to answer; your other call will go on hold automati-
cally if your station has the Automatic Hold feature set. If not, you must press
HOLD and then the flashing button.
Press the CALL button or C.O. line key to return to the outside party and begin
the transfer process again.
OR
Finish the first call and hang up; the waiting call will ring.
Lift the handset or press the ANS/RLS key to answer.
•
When you are transferring a call to a keyset set for Voice Announce or Auto
Answer, the transferred call will always ring.
NOTE: Intercom calls will not go on Automatic Hold.
NOTES:
CONFERENCE CALLS
You may conference up to five parties (you and four others) in any combination of
1. After the inside party answers, you may alternate back and forth between the
parties by pressing the TRSF key.
2. If you receive No More Calls tone, that station has no key available to receive
another call. Press TRSF to return to the other party.
outside lines and internal stations in any order.
3. You cannot transfer an Intercom call by pressing a DSS key.You must press the
TRSF key and dial the destination extension number.
•
•
While engaged in a conversation, press the CONF key and receive conference
tone.
Make another call, either intercom or outside, press the CONF key and receive
conference tone.
Make another call or press the CONF key to join all parties.
Repeat the last step until all parties are added.
TRANSFER WITH CAMP-ON
When you are transferring a call to another station and you receive a busy signal,
you may camp the call on to this station. Simply hang up when you hear the busy
signal. The called party will be alerted that a call is waiting for them.
•
•
NOTE: When attempting to add another party to the conference and you are not
able to reach the desired person, hang up. Simply press the CONF key again to
return to your previous conversation.
NOTE:If you receive No More Calls tone,that station has no key available to receive
another call. Press TRSF to return to the outside caller.
To drop a party from your conference call:
•
•
Press CONF and dial the extension or line number that is to be dropped.
Press CONF again to reestablish the conference.
18
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
NOTE:To leave the conference, hang up. Control is passed to the next internal sta-
tion. If there are no internal stations and you wish to leave outside lines connect-
ed together in a trunk to trunk conference, press the CONF key plus the CALL but-
ton that the call appears on or follow the instructions to drop a party and use your
extension number. When they hang up, the lines will release automatically. Press
CONF to rejoin a trunk to trunk conference.
3. When a station user places his/her keyset in Forward All mode and he/she does
not have a FORWARD ALL key, the TRSF key will light to indicate Forward All
has been set and calls to this station have been transferred elsewhere.
FORWARD BUSY
To forward calls when you are on the phone:
CONFERENCE SPLITTING
•
•
Dial 602 plus the destination you want the call to forward to.
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.
If you are the controlling party of a conference and your keyset has the Auto Hold
feature turned on (see customizing your keyset) and all of the outside lines
involved in the conference appear as buttons on your keyset,you can split the con-
ference into separate calls as follows:
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press SPK before you begin dialing.
•
Press any one of the outside line buttons. That outside line will remain steady
green to indicate you are still connected to it. All other outside lines in the con-
ference will be placed on system hold at your keyset. All intercom callers in the
conference will be disconnected. You may now speak with each caller private-
ly and transfer them as usual or reestablish another conference.
FORWARD NO ANSWER
To forward calls when you do not answer:
•
•
Dial 603 plus the destination you want the call forward to.
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.
FORWARDING CALLS
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press SPK before you begin dialing.
You may forward your calls to another station, group of stations or an external
telephone number. Program a destination for the type of forwarding you want as
detailed below. If you have FWD ALL, FWD BUSY and FWD NO ANSWER keys,
press one to turn that forward feature on. A steady red light reminds you what for-
ward condition is activated.
FORWARD BUSY/NO ANSWER
If you have both a Forward on Busy destination and a Forward No Answer desti-
nation programmed, you may set both of these at the same time:
You can clear all call forward conditions set at your station by lifting the handset
and dialing 600.
•
•
Dial 604.
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.
FORWARD ALL CALLS
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press SPK or the MONITOR key if you are using a 7B phone before you begin
dialing.
To forward all your calls under any condition:
•
•
Dial 601 plus the destination you want the call to forward to.
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.
FORWARD FOLLOW ME
When you want all calls to your extension forwarded to the extension where you
NOTES:
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset or
press SPK before you begin dialing.
are now:
2. The station that receives a Forwarded All call can transfer the call to the for-
warded station.This is useful when you are expecting an important call but you
do not wish to be disturbed by other calls.
•
•
Dial 606 plus your extension number.
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.
20
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
If you want a specific extension’s calls forwarded to your phone (Remote Call
Forward):
STATION CALL PICKUP
To pick up (answer) a call ringing at another station, lift the handset and dial 65
plus the extension number of the ringing phone.
•
•
Dial 606 plus the desired extension number.
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.
If you have a DP key assigned with a station number, you only need to press this
DP key with the flashing light to answer this ringing station.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press SPK before you begin dialing.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press SPK or MONITOR before you begin dialing.
FORWARD DND
To forward your phone when you activate DND.
GROUP CALL PICKUP
To pick up (answer) a call ringing in any pickup group, lift the handset and dial 66
plus the desired group number 01–99 or press the flashing GROUP PICKUP key if
available.
•
•
Dial 605 plus the destination you want the call to forward to.
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset
or press SPK before you begin dialing.
NOTES:
1. A group pickup key can have an extender for a specific pickup group.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset or
press SPK or the MONITOR key if you are using a 7B phone before dialing the
access code.
CALL FORWARD OPTIONS
A display keyset may review or change call forward options and destinations. Call
forward access can be done via the keypad or by accessing the keyset display fea-
tures. To review or change call forward options:
MY GROUP PICKUP
If desired, a new access code can be assigned to pickup ringing calls in the same
pickup group as you are in. Like “66” above except you do not need to dial the
desired group number. See your installation company for the assigned access
code. MY GROUP PICKUP:__________________.
•
•
Press TRSF 102.
The display will indicate the current call forward condition and destination
OR
Show 0: FORWARD CANCEL to indicate no forward is set.
Dial 0 to cancel current condition
OR
PRIVACY RELEASE
Dial 1-5 to select forward type
OR
This feature will allow another station to join in on your conversation by releasing
privacy on the C.O. from your phone.
Press UP or DOWN to select forward type.
Press the right soft key to move the cursor.
Dial the destination number (e.g., 202) OR
Press UP or DOWN to select the destination.
Press the right soft key to move the cursor.
Dial 1 to set OR
To Release Privacy
•
While on you are talking on a C.O. line and you wish to have other internal parties
(or up to three) join the conversation:
•
•
Press UP or DOWN to select YES or NO.
Press TRSF to store and exit.
•
Press the PRB key (the PRB key will light steady red). Inform the other party
that he/she may now join the conversation.
22
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
After the other party (or parties) has joined the conversation and you wish to
return privacy to the line so that no one else can join the conversation, press the
PRB key a second time, the PRB key LED will be off.
DIALING FEATURES
To Join a Non-Private Conversation
SPEED DIALING
When someone has informed you that you can join a conversation:
You can dial a preprogrammed telephone number stored in the system-wide
speed dial list of numbers 500–999 or from your personal list of numbers 00–49.
•
•
Press the C.O. line key that he/she has indicated.
OR
Dial the C.O. line number that he/she has indicated.
Your system may be set for 950 system wide numbers. If so the system speed dial
access codes are 050~999 and the station speed dial codes are 000~049.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press the SPD key or dial 16.
Dial the desired speed dial number.
The telephone number is automatically dialed for you.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press SPK or MONITOR before you begin dialing.
PROGRAMMING PERSONAL SPEED DIAL
NUMBERS
You can program frequently dialed telephone numbers in a personal speed dial
list. A station may be assigned up to fifty numbers, 00–49. See your system admin-
istrator to determine the amount assigned to your station.
•
•
•
•
While on-hook, press TRSF and then dial 105.
Dial a speed dial number (00–49).
Dial a line or line group access code.
Dial the telephone number to be stored (24 digits maximum). It can include #,
ꢀ, FLASH and PAUSE.
•
Press TRSF to store the number.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press SPK or the MONITOR key if you are using a 7B phone before you begin
dialing.
24
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
24 BUTTON KEYSET
PROGRAMMABLE KEYS LAYOUT
LAST NUMBER REDIAL
12 BUTTON KEYSET
PROGRAMMABLE KEYS LAYOUT
To redial the last telephone number you dialed, press the LNR key or dial 19.
NOTES:
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset or
press SPK or MONITOR before you begin dialing.
2. Redial does not apply to intercom calls.
A
B
C
D
E
F
A
B
C
D
E
F
For the purposes of programming speed dial numbers, the programmable keys in
the bottom row are known as A, B, C, D, E and F and are defined below.
MANUAL RETRY WITH LNR
While you are on an outside call listening to a busy signal and you want to redial
the same number dialed.
•
•
•
•
The A key is not used.
The B key inserts a flash.
The C key inserts a pause.
The D key is used for pulse to tone conversion. If your system uses rotary (or
pulse) dialing C.O. lines, pressing D while entering a speed dial number causes
all subsequent digits to be sent as DTMF tones.
•
Press the LNR key.
This will hang up your existing call and manually redial the same number dialed.
You can repeat this operation for a limited number of attempts.
•
The E key is used to hide digits. Display keyset users may want to hide some
speed dial numbers so that they will not show in the display.When you are en-
tering a telephone number, press E. All subsequent digits will be hidden. Press
E again to begin displaying digits.
SAVE NUMBER WITH REDIAL
To save the number you just dialed for later use, press the SNR key before hanging
up.
•
•
The F key is used to enter a name. See Personal Speed Dial Names under Display
Features.
Use the HOLD key to clear a speed dial number.
To redial this saved number at any time, press the SNR key or dial 17.The same line
will be selected for you.
ONE TOUCH SPEED DIALING
NOTES:
You may assign any speed dial number to an already existing One Touch Speed
Dial button for quick and easy dialing of frequently used numbers.
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset or
press SPK or the MONITOR key if you are using a 7B phone before you begin
dialing.
2. The saved telephone number is stored in memory until you save another.
3. Redial does not apply to intercom calls.
•
•
•
While on-hook, press TRSF and then dial 107.
Press a One Touch Speed Dial button.
Dial the speed dial number (00–49 or 500–999) that you want assigned to this
button.
CHAIN DIALING
•
Press TRSF to store your selection.
You may manually dial additional digits following a speed dial number or chain as
many speed dial numbers together as required:
To call this telephone number, just press the One Touch Speed Dial button.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press SPK or the MONITOR key if you are using a 7B phone before you begin
dialing.
•
After the first speed number is dialed, press SPD again and dial another speed
number OR manually dial additional digits following a speed dial number.
26
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
AUTOMATIC REDIAL/RETRY
When you are making an outside call and you receive a busy signal, the system can
automatically redial the number for you. It will automatically redial at a pre-pro-
grammed interval for up to 15 attempts.
PAGING AND MESSAGING
MAKING AN INTERNAL PAGE
To make an announcement through the keyset speakers:
•
•
When you hear a busy signal, press the RETRY button.
The system will reserve the line and automatically redial the same number for
you. You will hear the call being made through the keyset speaker. The micro-
phone is muted.
When the called party answers, lift the handset or press the flashing SPK to
begin speaking.
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset.
Press the PAGE key or dial 55.
Dial the desired zone number 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4.
After the attention tone, make your announcement.
•
NOTE: If you have a dedicated page zone key, it is not necessary to press PAGE and
dial a zone number.
NOTES:
1. If you make another call, auto-redial is canceled.
2. To cancel a retry, lift and replace the handset.
MAKING AN EXTERNAL PAGE
To make an announcement through the external paging speakers:
PULSE TO TONE CHANGEOVER
When making an outside call on a dial pulse line, press #. All digits dialed after the
# with be sent as tones.
•
•
•
Lift the handset.
Press the PAGE key or dial 55.
Dial the desired zone number 5, 6, 7 or 8.
OR
Dial 9 to page all external zones.
After the attention tone, make your announcement.
MEMO REDIALING
When you are calling directory information, you can store the number you are
•
given using the SAVE feature. There is no need for pencil and paper.
NOTE: If you have a dedicated page zone key, it is not necessary to press PAGE and
dial a zone number.
•
•
•
While you are talking on an outside call, press SAVE.
Dial the telephone number as it is dictated to you on the key pad.
Press SAVE to store the number.
ALL PAGE
To page all designated keysets and external speakers at the same time:
To dial the number, press the SNR button. It will select the same line and dial the
stored number. If necessary, you can select a different line and then press the SNR
button.
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset.
Press the PAGE key or dial 55.
Dial ꢀ or press the ALL PAGE key.
After the attention tone, make your announcement.
NOTE:The LED on the PAGE key will only light when an All Page is in progress.
28
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
To retrieve an automatically parked call:
MEET ME PAGE
•
Dial 10 plus the number that was announced. If you have a PAGPK key, press it
and dial the number that was announced. If you have a PARK key, press it and
dial the announced orbit number.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset.
Press the Meet Me Page (MMPG) key or dial 54.
Dial the desired zone number.
After the attention tone, instruct the paged person to dial 56.
Press WAIT or TRSF.
Remain off-hook until the person dials 56 from any phone.
The paged person will be automatically connected with you.
•
You will be connected to the parked call.
NOTES:
1. If the call is not retrieved within a pre-programmed period of time, it will recall
your keyset and have a slow amber light. You cannot park and page intercom
calls.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset or
press SPK before you begin dialing.
CALL PARK AND PAGE
When you have an outside call for someone who is not at his/her desk, you can
park the call prior to paging. The iDCS 500 offers two different methods:
SETTING A MESSAGE INDICATION
When you are calling another station and no one answers or you receive a busy
MANUAL PARK ORBITS
•
•
While in conversation, press the PARK button.
signal, you can leave a message indication:
Enter a desired orbit number (0-9), if the orbit number is busy dial another
orbit number. Display users can press ꢀ to automatically place the call in any
available orbit number and see the number in the display.
Remember the selected orbit number.
Replace the handset when finished.
Lift the handset and make a page announcement as previously described
(example:“John Smith park two”).
•
•
Press the MSG key or dial 43 and receive confirmation tone.
Hang up. The MSG key on the called station will light. Standard telephones
receive special dial tone as a message indication or a lit message lamp, if the
phone is equipped with one and they are connected to a 16MWSLI card on the
system.
•
•
•
NOTES:
To retrieve a parked call from orbit:
1. A station can have up to five message indications.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset or
press SPK before you begin dialing.
•
•
Press the PARK button and dial the announced orbit number (0-9).
You will be connected to the parked call.
NOTES:
CANCELING MESSAGES
To cancel a message indication that you left at another station, dial 42 plus the
1. You must have a PARK button or park access code to retrieve and place calls in
park orbits.
extension number of the station at which you left a message.
2. If the call is not retrieved within a pre-programmed period of time, it will recall
your keyset and have a slow amber light. You cannot park and page intercom
calls.
To cancel all message indications left at your keyset, dial 42 plus your extension.
Your MSG light will go out.
3. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset or
press SPK before you begin dialing.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press SPK before you begin dialing.
AUTOMATIC PARK WITH PAGE KEY
•
While in conversation, press the PAGE button. The call is automatically parked
at your station.
•
•
Receive page tone and dial a desired page zone number.
Make announcement indicating your extension number or the line number.
Hang up.
30
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
RETURNING MESSAGES
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
•
Press the MSG key or dial 43.The first station that left a message will be called
automatically. If that station does not answer, your MSG light will stay on.
Repeat until all messages have been returned in the order received.
Your MSG light will turn off when all messages have been returned.
•
•
DO NOT DISTURB
Use this feature when you want to block calls to your keyset.
NOTES:
•
•
While on-hook, press the DND key or dial 401. The DND key lights steady red
to remind you of this mode.
To cancel DND, press the DND key again or dial 400. The DND light turns off.
You can make calls while in the DND mode.
1. Display keyset users can view message indications and return them in any
order. See Viewing Message Indications under Display Features.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset or
press SPK or the MONITOR key if you are using a 7B phone before you begin
dialing.
NOTES:
3. If a message has been left at your keyset by a keyset in Auto Answer, you must
manually cancel the message after it has been returned.
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset or
press SPK or the MONITOR key.
2. If you place your keyset in DND mode and you do not have a DND key, your
ANS/RLS key will flash to indicate DND status.
PROGRAMMED MESSAGES
When you will be away from your phone for any length of time, you can leave a
programmed station message. Display stations calling you will see this message
and be informed of your status or follow your instructions.
ONE TIME DND
If you are on a call and you do not wish to be interrupted while on that call, you
can press the DND key and place your station in Do Not Disturb. When you hang
up at the end of the call, DND will be automatically canceled and your keyset will
be able to receive new calls. This feature requires a DND key.
•
•
•
Dial 48 plus any message code (01-20) listed on the back of this user guide.
To cancel any of these messages you might have selected, dial 48 plus 00.
Press TRSF to exit and store your selection.
Note:This feature will not affect any calls currently ringing your keyset.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press SPK before you begin dialing.
MUTE
You can have multiple programmed message keys (PMSG) and each one can have
a different message code:
You can mute the handset transmitter or the microphone during any conversa-
tion:
•
•
Press any programmed message (PMSG) button. The message is set and the
button will light red. Press the button again to turn off.
Pressing another programmed message (PMSG) button will turn the previous
one off and set a different programmed message.
•
•
Press the MUTE key. It will light red.
To resume speaking, press the MUTE button again. The light turns off.
BACKGROUND MUSIC
When a music source is supplied, you may listen to music through the speaker in
your keyset:
•
•
While on-hook, press the HOLD button to hear music.
Press the HOLD button again to turn music off.
32
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
You can set the level of background music by using the VOL keys while listening
NOTE: Display keysets can show a reminder message. See Alarm Reminder
to the music. This does not affect the speakerphone level.
Messages under Display Features.
ESTABLISHED CALL PICKUP
To pick up an established call in progress at a single line extension connected to a
ANSWERING THE DOOR PHONE
When you are programmed to receive calls from a door phone:
computer modem on your PC.
•
•
You will receive three short rings repeated.
Lift the handset or press ANS/RLS or the MONITOR key. You are connected to
the door phone.
•
•
Press the EP key for that station on your keyset and the call is automatically
moved to your keyset.
The single line extension on your modem will be disconnected.
•
If an electric door lock release is installed, dial 13 to unlock the door.
NOTE: You must have an assigned (EP key) button on your regular keyset, for the
single line station.
CALLING THE DOOR PHONE/ROOM MONI-
TOR
You may call the door phone and listen to what may be happening outside or in
another room.
APPOINTMENT REMINDER/ALARM CLOCK
This feature works like an alarm clock. Use it to remind yourself of an appointment
later in the day (TODAY ONLY) or as a daily reminder every day (DAILY).You can set
up to three alarms. Each one can be either a TODAY ONLY or a DAILY alarm.
•
•
Dial the extension number of the door phone.
You will be connected to the door phone and you can listen or have a conver-
sation.
•
If an electric door lock release is installed, dial 13 to unlock the door.
When the alarm rings, you will hear three short rings repeated three times. Lift the
handset to answer the alarm. If you do not, the alarm will alert you two more times
at five minute intervals.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press SPK or the MONITOR key.
To set alarms:
EXECUTIVE/SECRETARY HOT LINE
If programmed, an executive and a secretary can have a hot line between them.
When the executive station is in the DND mode, all of its calls will ring the secre-
tary station.
•
•
•
Press TRSF and then dial 112.
Dial the alarm number 1, 2 or 3.
Dial the time at which you want the alarm to sound. Enter the time as HHMM
(hours and minutes) using the 24 hour clock.
Dial 0 (NOT SET), 1 (TODAY ONLY) or 2 (DAILY) to select the alarm type.
Press TRSF to save.
•
•
•
•
•
Either person can press the BOSS key to make a voice call to the other station.
Using the hot line will override DND at the other station. This key will light red
when the other station is in use.
Repeat for each alarm if needed.
To cancel individual alarms:
To transfer a call to a Boss in DND:
•
•
•
Press TRSF and then dial 112.
Dial alarm number 1, 2 or 3.
Press the HOLD key.
•
•
Press the TRSF key followed by the BOSS key.
Wait for the BOSS station to answer to announce the call and hang up to com-
plete the transfer OR
• Hang up to complete a blind transfer after pressing the BOSS key.
34
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
•
•
•
•
While on-hook, press TRSF and then dial 100.
Dial your four digit station passcode.
Dial 1 for locking outgoing, 2 for locked all calls or 0 to unlock.
Press TRSF to store your selection.
GROUP LISTENING
When you are engaged on a call and you are using the handset, you may want
other people to hear the distant party’s voice over the speaker:
•
Press the LISTEN key to turn on the speaker. The microphone is not in use, so
the distant party does not hear other parties present in your office.
Press LISTEN again to turn the speaker off and resume private conversation.
Repeat if necessary.
NOTE: When your keyset is locked for outgoing, the HOLD key will flash. When
your keyset is locked for all calls, the HOLD key will light steady.
•
•
MANUAL SIGNALLING
Use this feature when you want to send a brief 500ms ring burst to another sta-
tion, regardless of the status of your phone (on-hook, off-hook, handsfree, DND or
ringing).
NOTE: Depending on speaker volume and the acoustics of your office, it may be
advisable to turn the group listening feature off before hanging up.This will elim-
inate a momentary squeal.
ACCOUNT CODES
To send a signal to another station:
When equipped with optional equipment, your system will allow calls to be
charged to a specific account:
•
•
Press the Manual Signalling (MS) key.
You may press the MS key repeatedly to send multiple signals to the designat-
ed station.
•
•
During any outside C.O. call, press the account (ACC) key.
Enter the 3 digit account code bin number when prompted, OR
If your key has an extender of 000 enter the account code (maximum 12 char-
acters including Q and #) and press ACC000 again, OR
NOTE:Your phone must have a Manual Signalling (MS) key with a station number
extender assigned to it.
If your keyset has an extender other than 000 (001~999) account code con-
tained in that bin will automatically be entered for you.
OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE
Keysets may receive a voice announcement while on another call. The calling sta-
tion must have an OHVA key.When you are in DND, you cannot receive OHVA calls.
The OHVA feature will work with intercom calls and transferred calls.
LOCKING YOUR KEYSET
You can lock your keyset to control misuse of your phone while you are away.You
can unlock it when you return.Your default station passcode is 1234.
To make an off-hook voice announcement:
0
1
2
UNLOCKED
LOCKED OUTGOING LOCKED ALL CALLS
•
•
•
•
Dial the extension number or press the DSS key.
When you receive a busy signal, press the OHVA key.
After the attention tone, begin speaking.
Finish the call by replacing the handset or pressing the ANS/RLS or the MON-
ITOR key if you are using a 7B phone.
Make outside calls
YES
NO
NO
ACCESS DENIED
Receive outside calls
Make intercom calls
Receive intercom calls
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
NOTES:
1. When you are voice announcing to a station close to you, use the handset to
avoid an echo effect.
2. You cannot off-hook voice announce to single line telephones.
36
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
When you receive an off-hook voice announcement, if you are using the handset,
you will hear the announcement over the handset receiver. If you are using the
speakerphone, you will hear the announcement over the keyset speaker. In both
cases, you can continue to speak to the original party.
IN GROUP/OUT OF GROUP
If your keyset is assigned to a station ring group, you can remove your keyset from
the group and then put it back in. While you are out of the group, you can receive
calls to your extension number but not calls to the group number. If you have an
IN/OUT key with the group number assigned.
•
•
Press the flashing CALL button on your keyset.This will place the original party
on hold and allow you to talk to the announcing party.
To return to your first party, press the key corresponding to your original call.
This will disconnect the OHVA call.
•
•
Press the IN/OUT key. It will light red when your keyset is in the group.
Press the IN/OUT key again to exit the group and turn the light off. Repeat as
necessary.
Executive off-hook voice announce allows you to engage in conversation on your
keyset and simultaneously receive and reply handsfree to an OHVA through your
add-on module (AOM). Use caution because the conversation through the AOM
may possibly be heard by the caller on the keyset. When you receive an executive
OHVA through your AOM:
If you do not have an IN/OUT key:
•
Dial the IN/OUT access code number __________, then the group number,
then 0 to exit the group or 1 to enter the group.
•
•
•
Reply by speaking in the direction of the microphone in the AOM unit.
Adjust the volume with the VOL keys on the AOM unit.
Press the SPK or the MONITOR key on the AOM to disconnect the announcing
party.
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset
or press SPK or the MONITOR key.
The IN/OUT key can include an extender to indicate the specific group that this
key will affect. This means that if you are in multiple groups, you can decide for
which groups you will receive calls.
NOTES:
1. Executive off-hook voice announce can only be accomplished when an AOM is
attached to your phone.
2. If the MUTE key on the AOM is lit, you must press the AOM’s SPK key to answer
the OHVA call.
OHVA BLOCK
Your keyset can be programmed with an OHVA Block (BLOCK) key. Pressing this
key will prevent anyone from making an OHVA to you until you press the button
again and cancel the blocking.
OHVA REJECT
Your keyset can be programmed with an OHVA Reject (REJECT) key. Pressing this
key while receiving an OHVA call will disconnect the voice announcing party and
return you to your original call.
38
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
SET ANSWER MODE (INTERCOM)
You can receive internal calls in one of three modes (see Answering Intercom Calls
CUSTOMIZING YOUR KEYSET
under Intercom Calls for descriptions):
AME PASSWORD
•
•
•
While on-hook, press TRSF and then dial 103.
Dial 0 for Ringing, 1 for Auto Answer or 2 for Voice Announce.
Press TRSF to store your selection.
This feature allows people using the AME feature to enable password protection.
This will prevent unauthorized people from listening to your messages being left.
The passcode is the same as your station passcode. This feature only applies if
there is an SVM card installed in the system and your keyset has a programmed
AME key.
NOTE: When your keyset is programmed for Auto Answer and you have Forward
No Answer (FNA) turned on, you must answer screened transfers by pressing
ANS/RLS or the MONITOR key if you are using a 7B phone before your FNA timer
expires or the call will forward.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press TRSF and then dial 110.
Dial 101 to turn on AME PASSWORD or 100 to turn it off.
Press TRSF to store your selection.
SET ANSWER MODE (CO)
Your incoming CO calls can be set to follow the intercom answer mode.
AUTO CAMP-ON
This option allows intercom calls to be automatically camped on, if possible, when
a busy station is called.
•
•
•
•
While on-hook, press TRSF and then dial 110.
Dial 15 to access AUTO ANS CO.
Press the VOLUME UP or DOWN key to change the status.
Press TRSF to store your selection.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press TRSF and then dial 110.
Press 081 to turn CAMP-ON on or 080 to turn it off.
Press TRSF to store your selection.
AUTOMATIC HOLD
will automatically put your call on hold and connect you to the next call. This fea-
ture can be turned on or off at your keyset.
SELECT RING TONE
Each keyset user can select any one of eight ring frequencies:
•
•
•
While on-hook, press TRSF and then dial 111.
Dial 1–8 or press the UP and DOWN keys to hear each tone.
When you hear the tone that you prefer, press TRSF to save it.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press TRSF and then dial 110.
Dial 001 to turn Automatic Hold on or 000 to turn it off.
Press TRSF to store your selection.
NOTE: Specific lines or stations may be programmed to ring with a different tone
than what you have selected for you keyset.
NOTE: Intercom calls can only be automatically put on hold by pressing TRSF.
CHANGE YOUR PASSCODE
From the factory, your station passcode is 1234.You can change your station pass-
HEADSET OPERATION
Keyset users can switch between headset mode and handset mode. When using
headset mode, press the ANS/RLS or the MONITOR key if you are using a 7B
phone to answer and release calls.
code whenever you desire.
•
•
•
•
While on-hook, press TRSF and then dial 101.
Dial your old passcode.
Dial a new passcode (must be four characters).You can use 0–9.
Redial the new passcode to verify. If successful, you will hear two beeps. Four
beeps indicate an incorrect code. Reenter the code again.
Press TRSF to store the new passcode.
•
•
•
Dial 021 to use the headset or 020 to use the handset.
Press TRSF to store your selection.
•
40
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
Your keyset may be equipped with a Headset mode key. If it is so equipped press-
ing this key while the light is out will cause the keyset to enter headset mode and
the light will illuminate to indicate this. Pressing the key while the light is lit will
cause the keyset to return to handset mode and the light will go out.
•
•
Dial 061 to turn ring preference on or 060 to turn it off.
Press TRSF to store your selection.
DISPLAY SPEED DIAL NAME
This option allows you to view the name associated with a speed dial number as
it is dialed.
HOT KEYPAD
On the iDCS 500, your keyset’s keypad can be made “live” or “hot” so that it is not
necessary to lift the handset or press SPK or the MONITOR key before you begin
dialing. Calls can be made and features activated by simply dialing the C.O. line
number, trunk group access code, intercom number or feature access code. To ac-
tivate this feature:
•
•
•
With you handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Press 111 to turn DISP SPDNAME on or 110 to turn it off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
CALLER ID REVIEW ALL
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press TRSF and then dial 110.
Dial 031 to turn the Hot Keypad on or 030 to turn it off.
Press TRSF to store your selection.
This feature allows display keyset users to review Caller ID information for calls
sent to their stations.This list can be from ten to fifty calls in a first in, first out basis.
The list includes calls that you answered and calls that rang your station but that
you did not answer. When reviewing this list, you can press one button to dial the
person back. The system must be using LCR to dial the stored number.
KEY CONFIRMATION TONE
•
•
•
With you handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Press 121 to turn CID REVIEW ALL on or 120 to turn it off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
You can hear a short beep (confirmation tone) each time you press a button on the
dial pad. This tone can be turned on or off.
•
•
•
While on-hook, press TRSF and then dial 110.
Dial 040 to turn tones off or 041 to turn tones on.
Press TRSF to store your selection.
SECURE OHVA
This option allows you to receive OHVA calls via the speaker while you are on the
handset.
REJOINING A PAGE
This feature allows you to hear the remaining portion of an ongoing internal page
•
•
•
With you handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.
Press 131 to turn AUTO CAMP-ON on or 130 to turn it off.
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.
after you return your keyset to idle. To enable this feature:
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press TRSF and then dial 110.
Dial 051 to turn this feature on or 050 to turn it off.
Press TRSF to store your selection.
RING PREFERENCE
This feature automatically answers ringing calls when you lift the handset or press
the ANS/RLS or the MONITOR key if you are using a 7B phone. This method will
always answer calls in the order they arrived at your keyset. When you turn ring
preference off, you must press the flashing button to answer a call, allowing you to
answer calls in the order you choose.
•
With the handset on-hook, press TRSF and then dial 110.
42
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
CALL LOG
DISPLAY FEATURES
The system can log both incoming and ooutgoing calls placed from or to your
telephone.You must have a LOG button programmed on your keyset and assigned
a review list. Each IN and OUT list can be up to 50 numbers maximum. They are
assigned in blocks of 10 each.
INTERACTIVE DISPLAY KEYS
The three keys below the display are substitutes for dedicated feature keys and ac-
cess codes. Pressing one of these keys has the same effect as pressing a program-
mable key. These keys are called soft keys as their functions are not fixed. They
change to present you with the best options for that call condition.The use of soft
keys allows the programmable keys to be used for more DSS and speed dial keys.
To view your incoming and outbound call logs:
•
•
•
Press the LOG key.
Press either the IN or OUT key.
View the first IN/OUT telephone number. At this point you may select one of
the three options related to this number or use the UP/DOWN keys to scroll
through your list of calls.
The SCROLL key is used to display options available to the user at a particular time
or during a specific procedure. Press this key once while in the idle state to view
the three main categories available.
•
•
Press the CLEAR key yo erase this number from the list.
Press the NND key repeated to view the Name, Number, or Date associated
with this call.
201: STN NAME
CALL OTHER ANS
•
Press the DIAL key to call this number.
ANSWER: Guides you through the options to answer calls.
OTHER: Guides you through features other than making or answering calls.
CALL: Guides you through the options to make a call.
These options are the same for the incoming or outgoing call logs.
DIAL BY NAME
Each station or speed dial number can have an associated directory name. A sta-
tion or speed dial number can be selected by scrolling alphabetically through a
directory name list. This on-line “phone book” allows the user to look up and dial
any station or speed dial number in seconds.
Select one of the main categories: CALL, OTHER or ANS (ANSWER). Press the
SCROLL key to display additional options available under each of the three main
categories. The symbol ꢁ displayed as the last character on the lower line of the
display indicates that there are additional options.Press the SCROLL key to display
these additional options.
User instructions will be displayed in lower case letters. Options assigned to soft
keys will be in upper case letters.
•
•
Press the DIR key (DIRECTORY).
Select the directory you wish to use: PERS (personal speed dial numbers), SYS
(system speed dial numbers) or STN (station names).
Dial the key on the keypad that corresponds to the first letter of the name you
wish to search for.
Use the UP and DOWN arrows to scroll through the names.
Press the DIAL soft key to dial the number.
DIRECTORY INFORMATION
An 11 character directory name can be assigned to each extension number.
Display keyset users can view the name of the called or calling station before an-
swering.
•
•
•
NOTE: A DIR key can have an extender to take you directly to one of the above lists,
(PERS, SYS, or STN).
Each outside line can have an 11 character directory name. Incoming calls can be
easily identified and answered with different greetings.
CALL PROGRESS DISPLAYS
During everyday call handling, your keyset display will provide information that is
helpful and in some cases invaluable. Displays like [CALL FROM 203], [TRANSFER
TO 202], [701: RINGING], [TRANSFER FM 203], [708 busy], [Camp on to 204], [Recall
from 204], [Call for 501], [message from 204] and [FWD ALL to 204] keep you in-
Outside and internal calls ringing to a station group will display [CALL FOR xxx]
where xxx is the station group number.This allows you to answer calls directed to
you differently than calls directed to your group.
44
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
formed of what is happening and where you are. In some conditions you are
prompted to take an action and in other cases you receive directory information.
VIEWING MESSAGE INDICATIONS
You can view all of your message indications before you return them:
DISPLAY NUMBER DIALED
Display keysets begin showing digits as they are dialed. They will stay in the dis-
play until the call duration timer comes on automatically or the TIMER button is
pressed. If the call duration timer is not used, the number dialed will be displayed
until the call is released, transferred or put on hold.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press the MSG key with the red flashing light.
The first station that left a message indication will be displayed.
Press the UP and DOWN arrows to scroll through the stations that left message
indications. Use the soft keys to reply, clear or advance to the next message.
Press the ANS/RLS key to return your keyset to the idle condition.
•
CALL DURATION TIMER
ALARM REMINDER MESSAGES
When you use the alarm/appointment reminder feature, you create a 16 charac-
ter reminder message. When the alarm rings, your message will appear instead of
[ALARM REMINDER]. To program reminder messages:
The system can be set to automatically time outside calls. A few seconds after you
dial a telephone number, the timer appears in the display. It appears immediately
for incoming calls. The call timer continues for the duration of the call. Call dura-
tion times are displayed in minutes and seconds. If a call lasts longer than 60 min-
utes, the timer restarts.
•
•
•
Press TRSF and then dial 116.
Dial the alarm number 1, 2 or 3.
Dial the time you want the alarm to go off. Enter the time as HHMM (hours and
minutes) using the 24 hour clock.
You can press the TIMER key to manually begin timing a call. Press it again to stop
timing. If you press it while the automatic timer is on, the call duration time is
restarted.
•
•
Dial 0 (NOT SET), 1 (TODAY) or 2 (DAILY) to select the alarm type.
Write your message using the dial pad keys. Each press of a key selects a char-
acter. Pressing the next key moves the cursor to the next position. For example,
if your message is “TAKE MEDICATION,” press 8 once to get the letter “T.” Press
2 once to get “A.” Press 5 twice to get “K.” Continue selecting characters from
the following table to complete your message.
AUTO TIMER
Display keyset users may have the timer automatically start when they answer
incoming calls or after a short delay on an outgoing call.
•
•
Press the TRSF key to store the alarm and reminder message.
Repeat for each alarm if needed.
•
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press TRSF and then dial 110.
Dial 011 to turn the auto timer on or 010 to turn it off.
Press TRSF to store your selection.
COUNT
DIAL 0
DIAL 1
DIAL 2
DIAL 3
DIAL 4
DIAL 5
DIAL 6
DIAL 7
DIAL 8
1
2
Z
?
3
.
4
)
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Q
TIMER FUNCTION
Display keyset users may use this feature as a simple stopwatch.
space
,
!
A
D
G
J
B
E
C
F
I
@
#
•
•
•
•
When the keyset is idle, press the TIMER button to start timing.
Press the TIMER button again to stop timing.
Read the elapsed time in the display.
H
K
N
R
U
$
%
^
&
ꢀ
Lift the handset and replace it. The display will return to date and time.
L
O
S
V
M
P
T
46
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
DIAL 9
W
:
X
=
Y
[
(
]
9
•
•
When you reach a key listed below, dial the corresponding extender.
Press TRSF to store and exit programming.
DIAL ꢀ
ꢀ
KEY
DESCRIPTION
EXTENDER
NOTE: When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the
previous character, press UP to move the cursor one space to the right.
To cancel an individual alarm and reminder message:
BOSS ......................Boss and Secretary..................1–4
DP ............................Direct Pickup ............................Extension or
station group number
DS ............................Direct Station ............................Any extension number
FWRD ....................Call Forwarding ......................0–7
GCONF ..................Group Conference ..................0–5
GPIK........................Group Pick-Up ..........................01–20
IG..............................In/Out of Group........................Any group number you are part of
MMPG....................Meet Me Page ..........................0–9, ꢀ
PAGE ......................Page ............................................0–9, ꢀ
PARK ......................Park (orbits)................................0–9
RP ............................Ring Plan ....................................(1–6), HOLD for none
PMSG......................Programmed Messages ........01–30
•
•
•
•
Press TRSF and then dial 112.
Dial alarm number 1, 2 or 3.
Press the HOLD key.
Press the TRSF key.
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NAMES
Each personal speed dial number can have an 11 character name assigned to it.
This name is used to select the speed dial bin when you are dialing by directory.
SG ............................Station Group............................500 or 5000 through 549 or 5049
SPD..........................Speed Dialing ..........................00–49, 500–999
DIR ..........................Directory ....................................PERS (1), SYS (2) or STN (3)
VT ............................Voice Mail Transfer ..................Voice Mail Group number
(501–549)
•
•
•
Press TRSF and then dial 106.
Dial the speed dial bin number 00–49.
Write your message using the procedure described in Alarm Reminder Messag-
es.
Press the TRSF key to store the speed dial name.
Repeat for each speed dial bin if necessary.
•
•
NOTE: Confirm that the cursor is placed correctly before you enter the extender.
STATION NAMES
You can assign an 11 character name to your keyset.This allows other display key-
set users to call you using the directory dial feature.
To program a station name:
LCR WITH CLEAR
When you are making an outside call using LCR and dial an incorrect digit, you can
press the CLEAR soft key to reenter the telephone number. You do not need to
redial 9 to reaccess LCR.
•
•
Press TRSF and then dial 104.
Enter the 11 character name using the procedure described in Alarm Reminder
Messages.
Press TRSF to store the name.
BACKSPACE WITH LCR
If you misdial while using LCR, you can delete digits shown in the display by press-
•
ing the BSPC soft key as many times as necessary.
MANAGING KEY ASSIGNMENTS
You can view your key assignments and add extenders to some of your program-
mable keys for easy one touch operation of frequently used features.
•
•
While on-hook, press TRSF and then dial 107.
Use the VOL keys to scroll through all of your programmable keys OR press the
programmable key to which you want to add the extender.
48
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
At all times after step 1 you can talk and listen to your caller while repeating steps
2.
TEXT MESSAGING
This feature allows two digital keyset users to respond to each other with prepro-
grammed text messages. After receiving an Off Hook Voice Announcement or
Station Camp-On, you may respond with a text message while continuing to talk
and listen to your outside party.The other station can view this message and take
the appropriate action or respond back with another text message.
The following example will better demonstrate how to use Text Messaging. In this
example station 201 is making an off hook voice announcement to station 205
who after hearing the announcement will respond with a text message.
You must be permitted to use the Text Messaging feature. See your System
Administrator or Technician to be assigned this feature.
STATION 201: LINDA
received a call on line 702
STATION 205: JOHN
is talking on line 701
They will assign you ten (10) blank messages.You can create any 16 character mes-
sages (01 to 10) that are appropriate for your use.
Talking on line 702
702:
01:15
701:
05:25
Note: Please see ALARM REMINDER MESSAGES for instructions on how to enter
characters to create a text message.
CONF PAGE MUTE
Press TRANSFER
Familiarization with the two digit message numbers you will use the most will
make this procedure quick and easy. However if you do not know them, use the
UP/DOWN button to scroll to the desired message, then press SEND.
Transfer:
RETURN
The basics steps in text messaging are:
Dial 205
1. Press TMSG soft key to begin text messaging.
205:busy
2. Dial the 2 digit number for the desired message.
3. Confirm this is the intended message then press SEND.
4. Wait for a reply from the other station (steps 1, 2 & 3)
5. When any station presses EXIT the displays at both stations return to their pre-
vious call progress condition.
OHVA
CAMP ON
Ð
OHVA to 205
OHVA from 201
TMSG REJECT
Wait for reply
GIVE THE CALL
TMSG:01
SEND
Dial 03 or press Ï twice
ASK THEM TO HOLD
TMSG:03
SEND
Ð
ASK THEM TO HOLD
Wait for reply
TMSG
EXIT
Ð
702:
01:45
701:
05:55
CONF PAGE MUTE
CONF PAGE MUTE
50
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
NO CID DSP
Caller ID Digital Signal Processors (CIDDSP’s) are resources
in the iDCS 500 required for receiving CID data. If there are
no CIDDSP’s available at the time a call comes in, this is the
message you will see on your display.
WHAT IS CALLER ID?
Caller ID is the name given to the telephone company-provided feature that de-
livers the telephone number and sometimes the name of the person calling your
phone. There are two types of Caller ID; the first delivers the calling party’s tele-
phone number only and the second (sometimes referred to as “Deluxe” Caller ID)
delivers both the calling party’s telephone number and name as listed in the tele-
phone directory.
NOTE:The Caller ID features require optional software and/or hardware.Please see
your service and installation company for details.
WHAT IS ANI?
The iDCS 500 system can handle both types of Caller ID;in fact, in the case of num-
ber only delivery, the system can be programmed to insert a name for a specific
telephone number (up to a maximum of 1500 numbers). However, even though
you are paying to receive Caller ID information, there are some circumstances that
mean you will not receive this information.The six most common reasons are list-
ed below along with the display information that the iDCS 500 will provide.
ANI (Automatic Number Identification) is a feature offered by some telephone
service providers that provides the calling party’s telephone number. This service
is only available on E&M Tie Lines on a T1, digital trunk. ANI is similar to Caller
Identification (CID) but the format and information of the calling person is differ-
ent. CID uses FSK signalling and ANI uses DTMF signalling. Usually, with ANI, a call-
ing party’s identity is the Listed Directory Number (LDN) unless a separate bill-to-
number has been specified, (in which case the bill-to-number will be sent). Along
with the ANI digits you also receive DNIS digits with a separator digit. The DNIS
digits are used to tell the iDCS 500 where to route the call. Note that ANI does not
provide calling party NAME, only the number. The iDCS 500 can provide calling
number to name translation table.
PRIVATE
The caller does not wish his/her name or number to be re-
vealed to you. This type of call can be stopped at the tele-
phone company by dialing an access code on your outside
lines.This will redirect these PRIVATE calls to an announce-
ment that states that you do not wish to receive calls that
have had Caller ID blocked. The code to block these calls
can usually be found in the front section of the telephone
directory.
WHAT IS CLI?
On ISDN circuits, calling party information is called CLI and is supported on both
BRI and PRI type circuits on the iDCS 500. On BRI circuits the iDCS 500 only sup-
ports number delivery and, like ANI, a name can be attached to the telephone
number of frequent callers via the Caller ID translation table. On 5ESS and NI2 PRI
circuits both name and number support is provided on the iDCS 500 system. On
a DMS100 circuit only number service is provided.
OUT OF AREA
PAYPHONE
The caller is calling from an area that cannot provide Call-
er ID information (for example, international calls) or
he/she is calling from a type of circuit that cannot provide
Caller ID information, for example, some outbound WATS
lines.
SELECTING YOUR CALLER ID
DISPLAY
You can decide if you want to see the CID number in the display. Regardless of
which one is selected, you can press the NDD key to view the other pieces of CID
information. To select the type of Caller ID information you wish to view first:
The caller is calling from a coin-operated telephone. The
telephone company will send this information as there are
no directory listings for pay phones. The number will be
delivered as usual.
INVALID CID INFO
NO CID RECEIVED
This is a message that will be displayed when CID informa-
tion is sent on the line but was somehow corrupted.
•
•
With the handset on-hook, press TRSF and then dial 119.
Dial 0 for CID options or 1 for ANI options, or 2 for CLI options.
This is a message that will be displayed when there was no
CID information sent on the line.
52
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
•
•
Dial 0 for if you do not wish to view CID information, 1 to view the NUMBER
first or 2 to view the NAME first.
Press TRSF to store your selection.
NOTE: Your telephone system must have LCR correctly programmed to redial the
saved number. If LCR is not being used on your system, you will not be allowed to
STORE CID numbers.
VIEWING THE NEXT CALLER ID CALL
In the event that you have a call waiting or a camped-on call at your keyset, you
can press the NEXT key to display the Caller ID information associated with the
call in queue at your keyset. Either the CID name or CID number will show in the
display depending on your Name/Number selection.
INQUIRE CALLER ID PARK/HOLD INFO
If you are informed that an incoming call is on hold or has been parked for you,
you may view the Caller ID information before you retrieve the call.This will influ-
ence how you choose to handle the call.
From an idle keyset:
To view Caller ID information for calls that have been camped-on to your keyset,
press the NEXT key. If your keyset does not have a NEXT key, press the CID key
and then the NEXT soft key.
•
Press the INQUIRE key, OR
Press the CID key and then the INQUIRE soft key.
Dial the trunk number.
You may now answer the call by pressing ANS, OR
You may use NND to view more information about this call, OR
You can return to the idle condition by pressing IGNORE.
•
•
SAVING THE CALLER ID NUMBER
At any time during an incoming call that provides CID information, you may press
the SAVE key to save the CID number. If your keyset does not have a SAVE key,
press the CID key, the SCROLL key and then the SAVE soft key. The system must
be using LCR to dial the saved number.
If you are on a call:
•
Press the INQUIRE key.Your existing call will go on hold, OR
Press the CID key and then the INQUIRE soft key to place the first call on hold.
Dial the trunk number.
You may now answer the call by pressing ANS, OR
You may use NND to view more information about this call, OR
You can return to the idle condition by pressing IGNORE.
REDIALING A SAVED CALLER ID
•
•
NUMBER
To redial a number that has been saved, press the SNR key or dial 17.
NOTES:
1. Your telephone system must have LCR correctly programmed to redial the
saved number.
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset or
press SPK before you begin dialing.
NOTES:
1. If you are on an intercom call or you have Automatic Hold turned off, you must
finish the existing call or place it on hold before inquiring.
2. If you inquire about an outgoing call, you will receive a [call no longer avail-
able] display.
STORING A CALLER ID NUMBER
At any time during an incoming call that provides CID information, you may save
the CID number as a speed dial number in your personal speed dial list.To store a
Caller ID number in a personal speed dial bin:
REVIEWING PAST CALLER ID CALLS
This feature allows you to review CID information for calls sent to your keyset.This
list can contain 10–50 calls in a last-in,first-out basis.The list includes calls that you
answered and calls that rang your keyset but that you did not answer. When
reviewing this list, you can press one button to dial the person back. The system
must be using LCR to dial the stored number.To access the CID information stored
in your REVIEW list:
•
Press the STORE key.The system displays the speed dial bin in which the num-
ber was stored, OR
•
•
•
Press the CID key and then press the SCROLL key.
Press the STORE soft key.
The system displays the speed dial bin in which the number was stored.
54
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
•
Press the REVIEW key, OR
Press the CID key and then press the REVIEW soft key.
If you have entries in your review list, the most recent call will be shown first.
You can now CLEAR this entry, OR
ADD-ON MODULE
•
•
Use NND to view more information about this call, OR
Press DIAL to call this person back, OR
Press SCROLL and then press STORE to save this number in a personal speed
dial bin.
32 BUTTON MODULE WITH KEYSET
The 32 button module is used when you need more programmable keys added to
your keyset. The 32 tri-colored LED’s provide better visual indication of call status
and call progress. The extra programmable keys are used exactly like the one on
your keyset. Make them DSS/BLF keys or any combination of feature keys. The 32
button does not support executive off-hook voice announce (OHVA) and does not
have a microphone.A maximum of four 32 button modules can be assigned to any
keyset.
NOTES:
1. Each keyset defaults with ten review bins. Please see your system administra-
tor to determine the number of bins assigned to your keyset.
2. Your system must have LCR correctly programmed to allow you to DIAL num-
bers from the review list or to STORE entries from the review list.
64 BUTTON MODULE WITH KEYSET
The 64 button module is used when you need more programmable keys added to
your keyset. The 64 red LED’s provide visual indication of calls and features. The
extra programmable keys are used exactly like the ones on your keyset. Make
them DSS/BLF keys or feature keys. As a DSS/BLF the size of the 64 button module
allows for greater call status and faster call processing.The 64 button module does
not support executive off-hook voice announce (OHVA) and does not have a
microphone. A maximum of four 64 button modules can be assigned to any key-
set.
56
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
ACCESSING YOUR MAILBOX
[Also known as Subscriber Services Menu]
SVMi-8/SVMi-16E
This section describes how to setup and use the various features available to a
Subscriber. A Subscriber is a person that has been authorized access to the vari-
ous features and services available in the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E. Please review this sec-
tion carefully before you use your Authorized Features and Services, known as
Subscriber Services.
Inside Callers [Subscriber logging in from their Desk]
•
Dial the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E access number or press the key assigned to ring
SVMi-8/SVMi-16E [VMMSG].
•
Enter your personal password when prompted (the default password is
0000).
Voice Mail is one of the Subscriber Services available. Your voice mail box has the
capability of storing private messages, and offers a number of options for sending
or redirecting messages as well as provides several ways to notify you of new mes-
sages.
Outside Callers [Subscribers calling from Cell Phones or outside of the
office environment]
•
•
•
Dial the phone number that will be answered by the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E. The
main greeting will answer.
At the main greeting dial [#] plus your Subscriber (or mailbox) number
(Subscriber and Mailbox numbers will usually match your extension number).
Enter your personal password when prompted (the default password is
0000).
Another very common Subscriber Service is Access Manager.This allows you con-
trol over when and where you receive your calls as well as what to speak to your
callers in the event you are unable to speak to them directly. The ‘events’ are
referred to as “Call Conditions”. No-Answer, Busy, and Blocked are the most com-
monly used Call Conditions.
Access your Subscriber Services (or Mailbox) from a Station
other than your Own (or checking a mailbox associated with a
different station)
This guide can be used by Subscribers from within the office or from telephones
outside the office. The basic operation is the same, but the access method will be
different. See the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E Subscriber Services Menu Diagram for more
details.
•
Press the [VMMSG] key or dial the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E group number.You will
be prompted to enter a password.
Note that some features and prompts detailed here may not be available to all
Subscribers. See your System Administrator if you have questions about feature
availability.
•
•
Press [ꢀ]. This will take you to the Main Auto Attendant Menu.
Press [#] plus the Subscriber number of your choice.You will be prompted to
enter you password.
At this point the inside and outside callers follow the same instructions. You will
hear a message stating the number of messages left in your mailbox.You will then
hear the Subscriber Services Menu with the following options:
1
2
3
4
5
6
#
ꢀ
Listen to New Messages - See Listening to your Message.
Record and Send Message - See Sending Messages.
Review Saved Messages - See Listening to your Message.
Access Manager - See Access Manager.
Personal Greetings - See Personal Greetings.
Mailbox Administration - See Mailbox Administration.
Personal Services - See Personal Services.
Return to Main Menu.
58
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
SVMi-8/SVMi-16E Subscriber Services Menu
Group New
Messages
Group Saved
Messages
Listen to New Review Saved
Messages
Record & Send
Messages
Access
Manager
Personal
Greetings
Mailbox
Administration
Personal
Services
Pause, Resume
Play Menu
Options
Exit
Messages
11
33
1
3
2
4
5
6
#
8
0
*
Assign and/or Edit
Primary Greeting
Change
Message Alert
Review
Workload
Group Messages Menu
Listen Menu
Record Menu
Follow Me
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
0
1
Group
Urgent Messages
Play
Message
For a Directory
of Subscribers
Assign and/or Edit
Busy Greeting
Change
Pager Notification
Edit Stored
Telephone Numbers
Block All Calls
Call forwarding
Call Screening
Find Me
1
1
11
2
#
3
4
5
6
7
8
#
0
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
2
3
5
7
8
9
#
0
Play Previous
Message
To Create a
Reminder
Group
Callback Requests
Assign and/or Edit
Blocking Greeting
Review Deleted
Messages
Change
Weekly Schedule
Change
Password
##
2
3
4
5
8
9
#
0
1
2
Save
Message
Group
Reminders
Assign and/or Edit
Night Greeting
Review Undelivered
Messages
Place a
Direct Call
Record
Name
"Enter the Recipient's Number"
Discard
Message
Review
Recording
3
Group
Private Messages
1
Assign and/or Edit
Screened Greeting
Auto Play
New Messages
Enter Directory
Name
3
3
Reply to Sender
4
Stop, Append to
Recording
2
Group
Fax Only Messages
Edit Only
Personal Greetings
Auto Play Message
Information
Extended
Prompting
Personal
Administration
4
8
0
Place
Call to Sender
5
Discard Recording
and Rerecord
3
Auto Set
Night Intercept
Edit Only
Mailbox Greeting
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
Deliver Copy
of Fax Message
55
6
Set
Delivery Options
4
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
R
e
c
o
r
d
an
d
S
e
nd
Subscriber
Administration
Play
Menu Options
Forward a
Copy of Message
Broadcast Message
Specify
Future Delivery
5
Pause, Resume
Menu Prompting
Play
Access Coverage
Play
Menu Options
Play
Menu Options
Record
a Reminder
Cancel, Return
Rewind
5 Seconds
7
t
o
S
u
b
s
c
r
i
be
r
S
ervices
SEND Message,
Then Copy
*
6
Change
Playback Volume
Group
A Specific Sender
Play
Menu Options
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
Cancel, Return
Play
Menu Options
77
8
t
o S cr r Services
u
b
s
i
b
e
Rewind
5 Seconds
*
*
7
Pause, Resume
Message Playback
Play
Message Inventory
Cancel, Return
Cancel, Return
r Services
e
o
sc
Sub riber Services
t
o
S
u
b
s
c
ri
b
Change
Playback Volume
*
*
77
Fast Forward
5 Seconds
9
Play
Menu Options
Pause, Resume
Record/Playback
8
Change
Playback Speed
99
#
Cancel, Return
to Subscriber Services
Fast Forward
5 Seconds
9
Skip to
Next Message
*
Change
Playback Speed
99
Scan Messages
##
0
SEND Message,
Then Exit Record
Play
Menu Options
#
Play
Menu Options
Play Message
Information
0
00
C
S
a
n
u
ce
b
l
s
,
R
e
t
e
u
r
n
Ca
n
c
e
l
,
R
e
t
u
r
n
Subscriber Services
t
o
c
ib
r Services
t
*
*
NOTE: All options shown MAY NOT be authorized. If an option is not
available please speak to your system administrator.
60
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
PLAY MENU OPTIONS
0
ꢀ
#
GETTING STARTED
EXIT TO AUTO ATTENDANT
PERSONAL SERVICES
Using your new SVMi-8/SVMi-16E Subscriber Services is as simple as following a
few simple spoken instructions. First time users should read this section as a tuto-
rial.You should start with the following steps:
•
Access your Subscriber Services Menu - You already know how to do this.
1 or 3
From the Subscriber Services Menu:
LISTENING TO OLD OR NEW MESSAGES
•
•
•
•
•
Record a Primary/No-Answer Personal Greeting. Dial [5][1].
Record a Mailbox Greeting. Dial [5][7].
Change your access code (Password). Dial [#][7][1].
Record your name. Dial [#][7][2].
1
Play / replay the message you just heard.
Play the previous message.
11
2
Enter your directory name. Dial [#][7][3].
Save the message you just heard and listen to the next message.
Delete the message you just heard and listen to the next message.
Reply to the message.
3
After you have completed the steps above your Subscriber Services are set up and
ready to use.
4
This will allow you to leave a message in the mailbox of the sender (if the
sender has a mailbox on this system).
LISTEN TO YOUR MESSAGES
5
Return the call directly to the telephone number that left the message.
If there are new messages in your mailbox your [VMMSG] key will be lit. Call the
SVMi-8/SVMi-16E by pressing this key, and when prompted enter your password.
You will then be at the Subscriber Services Menu. Select [1] to listen to new mes-
sages or [3] to listen to saved messages.
This will work for internal and external callers, but Caller ID service is need-
ed to use this feature on an outside call.
55
Deliver a fax copy.
This will allow you to receive attached faxmail document(s). Faxmail docu-
ments can be delivered to any fax machine of your choice as long as out
calling is authorized. You can also have faxmail messages automatically
delivered to the fax machine of your choice.
Note:After you enter your password, if“Autoplay of New Messages”is enabled and
you have new messages the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E will begin to play them automati-
cally. A subscriber can control this feature. From the Subscriber Services Menu [6]
[5] toggles “Autoplay of New Messages” ON/OFF.
6
Forward the message and saves a copy.
SUBSCRIBER SERVICES MENU
The subscriber can be selected by dialing their mailbox number (nnn),
using the directory service (#) or you may also add comments and leave it
as a memo to yourself (##).
The following is a list of all the options available in the Subscriber Main Menu.
1
LISTENING TO NEW MESSAGES
GROUP NEW MESSAGES
RECORD AND SEND A MESSAGE
LISTENING TO OLD MESSAGES
GROUP OLD MESSAGES
ACCESS MANAGER
The Send and Copy Service (option 6) allows a user to send copies of a mes-
sage to multiple recipients easily. A different introduction message may be
left for each recipient.
11
2
7
Rewind the message 5 seconds.
3
77
Change playback volume of the recording.
33
4
There are two levels of volume during playback. Dialing this code will tog-
gle between the two levels.
5
PERSONAL GREETINGS
8
9
Pause or resume during message playback.
Fast forward the message 5 seconds.
6
MAILBOX ADMINISTRATION
PAUSE / RESUME
8
62
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
99
0
Change playback speed of the recording.
b) Record your message at the tone. After recording the message, you will hear
the Send Menu with the following functions:
There are two levels of speed during playback. Dialing this code will toggle
between the two speeds.
1
2
3
4
5
6
#
Review
Continue Recording
Discard and Re-Record
Set Message Attributes (Delivery Options)
Schedule Future Delivery
Play options.
Pressing this key will play all the menu options available to you from this
point.
00
#
Hear the time and date, and sender's information of the message you just
heard. Sender information is not available on outside calls.
Save and Send then Send a Copy to Someone Else
Save and Send the Recording
Move to the next message. This does not Save or Discard the current mes-
sage - it is retained as new.
Setting Message Attributes
##
Scan. Plays first 7 seconds of a message then skips to next message. This is
similar to the scan button on a radio. It will allow you to find a specific mes-
sage quickly. To stop scanning press [1].
If after recording a message you select [4] you can set up any combination of the
following delivery options:
1
2
3
4
5
ꢀ
Urgent Delivery
Return Receipt Requested
Request a Call Back
Private Delivery
Reply Required
Exit
ꢀ
Cancel and return to previous menu.
11 or 33
GROUP NEW OR OLD MESSAGES
Scheduling Future Delivery
Messages can be grouped as either Reminders, press [3] or Messages from a spe-
cific sender, press [9].
If after recording a message you select [5] to schedule future delivery, you will be
able to set message attributes and set this message as:
Additionally you can press [#] and hear a summary of your mailbox contents:
#
1
2
3
4
5
ꢀ
Immediate Delivery
Next Few Hours
End of Current Business Day (based on your Availability Schedule)
Beginning of Next Business Day (based on your Availability Schedule)
A Coming Day of the Week
Specific Day / Time
Exit
a) Number of messages
b) Number of reminders
c) Number of urgent messages
d) Number of messages needing a callback
e) Number of private messages
f) Number of fax messages
2
4
RECORD AND SEND A MESSAGE
ACCESS MANAGER
This option is used to send a message to another subscriber.The steps are simple:
The Access Manager allows the subscriber to set a number of options for when,
where and how, and/or if the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E contacts you when a caller dials
your extension number. All of the options are toggled on/off based on their cur-
rent status when you access them.
a) Enter the recipient’s mailbox number, or if this is not known enter [#] to use
the system directory.
64
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
Note: ALL Access Manager options MUST be individually allowed by the System
Administrator for each Subscriber. They are:
then play your primary, No Answer greeting during the day (when you are
available) and will NOT ring your extension but simply play your Night greet-
ing during the night (when you are not available).
1
Follow Me
Note: This does NOT use the Day and Night schedules of the phone system. It
Allows the subscriber to enter an alternate location and set how long the new
destination (Designated Location) will be active. This number may be an
internal or external number. This is useful if you are frequently traveling or
changing the number where you can be reached.
is solely controlled by the Subscriber’s Availability Schedule.
8
ꢀ
0
#
Pause / Resume
Exit from Access Manager
Play All Options
When Follow Me is activated, the transfer will be supervised and confirmed.
This means that if the call is not answered or if rejected by the Subscriber at
the designated location it will be recalled to the Subscriber’s mailbox.
Play Access Coverage
This feature is useful for finding out how you current access settings are set.
It will also tell you what greetings will play under each of the call conditions
you have setup.
3
4
Call Blocking
When this feature is active, callers will not be transferred to your extension,
they will hear your 'blocked' greeting (if recorded) and will go directly to your
mailbox if they do not select any or are not offered any other options.
5
Call Forwarding
Unlike Follow Me where the subscriber wants to take their calls at an alter-
nate location this feature allows the subscriber to pass control of his calls to
another Subscriber. The “Forwarded To” Subscriber will now be in control of
the caller and the caller will NOT return to originating Subscriber’s Mailbox. If
the “Forwarded To” Subscriber does not answer the caller it will now follow
what ever the “Forwarded To” Subscriber has set up for their call conditions.
The Caller will hear“Forwarding to”“{Subscriber Name}”before actually being
forwarded.
PERSONAL GREETINGS
The options available in this menu will be determined by your System
Administrator, and not all of them may be available to you. In the simplest sys-
tems, only a mailbox greeting will be available, additional greetings may be acces-
sible in more complex systems.
Your Personal Greeting will be played every time someone dials your extension
and you do not answer.
5
6
Call Screening
You may record up to 9 Personal Greetings, and you may assign any one of them
to be active. There are several different 'Call Coverage' conditions to which you
may assign any of your 9 greetings.The Call Coverage Conditions are: No-Answer,
Busy, and Do Not Disturb (or Forwarded All). This will allow different greetings to
play depending on the type of call forward that you have set, or the condition of
your telephone.
If this is turned on, the caller will be asked their name and the SVMi-8/SVMi-
16E will play this name to you before the transfer, giving you an option to
accept or reject the call.
Find Me
Find Me, when enabled, will attempt to locate the subscriber by calling a list
of preprogrammed phone numbers. The stored phone numbers are entered
in 'Personal Services' [#][2] (if allowed by the Administrator). The stored tele-
phone number list can contain up to 9 preprogrammed telephone numbers.
The Find Me feature only use the first five.
The Call Coverage conditions that you can assign specific greetings to are select-
ed by the following digits:
1
Primary/No Answer Greeting
Used when in your office, away from your desk or during the time period you
are scheduled available. If this is the only Personal Greeting you record, it will
play for all call coverage conditions.
7
Night Intercept
This feature is dependent on your weekly availability schedule, which is
entered in 'Personal Services' [#][3] (if allowed by the Administrator). When
Night Intercept is active the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E will first ring your extension
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Basic
Greeting' feature.
66
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
Edit Personal Greetings
Example:“Hi this is John Smith.I'm sorry I am not available to answer your call.
If someone else can help you, please enter the extension number now. Or, to
leave me a message, press 1.”
6
You may also edit/record each one of the greetings (1-9) at any time.
Select a greeting number to edit and follow the instructions to record your
greeting. When you are done recording your greeting, you will be able to lis-
ten to the greeting you recorded, save the greeting you recorded and return
to the previous menu, record the greeting again, or exit without saving the
greeting.
2
Busy Greeting
Played to a caller when you are already talking to someone on your extension
or the telephone at your Designated Location.
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Busy
Greeting' feature.
Note: If you record only the greeting assigned to the No-Answer Call
Coverage Condition,then that greeting will play to callers for all Call Coverage
Conditions (No-Answer, Busy, Blocked, Night, and Rejected Caller). In this case,
the salutation part of the greeting should be very general.
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. I'm on another line right now. If someone else
can help you, please enter the extension number now. Or, to leave a message,
press 1.”
7
Edit Mailbox Greeting
3
Call Blocking Greeting
Used whenever a caller reaches your mailbox or if you have not recorded any
of the Call Coverage greetings.The way a caller is transferred to your mailbox
greeting directly, is by another subscriber transferring the caller to your mail-
box using the VT (VoiceMail Transfer) key.
Used while Call Blocking is enabled in your Access Manager or if your phone
is forwarded ALL or DND.
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Call
Blocking' feature.
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the
'Mailbox Greeting Option' feature.
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. Sorry I missed your call, but I'm going to be
out of the office for the next few hours. If someone else can help you, please
enter the extension number now. Or, to leave me a message, press 1.”
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. Please leave me a message, I will call you as
soon as I can.”
4
Night Greeting
Note: This greeting will only play if none of the 5 personal greetings has
played to the caller. A common usage for this Greeting is when another
Subscriber is talking with a caller and uses the VT key on their phone to trans-
fer the caller directly to your Mailbox.
Used during the time period you are scheduled UNAVAILABLE, usually after
business hours during the evening and at night.
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the
'Scheduling' feature.
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. I've left the office for the evening. If you would
like to try someone else, please enter the extension number now. Or, to leave
me a message, press 1.”
6
MAILBOX ADMINISTRATION
5
Call Screening Greeting
Used while Call Screening is enabled, and you REJECT a caller after listening
to the caller's record name.
The Mailbox Administration menu is used to turn on and off your pager notifica-
tion, message alert options and other message control features.
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Call
Screening' feature.
1
Message Alert
When this function is activated, the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E will call any outside or
inside telephone number, after each message is left in your voice mailbox.
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. I'm sorry, but I am not available to speak with
you at this time. If someone else can help you, please enter the extension
number now. Or, to leave me a message, press 1.”
To hear your message at the remote location when the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E calls
you, after you pick up the telephone and answer you will be instructed that
there is a message and to enter your password. Simply enter your password
and you will now be logged in.
68
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
Setting Up Message Alert:
This useful feature will allow you to cancel any messages that have NOT yet
been picked up by the recipient.
■
■
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
Press [1] for Message Alert.
5
6
Auto Play New Messages
There are 4 options available to you:
If this option is enabled, after you enter your password correctly any new
messages will immediately begin to play.To enable (or if already enabled tog-
gle and disable) this feature:
Press [1] to toggle message alert on and off.
Press [2] to set the schedule when you would like to be notified.
Press [3] to be notified on urgent messages only.
Press [4] to set the destination phone number.
■
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
Press [5] to Set Auto Play of New Messages.
2
Pager Notification
Auto Play Message Information
When this function is activated, the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E will call your beeper
service and notify you after each message is left in your voice mailbox.
If this option is enabled, the date, time and sender’s name will be played auto-
matically before each message. If this is disabled, the information must be
requested manually by pressing ‘00’. To enable (or if already enabled toggle
and disable) this feature:
■
■
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
Press [2] for pager notification.
■
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
There are 4 options available to you:
Press [6] to Set Auto Play of Message Information.
Press [1] to toggle pager notification on and off.
Press [2] to set the schedule when you would like to be paged.
Press [3] to be notified on urgent messages only.
Press [4] to set the pager phone number.
9
MESSAGE BROADCAST
3
Undelete
When this function is activated, the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E will allow you to
undelete any messages that you have recently deleted (up to the pro-
grammed Daily Maintenance Time, which is set to 3 a.m. by Default the fol-
lowing morning).
This option will only be available if it has been allowed by the System
Administrator.
Broadcast to All Mailboxes
■
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
If you have been designated as a Subscriber Administrator, you may send a
message to ALL mailboxes in the system.
Press [3] for Deleted Messages.
Deleted voice mail messages are temporarily stored in memory until 3 a.m.
the following day. Select this option to recover ("undelete") previously delet-
ed messages, during this period of time.
■
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.
Press [9] for Broadcast Messages.
This option will only be available if your mailbox has been assigned
Subscriber Administration privileges.
4
Undelivered Retrieval
When this function is activated, the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E will allow you to recall
any messages you have sent that have NOT yet been picked up by the recip-
ient.
70
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
PERSONAL ADMINISTRATION SETTINGS
This menu allows you to make changes to basic setup settings, that are rarely
changed. Use these when you initially set up your personal Subscriber settings.
You probably will not need to change them after that.
#
PERSONAL SERVICES
The Personal Administration Menu is used to set your password and record your
name. Many of these features must be allowed by the System Administrator.
1
Setting your Password
■
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [#][7][1].
1
Workload Management
The current password will be played and you will have the chance to
change it.
Allows you to access to all reminders, both Active and Pending. If authorized
you can group your reminders as Commitments, Follow-Ups or Tasks for bet-
ter organization. The system will flag each reminder as Active or Pending
(pending means scheduled for future delivery).
2
Recording your Name
Use this option to record your name.Your recorded name is played in several
different situations. It is important to record your name for proper operation
of the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E system.
2
Stored Numbers
Allows you to enter up to 9 stored phone numbers. The first five of these are
used in the 'Find Me' feature, but any of them (1-9) can be easily dialed using
only one digit followed by the pound key, to be used by many other features
from within your subscriber space. (ie: “Follow Me, “Message Alert”, “Pager
Alert”, and “Direct Call”).
■
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [#][7][2].
The current name will be played and you will have the chance to change
it.
Note: It is possible that if you do not record your name and/or enter your
Directory Name (described below), you will not be included in the Dial by
Name Directory.
3
5
Schedule Availability
Allows you to enter a weekly availability schedule for use with Night Personal
Greeting and the Auto Night Intercept feature. Follow the spoken directions
to enter the days of the week and times you are generally available to talk to
your callers. All other times you will be considered unavailable.
3
Entering your Directory Name
Use this option to enter your Directory Name.Your Directory Name is used by
callers to find you if they do not know your extension number.
■
■
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [#][7][3].
The current Directory Name will be played as a string of digits that are
equal to your name spelled out on your telephone keypad. Follow the
instructions to enter a new name.You will be prompted to enter your last
name and then your first name.
Place a Direct Call
Allows you to place a direct call out of the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E from anywhere.
You may either dial the number or dial a single digit 1-5 that corresponds to
a stored number (See Personal Services, 2 - Stored Numbers). This feature
must be authorized by the System Administrator and can be limited or
opened to internal, local, and long distance calls.
This must be done in order for the directory feature to work correctly.
Note: It is possible that if you do not record your name (described above)
and/or enter your Directory Name, you will not be included in the Dial by
Name Directory.
7
Personal Administration
This area is used during the initial set up of your Subscriber Settings (see next
section).
4
Extended Prompting
Use this option to drastically reduce the number of prompts played in the
subscriber interface (mailbox prompts). Change this setting only if you are
very familiar with the user operation of the SVMi-8/SVMi-16E.
72
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
Note: Remember if you know what digits to press, you can enter them at any
time you do not have to wait to be prompted. This feature can be toggled
on/off at anytime. Also if it is off you will be prompted within each subscriber
menu to press zero for more options. This enables you to still be able to find
out what to do if you were to get lost and extended prompting was disabled.
AME Password
If your keyset has AME PASSWORD (MMC 110) set to YES, you must enter your
station password to listen to messages being left. This will prevent unauthorized
people from listening to messages being left for you.
If the password option is turned on, while a message is being left, press the flash-
ing AME indicator and enter your station password (not your SVMi-8/SVMi-16E
password).You will then hear the message being left.
KEYSET USER FEATURES
The following options are available if you have a display keyset.They require setup
by the System Administrator.
Call Record
Message Waiting Lights
If you have a call record button assigned to your phone, you may press it at any
time, to record the conversation in progress. If you have a display keyset, you will
also have the soft key options to pause and time the message.
When new messages are left in your mailbox,the voice mail message light on your
keyset will flash. Press this flashing key [VMMSG] and follow the prompts to
retrieve messages.This key may be pressed at any time to log into your Subscriber
Main Menu.
Answer Machine Emulation
If you have an Answer Machine Emulation key programmed on your keyset, you
can use it to monitor calls going to your voice mail, and optionally answer them.
The operation of this feature is similar to screening a call on a home answering
machine.
Your keyset must be set to forward on no answer to voice mail. After ringing your
station the caller will be connected to your voice mail and hear your personal
greeting before leaving a message. During this time you will be monitoring the
connection between the caller and your voice mail box. At this time you will only
be monitoring the call, you can not talk to the other party until you answer. You
may pick up the call at any time or ignore it.
To activate this feature press the AME button. The associated indicator will be lit
steady. Press again to turn off. If this key is pressed while a station is ringing (dur-
ing forward no answer), the feature will be turned on for the current call only.
While the caller is leaving a message or ringing you may:
■
■
Press [#] to immediately put the caller in your voice mailbox and monitor it.
Press [ꢀ] to immediately disconnect your station. The caller continues to
leave a message normally.
■
■
Pick up the handset and monitor privately.
Press ANS / RLS to answer the call (using the handset or speaker).
74
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS
SHORTCUTS
Calling
CODE
NAME
TELEPHONE NUMBER
Calling a station that is busy or does not answer you can press [#] to immediately
send the call to the called parties mailbox.
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
Being Called
If your phone rings and you want to send the caller directly to your mailbox, sim-
ply press [#].
Direct Messaging
[#] + DSS To make it easy to leave messages for others in your office without hav-
ing to dial their extension number first, keyset users may simply dial [#] plus a
mailbox (extension) number and leave a message directly.If you dial a busy exten-
sion press [#] to connect directly with the mailbox.
Self Memo (Reminder)
Pressing [##] will leave a message in your own mailbox. This is useful to remind
yourself of things to do now or in the future. Messages can be sent with future
delivery so you can have the system call you when items become due.
INTERACTIVE DISPLAYS
Display keyset users have the added advantage of using the soft keys and displays
to play, save, delete, reply, call, forward, rewind, pause, fast forward, change the vol-
ume, get message information, or help.
Viewing Mailbox Contents
If you have new messages, in addition to the Terminal Status Indicator (TSI) you
will be able to use the keyset displays and soft keys to communicate with the
SVMi-8/SVMi-16E.
76
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DCS Keyset
Table of Contents
Home Page
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS
CODE
NAME
TELEPHONE NUMBER
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Home Page
Table of Contents
STD Telephone
STD Telephone
Table of Contents
Home Page
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ABOUT THIS BOOK ................................................................................1
THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW ..........................................2–3
OUTSIDE CALLS
STANDARD TELEPHONE
USER GUIDE
Making an Outside Call......................................................................................4
Answering an Outside Call ..............................................................................4
Universal Answer ................................................................................................4
Flash/Recall........................................................................................................4–5
Busy Line Queuing with Callback ................................................................5
iDCS 500 Release 2/OfficeServ™ System
INTERCOM CALLS
Calling Other Stations ........................................................................................6
Answering Intercom Calls ................................................................................6
Busy Station Callback ........................................................................................6
Busy Station Camp-on........................................................................................6
Calling Your System Operator..........................................................................7
CALL PROCESSING
March 2004
Holding Calls..........................................................................................................8
Transferring Calls..................................................................................................9
Transfer with Camp-On......................................................................................9
Transfer Cancel......................................................................................................9
Transfer Recall........................................................................................................9
Call Waiting ..........................................................................................................10
Setting Up a Conference ................................................................................10
Forwarding Your Calls ..............................................................................10–12
Call Pickup............................................................................................................12
Samsung Telecommunications America reserves the right without prior notice to revise information in
this guide for any reason. Samsung Telecommunications America also reserves the right without prior
notice to make changes in design or components of equipment as engineering and manufacturing
may warrant. Samsung Telecommunications America disclaims all liabilities for damages arising from
the erroneous interpretation or use of information presented in this guide.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STD Telephone
Table of Contents
Home Page
DIALING FEATURES
Speed Dialing......................................................................................................13
Programming Personal Speed Dial Numbers ........................................13
Last Number Redial ..........................................................................................13
Save Number with Redial ..............................................................................13
Pulse to Tone Changeover..............................................................................14
PAGING AND MESSAGING
Making an Internal Page ................................................................................15
Making an External Page ................................................................................15
All Page..................................................................................................................15
Meet Me Page/Answer ....................................................................................15
Call Park and Page ............................................................................................15
Retrieving a Parked Call ..................................................................................16
Setting a Message Indication........................................................................16
Returning Messages ........................................................................................16
Canceling a Message........................................................................................17
Programmed Messages ..................................................................................17
ABOUT THIS BOOK
This booklet provides instructions for using an industry standard single line tele-
phone set with the iDCS 500 Release 2 systems. A variety of single line sets from
many different manufacturers are available. Check with your service and installa-
tion company to ensure proper operation with the iDCS 500 Release 2 system.
Please take the time to study this guide and to become familiar with the operation
of your standard telephone. Keep it handy. You may need to look up instructions
for infrequently used features.
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
Do Not Disturb....................................................................................................18
Door Phone Calls ..............................................................................................18
Account Codes ............................................................................................18–19
In/Out of Group..................................................................................................19
Locking your Station ........................................................................................19
Changing your Station Passcode ................................................................20
Learning to use your telephone correctly will make everyday telephone commu-
nications a breeze.
This book is written based on the factory default settings for the feature access
codes. Sometimes, due to programming requirements, these codes may be
changed. If you find that a feature code does not work as described in this book,
please contact your installation and service company to determine the correct
code.
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL LIST ....................................21–22
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STD Telephone
Table of Contents
Home Page
SYSTEM TONES
The system provides several tones to assist you. Some of these tones are already
THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW
familiar to you.
USER ORIENTATION
Intercom Dial Tone—A steady tone that indicates you can begin dialing.
Lifting the handset on your telephone will provide the iDCS system with dial tone.
This is also referred to as internal or intercom dial tone. To get an outside line from
the telephone company, dial an access code, usually the digit “9.” To call another
station in your system, simply dial its extension number. See your system directo-
ry list for other access codes and extension numbers.
DIAL TONE
CONTINUOUS
Ringback Tone—Indicates the station you dialed is ringing.
HOOKFLASH
RINGBACK TONE—1000 ms ON/3000 ms OFF
CONTINUOUS
Throughout this guide, you will see references to “hookflash.” A hookflash is a
momentary operation of the hookswitch required for a feature operation. Some
telephones have a FLASH key. This key may be pressed instead of the hookswitch.
Busy Tone—Indicates the station you dialed is busy.
BUSY TONE—500 ms ON/500 ms OFF
C.O. LINES
CONTINUOUS
Lines from the telephone company are “C.O. lines.” Calls on these lines are referred
to as “outside calls.” These C.O. lines are accessed by dialing an access code. For
example, dial 9 to get a local outside line or dial 800–8XX for other line groups.
Each line in the system is numbered beginning with 701, and then 702, 703, etc. To
get a specific line, dial its three digit line number. If Least Cost Routing (LCR) is pro-
grammed into the system, you will only be required to dial 9.
DND/No More Calls Tone—Fast busy tone indicates the station you dialed
is in the Do Not Disturb mode or cannot receive any more calls.
DND/NO MORE CALLS TONE—250 ms ON/250 ms OFF
FOR TEN SECONDS
DISTINCTIVE RINGING
The iDCS system provides distinctive ring patterns to your phone:
Transfer/Conference Tone—Indicates your call is being held and you
can dial another party.
TRANSFER/CONF TONE—100 ms ON/100 ms OFF
•
•
•
Outside calls have a single ring tone repeated.
Intercom calls have a double ring tone repeated.
Door phone calls and alarm/appointment reminders have a triple ring tone
repeated.
CONTINUOUS
Confirmation Tone—Very short beeps followed by dial tone indicate you
have correctly set or canceled a system feature.
CONFIRMATION TONE—50 ms ON/50 ms OFF
FOR ONE SECOND
(programmable)
Error Tone—A distinctive two level beeping tone indicates you have done
something incorrectly.Try again.
ERROR TONE—50 ms of tone 1/50 ms of tone 2
FOR THREE SECONDS
2
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STD Telephone
Table of Contents
Home Page
RECALL DIAL TONE
Hookflash and then dial 18 to disconnect your outside call and receive telephone
OUTSIDE CALLS
company dial tone for a new call.
MAKING AN OUTSIDE CALL
BUSY LINE QUEUING WITH
CALLBACK
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset and receive internal dial tone.
Dial a C.O. line or line group access code.
Receive outside dial tone and then dial the telephone number.
Finish the call by replacing the handset.
If you receive a busy signal when you select an outside line:
•
•
•
While on that call, hookflash, receive transfer tone and dial 44.
When the line becomes free, the system will call you back.
Lift the handset, receive dial tone and dial the telephone number or the
speed dial number again.
If your system is programmed to require an authorization code before making a
call:
•
Dial 4 and a valid code. You will hear confirmation tone, followed by dial
tone.
Select a C.O. line.
NOTE: A callback will be canceled if it is not answered within 30 seconds.
•
If your system is programmed to require an account code before making a call:
•
•
Dial 47 and a valid code.
Hookflash and receive transfer tone. Select a C.O. line.
For more information see your system administrator.
ANSWERING AN OUTSIDE CALL
•
Lift the handset. You are automatically connected to the ringing call.
•
Finish the call by replacing the handset.
UNIVERSAL ANSWER
Outside lines may be programmed to ring a general alerting device. To answer
calls ringing this device, dial 67. This device can operate in any system ring mode.
SENDING A FLASH
While you are on an outside call, hookflash, receive transfer tone and dial 49 to
send a flash to the telephone company. This may be required for some custom call-
ing features or CENTREX lines.
Note: Flash is not available on an ISDN circuit.
4
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STD Telephone
Table of Contents
Home Page
CALLING YOUR SYSTEM OPERATOR
INTERCOM CALLS
•
Lift the handset and dial 0 to call your system operator or group of opera-
tors.
CALLING OTHER STATIONS
•
If you want to call a specific operator, dial that person’s extension number.
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset.
Dial the extension number or group number.
Wait for the party to answer.
If you hear several brief tone bursts instead of ringback tone, the
station you called is set for Voice Announce or Auto Answer.
Begin speaking immediately after the tone.
Finish the call by replacing the handset.
•
•
ANSWERING INTERCOM CALLS
•
Lift the handset and you are automatically connected to the ringing call.
•
Finish the call by replacing the handset.
BUSY STATION CALLBACK
When you call another station and you receive a busy signal:
•
•
•
Hookflash, receive transfer tone, dial 44, receive transfer tone and hang up.
When the busy station becomes free, your telephone will ring.
Lift the handset to automatically call the now idle station.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds to answer or the callback will be canceled.
BUSY STATION CAMP-ON
When you call another station and receive a busy signal but you do not want to
wait for a callback:
•
•
•
•
Hookflash, receive transfer tone and dial 45.
The called station will receive off-hook ring or camp-on tone.
You will hear ringback tone.
Wait for the called party to answer.
The called station must release its first call or put it on hold before answering your
camp-on.
6
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STD Telephone
Table of Contents
Home Page
TRANSFERRING CALLS
Transfer is used to send any call to another extension in one of two ways. You can
perform a screened transfer by informing the other extension who is calling or you
can perform a blind transfer without notification.
CALL PROCESSING
HOLDING CALLS
•
While you are speaking on a call, hookflash to receive transfer dial tone and
then dial an extension number. Your call is automatically put on transfer
hold.
•
When you are connected to any call, hookflash, receive transfer tone and
dial 11. The call will now be on hold. You may now make or receive a second
call.
To take the caller off hold, lift the handset and dial 11. You are now con-
nected to the call. You may resume your conversation.
•
Hang up when you hear ringing—OR—wait for the party to answer and
advise the party of the call and then hang up. If the transfer is refused, you
will be reconnected to the outside line when the station hangs up or you
can hookflash to return to the outside party.
•
NOTE: A standard telephone can put only one call on hold at a time.
NOTE: After the inside party answers, you may alternate back and forth between
the parties by hookflashing.
HOLD RECALL
If you leave a call on hold longer than the hold timer, the call will recall your sta-
tion.
TRANSFER WITH CAMP-ON
•
•
When your phone rings, lift the handset to answer the recall.
If you do not answer this recall within a pre-programmed period of time, it
will go to the operator group.
When you are transferring a call to another station and it is busy, you may camp
the call on to this station:
•
While you are speaking on a call, hookflash to receive transfer dial tone and
then dial an extension number. Your call is automatically put on transfer
hold.
RETRIEVING CALLS ON HOLD AT
ANOTHER STATION
•
Hang up when you hear a busy signal. The called party will be alerted that
a call is waiting.
When a line is on hold at any other station:
TRANSFER CANCEL
•
Lift the handset and dial 12 plus the extension number of the station that
placed the call on hold—OR—dial 12 plus the line number if you know
what it is.
If this feature has been activated on your system the Consultation Hold feature will
not work. Instead, when you hookflash to return to the outside party after initiat-
ing a transfer, the internal party will be dropped allowing you to transfer the call
to another destination. This is especially useful if the party you originally tried to
transfer to was busy or did not answer.
CONSULTATION HOLD
When you are speaking on an outside line and it is necessary to consult with an-
other extension:
TRANSFER RECALL
All calls that you have transferred (screened, unscreened and camped-on) will
automatically recall to your station if they are not answered in a pre-programmed
period of time.
•
•
•
•
Hookflash and receive transfer tone. Your call is placed on transfer hold.
Dial an extension number.
Consult with the internal party.
Hookflash to return to the outside party or hang up to transfer the call.
NOTE: Repeatedly pressing the hookflash will flip-flop between the outside and
inside parties (except if the destination station is set for Auto Answer or Voice
Announce, or the system has Transfer Cancel activated).
8
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STD Telephone
Table of Contents
Home Page
CALL WAITING
If an outside call has been camped-on to your phone or another station is
FORWARD ALL CALLS
To forward all of your calls to another station:
camped-on to you:
•
Lift the handset and dial 601 followed by the destination you want your
calls to forward to. This can be an internal (within your system) or external
(outside your system such as a cell phone) number.
•
•
•
•
•
•
You will receive camp-on tone indicating another call is waiting.
Hookflash and then dial 11 to put the first call on hold.
Hang up and the waiting call will ring.
Lift the handset to answer.
Complete this call by transferring it or hanging up.
Lift the handset and then dial 11 to return to your first call.
•
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.
To cancel Forward All Calls, lift the handset and dial 600—OR—dial another for-
ward code, e.g., 604.
FORWARD BUSY
To forward calls to another station when you are on the phone:
SETTING UP A CONFERENCE
You may conference five parties (you and four other parties) in any combination of
•
Lift the handset and dial 602 followed by the destination you want your
calls to forward to. This can be an internal (within your system) or external
(outside your system such as a cell phone) number.
outside lines and internal stations in any order.
•
While you are engaged in a conversation, hookflash, receive transfer tone
and dial 46. You will receive conference tone.
•
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.
•
•
•
•
Make another call, either intercom or outside.
After the called party answers, hookflash and receive conference tone.
Make another call—OR—hookflash to join all parties.
Repeat as necessary.
To cancel Forward Busy, lift the handset and dial 600—OR—dial another forward
code, e.g., 604.
FORWARD NO ANSWER
To forward calls to another station when you do not answer:
To drop a party from your conference call:
•
Hookflash, receive confirmation tone and dial the extension or line number
that is to be dropped.
•
Lift the handset and dial 603 followed by the destination you want your call
to forward to. This can be an internal (within your system) or external (out-
side your system such as a cell phone) number.
•
Receive conference tone and dial 46 to rejoin the other parties.
NOTES: To leave the conference, hang up. Control will be passed to the first inter-
nal station that was added. If there are no internal stations and you wish to leave
outside lines connected together in a trunk to trunk conference, follow the instruc-
tions to drop a party and use your extension number. When the parties on the out-
side lines hang up, the lines will release automatically, proceeding disconnect
supervision is supplied by the telephone company.
•
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.
To cancel Forward No Answer, lift the handset and dial 600—OR—dial another
forward code, e.g., 604.
FORWARD NO ANSWER/BUSY
To forward calls to another station when you do not answer or when you are on
FORWARDING YOUR CALLS
You may forward your calls to other stations or groups of stations. When they are
programmed, Forward All Calls will have priority over Forward Busy and Forward
No Answer conditions.
the phone:
•
•
Lift the handset and dial 604.
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.
To clear all call forward conditions set at your station, lift the handset and dial 600.
NOTE: This option will only work if Forward No Answer and Forward Busy destina-
tions are already programmed.
NOTE: It is not necessary to clear call forwarding to change your selection; simply
enter a new forward command.
To cancel Forward No Answer/Busy, lift the handset and dial 600—OR—dial
another forward code, e.g., 601.
10
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STD Telephone
Table of Contents
Home Page
FORWARD FOLLOW ME
When you want all calls to your extension forwarded to the extension where you
DIALING FEATURES
are now:
SPEED DIALING
You can dial a preprogrammed telephone number stored in the system-wide
•
•
Dial 606 plus your extension number.
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.
speed dial list of numbers 500–999 or from your personal list of numbers 00–49.
If you want a specific extension’s calls forwarded to your phone (Remote Call
Forward):
•
•
•
Lift the handset and dial 16.
Dial the desired speed dial number.
The telephone number is automatically dialed for you.
•
•
Dial 606 plus the desired extension number.
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.
NOTE: You system may be set for 950 system wide numbers. If so the system speed
dial access codes are 050~999 and the station speed dial codes are 000~049.
To cancel Forward Follow Me, lift the handset and dial 600—OR—dial another for-
ward code, e.g., 601.
PROGRAMMING PERSONAL
SPEED DIAL NUMBERS
To program personal speed dial numbers:
FORWARD DND
To forward your phone when you activate DND.
•
Dial 605 followed by the destination you want your calls to forward to. This
can be an internal (within your system) or external (outside your system
such as a cell phone) number.
•
•
Lift handset to go offhook.
Dial 15105 the next available speed dial bin number (e.g. 01), a trunk or
trunk group number and your speed dial digits.
Listen for system dial tone and replace handset.
•
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.
•
NOTE: It is much easier to have your System Administrator program these for you.
STATION CALL PICKUP
To pick up (answer) a call ringing at another station:
LAST NUMBER REDIAL
To redial the last telephone number you have dialed:
•
Lift the handset and dial 65 plus the extension number of the ringing
phone.
•
Lift the handset and dial 19.
GROUP CALL PICKUP
NOTE: Redial does not apply to intercom calls.
To pick up (answer) a call ringing in any pickup group:
SAVE NUMBER WITH REDIAL
•
Lift the handset and dial 66 plus the desired group number 01–20.
To save the number you have just dialed for later use:
NOTE: Station and group pickup features cannot be used to answer recalls to a sta-
tion, only new ringing calls and operator recalls.
•
Before hanging up, hookflash, receive confirmation tone and dial 17.
To redial this saved number at any time:
•
Lift the handset and dial 17. This step will select the same line and dial the
number for you.
This telephone number is stored in memory until you save another. When you do,
the new number will be saved and the old number will be erased.
NOTE: Save Number does not apply to intercom calls.
12
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STD Telephone
Table of Contents
Home Page
PULSE TO TONE CHANGEOVER
When making an outside call on a dial pulse line, press #. All digits dialed after the
PAGING AND MESSAGING
# will be sent as tones.
MAKING AN INTERNAL PAGE
To make an announcement through the keyset speakers:
•
•
Lift the handset.
Dial 55 plus zone number 1, 2, 3 or 4—OR—dial 55 plus 0 to page all inter-
nal zones.
•
After the brief attention tone, make the announcement.
MAKING AN EXTERNAL PAGE
To make an announcement through the external paging speakers:
•
•
Lift the handset.
Dial 55 plus zone number 5, 6, 7 or 8—OR—dial 55 plus 9 to page all ex-
ternal zones.
•
After the brief attention tone, make the announcement.
ALL PAGE
To page all keysets and the external speakers at the same time:
•
•
Lift the handset and dial 55 plus 4.
After the brief attention tone, make the announcement.
MEET ME PAGE/ANSWER
•
Make a page by dialing 54 plus any zone and instruct the paged person to
dial 56.
•
After completing the page, hookflash and remain off-hook until the paged
person dials 56 from any phone. The paged person will be automatically
connected with you.
CALL PARK AND PAGE
When you have an outside call for someone who is not at his/her desk, you can
park the call and page the requested party:
•
•
While in conversation, hookflash and dial 55. The call is automatically
parked at your station.
Dial the desired page zone and make the announcement. Be sure to
include your station number, for example, “Mr. Smith, park 201.”
14
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STD Telephone
Table of Contents
Home Page
RETRIEVING A PARKED CALL
To retrieve a call that has been parked for you:
CANCELING A MESSAGE
You can cancel a message indication that you have left at another station.
•
•
Lift the handset.
•
•
Lift the handset.
Dial 42 plus the extension number of that station.
Dial 10 plus the station number that was announced. You will be connect-
ed to the parked call.
To cancel all message indications left at your phone:
•
•
Lift the handset and dial 42 plus your extension number.
Replace the handset.
SETTING A MESSAGE INDICATION
When you are calling another station and no one answers or you receive a busy
signal, you can set a message indication at that station. The MESSAGE key on key-
sets will flash and standard telephones will receive special dial tone and light their
message lamp if their phone is equipped with one and they are on a 16DSL card.
PROGRAMMED MESSAGES
When you will be away from your phone for any length of time, you may leave a
programmed station message. Display stations calling you will see this message
and be informed of your status or follow your instructions.
•
•
Hookflash and dial 43.
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.
•
Lift the handset and dial 48 plus any message code, 01–20 listed on the
back of this user guide.
Listen for confirmation tone and hang up.
If the keyset you are calling is in the Auto Answer mode, you must use the follow-
ing procedure:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Hang up for at least two seconds.
Lift the handset.
Dial 41 plus the extension number.
Receive confirmation tone and then hang up.
To cancel this message, lift the handset and dial 48 plus 00.
NOTE: A station can have up to and including five message indications. If you
receive dial tone instead of confirmation tone, there are already five messages at
this station. Try again later.
RETURNING MESSAGES
When you see your message indicating lamp flashing if your phone is equipped
with one and your phone is connected to an 8MWSLI or
a
16 MWSLI card or you lift the handset and receive special dial tone, another sta-
tion has left a message for you. To return messages:
•
•
Lift the handset.
Dial 43. The first station that left you a message will be called automatical-
ly. If it is not answered, your message indication will remain.
Repeat the prior step until all messages have been returned in the order
received.
•
•
Dial tone will return to normal when all messages have been returned.
16
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STD Telephone
Table of Contents
To enter an account code after the outside party hangs up.
Home Page
•
After the outside party hangs up, hookflash, receive confirmation tone and
then dial 47.
Dial the account code (it may be a maximum of 12 characters including Q
CONVENIENCE FEATURES
•
DO NOT DISTURB
and #).
Use Do Not Disturb (DND) when you want to block calls to your keyset.
NOTE: If you wait for the outside party to hang up, you must complete this proce-
dure within ten seconds. You cannot repeat if you make a mistake.
•
•
Lift the handset and then dial 401.
To cancel DND, lift the handset and then dial 400.
IN/OUT OF GROUP
You are able to make calls while in the DND mode.
If your station is assigned to a hunt group, this feature will allow you to dial an
access code plus the group number, e.g., 501, plus 0 to temporarily prevent your
station from receiving any group calls. You will still be able to receive calls that are
dialed directly to your station. To reenter the group, dial an access code plus the
group number, e.g., 501, plus 1.
ANSWERING THE DOOR PHONE
When your station is programmed to receive calls from the door phone:
•
•
•
You will receive three short rings repeatedly.
Lift the handset and you will be connected to the door phone.
If an electric door lock release is installed, hookflash, receive confirmation
tone and dial 13 to release the lock.
LOCKING YOUR STATION
1
2
0
CALLING THE DOOR PHONE
(ROOM MONITORING)
You can call the door phone and listen to what is happening outside or in anoth-
er room.
LOCKED
OUTGOING
LOCKED
ALL CALLS
UNLOCKED
Make outside calls
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
Receive outside calls
Make intercom calls
Receive intercom calls
•
•
Lift the handset and then dial the extension number of the door box.
You will be connected to the door phone. You can listen or have a conver-
sation.
•
If an electric door lock release is installed, hookflash, receive confirmation
tone and dial 13 to release the lock.
To lock your phone from making outgoing calls:
ACCOUNT CODES
When it is equipped with optional equipment, your iDCS system allows calls to be
charged to different accounts. You can enter an account code in two ways. To
enter an account code by interrupting the conversation:
•
Lift handset to go offhook and dial 15100 plus your station passcode
(default 1234) then dial 1.
•
Listen for system dial tone and replace handset. Your station is now locked
from making outgoing calls.
•
•
While on an outside call, hookflash, receive confirmation tone and dial 47.
Dial the account code (it may be a maximum of 12 characters including Q
and #).
•
•
Hookflash to return to the conversation.
If you make an error, repeat the procedure with the correct code. Only the
last account code dialed will be recorded.
18
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STD Telephone
Table of Contents
Home Page
To lock your station from making both internal and outgoing calls:
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS
•
Lift handset to go offhook and dial 15100 plus your station passcode
(default 1234) then dial 2.
CODE
NAME
TELEPHONE NUMBER
•
Listen for system dial tone and replace handset. Your station is now locked
from making both internal and outgoing calls.
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
To unlock your phone:
•
Lift handset to go offhook and dial 15100 plus your station passcode
(default 1234) then dial 0.
•
Listen for system dial tone and replace handset. Your station is now
unlocked.
CHANGING YOUR STATION
PASSCODE
To change your station user passcode:
•
•
•
•
Lift handset to go offhook then dial 15101
Then dial your existing station passcode
Then dial a new passcode (must be four digits)
Listen for confirmation tone then replace the handset
20
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STD Telephone
Table of Contents
Home Page
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS
N O T E S
CODE
NAME
TELEPHONE NUMBER
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Home Page
Table of Contents
System Admin
SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATION
AND
SPECIAL FEATURES GUIDE
iDCS 500 Release 2/OfficeServ™ System
March 2004
Samsung Telecommunications America reserves the right without prior notice to revise information in
this guide for any reason. Samsung Telecommunications America also reserves the right without prior
notice to make changes in design or components of equipment as engineering and manufacturing
may warrant. Samsung Telecommunications America disclaims all liabilities for damages arising from
the erroneous interpretation or use of information presented in this guide.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Admin
Table of Contents
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR PROGRAMMING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ABOUT THIS BOOK .................................................................................... 1
SPECIAL FEATURES
System Ring Plans .......................................................................................................... 2
Manual Ring Plan Change ............................................................................................ 2
Temporary Ring Plan Override ....................................................................................2
Calling The System Operator ...................................................................................... 3
Operator Recalls .............................................................................................................. 3
Executive Barge-in .......................................................................................................... 3
Walking Class of Service ................................................................................................4
In/Out of Group ................................................................................................................4
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ........................................................................ 5
DISA Security................................................................................................................ 5–6
Forced Account Codes .................................................................................................. 6
Authorization Codes ...................................................................................................... 7
Using the Tie Line ...................................................................................................... 7–8
Customer Level Access .............................................................................................. 10
Customer Level Access Using the PROG Key ......................................................10
Change Feature Passcode ..........................................................................................11
Set Date and Time Display ................................................................................ 11–12
Reset Station Passcodes to Default ................................................................ 12–13
Program Station Names........................................................................................13–15
Program Trunk Names..................................................................................................16
Program Station Group Names ................................................................................17
Program System Speed Dial Numbers .......................................................... 18–19
Program System Speed Dial Names........................................................................20
Program Personal Speed Dial Numbers for Other Stations ....................21–22
Program Personal Speed Dial Names for Other Stations ........................23–24
Create Programmed Station Messages ........................................................ 24–25
Set Alarm/Appointment Reminder with Message.................................... 25–26
Managing Key Assignments ............................................................................ 27–28
Programming Account Codes ..................................................................................29
Station Timers ..........................................................................................................30–31
Adding Names to the Translation Table ........................................................31–32
Holiday ..............................................................................................................................33
Customer Set Relocation......................................................................................34–35
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE ALARMS ......................................36
CALLER ID SPECIAL FEATURES
Abandon Call List ............................................................................................................ 9
CID on SMDR .................................................................................................................... 9
Number to Name Translation ......................................................................................9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Admin
Table of Contents
Home Page
ABOUT THIS BOOK
This book contains instructions for special features that every telephone user may
not need to know.The owner can decide who the system administrator will be and
who will have access to these features. Station users can be trained on only the
items that apply to them. This procedure will help control costs and telephone
abuse.
Several of the features listed in this book are specific to the system operator or
attendant position.You can have more than one operator or set your system up to
be used without an operator.
The designated system administrator can access specific programs and modify
some functions to better manage the iDCS 500 Release 2 office telephone system.
Instructions are detailed and easy to follow. When assistance is needed, contact
your installation and service company.
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Admin
Table of Contents
Home Page
CALLING THE SYSTEM OPERATOR
SPECIAL FEATURES
Any station that dials 0 will ring its assigned operator. (If tenant service is used,
each tenant may have a different operator or operator group.) Calls to the system
or tenant operator are easily identified because the CALL key will have a fast flash-
ing red light. Station users will never receive a busy signal when they dial 0 or the
operator group number. The calls will continue ringing in queue until answered.
SYSTEM RING PLANS
Your system is designed to have a maximum of six different Ring Plans. Each ring
plan can be programmed to allow different lines to ring different ring plans to ring
different station and/or station groups. Examples of why different ring plans are
required can include normal day operation, night operation, using different oper-
ators during different lunch shifts and Saturday or evening hours of operation.
While the system is in a ring plan, each station will be limited to its individual Ring
Plan class of service dialing restrictions.You can place the system in one of any six
of these ring plans at any time. Ring Plans are available on an individual tenant
basis and may be set automatically or manually. Automatic Ring Plans have an
individual start time and will remain in that mode until the beginning of the next
defined ring plan. If no automatic timer is set, you must change ring plans manu-
ally.
OPERATOR RECALLS
Transferred calls that go unanswered will recall to the station that originated the
transfer. Should the station that originated the transfer not answer the recall, the
call will be sent to the operator as a transfer recall.
A call left on hold will recall the station that put it on hold. If the hold recall is unan-
swered at the station that originated the hold, the call is sent to the operator.
Both types of recalls will ring and have a slow flashing amber light on the LINE key
or CALL key.
Any of these ring plans can be switched from one plan to another at any time by
manually pressing a ring plan button. There are two ways to override the auto-
matic ring plans; one is a temporary override until the next programmed start
time, and the other is a permanent override until manually changed.
EXECUTIVE BARGE-IN
If you want to break into another conversation, you must be allowed to barge-in
and the other station or trunk must not be secure.
MANUAL RING PLAN CHANGE
•
•
•
Dial the desired extension or trunk number and listen for the busy signal.
Press the BARGE button and begin speaking after the tone.
Hang up when you are finished.
Press the RTO button plus the ring plan passcode (four digits) and the ring plan (1-
6) you wish to set. The system will override all the automatic time tables and will
remain in the set ring plan until manually changed. To manually change or cancel
the ring plan time override and return ring plan operation to the system clock:
press the RTO plus the ring plan passcode (four digits) and a“0”to cancel the ring
plan time override and return to normal operation.
The system can be set for one of the three following barge-in options:
•
•
•
No barge-in allowed
Barge-in with intrusion tone
Barge-in without intrusion tone (service observing)
TEMPORARY RING PLAN CHANGE
Press the RP button plus the ring plan passcode (four digits) and the ring plan (1-
6) you wish to set.The system will remain in that ring plan until the next automat-
ic start time for the next ring plan goes into effect.
When the second or third option is selected the barger will take priority over the
line. This means unless you (barger) hang up first, the station or line you barged
into will still be connected to you when the station you barged into hangs up.
When the third option is selected, the station that barges-in can monitor the con-
versation and no warning tone or display will be sent to the station being moni-
tored.The handset transmitter and keyset microphone are disabled.The party that
originated the barge-in may join the conversation by pressing the MUTE button
on the keyset.Your service company must program these options for you.
NOTE: This button may also be assigned an extender of one of the six ring plans.
Example: An RP button is given an extender of 3 (RP3) and the operation of this
button is a push on/push off type of operation with the system always returning
to ring plan 1 when the key is turned off.When the system is operating in ring plan
3, the RP3 button will light steady red, and when off the light will also turn off.
2
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Admin
Table of Contents
Home Page
If the station does not have an IN/OUT key:
WARNING
Barge-in without tone may violate state or federal laws concerning the
right to privacy. Samsung Telecommunications America is in no way
responsible for the possible misuse of this feature.
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset and dial the feature access code _________________.
Dial the group number.
Dial 0 to be out of the group or dial 1 to be in the group.
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.
WALKING CLASS OF SERVICE
If the station has an IN/OUT key:
You can change a restricted station’s class of service to the same class as your sta-
tion, allowing you to make calls or use features that would otherwise be restricted
from that station.
•
•
Press the IN/OUT key. It will light red when the station is in the group.
Press the IN/OUT key again. The light is off when the station is out of the
group.
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset or press the SPK or the MONITOR key.
Dial 59 and then your extension number.
Dial your station passcode and receive internal dial tone.
Dial an access code and then the telephone number—OR—use the desired
feature as usual.
NOTE: A station can be in more than one group.
DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS (DISA)
From outside of the office, selected individuals can call into the iDCS system on
special DISA line(s). A security code must be entered to gain access. Once these
individuals are in the system, they can make outside calls using the office lines or
call stations within the system. Individuals who will use DISA must have their sta-
tions assigned for DISA access and must change their station passcodes. The
default passcode 1234 cannot be used.
•
Hang up. The station will be returned to its restricted status.
NOTE:The default station passcode 1234 cannot be used.
IN/OUT OF GROUP
Any station assigned to a station group can remove itself from that group and
then reenter the group at a later time.When out of the group, a station can receive
calls to its extension number but not to the group.
•
•
Call in on the DISA line from any phone with tone dialing.
You will hear a dial tone. Dial your security code (your extension number
plus your station passcode).
•
•
If you are allowed access, you will receive a dial tone.
Dial any line access code, receive outside dial tone and then dial a tele-
phone number OR dial any extension number to call a station in the sys-
tem.
To make another call, press Q, receive dial tone and dial another number.
Press # and hang up when finished.
The number of groups available to choose from may vary depending on your iDCS
500 Release 2 system type:
iDCS 500 RLS 2 M 40 Groups
•
•
(500 through 539) or (5000 through 5039 depending if your
system is setup for 4 digits numbering plan)
iDCS 500 RLS 2 L
80 Groups
NOTE: Outgoing DISA calls are controlled by the dialing class of the station identi-
fied by the security code.The DISA line must have disconnect supervision from the
central office. Insist that this service is verified by your installation/service compa-
ny.
(500 through 579) or (5000 though 5079 depending if your
system is setup for 4 digits numbering plan)
To create a backup or relief operator position, assign the main operator and one or
more backup individuals to the operator group. All but the main operator should
be out of the group.When it is necessary to use a backup operator, put the desired
backup station in the group and remove the main operator. When incoming call
traffic is heavy, you can have another station put itself in the operator group along
with the main operator to handle the extra call load.
DISA SECURITY
A common practice among hackers is to repeatedly dial a known DISA access
number (usually with a computer) and try a different passcode each time. The
hacker hopes to eventually chance upon the correct passcode and thus gain
4
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Admin
Table of Contents
Home Page
access to your system. The iDCS security feature counts the number of sequential
incorrect passcode attempts. If a certain number is reached, DISA is disabled and
the system sends an alarm to designated display stations.The number of passcode
attempts and the disable duration are both programmable. In addition, the iDCS
system will print an SMDR record (a customer-provided printer is required) each
time an incorrect passcode is entered.
outside call in the usual manner. If an incorrect code is entered, the station
returns error tone.
This code will always print on SMDR reports. For information on entering and
changing forced account codes, see the system administrator programming sec-
tion of this book.
AUTHORIZATION CODES
The DISA alarm will ring for a programmable time before canceling the ringing;
however, the DISA alarm display will remain until the alarm is cleared. To clear the
DISA alarm, follow the following procedure:
Authorization codes are used to validate a station user and give permission to
make a call. These four digit authorization codes can be either forced or optional,
but if used, are always verified from a system list of 500 entries. Each authorization
code has an associated class of service.When the code is entered, the class of serv-
ice is changed to that of the authorization code.
•
•
•
Lift the handset and dial 58.
Enter the DISA alarm passcode (see your service company).
Replace the handset.
USING AUTHORIZATION CODES
WARNING
As it is impossible to prevent unauthorized access to your telephone sys-
tem by hackers, we suggest that you do not turn the DISA feature on unless
you intend to use it. If you do use this feature, it is good practice to fre-
quently change passcodes and periodically review your telephone records
for unauthorized use.
After going off-hook, the station user must dial Q followed by a four digit authori-
zation code. If you enter a correct code, you will hear confirmation tone and then
receive a dial tone and you can make an outside call in the usual manner.The sta-
tion then follows the dialing class for that authorization code. If you enter an incor-
rect code, the station returns error tone. This code may or may not print on SMDR
reports depending on SMDR programming.
FORCED ACCOUNT CODES
VERIFIED
USING THE TIE LINE
OUTGOING
Your office can be connected to another system with a tie line. Use this line to
make calls to stations in the other system. If programming allows, you can access
lines in the other system to make outside calls. Tie line calls can be put on hold,
transferred and conferenced in the same manner as are other outside calls.
When set for this option the user must enter an account code for all outgoing calls.
The account code entered will be verified from a system list of 999 entries. Forced
verified codes can contain the digits 0~9.
NOT VERIFIED
When set for this option the user must enter an account code for all outgoing calls,
but the account code is not verified against the system list. Non verified account
codes can contain the digits 0~9, * and #.
•
•
•
Lift the handset or press the SPK or MONITOR key.
Dial the tie line access code or press the tie line key.
When you receive dial tone from the other system, you can dial extension
numbers or access outside lines. You must know the extension numbers
and the line access codes for the other system.
Finish the call by replacing the handset or pressing the ANS/RLS or the
MONITOR key if you are using a 7 button phone.
USING FORCED ACCOUNT CODES
•
•
•
•
Lift the handset and press the ACCT CODE key or dial 47.
Enter the account code.
Press the account code button again, press TRSF or hookflash (on an SLT).
If a correct code is entered, you will hear a dial tone and you can make an
NOTE: Outgoing calls are controlled by the station’s dialing class.
6
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Admin
Table of Contents
Home Page
INCOMING
CALLER ID
SPECIAL FEATURES
Station users in the other system can access the tie line and make intercom calls
to stations in your system.Answer tie line calls ringing at your station as you would
any other outside call.They can be put on hold, transferred and conferenced in the
same manner as are other outside calls.
NOTE: The Caller ID features below require optional software and/or hard-
ware. Please ask your installation and service company for details.
IN AND OUT ON TIE LINE
Users accessing the tie line from the other system can get a line in your system and
make outgoing calls. These calls can be controlled by assigning a dialing class to
the tie line. For further information, see your service company.
ABANDON CALL LIST
The system has a system-wide abandoned calls list that stores CID information for
the last 100 calls that rang but were not answered and were accompanied with
valid CID information. Calls with CID information consisting of OUT OF AREA, PAY-
PHONE or PRIVATE will not be stored in the list. The abandoned calls list is
accessed using the system administrator’s passcode.When reviewing this list, you
are provided options to CLEAR the entry or DIAL the number. You can use the
NND key to toggle between the CID name, CID number and the date and time the
call came in. The system must be using LCR to dial numbers from the abandoned
calls list.
To view the list of abandoned incoming calls for which CID information has been
received:
•
•
Dial 64 and dial the system administrator passcode.
Scroll through the entries using the VOL keys.
CID ON SMDR
The Station Message Detail Records (SMDR) report can be set to include the CID
name and number for incoming calls. This format expands the printout to 113
characters.You must use a wide carriage printer or an 80 column printer set to the
condensed print option.
NUMBER TO NAME TRANSLATION
The system provides a translation table of 1000 entries in the iDCS 500 M, and
2000 entries in the iDCS 500 L for use in areas that do not provide name and
number (sometimes called “deluxe”) Caller ID or when ANI is received. When the
CID or ANI number is received, the table is searched. When a match is found, the
system will display the corresponding name from the table.This will allow users in
areas that do not support “deluxe” Caller ID or have only ANI service to provide
names for callers.
8
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Admin
Table of Contents
Home Page
CALLER ID SPECIAL FEATURES
INVESTIGATE
Investigate allows selected stations with a special class of service to investi-
gate any call in progress. If CID information is available for an incoming call,
you will know to whom this station user is speaking. For outgoing calls, you
can see the number that was dialed. After investigating, you may barge-in
on the conversation, disconnect the call or hang up your phone to end the
investigation.
•
•
•
•
At your keyset, press the INVESTIGATE key.
Enter your station passcode. (Default passcodes cannot be used.)
Enter the station number to be investigated.
You can now press BARGE to barge-in on the conversation.
OR
You can press NND to view more information about the call.
OR
You can press DROP to disconnect the call.
NOTES:
1. If the call is an outgoing call, the NND key will not appear.
2. This feature requires optional software and/or hardware.Please ask your
installation and service company for details.
WARNING
This feature may violate state or federal laws concerning the right
to privacy. Samsung Telecommunications America is in no way re-
sponsible for the possible misuse of this feature.
NOTE: This information is NOT repeated in this user guide.
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR
PROGRAMMING
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Admin
Table of Contents
Home Page
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR
PROGRAMMING
CUSTOMER LEVEL ACCESS
Before any customer programs can be accessed, you must first open system pro-
gramming using the passcode you have been assigned. You must use a display
keyset. Should it become necessary to change this passcode, see your service
company.
•
•
While on-hook, press TRSF and then dial 200.
Your display shows [ENABLE CUS. PROG. PASSCODE].
Dial the four digit passcode.
The display shows [ENABLE CUS. PROG. - DISABLE].
Dial 1 to enable. The display shows [ENABLE CUS. PROG - ENABLE].
Press TRSF. The keyset returns to its idle condition.
Press TRSF and then dial the three digit program code you want to access.
Follow the instructions for that program.
•
•
•
NOTE:You must begin programming within 30 seconds. Once you are in program-
ming, any delay of more than 30 seconds between key strokes will cause the sys-
tem to automatically close programming.
CUSTOMER LEVEL ACCESS USING THE
PROG KEY
A designated keyset may be programmed with a “PROG” key which allows access
to the following areas of system programming.When pressed you must enter your
station passcode followed by the MMC number. The default station passcode
“1234” can not be used. The only MMCs that may entered from pressing the
“PROG” key are as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
MMC 100 Station Lock for All Stations
MMC 102 Station Forward for All Stations
MMC 104 Station Name
MMC 115 Program Message for all Stations
MMC 116 Alarm and Message
MMC 505 System Day and Time
MMC 705 System Speed Dial
MMC 706 System Speed Dial Name
MMC 722 Station Key Programming
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Admin
Table of Contents
Home Page
Failure to enter the time using the 24 hour clock will cause the date to change at
12:00 P.M. Open customer programming and follow the instructions below.
CHANGING FEATURE PASSCODE
You can change individual feature passcodes. This program is used to change the
passcodes for several features. These features are the following: RING PLAN SER-
VICE, DISA ALARM, ALARM CLEAR, and AA RECORD. Note: Each passcode is four
digits long. Each digit can be 0 to 9.
ACTION
DISPLAY
1. Press TRSF and then dial 505
OLD:6010184:0047
NEW:WMMDDYY:HHMM
Display shows
PROGRAM KEYS
2. Enter the new time and date using
the above format
OLD:6010184:0047
NEW:3020994:1445
UP & DOWN - Select the extension number.
HOLD - Press to reset the passcode to default settings.
3. Verify the time and date and reenter
them if necessary
OLD:3020994:1445
NEW:WMMDDYY:HHMM
Open customer programming and follow the instructions below.
4. Press TRSF to store and exit
programming OR press SPK to store
and advance to the next program
ACTION
DISPLAY
1. Press TRSF and then dial 202
CHANGE PASSCODE
RING PLAN: 0000
Display shows
If you have entered invalid data, you will receive an [ INVALID ENTRY ] message for
three seconds. Reenter the correct date and time. If the information you entered is
incorrect, repeat the procedure.
2. Use the UP and DOWN keys to scroll
through the different options and press
the right soft keys.
CHANGE PASSCODE
DISA ALARM:5678
RESET STATION PASSCODES
TO DEFAULT
3. Press HOLD to reset the passcode
CHANGE PASSCODE
RING PLAN: 0000
Individual keyset users can set or change their own individual passcodes. These
passcodes are used to lock and unlock keysets, override toll restriction and access
the DISA feature. At times, it may be necessary for the system administrator to
reset a station’s passcode to default“1234.”This program cannot be used to display
passcodes, only to reset them.
4. Press TRSF to store and exit programming
OR press SPK to store and advance to the
next program
SET DATE AND TIME DISPLAY
Should it ever become necessary to correct the date and time displayed on all of
the keysets, do so as soon as you notice that they are incorrect. Automatic
Operating Mode will not work correctly and SMDR records will be of no value
when the date and time are not correct.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN - Select the extension number.
HOLD - Press to reset the passcode.
Open customer programming and follow the instructions below.
The display format is the following:
ACTION
DISPLAY
W (Day of the week): Enter 0 for Sunday and 6 for Saturday.
MM (Month): Enter 01 for January and 12 for December.
DD (Day of the month): Enter a number in the range of 01–31.
YY (Year): Enter the last two digits of the year.
1. Press TRSF and then dial 101
[201] PASSCODE
PASSCODE:4444
Display shows
HH (Hours): Use the 24 hour clock and enter a number in the range of 00–24.
MM (Minutes): Enter a number in the range of 00–59.
11
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Admin
Table of Contents
Home Page
4. Press TRSF to store and exit
2. Dial the station number OR use the
UP and DOWN keys to scroll through
the keyset numbers and press the
right soft key to move the cursor right
[205] PASSCODE
PASSCODE:4444
programming OR press SPK to store
and advance to the next program
NOTE: Directory information is always 11 characters.
3. Press HOLD to reset the passcode
[205] PASSCODE
PASSCODE : 1234
DEFAULT DATA: NONE
Names are written using the keypad. Each press of a key will select a character.
Pressing the dial pad key moves the cursor to the next position. For example, if the
directory name is “SAM SMITH,” press the number “7” three times to get the letter
“S.” Press the number “2” once to get the letter “A.” Continue selecting characters
from the table below to complete your message. Press the “A” key to change the
letter from upper case to lower case.
4. Press the right soft key to return to
step 2 OR press TRSF to store and exit
programming OR press SPK to
store and advance to the next program
DEFAULT DATA: ALL STATION PASSCODES = 1234
NOTE:When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as does the
previous character, press the UP key to move the cursor to the right.
PROGRAM STATION NAMES
This program is used to assign a character name or identification for each exten-
sion.You may assign a name of 11 characters long.
DCS KEYSETS
COUNT
DIAL 0
DIAL 1
DIAL 2
DIAL 3
DIAL 4
DIAL 5
DIAL 6
DIAL 7
DIAL 8
DIAL 9
DIAL 4
1
2
Z
?
3
.
4
)
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
4
PROGRAM KEYS
Q
UP & DOWN - Used to scroll and move cursor.
KEYPAD - Used to enter characters.
HOLD - Press to clear entry.
space
,
!
A
D
G
J
B
E
C
F
I
@
#
$
%
^
&
Q
(
Open customer programming and follow the instructions below.
H
K
N
R
U
X
=
L
O
S
V
Y
[
ACTION
DISPLAY
M
P
T
1. Press TRSF and then dial 104
[201] STN NAME
Display shows
2. Dial station number (e.g., 205)
OR press UP or DOWN to select the
station and press the right soft key to
move the cursor
[205] STN NAME
W
:
]
The # key can be used for the following special characters: #, space, &, !, :, ?, ., %, $, -
, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ;, \,“ and ~.
3. Enter the station name using the
procedure described on the next page
and press the right soft key to return to
step 2
[205] STN NAME
SAM SMITH
13
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Admin
Table of Contents
Home Page
iDCS KEYSETS
COUNT
DIAL 0
DIAL 1
DIAL 2
DIAL 3
DIAL 4
DIAL 5
DIAL 6
DIAL 7
DIAL 8
DIAL 9
DIAL 4
PROGRAM TRUNK NAMES
This program is used to assign a character name or identification for each C.O. line.
1
2
3
.
4
)
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
4
<
>
?
You may assign a name of 11 characters long.
space
,
!
PROGRAM KEYS
A
D
G
J
B
E
C
F
I
@
#
$
%
^
&
Q
Z
]
UP & DOWN - Used to scroll and move cursor.
KEYPAD - Used to enter characters.
HOLD - Press to clear entry.
H
K
N
Q
U
X
=
L
O
R
V
Y
[
Open customer programming and follow the instructions below.
M
P
T
ACTION
DISPLAY
1. Press TRSF and then dial 404
[701] TRUNK NAME
W
:
Display shows
2. Dial trunk (e.g., 704) OR press UP or
DOWN to select trunk and press the right
soft key to move the cursor
[704] TRUNK NAME
1. When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previ-
ous character, press UP to move the cursor one space to the right.
2. Other symbols are available for DIAL #.
3. Enter the trunk name using the procedure
in Program Station Names and press the
right soft key to return to step 2
[704] TRUNK NAME
SAMSUNG
4. Press TRSF to store and exit programming
OR press SPK to store and advance to
the next program
15
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Admin
Table of Contents
Home Page
PROGRAM STATION GROUP NAMES
This program is used to assign a character name or identification for each station
group.You may assign a name 11 characters long.
PROGRAM SYSTEM SPEED DIAL NUMBERS
The system list starts with 200 numbers and can be increased in blocks of ten.The
system may have either 500 or 950 maximum depending on the setting in MMC
861. See your service company to increase or decrease the system list.
PROGRAM KEYS
The speed dial codes are 500–999 or 050–999. Each speed dial number consists of
a line access code and the telephone number to be dialed.The access code can be
any line group,individual line,station group or individual extension.The speed dial
number can be up to 24 characters long including 4, #, FLASH and PAUSE.
UP & DOWN - Used to scroll and move cursor.
KEYPAD - Used to enter characters.
HOLD - Press to clear entry.
Open customer programming and follow the instructions below.
NOTE: If Least Cost Routing (LCR) is being used, the LCR access code must be
entered.
ACTION
DISPLAY
When you are entering a speed dial number, there are some special keys that you
will need to use.These are the bottom row of programmable keys on the LCD 12B
and LCD 24B keysets and are known as keys A, B, C, D, E and F.
1. Press TRSF and then dial 602
[501] SGR NAME
Display shows the first group
2. Dial the group number (e.g., 505) OR
press the UP or DOWN key to make a
selection and press the left or right
soft key to move the cursor
[505] SGR NAME
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN - Select the speed dial bin.
KEYPAD - Used to enter number.
HOLD - Press to clear entry.
SPK/RLS - Save data and advance to next program.
A - Does not have a function.
3. Enter the name using the method
[505] SGR NAME
SAMSUNG
in Program Station Names
B - Inserts a FLASH.
C - Inserts a PAUSE.
D - Changes the dialing type from pulse to tone.
E - Hides and displays digits.
F - Changes display to speed dial name entry.
4. Press the left or right soft key to return to
step 2 OR press TRSF to store and exit
programming OR press SPK to store and
advance to the next program
DCS KEYSETS
24 BUTTON KEYSET
PROGRAMMABLE KEYS LAYOUT
12 BUTTON KEYSET
PROGRAMMABLE KEYS LAYOUT
A
B
C
D
E
F
A
B
C
D
E
F
17
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Admin
Table of Contents
Home Page
iDCS KEYSETS
PROGRAM SYSTEM SPEED DIAL NAMES
This program is used to assign a character name or identification for each system
speed dial location.This name enables you to locate the speed dial number when
you are using the directory dial feature.You may assign a name 11 characters long.
8D KEYSET PROGRAMMABLE
KEYS LAYOUT
28D KEYSET, 18D KEYSET
PROGRAMMABLE KEYS LAYOUT
VOLUME
A
C
E
B
D
F
PROGRAM KEYS
Transfer
Speaker
C
E
F
A
B
UP & DOWN - Used to scroll through speed dial bins.
KEYPAD - Used to enter selections.
D
Transfer Speaker
SOFT KEYS - Move cursor left and right.
SPK - Used to store data and advance to next program.
HOLD - Used to clear previous entry.
Open customer programming and follow the instructions below.
ACTION
DISPLAY
ACTION
DISPLAY
1. Press TRSF and then 706
SYS SPEED NAME
500:
1. Press TRSF and then dial 705
SYS SPEED DIAL
500:
Display shows the first name
Display shows the first number
2. Dial the system speed number (e.g., 505)
OR press UP or DOWN to select the entry
number and press the right soft key to
move the cursor
SYS SPEED NAME
505:
2. Dial the speed bin desired (e.g., 505) OR
press UP or DOWN to choose and
SYS SPEED DIAL
505:
press the right soft key to move the cursor
3. Enter the access code (e.g., 9—the system
will automatically insert a dash) followed by
the phone number (up to 24 digits long)
and press the right soft key to return to
step 2
SYS SPEED DIAL
505:9–121223456789
3. Enter the name as shown in Program
Station Names and press the right soft
key to return to step 2 OR press the
F key to toggle to the speed dial number
to return to Program System Speed Dial
Numbers, step 4
SYS SPEED NAME
505:SAMSUNG
4. Press the F key to toggle to Program
System Speed Dial Names, step 3 to
enter the name
SYS SPEED NAME
505:
4. Press the right soft key to return to step 2
above OR press TRSF to store and exit
programming OR press SPK to store and
advance to the next program
5. Press TRSF to store and exit
programming OR press SPK to store
and advance to the next program
DEFAULT DATA: NO SPEED NUMBERS ASSIGNED
19
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Admin
Table of Contents
Home Page
iDCS KEYSETS
PROGRAM PERSONAL SPEED DIAL
NUMBERS FOR OTHER STATIONS
8D KEYSET PROGRAMMABLE
KEYS LAYOUT
28D KEYSET, 18D KEYSET
PROGRAMMABLE KEYS LAYOUT
Individual station users can program their own numbers, but in cases where this is
not practical, or for single line telephone users, this program allows a system
administrator to view or change any station’s speed dial numbers. The station
speed dial codes are 00–49 or 000–049. Each station begins with ten numbers
(00–09) and can be assigned more in blocks of ten (up to a maximum of fifty num-
bers).
VOLUME
A
C
E
B
D
F
Transfer
Speaker
C
E
F
A
B
D
Transfer Speaker
Each speed dial number consists of a line access code and the telephone number
to be dialed. The access code can be any line group, individual line, station group
or individual extension. The speed dial number can be up to 24 characters long
including 4, #, FLASH and PAUSE.
Open customer programming and follow the instructions below.
ACTION
DISPLAY
NOTE: If Least Cost Routing (LCR) is used, the LCR access code must be entered.
1. Press TRSF and then dial 105
[201] SPEED DIAL
00 :
Display shows
When you are entering a speed dial number, there are some special keys that you
will need to use.These are the bottom row of programmable keys on the LCD 12B
and LCD 24B keysets and are known as keys A, B, C, D, E and F.
2. Dial the station number (e.g., 205) OR
press UP or DOWN to select the station
and press the right soft key to move the
cursor OR press the left soft key to go
to step 4
[205] SPEED DIAL
00 :
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN - Scrolls through extension numbers and speed dial bins.
KEYPAD - Used to enter number.
HOLD - Press to clear entry.
A - Does not have a function.
B - Inserts a FLASH.
3. If the selected station has no speed dial
bins, this display will be shown and a new
station may be selected
[205] SPEED DIAL
SPDBLK NOT EXIST
C - Inserts a PAUSE.
4. Dial the location number (e.g., 05) OR
press UP or DOWN to select the location
and press the right soft key to move the
cursor OR press the left soft key to return
to step 2
[205] SPEED DIAL
05: _
D - Changes the dialing type from pulse to tone.
E - Hides and displays digits.
F - Changes display to speed dial name entry.
DCS KEYSETS
24 BUTTON KEYSET
PROGRAMMABLE KEYS LAYOUT
5. Enter the trunk access code (e.g., 9)
followed by the number to be dialed
(e.g., 4264100) OR press the right
[205] SPEED DIAL
05 : 9-4264100_
12 BUTTON KEYSET
PROGRAMMABLE KEYS LAYOUT
soft key to return to step 2 OR press the
left soft key to return to step 3 OR press
HOLD to clear an entry (if an error is made,
use the DOWN key to step back)
A
B
C
D
E
F
A
B
C
D
E
F
21
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Admin
Table of Contents
Home Page
6. Press the F key to access Program Station
Speed Dial Names OR press TRSF to save
and exit programming OR press SPK to save
and advance to the next program
4. Dial the speed dial location (e.g., 05) OR
use UP or DOWN to scroll through the
location numbers and use the right soft
key to move the cursor OR press the left
soft key to return to step 2 above
[205] SPEED NAME
01:_
DEFAULT DATA: NO SPEED DIAL NUMBERS PROGRAMMED
5. Enter the name using the procedure in
Program Station Names and press the
right soft key to return to step 2 OR
press the left soft key to return to step 3
[205] SPEED NAME
01:SAM SMITH
PROGRAM PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NAMES
FOR OTHER STATIONS
Each individual station user can program his/her own names but in cases where it
is impractical or for single line telephone users, this program allows a system
administrator to view or change any station’s speed dial names.The station speed
dial codes are 00–49. Each station begins with ten numbers (00–09) and can be
assigned more in blocks of ten up to a maximum of fifty numbers.
6. Press the F key to access Program
Personal Speed Dial Numbers for
Other Stations OR press TRSF to
store and exit programming OR press
SPK to store and advance to the
next program
PROGRAM KEYS
CREATE PROGRAMMED STATION
MESSAGES
The programmed station message feature lets you set a message at your phone to
notify users with Display Phones that you may be out of town. This way, when
Display Phone users call their display will show“OUT OF TOWN”and they will know
why you do not answer.
UP & DOWN - Used to scroll through extension numbers and speed dial bins.
KEYPAD - Used to enter selections.
SOFT KEYS - Move cursor left and right.
SPK - Used to store data and advance to next program.
HOLD - Used to clear previous entry.
ANS/RLS - Used to select ALL.
ACTION
DISPLAY
The iDCS 500 Release 2 system allows 15 messages to be programmed in the sys-
tem list in MMC 715 and each station can program 5 messages individually.
1. Press TRSF and then dial 106
[201] SPEED NAME
00:
Display shows
PROGRAM KEYS
2. Dial the station number (e.g., 205) OR
press UP or DOWN to select the station
and press the right soft key to move the
cursor
[205] SPEED NAME
00:
UP & DOWN - Select the message number.
KEYPAD - Used to enter characters.
HOLD - Press to clear entry.
Open customer programming and follow the instructions below.
3. If the selected station has no speed dial
bins, this display will be shown and a new
station may be selected
[205] SPEED DIAL
SPDBLK NOT EXIST
ACTION
DISPLAY
1. Press TRSF and then dial 715
PGM.MESSAGE (01)
GIVE ME THE CALL
Display shows the first message
23
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Admin
[201]ALM REM(1)
Table of Contents
Home Page
2. Dial in the message number (e.g., 11)
OR press UP or DOWN to scroll through
the messages and press the right soft
key to move the cursor
PGM.MESSAGE (16)
EMPTY MESSAGE
3. Dial 1–3 to select the alarm (e.g., 2) OR
press UP or DOWN to select the alarm
and press the right soft key to move the
cursor OR press the left soft key to
return to step 2
HHMM: NOTSET
3. Enter in the message using the
procedure in Program Station Names
and press the right soft key to return
to step 2 above
PGM.MESSAGE (16)
IN THE SHOWROOM
4. Enter the alarm time in 24 hour clock
format (e.g., 1300) and the display will
automatically advance to step 5
[205]ALM REM (2)
HHMM:1300NOTSET
4. Press TRSF to store and exit programming
OR press SPK to store and advance to
the next program
5. Enter the alarm type from the list above
OR press UP or DOWN to select the
alarm type and press the right soft key
to move the cursor
[205]ALM REM (2)
HHMM:1300DAILY
SET ALARM/APPOINTMENT
REMINDER WITH MESSAGE
6. Enter the messages using the procedure
in Program Station Names and press the
right soft key to return to step 2
[205]ALM REM (2)
TAKE MEDICATION
Keyset users can set their own alarms but standard telephone users cannot. The
system administrator can set alarm/appointment reminders for other stations in
the system.
7. Press TRSF to store and exit pro-
gramming OR press SPK to store
and advance to the next program
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN - Scroll through extensions.
HOLD - Press to clear data.
KEYPAD - Used to enter data.
Open customer programming and follow the instructions below.
ACTION
DISPLAY
1. Press TRSF and then dial 116
[201]ALM REM(1)
HHMM: NOTSET
Display shows
2. Dial the station number (e.g., 205) OR
press UP or DOWN to select the station
and press the right soft key to move the
cursor OR press ANS/RLS to select all
stations
[205]ALM REM(1)
HHMM: NOTSET
OR
[ALL]ALM REM(1)
HHMM: NOTSET
25
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Admin
Table of Contents
Home Page
PROGRAM KEYS
MANAGING KEY ASSIGNMENTS
You can view station key assignments and add extenders to some of the program-
UP & DOWN - Select the extension number.
KEYPAD - Used to enter extender codes.
HOLD - Used to clear the displayed data.
mable keys for easy one touch operation of frequently used features.
An extender is a number that makes an otherwise general key very specific. Add-
ing the digit “4” to a PAGE key defines this key for paging zone four. Adding “225”
to a directed pickup key will define this key as pickup for extension 225 only. The
key must already be assigned by the installing technician.
Open customer programming and follow the instructions below.
ACTION
DISPLAY
1. Press TRSF and then dial 107
[201] KEY EXTEND
01:CALL1
Display shows the first station
Use this program to assign extenders to the following keys:
2. Dial the station number (e.g., 205) OR use
UP or DOWN to scroll through the station
numbers and press the right soft key to
move the cursor
[205] KEY EXTEND
01:CALL1
KEY
DESCRIPTION
EXTENDER
BOSS..............Boss/Secretary ..............................(1–4)
DP ..................Direct Pickup ................................(Extension number or
station group number)
DS....................Direct Station ................................(Any extension number)
FWRD ............Call Forwarding ............................(0–7)
GCONF ..........Group Conference ......................(1–5)
GPIK ..............Group Pick-Up ..............................(01–20)
IG ....................In/Out of Group ..........................(Any group number you are part of)
MMPG ..........Meet Me Page ..............................(0–9, 4)
PAGE ..............Page ................................................(0–9, 4)
PARK ..............Park (orbits) ....................................(0–9)
RP....................Ring Plan ........................................(1–6), HOLD for none
SPD ................Speed Dialing ................................(00–49, 500–999)
PMSG ............Programmed Messages ............(01–30)
DIR..................Directory..........................................PERS (1), SYS (2) or STN (3)
VT....................Voice Mail Transfer ......................Voice Mail Group
501–529 for the iDCS 500 M
3. Enter the key number (e.g., 18) OR use
UP and DOWN to scroll through the keys
and use the right soft key to move the
cursor OR press the key to be programmed
[205] KEY EXTEND
18:DS
4. Dial the extender according to the list
above and the system will display your
selection
If there are no more entries, press
the left soft key to return to step 2
5. Press TRSF to store and exit programming
OR press SPK to store and advance to the
next program
[205] KEY EXTEND
18:DS207
501–549 for the iDCS 500 L
SG....................Station Group ................................501–539 for the iDCS 500 M
501–579 for the iDCS 500 L
28
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Admin
Table of Contents
Home Page
PROGRAMMING ACCOUNT CODES
This program is used to add or change account code entries.
STATION TIMERS
Each station can have five timers customized for them to accommodate station
users with individual work habits. These timers are as follows:
PROGRAM KEYS
NO ANS FWD No Answer Forward
KEYPAD - Used to enter the account code (allowable digits 0–9).
UP & DOWN - Used to select entry number.
FLASH & TRSF - Used to view and change only the used entries.
SPK/RLS - Used to clear data.
This is the amount of time a call will ring at a station before it forwards to the
Forward No Answer destination. The default is 15 seconds and the range is 000 to
250 seconds. Make sure that this timer is not set to a greater value than the trans-
fer recall timer or transferred calls will not forward.
Open customer programming and follow the instructions below.
DTMF DUR.
DTMF Duration
This is the duration of DTMF tones sent to an analog voice mail port. The default
duration is 100 milliseconds and the range is 0100 to 9900 milliseconds.
ACTION
DISPLAY
1. Press TRSF and then dial 708
ACCOUNT CODE
(001)
Display shows
F-DGT DELY
First Digit Delay
This is the time the system will wait before sending DTMF digits to a voice mail
port. The default time is 600 milliseconds and the range is from 100 to 9900 mil-
liseconds.
2. Dial the account code entry (e.g., 005)
OR press UP or DOWN to select the
entry number and press the right soft
key to move the cursor
ACCOUNT CODE
(005)
OFFHK SEL.
Off Hook Select
This timer controls the delay between going off hook (lifting the handset) and the
off hook select destination being called.The default duration is 10 seconds and the
range is from 000 to 250 seconds.
3. Enter the account code via the dial pad,
e.g., 1234 (maximum of 12 digits) and
press the right soft key to move the
cursor back to step 2
ACCOUNT CODE
(005)123456789012
EFWD DELAY External Forward Delay
4. Press TRSF to store and exit pro-
gramming OR press SPK to store and
advance to the next program
This is the time that a station will ring before a call forwards to the external call
forward destination. The default duration is 10 seconds and the range is 1 second
to 250 seconds.
Open customer programming and follow the instructions below.
PROGRAM KEYS
KEYPAD - Used to set timer values.
UP & DOWN - Used to select extension number.
SPK/RLS - Save data and advance to next program.
ACTION
DISPLAY
1. Press TRSF and then dial 502
[201] NO ANS FWD
010 SEC
Display shows
29
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Admin
Table of Contents
Home Page
ACTION
DISPLAY
2. Dial the station number (e.g., 205) OR
press UP or DOWN key to select the
station and press the right soft key OR
press ANS/RLS to select all stations
and press the right soft key
[205] NO ANS FWD
010 SEC
OR
[ALL] NO ANS FWD
010 SEC
1. Press TRSF and then dial 728
TRANSLATION:(001)
DIGIT:
Display shows first entry
2. Dial entry number (e.g., 005 or 0005)
OR use UP and DOWN to scroll
through entries and press right
soft key to select entry
TRANSLATION:(005)
DIGIT:_
3. Press UP or DOWN key to select the
[205] DTMF DUR.
0100 MS→
station timer and press the right soft key
4. Enter the new value via the dial pad,
e.g., 0300 and the system will return
to step 2
[205] DTMF DUR.
0100 MS→0300
3. Enter telephone number and press
right soft key to advance to name entry
OR enter telephone number and press
left soft key to return to step 2 above
TRANSLATION:(005)
DIGIT:3054264100
5. Press TRSF to store and exit
programming OR press SPK to store
and advance to the next program
4. Enter the name using the method
in Program Station Names
TRANSLATION:(005)
SAMSUNG TELECOM
and press right or left soft key to
return to step 2 above
OR press SPK to save and advance
to next MMC OR press TRSF to
save and exit programming
ADDING NAMES TO THE
TRANSLATION TABLE
This program allows the system administrator or technician to associate a CID or
ANI number received from the Central Office with a name programmed in this
translation table. If there is no match between a received number and a name in
this table, [no CID name] or [no ANI name] will be displayed.
DEFAULT DATA: NONE
The translation table consists of 1000 entries in the iDCS 500 Release 2 M system
or 2000 entries in the iDCS 500 Release 2 L system with each entry comprised of
a ten digit telephone number and a 16 digit name. See Program Station Names.
Open customer programming and follow the instructions below.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN - Used to scroll through options.
KEYPAD - Used to enter selections.
SOFT KEYS - Move cursor left and right.
SPK - Used to store data and advance to next MMC.
HOLD - Used to clear previous entry.
31
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Admin
Table of Contents
Home Page
CUSTOMER SET RELOCATION
HOLIDAY
This program is used to swap information associated with two stations. All assign-
ments such as trunk ring, station group, station COS, station speed dial etc. will fol-
low this program. 12 button keysets and 24 button keysets can be exchanged.
Basic 7 button keysets can be exchanged with Basic 7 button key sets. Single line
stations numbers can be exchanged.If incompatible set types are selected the sys-
tem will provide an ERROR: NO MATCH message. 12 button and 24 button key
assignments should be taken in consideration when relocating these type of sets.
The table below shows which phones can be switched with each other.
This program provides the ability to set as many as 20 different holidays. Each hol-
iday will override the System Operating Mode for that particular date with a pro-
grammed ring plan.
PROGRAM KEYS
UP & DOWN - Used to scroll through options.
KEYPAD - Used to enter selections.
SOFT KEYS - Move cursor left and right.
HOLD - Used to clear an entry.
NOTE: In order to use this program it must first be activated by a technician. Please
see your installing company to have this done if you wish to use this program.
ACTION
DISPLAY
PROGRAM KEYS
1. Press TRSF and then dial 512
RING PLAN
FOLLOW1
Display shows
UP & DOWN - Used to scroll through options.
KEYPAD - Used to enter selections.
SOFT KEYS - Move cursor left and right.
SPK - Used to store data and advance to next program.
HOLD - Used to clear previous entry.
2. Press the right soft key to move the
cursor to bottom half of display
RING PLAN
FOLLOW1
3. Enter the desired ring plan (e.g., 0-6)
RING PLAN
FOLLOW4
ANS/RLS - Used to select ALL.
Display will return to STEP 1
ACTION
DISPLAY
4. Press UP or DOWN to change display
ASSIGN HOLIDAY
01:
to holiday assignment
1. Press TRSF 315
SET RELOCATION
EXT _ EXT
Display shows
5. Press the right soft key to move the
cursor to bottom half of display
ASSIGN HOLIDAY
01:
2. Enter first station number (e.g., 202)
SET RELOCATION
EXT 202 EXT _
Press RIGHT soft key to move cursor
6. Enter a desired holiday date
ASSIGN HOLIDAY
01:
(e.g., 1225)
3. Enter second station number (e.g., 210)
SET RELOCATION
Press RIGHT soft key to enter data
EXT 202 EXT 210
7. Press TRSF to store and exit
programming OR press SPK to store
and advance to the next program
ASSIGN HOLIDAY
01:1225
4. Display will return to STEP 1
Go to STEP 2
SET RELOCATION
EXT _ EXT
OR press TRSF to store and exit
programming.
33
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Admin
Table of Contents
Home Page
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
ALARMS
The iDCS 500 Release 2 system (with a LAN board installed) provide a feature that
self-checks for any failures.If a failure does occur in the iDCS software or hardware,
a fault error will be generated and buffered to an alarm report. During an alarm
state every phone with an assigned SYSTEM ALARM button will ring and cause
the SYSTEM ALARM button to flash amber. A phone with a display should be
used so that the alarm information can be viewed.When an alarm occurs, the user
can press the SYSTEM ALARM button to view and scroll through the alarms.This
will silence the audible part of the alarm, but the SYSTEM ALARM button will
continue to flash until your Service Company views and clears the alarms in the
alarm report located in the system software.
35
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Home Page
Table of Contents
AAUCD
AAUCD
Table of Contents
Home Page
TABLE OF CONTENTS
OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
AUTO ATTENDANT
AUTO ATTENDANT
AND
UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION
Recording Greetings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Playing Greetings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Changing the Greeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Manual Ring Plan Mode Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Auto Ring Plan Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
ADMINISTRATION GUIDE
UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION
Supervisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Supervisor Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Admin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Call Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Calls in Queue Now . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Abandoned Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Average Ring Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Number of Times All Agents Busy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Average Time in Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Total Calls Received . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Longest Queue Time Today . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Longest Queue Time Now . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Agent Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Logged In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Calls Answered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Average Call Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Average Ring Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Call Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Manual Wrap-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Agent Pin Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-14
Sample UCD Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
iDCS 500 Release 2 / OfficeServ™
March 2004
Samsung Telecommunications America reserves the right without prior notice to revise information in
this guide for any reason. Samsung Telecommunications America also reserves the right without prior
notice to make changes in design or components of equipment engineering and manufacturing may
warrant. Samsung Telecommunications America disclaims all liabilities for damages arising from the
erroneous interpretation or use of information presented in this guide.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AAUCD
Table of Contents
Home Page
OVERVIEW
Your iDCS 500 telephone system is equipped with an integrated option package
to enhance call processing. The improved feature support is in the form of Auto
Attendant and Uniform Call Distribution.One or both may be activated in your sys-
tem.
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AAUCD
Table of Contents
Home Page
z
Press the AA PLAY key
z Dial the first AA port (this will usually be 3951)
AUTO ATTENDANT
z
z
Enter the number of the prompt to play (if in doubt get a list of the prompts
from your installation and service company)
The prompt will begin to play along with all subsequent prompts
The auto attendant will answer and process incoming calls without human inter-
vention. The caller is answered and hears a message prompting him/her to dial
numbers to reach extensions in the phone system or follow other options provid-
ed by the AA card.
CHANGING THE GREETING
The AA card allows the system administrator to call in and change the current
operating ring plan with its associated greeting to a different ring plan mode with
or without an alternate greeting.
Your installation and service company has already designed and programmed
these options for you, including the greetings and messages that play at different
times while the call is being processed.
z
Call the auto attendant and dial a special passcode while you are listening to
the present operating ring plan's associated greeting. Your service company
technician programs the special passcode for you.
Dial 1 for the first ring plan with its preprogrammed greeting, 2 for the second
ring plan with its preprogrammed greeting, 3 for the third ring plan with its
preprogrammed greeting, 4 for the fourth ring plan with its preprogrammed
greeting, 5 for the fifth ring plan with its preprogrammed greeting, or 6 for the
sixth ring plan with its preprogrammed greeting.
The only administration associated with this card is the greeting change. Different
day and night greetings may be programmed. These change when the iDCS 500
system switches from normal day operation to evening operation. Additionally, an
alternate greeting may be recorded to indicate a holiday, an emergency or anoth-
er temporary closure. From time to time, it may be necessary to manually change
the active greeting from the current (day or night) to the alternate (holiday).
z
RECORDING GREETINGS
To record greetings (or prompts) you must have an AA RECORD key programmed
on your keyset. Select a quiet place where you will not be disturbed. Each AA card
has 2 minutes of recording time.
z
z
Dial a 0 to leave the greeting for that ring plan or a 1 to enable your alternate
greeting.
Hang up. The selected ring plan with its associated greeting is set.
MANUAL RING PLAN MODE SERVICE
z
z
Press the AA RECORD key
Enter the passcode (this can be supplied by your installation and service com-
pany)
z
When the iDCS 500 phone system changes from one of its ring plans, the AA
greeting associated with that ring will also change.
z
z
z
Lift the handset and press HANDSET softkey
Dial the first AA port (this will usually be 3951)
Enter the number of the prompt to record (if in doubt get a list of the prompts
from your installation and service company)
Begin recording after the tone, when finished press the AA RECORD key
Repeat as necessary
z
When the ring plan of the phone system is changed remotely the ring plan sta-
tus of the iDCS 500 phone system is also changed.This means that a customer
who needs to put the system in a different ring plan can call in remotely and
do it.
When the alternate greeting is set, the iDCS 500 system will go into the ring
plan selected. If a RTO or a RP key is programmed on the iDCS 500 and alter-
nate greeting is enabled, then the RTO or RP key will FLASH.
z
z
z
PLAYING GREETINGS
You may play the greetings to check that you are happy with the quality and con-
AUTO RING PLAN SERVICE
z
Manually changing an Auto Attendant to a different ring plan without an alter-
nate greeting.The greeting will change the iDCS 500 system ring plan until the
next scheduled change by the automatic time tables program.
tent. To do this you must have an AA PLAY key programmed on your keyset.
2
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AAUCD
Table of Contents
Home Page
z
Manually changing an Auto Attendant greeting to an alternate greeting will
flash the RTO and/or RP button to indicate that the alternate greeting is set.
The system will continue in the selected ring plan until manually changed.The
auto ring plan service will be suspended during this time.
UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION
UCD is used to distribute calls to a group of agents. If the group members are all
busy, UCD controls queue patterns and information messages. It also provides
agent and call statistics in both real time on a keyset display and in the form of
printed reports at a customer-provided printer.
Your installation and service company has already designed and programmed
these options for you, including the group members, timing parameters, greetings
and messages that play at different times while the call is being processed.
SUPERVISOR
Each UCD group can be assigned one or more optional supervisors. A supervisor
can be responsible for more than one UCD group. If you are a supervisor, you will
have a special key assigned to your display keyset that will allow you to adminis-
trate the UCD group. Your keyset will have a separate SUPERVISOR key for each
UCD group. UCD alarm conditions will show by flashing these keys.
ALARMS
Your installation and service company may have programmed alarm conditions to
alert you to the following:
z
z
z
The number of calls waiting at the UCD group has exceeded a specific pro-
grammed number
The amount of time a caller has been waiting has exceeded a specific pro-
grammed time
Both options above
When the alarm is activated at your keyset, one of the following will occur:
z
Your SUPERVISOR key will flash and the keyset display will indicate the type of
alarm condition (time or number of calls).
ALARM SUPERVISOR
5XX: RING TIME
or
ALARM SUPERVISOR
5XX: QUEUE TIME
4
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AAUCD
Table of Contents
Home Page
Press the UP key.You will be presented with the following display. It shows you the
number of C.O. calls that rang in when all members of the group were busy. It is
possible for this total to represent more than one day’s calls if the AUTO CLEAR
option is not turned on.
z Your SUPERVISOR key will flash and the keyset display will indicate the
type of alarm condition (time or number of calls) and an audible alarm will
sound.
NOTES:
000 times all
busy today
1. Pressing the SUPERVISOR key has no effect on the visual alarm but it will can-
cel the audio alarm (stop it from ringing until the next activation—it is not dis-
abled permanently).
2. Your keyset will indicate a visual alarm condition for as long as the alarm con-
dition exists.
Press the UP key.You will be presented with the following display. It shows you the
average time a caller waits in queue before being answered by an agent.
average time in
queue is 00:00
SUPERVISOR KEY
Throughout this guide, the displays used are for example only. The numbers and
names on your display may differ slightly.
Press the UP key.You will be presented with the following display. It shows you the
total number of calls received. It is possible for this total to represent more than
one day’s calls if the AUTO CLEAR option is not turned on.
Press the SUPERVISOR key.You will be presented with three options:
0000 calls
received today
523: SALES
CALL ADMIN AGENT
Press the UP key.You will be presented with the following display. It shows you the
longest time a caller waited in queue before answered by an agent.
The CALL and AGENT options allow the supervisor to view statistics for each of
these areas while ADMIN is used to clear the saved data and run reports. Let’s
explore each of these options by pressing the key directly below the word on the
display.
longest queue
time is 00:00
Call
Agent
When you press CALL, you will be presented with the following display. It shows
you how many calls are currently in queue.
Throughout the AGENT menu, you can press the SCROLL key at any time to view
an individual station’s data. You can also use the UP and DOWN keys to move
between stations.
000 calls in
queue now
When you press AGENT, you will be presented with the following display. The
“available” number shows how many agents are programmed in this particular
UCD group. The “logged in” number shows how many agents are currently avail-
able to take calls (not in Do Not Disturb (DND), logged out or busy).
Press the UP key.You will be presented with the following display. It shows you the
average amount of time it takes a caller to be answered after the call begins ring-
ing at a station.
average ring
time is 00:00
06 available
05 logged in
6
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AAUCD
Table of Contents
Home Page
Press the UP key.You will be presented with the following display. It shows you the
first station in the UCD group, its associated directory name and the status of that
station (in group, out of group or in DND).
Clearing Stored Data
Select the CLEAR option. You will be presented with two options—MANUAL and
AUTO.
212: FRED SMITH
status: IN
CLEAR GROUP DATA
MANUAL
AUTO
NOTE: Press the key directly below the word IN or OUT to change the status of the
station to the opposite condition. DND cannot be changed here.
z
z
If you select MANUAL, choose YES or NO to immediately clear the data.
If you select AUTO, you can turn the automatic clear function ON or OFF to
clear the data automatically at a programmed time. If you select ON, you will
be prompted to enter a new time to automatically clear the data. The time is
entered in 24 hour format, for example, 11:30 p.m. is entered 2330. Select VIEW
to see or change the currently selected AUTO option. Press the right soft key
to turn automatic clearing ON and OFF.
Press SCROLL. You will be presented with the following display. It shows you haw
many calls station 212 answered. It is possible for this total to represent more than
one day’s calls if the AUTO CLEAR option is not turned on.
212: answered
000 calls today
Printing Data/Running Reports
Press SCROLL. You will be presented with the following display. It shows you the
average call duration for this agent.
Select the PRINT option. You will be presented with two options—MANUAL and
AUTO.
212: average
PRINT GROUP DATA
call time 00:00
MANUAL
AUTO
Press SCROLL. You will be presented with the following display. It shows you the
average amount of time it take for this agent to answer a call.
z
z
If you select MANUAL, choose YES or NO to immediately print the data to your
customer-provided printer.
If you select AUTO, you can turn the automatic print function ON or OFF to
print the data automatically at a programmed time. If you select ON, you will
be prompted to enter a new time to automatically print the data. The time is
entered in 24 hour format, for example, 11:30 p.m. is entered 2330. Select VIEW
to see or change the currently selected AUTO option. Press the right soft key
to turn automatic printing ON and OFF.
212: average
ring time 00:00
Admin
When you press ADMIN, you will be presented with the following display. The
CLEAR option is used to clear (set to 0) the CALL and AGENT data for the current
group (in this case 529, the sales group). The PRINT option is used to print the
CALL and AGENT data for the current group (in this case, 529, the sales group). It
requires a customer-provided printer.
529: Sales group
PRINT
CLEAR
8
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AAUCD
Table of Contents
Home Page
Total Calls Received
CALL STATISTICS
The total number of times that calls were sent to the UCD group number. (This
does not include calls sent to a station number that happens to be in a UCD group,
the call must be sent to the group number 530 - 549).
The following is a description of statistics that can be viewed by a UCD Supervisor.
Calls in Queue Now
How many calls are currently in queue.
This statistic is a real time statistic and so will not print on a report.
This statistic includes calls that were answered by the group, Calls that went to a
group with all agents busy or out of group, calls that are abandoned and calls that
go to UCD final destination. This includes intercom calls to the UCD group.
Abandoned Calls
This shows the number of callers that reached the UCD group, but hung up before
being answered. A high number probably means that there are not enough
agents available and the wait time is too long.
If this number is less than the total calls received by all the agents it is possible that
calls were transferred from one agent to another. If this number is more than the
total calls received by all the agents it is possible that calls were unanswered by an
agent and went to final destination or callers hung up while in queue.
Average Ring Time
This statistic includes:
This is calculated from the time an agent begins to ring until the time an agent an-
swers the call, this does not include ringing at an agent station that does not
answer or is logged out because of the ring next option.
z
z
z
Calls answered by agent.
Calls that are not answered by an agent and go to final destination.
Calls that are sent to the UCD group but callers hang up before being
answered.
Number of Times All Agents Busy
This is the number of times that a call is placed to a UCD group and all agents are
busy or out of group.This check is made when the call is first placed to the group.
If all agents are busy or logged out this counter is incremented. It will not incre-
ment again for this call unless the call is answered and transferred back into the
UCD group.
Longest Queue Time Today
This shows the longest call in queue today.
The queue time is calculated as follows:
Example:If there are 5 members in a group, 3 are Out of Group one is busy and one
is idle, and a call is placed to the group, because there is an idle station the all
agents busy counter is not incremented.
Queue time begins when a caller starts to hear the first UCD message.
Queue time ends when a caller is either:
z
z
z
Answered by an agent.
System gets disconnect from C.O. or
Caller is transferred to final destination.
If the idle station rings, does not answer and is logged out, although the condition
of the group is now all agents busy, the check has been made and the agent busy
statistic does not increment. Also if a call comes into a group with all agents busy
and then one becomes idle, the busy counter will increment because the check
has been made.
Average Time in Queue
This is calculated as an average of all the calls that were in queue.
Note that this is ONLY an average of the calls that were in queue. The caller must
have heard the first UCD recording to be considered in queue.
10
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AAUCD
Table of Contents
Home Page
Longest Queue Time Now
Average Ring Time
This shows the longest call currently in queue.The queue time is calculated as fol-
lows:
This is an average of all the ring times for the agent. Ring times are previously
explained.
Queue time begins when a caller starts to hear the first UCD message.
Queue time ends when a caller is either:
CALL STATUS (CS)
This key may be programmed on each agent keyset to provide an indication of
waiting calls at the UCD group.
z
z
z
Answered by an agent.
System gets disconnect from C.O. or
Caller is transferred to final destination.
This key has no effect when pressed, but will flash amber or red to indicate that
calls are waiting.
AGENT STATISTICS
Each statistic in this category can be read individually for each UCD agent.
There are two levels that can be programmed for this key, the are CS level 1 and
CS level 2.
By default these levels are 05 for level 1 and 10 for level 2. This means that when
there are 5 or more calls in queue at the UCD group the CS key will flash amber,
when there are 10 or more calls in queue at the UCD group the CS key will flash
red. These levels can be changed by your service company.
Logged In
The number of stations programmed in the UCD group and the number of sta-
tions that are currently logged in.This statistic is a real time statistic and so will not
print on a report.
MANUAL WRAP-UP
When it is not practical for an agent to follow the preset wrap-up timer it can be
Status
This screen shows the agents name, extension number and status. The status can
be in Group, Out of group or in DND.This statistic is a real time statistic and so will
not print on a report.
manually controlled. Assign an Agent Busy Wrap-Up (ABW) key to select keysets.
z
z
While on an UCD call press the ABW key.The LED will light red and you will not
receive another UCD call.
When finished with any work related to this call press the ABW key again.The
LED will turn off and you are available for another UCD call.
Calls Answered
The total number of calls received by the agent. This does not include ring no
answer to a agent station.
If the total number of all agent calls is less than the calls received by the group it
is possible that calls were unanswered by an agent and went to final destination
or that callers hung up while in queue.
AGENT PIN NUMBERS
The system has the capability to require agents to log in and log out with a PIN
number. Ask the installing technician to enable this option on a per UCD basis
(MMC 607). In addition you may be permitted access to MMC 718, Agent ID Code,
where you can assign up to 300 (L version) and 100 (M version) agents. Codes can
be from 1-4 digits in length.
If the total number of all agent calls is more than the calls received by the group
it is possible that calls were transferred from one agent to another.
Average Call Time
This is an average of all the call durations for the agent.
Dial code entry number 001-300 (e.g., 005) or press UP or DOWN keys to select
index number and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor.
AGENT PIN (005)
ID: GRP:
12
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AAUCD
Table of Contents
Home Page
Enter ID code via keypad (e.g. 1234) and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor.
SAMPLE UCD REPORT
AGENT PIN (005)
ID:1234 :GRP:
=======================================================
UCD GROUP 530 : SALES
Enter group number 501 to 519 (e.g., 505) or press UP or DOWN key to select
group or press the ANS/RLS to select all UCD groups and press RIGHT soft key.
FROM: SUN 02 Feb 00:00
TO : SUN 02 Feb 02:54
AGENT PIN (005)
ID:1234 :GRP:505
CALL STATISTICS
===============
AVERAGE RING TIME(TIME TO ANSWER)......00:40
NUMBER OF TIMES ALL AGENTS BUSY........00002
AVERAGE TIME IN QUEUE..................00:51
TOTAL CALLS RECEIVED...................00011
LONGEST QUEUE TIME (TODAY).............02:14
TOTAL CALLS ABANDONED..................00004
AGENT STATISTICS
================
MEMBER AGENT NAME
CALLS
ANSWERED CALL TIME TIME
--------------------------------------------------------
AVERAGE
RING
01
02
03
04
210
211
208
207
JOHN
SAM
0002
0001
0003
0001
01:55
02:18
01:22
03:16
00:05
00:06
00:04
00:05
MIKE
PETER
14
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|